JP6855142B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game machine called a pachinko game machine is known, and this pachinko game machine generally includes a game area in which a game ball launched on a game board can roll and a start area provided in this game area. , A symbol display device and a variable display control means for controlling the symbol display device. In such a game machine, when a predetermined condition such as that the game ball has passed through the starting area (winning of the starting port of the game ball) is satisfied, the variable display control means controls the symbol display device to control the symbol display device. Identification information (for example, a special symbol described later) is displayed in a variable manner on the display area. Then, when the identification information finally derived and displayed on the display area of the symbol display device has a predetermined combination (specific display mode), the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called "big hit"). ”).

Further, conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and provided with a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-150303

By the way, the above-mentioned game machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit, various table data, etc. are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, in such a game machine, there is a demand for the development of a technique capable of more efficiently executing the processing performed by the main control circuit and reducing the processing load of the main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is a game capable of more efficiently executing processing performed by the main control circuit and reducing the processing load of the main control circuit. To provide an opportunity.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

An arithmetic processing means (for example, a main CPU 6101 described later) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
A storage means (for example, a main RAM 6103 described later) for storing information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The storage means is provided with two work areas.
Specific information (for example, an identifier described later) associated with the work area to be used is added to the information in which processing is performed using each work area.
When the arithmetic processing means processes information using one of the two work areas, the work area to be used is based on the specific information added to the information to be processed. Select and
The specific information is higher-level address data that constitutes the address of the corresponding work area.
In the work area selection process by the arithmetic processing means, the arithmetic processing means is a gaming machine characterized in that an address of a work area to be used is designated based on the specific information.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to more efficiently execute the processing performed by the main control circuit and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the figure which shows the operation button group of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. This is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. This is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the voice / LED control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the output signal of the voice / LED control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a control block diagram for demonstrating an example of volume control by a host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between a built-in relay board and a speaker of a pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the display control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between a sub-board of a pachinko gaming machine and a CGROM board (NOR type) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between a sub-board of a pachinko gaming machine and a CGROM board (NAND type) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the AND circuit provided on the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a truth table for demonstrating the operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver provided on the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of a big hit of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM of a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selectivity of a main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. This is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM of the sub-control circuit. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the drawing control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game permission processing. (A) A flowchart showing an example of the setting process, and (b) a flowchart showing another example of the setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backup clear process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game return processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening prize detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving number subtraction processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table setting process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission processing executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a message setting process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message transmission processing executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a table which shows an example of the selection rate of the limiter number in the pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 1 for each set value. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a right gate for continuous operation of an accessory in the pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 4. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main processing executed by the host control circuit (sub-control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example for demonstrating the sub-device input discrimination information created in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-device input processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. An example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is shown, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 65. It is a figure for conceptually explaining the backlight control process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing which accompanies the modification of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process which shows the backlight control process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the first embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. Is. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the second embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. Is. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the third embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. Is. It is a flowchart which shows an example of RTC acquisition processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the animation control main processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of composition reproduction control processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the amplifier check process for use in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the amplifier check process for deep bass in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check processing which performs the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (collective) check processing in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the more preferable form of the sound amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a more preferable form of the amplifier check process for a normal use amplifier and a deep bass in a pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. An example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is shown, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 83. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows 1st Example of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows 4th Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows 5th Embodiment of the sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is an attenuation table which shows an example of the luminance attenuation value of each color (red, green, blue) according to the emission intensity of the strong, medium, and weak LEDs. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the connection state of an LED port, an LED and a solenoid in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the data load processing which is executed as one of various initialization processing by a host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number initialization process which is executed as one of various initialization processes by a host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number periodical update process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, (a) a flowchart showing an example of random number 1 acquisition processing, (b) a flowchart showing an example of random number 2 acquisition processing, and (c) an example of random number 3 acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of (d) random number 4 acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number acquisition processing which is executed when a random number is used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. This is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for explaining a modified example of the sub-random number process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reception interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory initial operation process which is executed as one of various initialization processes by a host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving a production system command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the variation start command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial position restoration operation processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving the demo command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hit system command reception time processing about the accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu task executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu redisplay process is executed. This is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, (a) a screen indicating that the backup clear process without setting change processing has been executed, and (b) a start port abnormality winning error has occurred. A screen indicating that the backup clear process was executed without the setting change process, (c) the backup clear process without the setting change process was executed, and a start port error winning error occurred. This is the screen after the notification period has elapsed, indicating that the backup clear process has been executed. This is another example of the hall menu task executed by the host control circuit, and is a flowchart in the case of executing the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information by the host control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu processing executed by a sub CPU. This is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, and is the flowchart which continues from FIG. 117. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can perform a page update in a setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen which each history data was cleared in the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example of the initial screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows an example when "setting display" is selected. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is the figure which shows the example of the page update screen which can perform page update. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the setting change / confirmation history screen which can confirm a setting value is displayed in the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the maintenance process executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the figure showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. is there. This is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the example of the screen which is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the input password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. On the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set value can be confirmed is displayed. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure up to. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the volume switch which generates the volume password applied to the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. In the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, the figure showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. is there. This is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine which constitutes the gaming system which concerns on modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal and the server device of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the 2D code in the pachinko game machine of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2D code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern table which can be used in 2nd Embodiment. It is an external perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an external perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of various registers which the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention has. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the variation display of each special symbol at the time of simultaneous variation function operation in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol work area table in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol relation definition data table in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol work area table in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol relation definition data table in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the 1st special symbol work area table in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state monitoring process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 3) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 4) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the weight processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial setting process at startup in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting operation preprocessing in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power failure process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol-related timer update process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation start processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game waiting process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variation end processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variation end processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol per end processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation start processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game waiting process in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fall determination processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol effect mode management process in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table, the special symbol variation pattern selection table group, and the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table used in another example of the effect variation table selection method. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game state setting process in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation end processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state management process in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol per end processing in 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

A. First Embodiment Hereinafter, the configuration and various operations of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[1. Game machine configuration]
[1-1. Appearance composition]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a group of operation buttons. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display units. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is the direction in the front view. Therefore, for example, "left" is described in the right direction of the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, so "right" on the drawing is "left" in the front view. Similarly, in the case where "right" is described in the left direction of the drawing, the "left" on the drawing becomes the "right" in the front view for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a display device 16, and a game board unit 17. , The payout unit 18, and the substrate unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and also has the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front surface side. To support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting means for producing a notification or an effect by light, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be executed, and may be, for example, a lamp or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when the term "select button 664" is used, it means a general term for the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hall menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, the upper plate 26 or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is a lower front portion of the base door 12 and is arranged below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are launched from the launching device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on the result of a jackpot determination of a special symbol described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 26 is paid out from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launch device 15 includes a panel body 31, a drive device (not shown), and a launch handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the launching handle 32 is operated by the player in the launching device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in response to the operation.

The display device 16 displays the result of a big hit determination of a special symbol (hereinafter, the big hit determination of a special symbol may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game, for example, a liquid crystal display. The device is used. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the display device 16 include, for example, an identification symbol for effect (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of the jackpot determination, an effect image during jackpot, a demo effect image, and a special. The number of pending symbols variable display (variable display) is included. The display device 16 (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the center rail 1742 described later).

In the present embodiment, one display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. You may try to do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). A sub-control board 40 having a sub-control board 40, a payout / launch control board 50 having a payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of a game ball, and a power supply circuit 338 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 60 having (see FIG. 9), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) are provided, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 40 is configured as a one-board board (a board provided with one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs on one board), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of boards are used. (For example, the host control circuit 2100, the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the display control circuit 2300, etc.) may be configured.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

Inside the main board case that houses the main control board 30, there is a setting switch 332 that is operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 that is operated when changing or checking the set value, and a performance display monitor. The 334 and the error notification monitor 336 (both of which see FIG. 9 described later) are housed. The performance display monitor 334 displays, for example, performance display data and set values, which will be described later. For example, an error code or the like described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. The setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security, and are referred to as a pachinko gaming machine 1 management manager (hereinafter referred to as "game machine management manager"). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The inside of the main board case means that the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and only the corresponding parts of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case are turned off. When there is a notch and the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine management manager to expose the back surface, the game machine management It also includes those that allow the responsible person to access the configuration switch 332 and / and the configuration key 328.

The RAM clear switch (RAM clear switch 6121 in FIG. 161 described later), which is the backup switch 330 (see FIG. 9 described later), is the setting switch (setting switch 332 in FIG. 9 described later, and the setting in FIG. 161 described later). It is controlled to function as a switch 6081), but at this time, if the game machine is not installed in the island equipment, there is no influence from the island equipment, so a person other than the game machine management manager can easily play the game machine. It is assumed that you can access the exposed setting switch on the back of the switch and then install it on the island facility. On the other hand, even if a game machine is installed on the island equipment, depending on the type of the island equipment, it is assumed that a person other than the person in charge of managing the game machine can move to the back side of the game machine in the installed state. .. Therefore, under each situation, it is considered possible to easily access the setting switch without using the key managed by the game machine management manager for the pachinko game machine. Therefore, in such a case, the pachinko game machine can be rotated by using the key managed by the game machine management manager (such as rotating the front door and the main body of the game machine). Control so that setting changes and setting confirmations can be performed using the setting switches that are exposed on the back of the gaming machine before it is moved, and accurate management by the gaming machine management manager for setting changes and setting confirmations. You may try to. The setting key (setting key 328 in FIG. 9 described later, setting key 6080 in FIG. 161 described later) and the key for rotating the pachinko gaming machine (door key, etc.) may be different keys. Desirably, it is possible to control so that the setting cannot be changed or the setting can be confirmed only by using one of the keys.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. It includes a center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes a accessory group 1000 of an upper accessory or the like (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the display device 16. Of these accessory groups 1000, at least one accessory or an operating member constituting the accessory functions as an operable effect based on the result of the special lottery, and thus will be referred to as a director below. There is also.

The transparent panel 172 is formed with an opening 1722 at a portion where a display area of the display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, changes the direction of travel, and flows down toward the lower part of the game area 20.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 is provided with a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 is divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flows down the game area 20, and the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The flow-down area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left-handed hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right-handed hitting". It is said that it can be divided by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided at the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later. It is done when it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

In addition, in this specification, when it simply refers to "special symbol", it means both 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting port 420 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also gives an opportunity to display the result of the big hit determination on the display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73, which will be described later. It is what you give. A first start port switch 421 is arranged at the first start port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the first starting port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are ejected from the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handed striking.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below, for example, the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, it has been required to make the display device 16 larger, and it is difficult to arrange the display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also gives an opportunity to display the result of the big hit determination on the display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74 described later. It is something to give. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected in the second start port switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are discharged to the payout port 61. Is discharged (discharged) from the upper plate to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that can rotate to the right, a start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ). The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the start port solenoid 4630. It is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball either wins the second start port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 from the out port 450. Will be done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and the number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode on the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for determining a normal symbol on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passing gate switch 49a is provided at the passing gate 49 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball through the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed striking.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 is that in recent years, it has been required to make the display device 16 larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged display device 16.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided at the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and is shifted to the jackpot game state. Is done in.

The general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning openings 56 are arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a are arranged in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When a game ball is detected in the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 is 10, and the number of prize balls in the large winning opening 540 is 3. The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting ports or winning openings.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 26 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a symbol hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to open the state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary hit"), the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port is opened. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the held normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a is lit and the display LED 72b is lit. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened is shifted to the jackpot game state in which the game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 determine the number of times the reserved special symbol variable display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of reserved special symbol variable displays"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of hold of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly has a main control circuit 100 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338. Hereinafter, each of these configurations will be described in the order of the main control circuit 100, the payout / emission control circuit 300, the power supply circuit 338, and the sub control circuit 200 for convenience.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the second special for the upper limit of 4 times are stored. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start memory, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off (power is turned off).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol hold display unit 75. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the start port solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes a first start port switch 421, a second start port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. Is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the amusement park.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that serves as an opportunity to execute a setting change process or a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is for changing the set setting value at the time of the setting change processing described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that they cannot be easily accessed by a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine manager.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. A payout device 350 for paying out game balls, a launcher 15 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300. The payout device 350 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

[1-2-2. Payout / launch control circuit]
When the payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 350. Control is performed so that the payout device 350 pays out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the launch solenoid (shown) is based on the rotation angle (rotation amount). It supplies power to the wheel and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 (relay board 2010) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to light of the LED 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out game balls and a game. A launching device 15 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure according to an operation of a game hall administrator, and the like are connected.

[1-2-3. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

A power switch 35 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Although the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine management manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 in the above case correspond to each other. When there is a notch only in a place and the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine management manager to expose the back surface. , Including those that allow the game machine manager to access the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 aggregates the base values based on the past game history, and stores the aggregated results in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. This specific work area will be described later, but it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear process described later is performed. It should be noted that the aggregation of the base values may be performed based on the performance of a predetermined operation, or the aggregation may be performed at all times so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a total history aggregation means that aggregates all base values based on the total game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present. It is provided with a history aggregation means for each set value that executes aggregation of the base value for each set value based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all base values is performed by the game machine management manager or the like, the total history totaling means executes the totalization of all the base values described above. All the base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the base value for each set value is performed, the history totaling means for each set value executes the totalization of the base value for each set value. The base value for each set value aggregated by the history aggregation means for each set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The history aggregation means for each set value can also aggregate only the base value for any set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set setting value but also the base value for other setting values other than the set setting value can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other set values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

The main CPU 101 has both a total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and a set value-specific base value aggregated by the set value-specific history aggregation means, for example, in response to an operation by the game machine management manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of these can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base values of the specific set values on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Further, both the total base value and the base value for each set value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all set values in a list, or when displaying both all base values and base values by set value in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes a total history totaling means and a set value-based history totaling means, and in addition to these or in place of the set value-based history totaling means, from the execution of the setting change process described later to the present. A means for totaling the history after changing the setting may be provided, which aggregates the base value after changing the setting based on the game history. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by making all or part of all the base values and the base value for each set value and / and the base value for each set value after the setting change displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game Information based on the past game history of the machine 1 can be easily confirmed.

In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering a special electric accessory (large winning opening) or an ordinary electric accessory. The ratio of the number of game balls issued (payment by the character) may be displayed. Further, it may be displayed with respect to the total number of shots, and may also be displayed as a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning opening). Moreover, you may display them by setting.

Further, an error code described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may display a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing described later, a setting checking code indicating that the setting confirmation processing described later is in progress, and the like. it can. It should be noted that during the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[1-2-4. Sub control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the sub control circuit 200 and a connection relationship between the sub control circuit 200 and various peripheral devices thereof.

The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100, and as shown in FIG. 10, the relay board 2010 and the sub-board 2020 (first board). ), A control ROM board 2030, and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) board 2040 (second board). Then, the sub-board 2020 is connected to the relay board 2010, the control ROM board 2030, and the CG ROM board 2040. In the sub control circuit 200, the sub board 2020 and various ROM boards (control ROM board 2030 and CG ROM board 2040) are connected via a board-to-board connector (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 9, the sub control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the main button 662, and each select. The select button switches 6641a to 6641d, which are turned on and off by operating the buttons 664a to 664d, and the accessory detection sensor group 1002, which detects that the accessory group 1000 is in the initial position, are connected. These illustrations are omitted. Further, in reality, select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided, respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as select button switches 6641 for convenience. Further, the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is provided as many as the number of motors provided corresponding to the movable accessory.

The relay board 2010 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 and transmitting the received command to the sub board 2020.

When the sub-control board is the one-board board described above as the receiving means for receiving the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub-control board itself may have a function as a receiving means. However, the command may be received as a result via the relay board or the like.

Further, when the sub-control board is composed of a plurality of boards, any board may be provided with the receiving means, and even in this case, it is interpreted that the sub-control board has the receiving means. can do. Further, also in this case, even when the sub-control board composed of a plurality of boards receives the command via the relay board or the like, the information related to the command by any of the boards constituting the sub-control board as a result. It is also possible to express that the sub-control board has received the command if it recognizes.

The sub-board 2020 is provided with a host control circuit 2100, an audio / LED control circuit 2200, a display control circuit 2300, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 250, and a built-in relay board 2600. Of these, at least the host control circuit 2100, the audio / LED control circuit 2200, and the display control circuit 2300 are configured as one board.

The host control circuit 2100 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub control circuit 200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and is a CPU processor, a sub work RAM 2100a, a SRAM 2100b, an RTC (real time clock), and the like. It is configured to include a watchdog timer. The host control circuit 2100 is connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the display control circuit 2300, and the built-in relay board 2600 in the sub-board 2020. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the control ROM board 2030.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 has a subwork RAM 2100a and an SRAM (Static RAM) 210b. The subwork RAM 2100a is a storage device that acts as a temporary storage area for work when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes, and various flags and variables required when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes. Memorize the value of. The RAM 2100b is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the subwork RAM 2100a. In the present embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the host control circuit 2100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area. ..

The voice / LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 and the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, and is based on the control signals (sound request and LED request described later) input from the host control circuit 2100. This is a circuit that controls the sound reproduction operation by the lamp group 25 and the light emission operation by the lamp group 25. Therefore, functionally, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 has a voice controller 2200a and a lamp controller 2200b. The voice controller 2200a and the lamp controller 2200b are substantially included in the sound lamp control module 2260 described later. The internal configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

In the present embodiment, when the control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the voice / LED control circuit 2200 are transmitted to the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, the voice / LED Communication between the control circuit 2200 and the lamp group 25 is performed by a communication method (a kind of serial communication method) of SPI (Serial Periperal Interface). Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp group 25 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED.

The display control circuit 2300 is connected to the display device 16 and displays an image (decorative pattern image, background image, effect image, etc.) related to the effect based on the control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 2100. It is a circuit for controlling various processing operations when displaying with. The display control circuit 2300 has a display controller (first display controller 2380 and second display controller 2390 described later) and a built-in VRAM (Video RAM) 237.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the SDRAM 2500 in the sub-board 2020. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the CGROM board 2040. Further, the display controller in the display control circuit 2300 is directly connected to the display device 16 without going through the relay board. The internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

The SDRAM 2500 is composed of a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate2) SDRAM. Further, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing various image data in the drawing control process of the image (moving image and still image) displayed by the display device 16. Specifically, for example, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer), a motion buffer, and the like.

The built-in relay board 2600 receives various signals and various data output from the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200, and transmits the received various signals and various data to the speaker 24, the lamp group 25, and the accessory group 1000. It is a relay board to transmit to.

Further, the built-in relay board 2600 has an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 2610 and a digital audio power amplifier 2620 (amplification means). In the present embodiment, an example in which the I2C controller 2610 and the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are mounted on the same relay board is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the relay board on which the I2C controller 2610 is mounted can be used as a digital audio. It may be provided separately from the relay board on which the power amplifier 2620 is mounted.

The I2C controller 2610 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 and the motor controller 2700 of the accessory group 1000. That is, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. Then, the control signals and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100 are input to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700.

In the present embodiment, the communication between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 is performed by the I2C communication method (a type of serial communication method). Further, in the present embodiment, one or more motors are included in the accessory group 1000, and one or more motor drivers for driving each motor are included in the motor controller 2700. Although FIG. 10 shows an example in which only one accessory group 1000 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of accessory groups 1000 may be provided.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 directly uses the motor of the accessory that constitutes the accessory group 1000 and the motor of the operating member that constitutes the accessory without using the motor controller 2700. It may be configured to be driven, or a control circuit for motor control may be provided separately. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of motor drivers (motors) are controlled by one control circuit, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used to control one or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers), or one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used to control one or more motors (motor drivers). It may be configured to control one motor (motor driver), or it may be configured to control one motor (motor driver) by one control circuit.

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200 and the speaker 24. That is, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620. Therefore, the audio signal or the like output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is input to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

The control ROM board 2030 is provided with a sub-main ROM 2050. The sub-main ROM 2050 stores various programs for controlling the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the host control circuit 2100 and various data tables (see, for example, FIGS. 21 to 28 described later). Then, the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100) executes various processes according to the program stored in the sub-main ROM 2050.

In the present embodiment, the sub-main ROM 2050 is applied as a storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like used in the host control circuit 2100, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a storage medium that can be read by a computer provided with a control means. Storage medium may be applied. Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the sub-main ROM 2050.

The CGROM board 2040 is provided with the CGROM 2060. The CGROM2060 is composed of a NOR type or NAND type flash memory. Further, the CGROM 2060 stores, for example, image data displayed on the display device 16 and audio data reproduced by the speaker 24 (sometimes referred to as sound data in this specification). At this time, various data are compressed (encoded) and stored in the CGROM 2060, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various data may be stored in the CGROM 2060 without being compressed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which various ROM boards (control ROM board 2030 and CGROM board 2040) and the sub board 2020 are connected by a board-to-board connector in the sub control circuit 200 has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, various ROMs may be directly inserted into a port such as a socket provided on the sub-board 2020 to form the sub-board 2020 with a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself. That is, the sub-board 2020 and various ROMs may be integrally configured. Further, when the sub-board 2020 is composed of a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself, the sub-control circuit 200 uses a sub depending on the type of memory used as the CG ROM. A switching means for physically or electrically switching the circuit on the board, or a switching means for switching the information of the circuit on the sub-board to be used depending on the type of memory may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the data communication speed between each of the various storage means (sub-main ROM 2050, CGROM 2060, built-in VRAM 2370, SDRAM 2500) and the corresponding control circuit is determined by the built-in VRAM 2370> SDRAM 2500> sub-main. ROM2050≈CGROM2060. That is, in the present embodiment, the communication speed between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the various circuits in the display control circuit 2300 is the fastest, followed by the communication speed between the SDRAM 2500 and the display control circuit 2300. Then, the communication speed between the sub-main ROM 2050 and the host control circuit 2100 and the communication speed between the CG ROM 2060 and the display control circuit 2300 become the slowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit can be arbitrarily set. For example, the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different from that of the present embodiment, or the communication speed between each storage means and the corresponding control circuit. May all be the same.

Here, possible configurations of the various storage means described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the storage means of the information related to the image data (compressed (encoded) image data) is the information related to the transparency data (alpha table described later) that can be used when the transparency is set for the image data. A configuration example that is the same as the storage means (CGROM2060) has been described. That is, a configuration example in which the "first information storage means" is physically the same as the "second information storage means" has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "first information storage means" may be composed of a storage means (storage medium) that is physically different from the "second information storage means".

Further, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification means not only a storage means such as CGROM2060, but also a table stored in the storage means, a data storage area in the storage means, and the like. Good. Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" may be different data storage areas or different tables in the same storage means. Further, the mode may be stored in different register addresses. That is, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification is different not only when the storage means (storage medium) are physically different, but also when they are physically the same storage means (for example, ROM, RAM, etc.). However, it also includes the case where the data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) are different in the storage means.

The above-mentioned meaning of the "information storage means" in the present specification is also applicable to the above-mentioned "third information storage means" (SDRAM 2500) and "fourth information storage means" (built-in VRAM 2370). Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" to the "fourth information storage means" may be composed of physically different storage means (storage media), or the "first information storage means" to. The "fourth information storage means" may be composed of different data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in one storage means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" are configured in one storage means (CGROM2060) with different data areas, and the "third information storage means" is defined as a "third information storage means". , The storage means (CGROM2060) including the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" and the storage means (SDRAM2500) physically different from each other, and the "fourth information storage means" is the "fourth information storage means". An example will be described in which a storage means (CGROM2060) including the "1 information storage means" and the "second information storage means" and a storage means (built-in VRAM2370) physically different from the "third information storage means" (SDRAM2500) are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Whether the "information storage means" is composed of a data area or a storage means, and how to combine the "information storage means" defined as the data area and the "information storage means" defined as the storage means. It can be appropriately set according to, for example, the configuration (number, type, etc.) of the storage means provided in the game machine. For example, in the present embodiment, the "first information storage means" to the "third information storage means" are configured by different data areas in one storage means, and the "fourth information storage means" is the "fourth information storage means". It may be composed of a storage means physically different from the storage means including the "1 information storage means" to the "third information storage means".

[1-2-5. Voice / LED control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the internal circuit configuration of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 and the connection relationship between the voice / LED control circuit 2200 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units. In FIG. 11, for the sake of simplification of the description, the illustration of the relay board and the like provided between the voice / LED control circuit 2200 and various peripheral devices and circuit units is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 includes an LSI (Large-Scale Integration) interface 2210, a memory interface 2220, a digital audio interface 2230, a peripheral interface 2240, a command register 2250, and a sound lamp. It includes a control module 2260, a main generator 2270, and a multi-effector 2280. The connection relationship of each part in the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is as follows.

Within the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the sound lamp control module 2260 is connected to a memory interface 2220, a peripheral interface 2240, a command register 2250, a main generator 2270 and a multi-effector 2280. Further, the command register 2250 is connected to the LSI interface 2210 in addition to the sound lamp control module 2260. In addition to the sound lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270 is connected to the memory interface 2220 and the multi-effect unit 2280. Further, the multi-effector 2280 is connected to the memory interface 2220 and the digital audio interface 2230 in addition to the sound lamp control module 2260 and the main generator 2270.

Next, the configuration of each part in the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described.

The LSI interface 2210 is an interface circuit used when input / output of control signals (for example, sound request, LED request, etc.) is performed between the host control circuit 2100 and the command register 2250. That is, the command register 2250 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 via the LSI interface 2210.

The memory interface 2220 is an interface circuit used when input / output operations such as voice data are performed between the sub-main ROM 2050 and each of the sound lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effector 2280.

The digital audio interface 2230 is an interface circuit used when an audio signal or the like is output from the multi-effect unit 2280 to the speaker 24. Further, the digital audio interface 2230 outputs an audio input signal to the multi-effect unit 2280.

The peripheral interface 2240 is an interface circuit used when input / output of a lamp signal or the like (LED data or the like described later) is performed between the lamp group 25 and the sound lamp control module 2260. Further, the peripheral interface 2240 is provided with three physical systems as physical systems (SPI channels) for outputting data to the LED driver included in the lamp group 25. In this embodiment, as described later, two physical systems (physical system 0 (SPI channel 0) and physical system 1 (SPI channel 1)) are used.

The command register 2250 is composed of a large number of registers (for example, a large number of voice control registers) accessed from the host control circuit 2100. The command register 2250 sets the function control of the sound lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effect unit 2280. The command register 2250 also sets the operating conditions of each interface (LSI interface 2210, memory interface 2220, digital audio interface 2230, peripheral interface 2240).

An IC (Integrated Circuit) is mounted on each register constituting the command register 2250, and each register is configured by a memory chip whose operation is stabilized by memory access control. When registers having such a configuration are used, the load on the signal bus to which each register is connected is reduced. Therefore, by increasing the number of memory chips (registers), the capacity per memory module (register) can be easily increased. The capacity of the command register 2250) can be increased.

The sound lamp control module 2260 comprehensively controls the voice reproduction operation and the like, and controls the operation of each component (each block) in the voice / LED control circuit 2200 according to the setting contents of the command register 2250. .. As shown in FIG. 11, the sound lamp control module 2260 includes a simple access controller 2260a, a sequencer 2260b, a lamp control unit 2260c, and a peripheral control unit 2260d.

The simple access controller 2260a is a circuit unit that collectively processes commands. The sequencer 2260b has various sequencers (automatic reproduction function units) for controlling automatic reproduction operations such as lamp lighting and voice. Then, each sequencer controls various operations according to a timer and step conditions (for example, conditions set for each step process during sequence reproduction such as LED animation and voice described later).

The lamp control unit 2260c calculates the set luminance value in all the channels (8 channels) in which the LED data described later can be set, and transmits the calculation result to the outside (LED driver). Further, the peripheral control unit 2260d performs physical transmission control when transmitting the calculation result data output from the lamp control unit 2260c to the LED driver.

The main generator 2270 is a circuit unit that generates an audio signal. Specifically, the main generator 2270 acquires predetermined audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 based on the control signal input from the sound lamp control module 2260, and uses the acquired audio data as a predetermined audio signal. Convert to. The main generator 2270 is a channel mix unit 2270c that mixes a decoder 2270a that is divided into playback channels CH1 to CH32 to reproduce compressed data, a channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) that adjusts the volume, and a playback sound of the decoder 2270a. And a remix unit 2270d that executes the final mixing operation.

The multi-effect unit 2280 includes a mixer that synthesizes an audio signal input from the main generator 2270 and an audio input signal input from the digital audio interface 2230, and various effectors for giving various sound effects to the audio. Then, the multi-effector 2280 outputs the audio signal synthesized by the mixer, the output signal from the effector, and the like to the speaker 24 via the digital audio interface 2230.

FIG. 12 is a drawing for explaining the output signal of the voice / LED control circuit. The CGROM2060 stores a maximum of 8192 types of sequence code groups and a maximum of 8192 types of SAC data groups. The sequence code and SAC data are specified by the sequence code number and SAC number having a length of 13 bits, respectively, and have a relationship of 8192 = 213.

In the case of this embodiment, the sequencer 2260b is provided with 16 series (SQ0 to SQ15) operating in parallel, and the simple accelerator controller 2260a is provided with 4 series (SAC0 to SAC3) operating in parallel. There is. Corresponding to this configuration, the command register 2250 is provided with a voice control register RGj2 for controlling sequencers (SQ0 to SQ15) and a voice control register RGj1 for controlling SAC (SAC0 to SAC3).

Then, when the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor writes the SAC number and its attached information to the predetermined voice control register RGj1 for SAC control based on the transmission operation of the voice command, the corresponding simple The access controller 2260a starts to function, and the simple access controller 2260a writes a group of setting data specified by the SAC number to a group of voice control registers instructed by the SAC data. In the present embodiment, the complicated setting operation can be completed by transmitting one SAC number and its attached information.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor transmits the sequence code number and its attached information to the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer 2260b (SQ0 to SQ7) based on the transmission operation of the voice command. Upon writing, the corresponding sequencer SQi starts functioning and writes a group of setting data specified by the sequence code to a group of voice control registers instructed by the sequence code.

Here, in the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencers (SQ0 to SQ7), a plurality of (up to 8) sequence code numbers and loop information for the production of each sequence code number are stored in the predetermined voice control register RGj2 for any sequencer SQi. Can be entered. Therefore, for example, when n + 1 sequence code numbers (X0, X1, ..., Xn) are specified for the sequencer SQi, the sequence code number X0 setting operation → the sequence code number X1 setting operation. → ... The setting operation of the sequence code number Xn is executed in order, and the sound effect corresponding to the setting operation is executed.

Further, since loop information such as the number of repetitions can be specified for each sequence code number, the sound effect specified by the sequence code number is repeated a predetermined number of times and then specified by the next sequence code number. Can be migrated.

As described above, the data to be set in the sequencer SQi is diverse, and it is necessary to appropriately set these sequence code numbers and accompanying data in the voice control register RGj2 for sequencer control. Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire sequence code number and accompanying data are divided in 1-byte units, and the divided 1-byte data and the register address of the sequencer control register RGj2 in which the 1-byte data should be set are divided. A group of SAC data as a set is secured in CGROM2060 (hereinafter, this is referred to as SAC data for starting a sequencer).

Then, the host control circuit 2100 activates the simple access controller 2260a by designating a predetermined SAC number in the voice control register RGj1 for SAC control. Here, of course, the SAC number specifies the SAC data for starting the sequencer. Then, based on the operation of the SAC (Simple Access Controller), necessary data is expanded in the sequencer control register RGj2. Therefore, it is easy to set the activation data of the sequencers SQ0 to SQ15.

By the way, as described above with respect to FIG. 12, a plurality of operation units (sequence steps) separated by a step end code (FFFEH) are described in a group of sequence codes specified by one sequence code number. After all, after executing all the plurality of sequence steps specified by one sequence code number, the plurality of sequence steps specified by the next sequence code number are executed.

Since the standby time can be set for each sequencer, the first sequence step (writing operation of a group of setting data) is started after the standby time pointed out by the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor. , When the step end code (FFFEH) is executed, the next group of setting data is written to the group of voice control registers after the waiting time. As the waiting time, a single time information can be set for each sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7). For example, in the preceding sequence step, the waiting time applied to the subsequent sequence steps following the sequence step is set. By doing so, the waiting time for each sequence step can be set arbitrarily.

Further, to continue the explanation of the internal configuration of the audio / LED control circuit 2200, as shown in FIG. 11, the output signals of the 6 channels of the channel mix unit 2270c (mixed L0, mixed R0, mixed L1, mixed R1, mixed SUB0, The mixed SUB1) is supplied to the total volume 2290 (TV0 to TV3) after being digitally filtered based on the operation parameters specified in the predetermined voice control register of the command register 2250 in the multi-effector 2280, and the total volume value. Amplified based on TV.

The total volume value TV is defined by an operation parameter written in the corresponding voice control register. As described above, this operation parameter is, in principle, a setting switch (hardware) operated by a staff member in this embodiment. It is specified based on the wear switch). However, if the player operates the volume switch (screen operation) during the game operation (however, while waiting for the sound effect), the total volume TV is defined (changed) based on the set value. When the player operates the volume switch, the channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) is defined (changed) instead of or in addition to the total volume TV being defined based on the set value. You can do it.

[1-2-5-1. Speaker volume control]
Next, the volume control of each speaker 24 executed by the host control circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit.

Sounds such as game sounds output from each speaker 24 (L0 / R0 / L1 / R1, SUB0, SUB1) are the audio signals of total volume TVs 0 to 3 output to all channels and individual sounds among all channels. By multiplying the audio signal for each playback channel output to the channel, the volume is controlled by the volume transition operation in which the volume value of the audio signal is gradually transitioned.

The "audio signal" has volume information (for example, information such as wattage), and can be simply called "volume". For example, in this specification, "audio signal for each reproduction channel" may be referred to as "volume for each reproduction channel".

The audio signals of the total volume TVs 0 to 3 are output by the total value of the audio signal by the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch and the audio signal output by the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging. It is defined by multiplying the audio signal. The host control circuit 2100 that executes the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch, the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging corresponds to the "first volume control means" of the present invention.

Further, the volume for each playback channel is obtained by multiplying the audio signal of the primary volume and the audio signal of the secondary volume. The audio signal of the primary volume is the audio signal output by the primary control 2840 of the first reproduction channel affected by the volume adjustment and the audio signal output by the primary control 2850 of the second reproduction channel not affected by the volume adjustment. It is defined by the total value. In the first playback channel primary control 2840, control is performed to change the volume of a normal game sound (that is, the audio signal (hereinafter the same)) based on, for example, an operation of changing the volume by a player or the like. It is said. The second playback channel primary control 2850 is a control that outputs a specific game sound (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) at a constant volume regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Is done. This constant volume may always be the maximum volume. In this way, the second playback channel primary control 2850, which is not affected by the volume adjustment, is controlled so that a specific game sound is output at a constant volume, so that it can be specified only in a specific playback channel, not as a whole. It is possible to execute control to keep the volume of the game sound constant. Further, the audio signal of the secondary volume is a volume incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number, and is output by the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880. The host control circuit 2100 that executes the first reproduction channel primary control 2840, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850, and the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data is the "second volume" of the present invention. Corresponds to "control means".

In this way, the sound output from each speaker 24 (L0 / R0 / L1 / R1, SUB0, SUB1) is the volume of the total volume TVs 0 to 3, the volume of the primary volume which is the volume for each playback channel, and the secondary. Since it is defined by multiplying the volume of the volume, it is possible to give diversity to the volume of the game sound. In particular, since the volume of the total volume TVs 0 to 3 is also defined by the volume output by the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and at the time of debugging. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of.

In addition, regarding the volume of normal game sounds, the volume can be changed based on the operation of changing the volume by the player or the like, but specific sounds such as error sounds and alarm sounds at the time of illegal acts are specified. As for the game sound, a constant volume is output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 regardless of whether or not the operation for changing the volume is performed. Therefore, it is not possible to hide the occurrence of an error or an illegal act, and it is possible to enhance security.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch has, for example, three stages of large, medium, and small. Further, the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen has seven stages, and is set to [small] = [1], [medium] = "4], and [large] = "7] in conjunction with the hardware switch.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the volume of a specific sound such as an error sound can be maintained only by the control by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850. It is possible to easily perform volume control such as changing the volume according to the volume adjustment for other normal sounds while maintaining the volume. The processing by the host control circuit 2100 when the volume adjustment is performed will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90.

[1-2-5-2. Connection configuration between digital audio power amplifier and speakers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a connection configuration between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 provided in the built-in relay board 2600 and its peripheral circuits and the speaker 24 will be described. FIG. 14 is a connection configuration diagram between the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24. Note that FIG. 14 shows a state in which the speaker 24 is not connected to the built-in relay board 2600 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the speaker box 24a provided with the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 via the harness 3000.

The built-in relay board 2600 includes a digital audio power amplifier 2620, an LC circuit 2630, a connection terminal group 2640 including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal), two resistors 2650 and 2660, and a capacitor. It has 2670 and a NOT circuit (logic circuit) 2680.

The digital audio power amplifier 2620 amplifies the input audio signal (audio data), outputs the amplified audio signal to the speaker 24, and drives the speaker 24. The LC circuit 2630 is composed of a resonance circuit including a coil and a capacitor. Further, the NOT circuit 2680 is a logic circuit that inverts the level of the input signal and outputs it.

The clock input terminal (MCK) and data input terminal (SDATA) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200. The clock signal (master clock signal) output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is input to the clock input terminal (MCK) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and the audio / LED is input to the data input terminal (SDATA). The audio signal (audio data) output from the control circuit 2200 is input.

Further, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are the first connection terminal and the first connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600, respectively, via the LC circuit 2630. It is connected to the second connection terminal. In the present embodiment, an example in which two output terminals of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be appropriately changed according to the function and specifications of the speaker 24. Can be done.

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has a mute terminal (MUTE: audio output control terminal). The digital audio power amplifier 2620 receives audio signals from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is the LOW level. It has a function of stopping the output or making these output terminals grounded via a high resistance (hereinafter referred to as a mute function). That is, when the level of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is the LOW level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is the first of the built-in relay board 2600 from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2). It has a function of generating a state in which the output of the audio signal to the connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped.

On the other hand, when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal (MUTE) is the HIGH level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2). Outputs an audio signal from.

The third connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 via the resistor 2660. Further, the output terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 is connected to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. The signal wiring between the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the resistor 2660 is connected to the power supply voltage (+ 5V) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the resistor 2650. Further, the signal wiring between the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 and the resistor 2660 is connected (grounded) to the grounded (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the capacitor 2670. Further, the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the ground (GND) terminal.

As shown in FIG. 14, the speaker 24 is attached to a speaker box 24a composed of a wooden frame. Further, the speaker box 24a is provided with a connection terminal group 24b including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal). Then, the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected to the speaker 24 via signal wiring. Further, the third connection terminal (specific connection terminal) of the speaker box 24a is electrically connected to the fourth connection terminal by the signal wiring W1.

As shown in FIG. 14, the harness 3000 is configured by bundling four signal wirings. Then, one of the four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings is connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600, respectively. On the other hand, the other four connection terminals (fifth connection terminal to eighth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a, respectively. That is, the first connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the first connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the first connection terminal and the fifth connection terminal in the harness 3000, and the built-in relay board 2600 The second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a and the second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the second connection terminal and the sixth connection terminal in the harness 3000. Further, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the third connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the third connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the harness 3000, and the built-in relay board 2600 The fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the fourth connection terminal and the eighth connection terminal in the harness 3000. As a result, the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 via the harness 3000.

The number of signal wirings included in the harness 3000 is not limited to four, and is appropriately changed according to, for example, the specifications of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, the connection configuration between the two, and the like. The harness 3000 has at least a signal wiring for connecting the output terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, and a signal wiring for grounding the mute terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 via the speaker box 24a. Should be included.

When the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24 are connected via the harness 3000 as described above, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected via the harness 3000. Is connected to the speaker 24. Further, the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is grounded via the NOT circuit 2680, the harness 3000, and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.

As a result, when the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620) via the harness 3000, a LOW level voltage signal is input to the NOT circuit 2680, so that the digital audio power amplifier 2620 The level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of is the HIGH level. In this case, an audio signal is output to the speaker 24 from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

On the other hand, when the speaker 24 is not connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620), the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is opened. In this case, since the power supply voltage (+ 5V) is input to the NOT circuit 2680, the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 becomes the LOW level, and the digital audio power amplifier. The above-mentioned mute function of 2620 is activated.

That is, when the speaker 24 is disconnected from the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620), the built-in relay board 2600 is connected from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. A state is generated in which the output of the audio signal to the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the above is stopped. As a result, the occurrence of a resonance phenomenon between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (output terminal) and the first and second connection terminals of the built-in relay board 2600 is suppressed, and problems such as failure of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 occur. Can be prevented.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be operated regardless of the software control by the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200. Therefore, for example, in a situation where the speaker 24 is detached from the built-in relay board 2600, even if it is recognized that the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200 are performing the output stop control of the audio signal, the program In the case where the audio signal is erroneously output due to a bug or the like, or in the pachinko game machine 1 having a structure in which the game board cannot be replaced unless the speaker 24 is removed from the harness 3000, after the replacement of the game board is completed. Even if a situation occurs such as when the door is closed without connecting the speaker 24 and the harness 3000 by mistake and audio output is started, the mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 described above operates in terms of hardware. In this case, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be reliably protected, and the safety of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the harness 3000 and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a. It is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600. In such a configuration, when the signal level of the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is LOW, is this factor due to the grounding of the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600? Since it can be determined by measuring the signal level of the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600, it is possible to more accurately manage the digital output operation from the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

[1-2-6. Display control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the display control circuit 2300 and a connection relationship between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units.

As shown in FIG. 15, the display control circuit 2300 includes a memory controller 2310, a command memory 2320, a command parser 2330, a moving image decoder 2340, a still image decoder 2350, an SDRAM controller 2360, a built-in VRAM 2370, and a first unit. It includes a display controller 2380, a second display controller 2390, a 3D (Dimension) geometry engine 2400, and a rendering engine 2410. The connection relationship of each part in the display control circuit 2300 and the connection relationship between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuits are as follows.

In the display control circuit 2300, the memory controller 2310 is connected to the command parser 2330, the moving image decoder 2340, and the still image decoder 2350. In addition to the memory controller 2310, the command parser 2330 is connected to the command memory 2320, the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400. The moving image decoder 2340 is connected to the SDRAM controller 2360 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330. The still image decoder 2350 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330.

Further, in the display control circuit 2300, the SDRAM controller 2360 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370, the first display controller 2380, and the second display controller 2390 in addition to the moving image decoder 2340. The built-in VRAM 2370 is connected to the first display controller 2380, the second display controller 2390, and the rendering engine 2410 in addition to the still image decoder 2350 and the SDRAM controller 2360. Further, the 3D geometry engine 2400 is connected to the rendering engine 2410 in addition to the command parser 2330.

The SDRAM 2500 is connected to the memory controller 2310 and the SDRAM controller 2360 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the CGROM board 2040 is connected to the memory controller 2310 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the memory controller 2310 and the command memory 2320 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the display device 16 is connected to the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 in the display control circuit 2300.

Next, the configuration of each part in the display control circuit 2300 will be described.

The memory controller 2310 mainly controls communication between various external memories (CGROM board 2040 and SDRAM 2500) and the display control circuit 2300. For example, the memory controller 2310 performs processing such as transmission / reception of an address designation signal of an external memory to be controlled, memory readiness, busy management, and the like, and data stored at a designated address for various memories (effect data). , Command data, etc.).

The command memory 2320 is a built-in memory for storing a command list. In addition to the command memory 2320, the command list can also be stored in the SDRAM 2500 and the CGROM board 2040 (CGROM2060).

The command parser 2330 acquires a command list from the designated memory (command memory 2320, SDRAM 2500 or CGROM 2060). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the type of memory (command memory 2320, SDRAM 2500 or CGROM 2060) in which the command list is arranged in the system control register (not shown) in the display control circuit 2300 by the host control circuit 2100 and The starting address is set. Then, the command parser 2330 accesses the start address in the memory specified in the system control register (not shown) and acquires the command list.

Further, the command parser 2330 analyzes the acquired command list to generate a specific control code, and outputs the control code to the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400. In this embodiment, each image processing module in the display control circuit 2300 operates based on the control code output by the command parser 2330.

The moving image decoder 2340 decodes the moving image compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the moving image decoder 2340 outputs the decoded moving image data to the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM). The moving image data (decoding result) output from the moving image decoder 2340 is stored in the movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500.

The still image decoder 2350 decodes the still image compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the still image decoder 2350 outputs the decoded still image data to the built-in VRAM 2370. The still image data (decoding result) output from the still image decoder 2350 is temporarily stored in a sprite buffer described later provided in the built-in VRAM 2370.

The SDRAM controller 2360 is a controller that controls operations such as storage processing of decoded moving image data and still image data in RAM, and image data transfer processing between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the CGROM board 2040 or SDRAM 2500.

The built-in VRAM 2370 operates as a work RAM when executing various processes such as a decoding process and a rendering process in the drawing control process by the display control circuit 2300. Further, in the image data transfer process between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500, which is performed in each processing process in the drawing control process described later, various image data are temporarily stored in the built-in VRAM 2370.

Each of the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 acquires a rendering result (drawing result) generated by the rendering engine 2410, and outputs the rendering result to the display device 16. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16. When two display controllers are provided as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, two screens are provided on the display device 16 by one display control circuit 2300 (1 chip) to display each screen. It can be controlled independently.

The 3D geometry engine 2400 converts 3D information into 2D information (projection conversion processing) based on the control code input from the command parser 2330, and affine transformation such as enlargement, reduction, rotation, and movement of figures. (Figure conversion) Performs processing. Then, the 3D geometry engine 2400 outputs the result of the conversion process to the rendering engine 2410.

The rendering engine 2410 refers to a texture source (SDRAM2500 in this embodiment) in which the stretched still image data and moving image data are stored, and performs rendering (drawing) processing on the image data. Then, the rendering engine 2410 writes the rendering result to the rendering target (in this embodiment, the built-in VRAM2370 or the SDRAM 2500).

The term "rendering" as used herein means editing data decoded according to specified information such as enlargement / reduction and rotation of a moving image (in this embodiment, information output from the 3D geometry engine 2400). It is to be. Further, the "rendering engine" referred to here also includes, for example, a "rasterizer" and a "pixel shader". Therefore, in the rendering engine 2410, similarly to the pixel shader, the ARGB value (A: alpha value indicating transparency (opacity), R: luminance value of red component, G: green component) for image data in pixel units. The calculation process of the luminance value of B: the luminance value of the blue component) is also performed.

[1-2-6-1. Connection configuration between display control circuit and CGROM]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration that can deal with different types of CGROMs (NOR type or NAND type) connected to the display control circuit 2300. Here, the connection configuration between the display control circuit 2300 provided in the sub-board 2020 and its peripheral circuits and the CGROM mounted on the CGROM board will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

FIG. 16 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040a when the CGROM is a NOR-type CGROM 2060a (NOR-type flash memory). Further, FIG. 17 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040b when the CGROM is a NAND-type CGROM2060b (NAND-type flash memory). Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the CGROM board is detached from the sub-board 2020 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion, but in reality, both boards are connected via a board-to-board connector. Be connected.

(1) Configuration of Sub-Board First, the internal configuration of the sub-board 2020 will be described. As is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 16 and 17, the configuration of the sub-board 2020 when the NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a is the same as that when the NAND type CGROM 2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b. The same is true.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the sub-board 2020 is provided with a display control circuit 2300, and a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and an AND circuit 302 (AND gate) are provided as peripheral circuits thereof. Further, the sub-board 2020 is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3030 including a plurality of connection terminals directly or indirectly connected to the display control circuit 2300 via various buses.

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 has four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to A3 in FIG. 16) and the other four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to A3) connected to each of the four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to A3). It has two input / output terminals (terminals B0 to B3 in FIG. 16). Further, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 has two control terminals (terminals in FIG. 16) for switching and controlling the signal communication direction between the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3. It has OE and terminal DIR).

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is between the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 according to the combination of the signal levels of the voltage signals applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR, respectively. Switch the communication direction of the signal in. Thereby, even if the communication direction (communication operation) is inconsistent for some reason, the safety of the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be ensured. The communication direction switching control operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 will be described in detail later. Further, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 used in the present embodiment can also be used for a system having two power supplies of 3.3V and 5V.

The display control circuit 2300 is provided with four input / output combined terminals (terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to terminals GMA28 / GRB0 in FIG. 16). The input / output combined terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output combined terminals GMA28 / GRB0 act as output terminals of the address bus when the CGROM is a NOR type CGROM2060a, and are ready when the CGROM is a NAND type CGROM2060b. / Acts as an input terminal for busy signals. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with 26 output terminals (terminals GMA27 to GMA2 in FIG. 16) that act as output terminals for data (address designation data, etc.) related to the address of the data storage area in the CGROM. Be done.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with two CG memory chip enable output terminals (terminal GCE_0 and terminal GCE_1 in FIG. 16). In the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has two memory spaces corresponding to two CG memory chip enable output terminals (GCE_0, GCE_1: specific output terminals), and each memory space has a memory. Information such as type, bus width, and access timing is set. However, in the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has a configuration that cannot be supported (used) when the ROM in the synchronous mode and the ROM in the asynchronous mode are mixed.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with a plurality of data bus input terminals for acquiring image data (compressed video / still image data) from the CGROM via the data bus.

The electrical connection of the components provided on the sub-board 2020 is as follows.

The input / output terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output terminals GMA28 / GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17. Will be done. Then, the input / output terminals A0 to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, respectively. That is, the input / output combined terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output combined terminals GMA28 / GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 via the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010, respectively. To.

Further, the output terminals GMA27 to output terminals GMA2 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the ninth connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, respectively, and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0 and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1 are , It is connected to the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, respectively. Further, the plurality of data bus input terminals of the display control circuit 2300 are respectively connected to the corresponding connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030.

The control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is connected to the fifth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, and the control terminal OE is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 302. One input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1. Further, the 6th connection terminal and the 7th connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 of the sub-board 2020 are connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal provided on the sub-board 2020, and the 8th connection terminal is connected to the sub-board 2020. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal.

(2) Configuration of CGROM Substrate (NOR Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM2060a is mounted will be described with reference to FIG.

When the NOR type CGROM2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a, the CGROM board 2040a includes various signal wirings (buses) and a plurality of connection terminals connected to the CGROM2060a via various buses together with the NOR type CGROM2060a. A group 3110 is provided.

The first to fourth connection terminals and the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a are connected to the CGROM 2060a.

In the example shown in FIG. 16, since the CGROM2060a is a NOR type flash memory (random access type flash memory), the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal and the ninth connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are used. The connection terminal is connected to an input terminal (not shown) of the address bus of CGROM2060a. Further, the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to the CG memory chip enable input terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 2060a, and the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are displayed by the display control circuit 2300 in the CGROM2060a. It is connected to the data output terminal of CGROM2060a used when acquiring image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a is connected to the eighth connection terminal via the signal wiring W2, and the eighth connection terminal is connected to the CGROM board 2040a. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal. That is, when the CGROM2060a is a NOR type flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is grounded via the signal wiring W2. Further, the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040a.

The number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 is the same as the number of connection terminals of the terminal group 3030 for connecting the CGROM board provided on the sub-board 2020. Then, when the CGROM board 2040a is connected (mounted) to the sub-board 2020, both boards are connected so that the connection terminals of the CGROM board 2040a are connected to the connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., the 37th connection terminal, ... Of the CGROM board 2040a are the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., The third of the sub-board 2020. It is connected to 37 connection terminals, ...

(3) Configuration of CGROM Substrate (NAND Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040b on which the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted will be described with reference to FIG. In the configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040b shown in FIG. 17, the same configuration as the CGROM substrate 2040a equipped with the NOR type CGROM 2060a shown in FIG. 16 is shown with the same reference numerals.

When the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b, the CGROM board 2040b is provided with the NAND type CGROM2060b and a transistor circuit 312 as a peripheral circuit thereof. Further, the CGROM board 2040b is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3110 including a plurality of connection terminals directly or indirectly connected to the CGROM 2060b via various buses.

The first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the drain terminal of the transistor circuit 312. The gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312 is connected to the CGROM 2060b, and the source terminal is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b. That is, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal are connected to the CGROM 2060b via the transistor circuit 312.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, since the CGROM2060b is a NAND type flash memory (sequential access type flash memory), the gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312, that is, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection in the terminal group 3110. The terminal is connected to a ready / busy output terminal (not shown) provided on the CGROM 2060b.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal via the signal wiring W3, and the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection are connected. The terminals are connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminals provided on the CGROM board 2040b. That is, when the CGROM2060b is a NAND flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is connected to the power supply voltage (+ 3.3V) terminal via the signal wiring W3.

Further, the eighth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b.

Further, the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the CGROM 2060b. At this time, the 9th connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal are connected to an input terminal (not shown) for data relating to the address provided in the CGROM 2060b, and the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal are CGs provided in the CGROM 2060b. Connected to the memory chip enable input terminal. Further, the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are connected to the data output terminal (not shown) of the CGROM2060b used when the display control circuit 2300 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from the CGROM2060b. To.

Even when the NAND type CGROM2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b, the number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is the number of the terminal group 3030 for connecting the CGROM board provided on the sub board 2020. It is the same as the number of connection terminals. Then, when the CGROM board 2040b is connected (mounted) to the sub-board 2020, both boards are connected so that the connection terminals of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 17, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., the 37th connection terminal, ... Of the CGROM board 2040b are the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal, ..., The third of the sub-board 2020. It is connected to 37 connection terminals, ...

[1-2-6-2. Communication operation between display control circuit and CGROM]
Next, the operation when the display control circuit 2300 acquires the image data (compressed data of the moving image / still image) from the CGROM will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Note that FIG. 18 is a truth table showing the correspondence between the input signal and the output signal in the AND circuit 302 provided on the sub-board 2020, and FIG. 19 is a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 provided on the sub-board 2020. Is a truth table showing the correspondence between the signal level applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR and the communication direction.

(1) Operation of AND Circuit and Bidirectional Balance Transceiver As shown in FIG. 18, the AND circuit 302 is bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 only when a HIGH level signal (voltage signal) is input to both input terminals. A HIGH level signal is output to the control terminal OE of the above, and a LOW level signal is output to the control terminal OE under other input conditions.

As shown in FIG. 19, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is a bidirectional balanced transceiver when a LOW level signal (voltage signal) is input to the control terminal OE and a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR. The input / output terminals A0 to input / output terminals A3 of 3010 act as output terminals, and the input / output terminals B0 to input / output terminals B3 act as input terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is the direction from the display control circuit 2300 toward the CGROM.

Further, in the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010, when a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE and a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR, the input / output terminals A0 to input / output of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are input. The terminal A3 acts as an input terminal, and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminal B3 act as output terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is the direction from the CGROM to the display control circuit 2300.

When the combination of the signal level input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and the signal level input to the control terminal DIR is a combination other than the above (HIGH to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010). When a level signal is input), the input / output terminals A0 to input / output terminals A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are in the HIGH impedance state (“Z” in FIG. 19). ), That is, the state is equivalent to the open state, and communication is not performed between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

(2) Communication operation between the display control circuit and the CGROM (NOR type) Here, first, consider the case where the CGROM board 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted is connected (mounted) to the sub board 2020.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since the LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is LOW. The level signal is input. The signal levels of the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 are set in the hardware initialization process (see FIG. 63 described later).

In the present embodiment, the amplitude values of the output signals from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals), which are preset by the sub control circuit 200, are different depending on the type of CGROM, so that the display control circuit The amplitude value of the signal output from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 provided in the 2300 changes according to the type of storage means. However, the mode in which "the amplitude value of the output signal changes according to the type of CGROM" is not limited to this mode. As described in the modified example 7 described later, the display control circuit 2300 detects the type of the connected storage means, and based on the detection result, from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals). The amplitude value of the output signal may be set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected is grounded via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a and the signal wiring W2. Therefore, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040a equipped with the NOR type CGROM 2060a is connected to the sub board 2020, the input / output terminals A to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are used as output terminals as shown in FIG. It acts, and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 act as input terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060a in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is the direction from the display control circuit 2300 toward the CGROM 2060a.

In this case, the signal wiring connected via the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 and the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a can be used as an address bus, and display control can be performed. The circuit 2300 can normally execute the memory addressing operation for the NOR type CGROM2060a. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 can directly specify the address via the address bus and perform the data read operation.

(3) Communication operation between the display control circuit and the CGROM (NAND type) Next, consider the case where the CGROM board 2040b on which the NAND type CGROM 2060b is mounted is connected (mounted) to the sub board 2020.

Also in this case, in the present embodiment, since the LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals CGE_0 and CGE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is used. Is input with a LOW level signal. That is, in the present embodiment, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 regardless of whether the type of CGROM is NOR type or NAND type. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected is a power supply voltage (as shown in FIG. 17) via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b and the signal wiring W3. Since it is connected to the + 3.3V) terminal, a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040b equipped with the NAND type CGROM 2060b is connected to the sub board 2020, the input / output terminals A to the input / output terminals A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are used as input terminals as shown in FIG. It acts, and the input / output terminals B0 to the input / output terminals B3 act as output terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060b in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is the direction from the CGROM 2060b toward the display control circuit 2300.

In this case, the signal wiring connected via the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 and the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b shall be used as the communication wiring of the ready / busy signal. Can be done. That is, in this case, the transmission process of the ready / busy signal referred to by the display control circuit 2300 when reading the data from the NAND type CGROM 2060b by the sequential access method from the CGROM 2060 to the display control circuit 2300 can be executed. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 can normally execute the memory state (ready / busy state) acquisition operation for the NAND type CGROM2060b.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the type of CGROM is changed, the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be normally executed without changing the configuration of the sub-board 2020. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, the optimum CGROM can be selected in consideration of data capacity, communication speed, price, and the like. Further, for example, when manufacturing a new pachinko game machine 1, the sub-board 2020 used in the pachinko game machine manufactured in the past is diverted from the conditions such as data capacity and communication speed, and only the type of CGROM is changed. Even in such a case, it can be easily dealt with. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CGROM can be selected according to the embodiment, and the expandability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be ensured.

Further, in the present embodiment, by using the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3030 of the sub-board 2020 and the first connection in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040 are used. The terminals to the fourth connection terminal can be used as data input / output terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide the data input terminal and the output terminal corresponding to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040, and the space of the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040 is saved. Can be achieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 can switch the "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM according to the type of the CGROM. However, the "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM as used herein means the overall mode of transmitting and receiving various information between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

For example, the "communication mode" between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM referred to in the present specification includes data (image data (compressed data of moving image / still image)) required for displaying information related to the effect operation on the display device 16. )) Not only the transmission / reception mode between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM, but also the transmission / reception mode and display when communicating the information specifying the address of the data stored in the CGROM between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM. It means that the control circuit 2300 also includes a transmission / reception mode when receiving a ready / busy signal from the CGROM. The present invention is not limited to this, and the "communication form" referred to in the present specification may mean only the communication form of the portion where the transmission / reception mode of information changes according to the type of CGROM.

[2. Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "normal hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random values (for example, jackpot determination random value and symbol determination random value) are displayed from various counters (for example, a jackpot judgment counter and a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 20).

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol start winning, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the condition that various data such as random values are stored. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern). ) Is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. , And the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is obtained. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has been achieved, the big hit game state control process for performing the big hit game state is executed. In the jackpot game state, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game state control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state in the normal state, which is different from the jackpot game state, is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, the game state in which the "big hit" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as the "normal game state") and the probability of being determined as the "big hit" are A gaming state that increases from the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability gaming state") and a gaming state in which a special symbol start prize is easily obtained as a result of the normal hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "short-time gaming state"). ) And so on. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts and wins during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (big hit determination random value, symbol determination random value, etc.) are extracted at the time of the start winning. ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data (for example, a random value for jackpot determination) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied is called "holding", and the various data held are called starting storage.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is suspended. The variable display of the special symbols is started in order. In the following, various data on the reserved special symbols will also be referred to as "reserved balls".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. It is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of the special symbol until. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a total of eight of the four first special symbols and the four second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball has been won (whether or not the “big hit” has been won) based on the above-mentioned information on the reserved ball, and further, the winning or not. It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on a determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit judgment counter and the random value value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 20). See the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

Next, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination as to whether or not to set as "normal hit" is performed. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined normal hit determination result and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the fluctuation display control process for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is obtained. In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "normal hit", a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, in particular, the possibility of winning a special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not obtained, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the game ball is paid out depending on the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In the present embodiment, as various random number value extraction methods, a soft random number method that generates random number values within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random number values may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 22 is a hit type when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as “main symbol”). It is a figure which shows an example about the selectivity of, and FIG. 23 is a figure which shows an example of the variation time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 not shown in FIGS. 21 to 24 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

In explaining the probability of the jackpot shown in FIG. 21, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. 1 With reference to the special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), a jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), the jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “second special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing" as in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)” is set in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ) Relationship between the range (width) of the random number for jackpot judgment determined as "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data"). Is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for a range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is the "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the game state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". In the time saving game state, the time saving number of times is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the time saving number of times is subtracted by 1 every time the special symbol changes once.

In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined as a normal hit (normal hit probability) in the normal hit determination is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric accessory 46 changing from the closed state to the open state, that is, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 is increased as compared with the non-time-saving game state. However, in the time-saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability as compared with the non-time-saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric role The frequency with which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 46. Further, two or three aspects of the above three aspects may be combined.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a normal game state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, a probability change time saving game state in which the probability change flag is ON and the time saving flag is ON, and a time saving game in which the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON are used. It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 to any of the gaming states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

[3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 for setting 1, about 1/290 for setting 2, and about 1/290 for setting 3. It is 1/280, setting 4 is about 1/270, setting 5 is about 1/260, and setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and setting 3. Is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, so that the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set as the set value. By changing according to the setting value, the jackpot probability is different. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the first special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. In addition, the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 for setting 1, 22 for setting 2, 23 for setting 3, 24 for setting 4, 25 for setting 5, and 26 for setting 6. It has become.

Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 for setting 1, 1/290 for setting 2, and 280 minutes for setting 3. 1. Setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 for setting 1, 1/29 for setting 2, and 28 for setting 3. It is 1/27, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

That is, with respect to the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 for a range (0 to 65535) of random numbers for jackpot determination, which is a fixed value. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high probability game state, setting 1 is 21 pieces, setting 2 is 22 pieces, setting 3 is 23 pieces, setting 4 is 24 pieces, setting 5 is 25 pieces, and setting 6 is 26 pieces. It is an individual.

It should be noted that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination of the second special symbol have the same jackpot probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, in the case of setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability gaming state (1/28 in the high probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low-probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high-probability gaming state).

In the present embodiment, the set value has 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be 6 stages, and can be arbitrarily set as long as there are a plurality of stages.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is configured to be different when the set value is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be common to a plurality of set values. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 and The jackpot probability common to setting 6 (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the big hit determination random number, which is a fixed value, is set. By changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the method for differentiating the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this, and the jackpot judgment value is not limited to this. By making the number of data common to all settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number according to the set value, the jackpot probability may be made different according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218 common to all settings, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (big hit probability is about 1/300) and in setting 2. The range from 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range from 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability is 1/280), and the range from 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability is 1/270). , Setting 5 sets the range from 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), setting 6 sets the range from 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot judgment), which has more digits than the numerator (number of jackpot judgment value data). Compared with the method of changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value with the range as a fixed value, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value, but the number of big hit judgment value data is all set. It is not always essential to have them in common. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is set to the range of 0 to 65535 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, the jackpot determination value data is set. The number of jackpot judgments is 219, and the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is set to the range of 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290). The range (width) is set to the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 221 and the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is the range of 0 to 59669. (The jackpot probability is about 1/270), and in setting 5, the number of jackpot determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1/260). In setting 6, the number of jackpot determination value data is 223, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even if both the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is changed according to the set value, the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the jackpot judgment random number as a fixed value. In comparison, the jackpot probability for each set value can be set in detail.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check process (see FIG. 42) in steps S72 and S82, which will be described later. , In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5", for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number is set as the set value. It may be checked whether or not it is within the corresponding range, and / and whether or not the number of jackpot determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number or / and the number of jackpot determination value data is out of the range according to the set value) (step to be described later). (When it corresponds to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[3-2. Big hit distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 22, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 22 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol as the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability) based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. 25.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), and Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 25.0%) ) Is decided. Special figure 1-1 is a big hit with 4 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time saving number of 100 times. In Special Figure 1-2, the number of rounds is 4, the probability variation flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed (the time reduction flag is set to OFF when the next jackpot game state is started). It's a big hit. Special Figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time reductions. Special figures 1-4 are jackpots in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the first special symbol over a fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 23, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Execute the control to stop with.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag is ON as in the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4). After the jackpot gaming state ends, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started, so-called "probability variation loop machine". In such a probabilistic loop machine, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the next jackpot gaming state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is played. Then, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag as in the special figure 1-1 or the special figure 1-3). (If it is a big hit that does not turn ON), after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to a low-probability gaming state without being controlled to a high-probability gaming state.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol as the special diagram 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or the special symbol based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Determined to be 2-2 (distribution probability 50.0%). Special figure 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time reductions. Special Figure 2-2 shows a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the second special symbol over the fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 23, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Execute the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes a control to stop the special symbol at the determined lost symbol.

The number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state. If the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the jackpot game state. The gaming state after the end of is controlled to the low probability gaming state (the gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF). In the following, the jackpot with 4 rounds, the probability change flag OFF, and the number of time reductions of 100 times (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-1) is referred to as "4R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, and the next jackpot game are A jackpot in which the time reduction continues until it is executed (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-2) is called a "4R probability variation jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is OFF, and the number of time reductions is 100 times (for example, Special Figure 1-). 3. The jackpot in Special Figure 2-1 is called "10R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, Special Figure 1-4, The jackpot in Special Figure 2-2) is referred to as a "10R probability variation jackpot".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but the time saving flag is not necessarily limited to this, and the determination is made based on the extracted symbol determination random number. Depending on the main symbol to be played, it may be decided whether to set the time saving flag to ON or OFF.

[3-3. Fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the flow until the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined (that is, the fluctuation time and the effect content) can be different depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 23 are stored in the main ROM 102. Further, the execution probability of the reach effect may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, or the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. 23. ..

As shown in FIG. 23, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be determined by using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol shows the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the effect selection. The relationship between the random number range, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern), the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time, and the effect content is defined. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probabilistic time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are not distinguished. Further, different random number ranges are set according to the set values for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

The reach determination random number range is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is lost. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from the reach determination counter and determines the extracted reach. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit determination using the random number value for big hit determination when starting the variable display of the special symbol, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect using the reach determination random number. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

For example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 in settings 1 and 2. It is specified in ~ 25, it is specified in 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and it is specified in 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variation time reduction game state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set to 1. In 2, it is specified as 0 to 10, in settings 3 and 4, it is specified as 0 to 11, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 12.

As described above, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the setting 3 -Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

In the present embodiment, when deciding whether or not to execute the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, is common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and is set to the setting 5. Although it is common to 6, but not limited to this, it may be different in all settings.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is an explanation of the case where the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, but when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The effect selection random number range is a random number used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter, and selects the extracted effect. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state and the result of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss). To determine the variation time of the special symbol using. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. When the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined to execute the reach effect is It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and the reach effect is not executed is as follows. Will be decided. That is, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal variation A), is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B), is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time saving game state (probability change flag ON and time saving flag ON) and the normal time saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (super reach B in a short time), is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

Since the main symbol is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, what is the determination of the fluctuation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a jackpot is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-shortening game state (probability variation flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving game state (probability variation flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a jackpot is It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (super reach B in a short time), is defined as 50 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect are the same, the variation of the special symbol The time is more likely to be determined in the setting 3 and 4 as a shorter fluctuation time than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the time is more likely to be determined in the setting 5 and 6 as a shorter fluctuation time than in the setting 3 and 4. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lottery). As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of times the jackpot game state will be executed will increase when viewed in a unit time, and the probability that the jackpot game state will be executed within a unit time will also increase. It is possible to execute an advantageous game.

In the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, is common to setting 3 and setting 4, and is common to setting 5 and setting 6. Although it is common, it is not limited to this, and all the setting values may be different.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot is determined in common for all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of is different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the content of the effect. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents a normal medium super reach B with a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the variation time and the effect content. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is "05H", the fluctuation pattern designation command of "83H05H" is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designation command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[3-4. Decorative design stop design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, an example of a stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selectivity shown in FIG. 22 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot will be described. .. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 24 are stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200.

When the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) stops the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command regardless of the set value. Determine the design. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special figure 1-2, the host control circuit 2100 has the specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol) in which all the decorative symbols are the same. ), Since the distribution probability is 0%, all the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in the present embodiment) are the same even-numbered symbols (distribution probability 30.0%), or all. It is determined that the decorative symbols of the above are the same odd-numbered symbols (distribution probability 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is set to "7" symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if it can be recognized as a jackpot with a high degree of profit from the player's point of view, another symbol (for example, "V" symbol) is used as the specific symbol. Is also good.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 24 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, A symbol other than the symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 24 correspond to, for example, a symbol in which at least one of all the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

As described above, according to FIG. 24, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is the jackpot determination of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Whether or not the game state after the jackpot game state ends is a jackpot controlled to a high-probability gaming state, and whether or not the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is 10R. Can vary depending on.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 22 is special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, or special figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON). Regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols are always stopped in the same even-numbered symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol (other than the specific symbol "7" symbol) regardless of the set value. (Hereinafter referred to as "second aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol regardless of the set value, or all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as "specific mode").

Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the device stops in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are 10R probability variation big hits, but since Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, it is a big hit in the normal game state. There is a high possibility that he won. Further, since the special figure 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, it is highly possible that the big hit was won in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this way, when stopped in a specific mode, the 10R probability variable jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is determined, and when stopped in a mode in which all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, the probability variable jackpot (4R probability variable jackpot or 10R) is determined. Probability change jackpot) is confirmed. On the other hand, when stopped in the first aspect, it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is not the most profitable for the player, but the possibility of the 4R probability variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the player may be notified of which jackpot the jackpot is when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or the jackpot game. It may be notified during the execution of the state, or may be notified when the jackpot game state ends. Further, although not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the high-probability gaming state is the high-probability gaming state even though the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state. It may be controlled to a so-called "latent probability change state" in which the player is not clearly shown to be controlled by.

[4. Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko machines]

The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are as described above, but the specifications are not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, it goes without saying that the following explanation is an example and is not limited to this.
[4-1. Deformation example of fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a modification of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As described above, there are cases where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation example of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 25 counts the number of times the special symbol is changed (that is, the number of times the special symbol is drawn). It is equipped with a counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means is reset at the start of the jackpot gaming state, for example, and starts counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 25, in another example, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect is performed. It is performed according to both the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the time when the jackpot game state ends and the set value.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time when the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, a random number range for reach determination is determined to execute the reach effect. Is specified to 0 to 25 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is to be executed is 0 to 10 in settings 1 and 2. In settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 0 to 5, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is lost, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the settings 1 and 2 as compared with the settings 3 and 4, and in the settings 3 and 4 as compared with the settings 5 and 6. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (in the settings 1 and 2, the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 as compared with the settings 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is 0 to 1000 times. Compared with, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the jackpot game is also performed for the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where the number of fluctuations is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is 0 to 1000, the random number range for effect selection is determined so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 20000 msec (normal medium reach). Is specified to 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is set to 1. It is not specified in ~ 4, but is specified in 0 to 99 in settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4, but not in settings 5 and 6. .. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally Super Reach B), is specified in 90 to 99 for all settings 1 to 4, and is specified in settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called big hit situation where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state is 1001 times or more, the set value set is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is lost and it is decided to execute the reach effect, the starting point is the time when the jackpot gaming state ends. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of executing the reach effect. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of executing the reach effect with a shorter fluctuation time of the special symbol.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state becomes 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit The number of changes in the special symbol per hour (that is, the number of lottery) becomes even larger. As a result, the expectation that the number of times the big hit game is executed in a unit time is higher is higher, and the probability that the big hit game is executed within the unit time is also higher.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the jackpot game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect will be significantly different depending on the set value. There can be room for it. As a result, when a so-called big hit is made, the set value set for the player is set without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving the game ball to the player). By giving a guessable opportunity, it is possible to give the player fun. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect, but in this embodiment, it is expected that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value is. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce the decrease in motivation to continue the game even if the reach effect is executed infrequently.

In the present embodiment, the starting point at which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted is set to the time when the jackpot gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state is set. The starting point can be any time point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends in the so-called ST machine that ends, or when the time-saving gaming state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value, but not necessarily 1001. It does not have to be more than once. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that he / she is addicted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes a predetermined number or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are significantly different depending on the set value, but the set value What is significantly different depending on the situation is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol is determined to be a big hit and the time when the game is actually controlled to the big hit game state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as “ending time”) from the end of the big hit game state to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300) displays the opening effect on the display device 16 at the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the display device 16 at the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production showing that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production to congratulate the fact that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method in the big hit game state (for example, right-handed). The production to teach is performed. In the ending effect, the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state is shown, the number of times the jackpot game state is continued (the number of consecutive villas) is shown, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends is a high-probability game. An effect indicating that the state is controlled, an effect of teaching a game method (for example, returning to left-handed) in the game state after the jackpot game state is completed, and an effect of displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1. Etc. are performed.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the jackpot gaming state increases as the set value increases. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average number of fluctuations (that is, the number of lottery) of the special symbol per unit time, and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the higher the set value is, the higher the expected value of the ball is ejected (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is), a large amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. In view of the possibility of this, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value becomes higher. In this case, the higher the set value with which the expected ball output value is higher, the longer all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time is, so that the fun of the game with the high setting value is guaranteed. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time.

Even when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the above-mentioned opening time, ending time, and jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 wins a prize for the game ball to the starting port (first starting port 420, second starting port 440). When it is detected, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check processing (see FIG. 42) of steps S74 and S82, which will be described later, is executed. Then, when it is determined in this setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721 described later), even if it is controlled to the jackpot game state. , The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[4-2. Big hit distribution and stop design of decorative design Modification example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the first and second modified examples of the jackpot distribution (selectivity of the main symbol) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these second modified examples. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the time of the 1st modification and the 2nd modification will be described. In the first modification and the second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. Note that FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and FIG. 27 is a diagram when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol of. Further, FIG. 28 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[4-2-1. First modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 28. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 26 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 28 are stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the first modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. With probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 Determine one of -8. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is the "10R probability variation jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution probability 10.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution probability). Separation probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in setting 6, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4 (both are 4R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both are high setting values). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, for Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but it is a high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the host control circuit 2100 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 28. -7, Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. The symbol is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at 0%). Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selection) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at a rate of 75.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 4R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol will stop in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher expectation than the first mode) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 50.0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figures 1-6 and the special figures 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0) regardless of the set value. %) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is feasible to enable the stop mode of the decorative symbol to be different depending on the set value even if the jackpot type is the same. Become. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the set value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

[4-2-2. Second variant]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 27 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modification, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the second modification, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Absent. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a probability variation attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled and the entry of the game ball into the probability change attacker is detected, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state, and the probability change attacker is reached. When the jackpot gaming state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. In this way, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability gaming state based on the entry of a game ball into a probabilistic attacker is also a so-called “probability-changing loop machine”.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the second modification, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the game ball is controlled in the jackpot game state in the mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker. Is controlled by. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions when the big hit is in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is 100 times, and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". When it is a big hit, the time reduction continues until the next big hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability change attacker" is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball enters the probability change attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100%). It is controlled to a low probability gaming state with a probability close to). In addition, the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability change attacker" is in the big hit game state as long as the game ball is launched toward the placement portion of the probability change attacker (for example, the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probabilistic attacker while being controlled (it is controlled to a high probability game state with a probability of almost 100%). Therefore, in this second modification, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is referred to as the "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". The jackpot is called a "probability change jackpot".

However, if it is "a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker", it is controlled to a high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker". Instead of being controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when "a mode in which a game ball can easily enter a probabilistic attacker", "it is difficult for a game ball to enter a probabilistic attacker". It may be a mode in which the gaming state is controlled with a relatively higher probability than the "mode".

As a method of creating a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter, for example, a probabilistic attacker is not provided apart from the large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. It is conceivable to provide another big winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2). In the case of -4), the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is controlled, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1). In the case of -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3), by controlling the big hit game state in which the other big winning openings are opened without opening the special winning opening 540. It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above mode as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter.

Further, as described above, when a large winning opening 540 having a probabilistic attacker inside and another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a probabilistic attacker are provided, a large winning prize is opened in the big hit game state. You may make the mouth have a setting difference. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easier to select a big hit game state in which other big winning openings are opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is easier than other big winning openings. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened, such as the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 27, in such a second modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1-4, Special Figure 1-5, Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-7, and It is decided to be one of the special figures 1-8. However, in this second modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is the "10R probability variation jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution probability 10.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution probability). Separation probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in setting 6, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4 (both are 4R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both are high setting values). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, for Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Toku-zu 2-2 and Toku-zu 2-4 (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but it is a high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the host control circuit 2100 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 28. -7, Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. The symbol is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at 0%). Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selection) regardless of the set value. It is controlled to stop at a rate of 75.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 4R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol will stop in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher expectation than the first mode) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 50.0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figures 1-6 and the special figures 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0) regardless of the set value. %) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

As described above, in the second modified example as well, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the jackpot type is the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to allow the stop mode of the symbol to be different. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the set value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

In both the first modification and the second modification described above, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value by making the selection rate of the main symbol different according to the set value. doing. That is, the host control circuit 2100 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, according to the set value. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different depending on the set value by the control by the host control circuit 2100.

According to the first modification and the second modification described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the time saving inrush rate. It will be possible.

[5. Outline of drawing control method]
Here, an outline of the drawing control process executed by the display control circuit 2300 when the control signal of the drawing request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. Note that FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flow of image data (moving image data and still image data) at the time of drawing control processing.

In the present embodiment, the data (compressed data) of the image (moving image and / or still image) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display device 16 is stored in the CGROM 2060 in the CGROM board 2040. Then, when the control signal of the drawing request is input to the display control circuit 2300, the display control circuit 2300 first reads the image compressed data from the CGROM 2060 and decodes (decompresses) the image compressed data. At this time, when the moving image compressed data is read, the moving image compressed data is decoded by the moving image decoder 2340 in the display control circuit 2300, and when the still image compressed data is read out, the moving image compressed data is read out in the display control circuit 2300. The still image compressed data is decoded by the still image decoder 2350.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 writes the decoding result (image expansion data) of the image data to a predetermined buffer designated as the texture source. In the present embodiment, as the texture source, a movie buffer and a texture buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM) and a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 2370 are specified. For example, when displaying one moving image, the decompressed moving image data (decoding result) is written to the movie buffer in the SDRAM 2500. Further, for example, when displaying one still image, the expanded still image data is written to the sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM2370.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 specifies a rendering target for writing the rendering (drawing) result of the image data. As the rendering target, for example, a frame buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM), a frame buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 2370, or the like can be specified.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 operates the rendering engine 2410 to perform rendering processing on the decoding result of the image data written in the texture source, and writes the rendering result to the rendering target. In this process, the rendering process is performed according to designated information (various information input from the 3D geometry engine 2400) such as enlargement / reduction and rotation of the moving image.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 displays the rendering result (display output data) written to the rendering target on the display screen of the display device 16.

In this embodiment, two frame buffers are prepared as rendering targets. Then, when the rendering engine 2410 writes the rendering result to the frame buffer, the frame buffer in which the rendering result is written is switched for each frame. For example, when the rendering result is written to one frame buffer in a predetermined frame, the rendering result is written to the other frame buffer in the next frame, and the rendering result is written to one frame buffer in the next frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the process of writing the rendering result to one frame buffer and the process of writing the rendering result to the other frame buffer are alternately switched and executed for each frame.

Further, in the flow of the rendering result writing process and the display process described above, the rendering result written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (on the other hand). The frame buffer function of is switched from the drawing function to the display function). Further, the rendering result written in the other frame buffer in the next frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (the function of the other frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function). That is, in the present embodiment, the rendering result display processing in one frame buffer and the rendering result display processing in the other frame buffer are alternately switched and executed for each frame.

[6. Overview of audio playback control method]
Next, the outline of the voice reproduction process executed by the voice / LED control circuit 2200 when the sound request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the voice / LED control circuit 2200 will be described back to FIG.

In the present embodiment, the audio data output to the speaker 24 is stored in the CGROM 2060. The audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 is phrase compressed data specified by a 13-bit long phrase number NUM (000H to 1FFFH), and is a series of background music songs (BGM) or a set. A maximum of 8192 types (= 213) of production sounds (notice sounds) and the like are stored corresponding to the phrase number NUM. The phrase number NUM is specified by a set value (operating parameter) of a voice command transmitted from the host control circuit 2100 to the command register 2250 of the voice / LED control circuit 2200.

The voice command is used for Individual Write, which transmits a set value of 1 byte length to the voice control register of any one of a large number of voice control registers built in the voice / LED control circuit 2200, or a series of N consecutive voice commands. It is used for Block Write, which transmits N set values in a group to the voice control register group of.

In any case, the voice control register to be accessed is specified by a register address having a length of 1 byte, and the storage capacity of each voice control register is 1 byte. Then, in this embodiment, a large number of voice control registers are secured by dividing into seven register banks. That is, since the register bank is divided into seven, the total number of voice control registers is, in principle, a maximum of 7 × 256.

In this embodiment, in all the register banks, the specific register address is a voice control register for register bank setting. Therefore, in order to specify any one of the 7 × 256 voice control registers, the register bank is written in the voice control register for bank setting by the preceding voice command, and then the voice control belonging to that register bank is performed. The register is specified by the register address having a length of 1 byte.

By the way, in the operation of setting the set value in the voice control register, it is not always necessary to directly specify the register address of the voice control register to be set, and the SAC data (Simple Access Code Data) stored in the CGROM2060 or It is also possible to specify a Sequence Code to complete a series of setting operations for a group of voice control registers. In order to realize such an operation, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 includes four simple access controllers 2260a (simple access controller) and 16 sequencers 2260b (Sequencer) shown in FIG. ..

Explaining from the SAC (Simple Access Code) data for operating the simple access controller 2260a, the SAC data has the register address (1 byte) of the voice control register and the set value (1 byte) in the voice control register. It means a maximum of 512 sets (= 1024 bytes) of data groups associated with each other and is an aggregate terminated by a SAC end code (FFFFH) (see FIG. 12).

In the case of this embodiment, a maximum of 8192 types (= 213) of such SAC data can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 sets a 13-bit length SAC number to a voice control register for SAC control (see FIG. 12). ), The simple access controller 2260a can be made to function. The simple access controller 2260a that has started the function reads a group of SAC data specified by the SAC number in order from the CGROM 2060, and sets the set value indicated by the SAC data in the voice control register indicated by the SAC data.

Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 only needs to write (register) the SAC number in the voice control register for SAC control, and performs a series of setting operations without individually specifying the register address of the voice control register. Can be instructed. In the voice control register for SAC control, a standby time (standby information as attached data) that defines the start timing of a series of setting operations can be set, and the SAC number to the voice control register for SAC control can be set. It is also possible to delay the setting start timing to the voice control register by the simple access controller 2260a from the writing timing of.

Subsequently, a sequence code (Sequence Code) for operating the sequencer 2260b will be described. Similar to the SAC data, the sequence code is also a plurality of sets of data in which the register address (1 byte) of the voice control register and the set value (1 byte) of the voice control register are associated with each other (see FIG. 12). However, unlike the SAC data, the sequence code can specify a plurality of operation steps (plurality of sequence steps) that can be intermittently executed after a predetermined waiting time.

Further, in the voice control register for sequencer control, for each sequencer SQ0 to SQ15, the waiting time (standby information) that defines the start timing of the set operation, the presence or absence of the repeated operation, and the number of repetitions (loop information) ) Can be included. Therefore, the sequence code identifies a series of audio effects that are executed over a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 12, the plurality of operation steps are separated by a step end code (FFFEH), and the end of the plurality of operation steps is terminated by a sequence end code (FFFFH). In the case of this embodiment, a maximum of 8192 types (= 213) of sequence codes can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 uses a sequencer (Sequencer) to provide a sequence code number having a length of 13 bits and attached data that defines the operation of the sequencer. ) By writing to the voice control register for control, a series of setting operations can be instructed to the sequencer 2260b.

In this embodiment, only the necessary sets of such SAC data and sequence codes are stored in advance in the CGROM 2060, and a group of SAC data and a group of sequence codes are specified by SAC numbers and sequence code numbers. Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, the voice command for writing defines not only the direct setting operation to the voice control register but also the indirect setting operation via the simple access controller 2260a and the sequencer 2260b. It is also included when you do.

In order to realize the above operation, the host control circuit 2100 and the voice / LED control circuit 2200 have a parallel signal line (data bus) capable of transmitting and receiving 1-byte data and a 2-bit length operation management capable of transmitting operation management data. It is connected by a data line (address bus), a 2-bit length control signal line capable of controlling read / write operations, and a chip select signal line for selecting an audio / LED control circuit 2200.

The parallel signal line is realized by the data bus of the host control circuit 2100, and the operation management data line is realized by the address bus of the host control circuit 2100. The voice / LED control circuit 2200 is assigned three port numbers PORT in which the upper 6 bits are common and the lower 2 bits are 00, 01, and 10, and the host control circuit 2100 is assigned to these ports. When the I / OREAD instruction or the I / OWRITE instruction for the number PORT is executed, the circuit is configured so that the chip select signal CS becomes the active level in each case.

Then, the data output to the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address bus when the I / OREAD instruction or the I / OWRITE instruction is executed becomes the operation management data A0 to A1 for the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and the 2 bits A0. Based on ~ A1, it is specified whether the 1-byte data of the data bus at that time is a register address, write data, or read data.

That is, if the address data is [00], the data of the data bus at that timing is evaluated as a register address, while if the address data is [01], the data of the data bus at that timing is write data or read. It becomes data. The read data is when the I / OREAD instruction is executed, and the write data is when the I / OWRITE instruction is executed.

Therefore, the transmission operation of the voice command for writing the predetermined set value to the predetermined voice control register issues the I / OWRITE command while changing the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice / LED control circuit 2200. It is realized by executing it continuously. Specifically, the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are changed from [00] to [01], while the 1-byte data of the data bus is changed from [register address of voice control register] to [voice control register]. By changing to [Data written to], a predetermined voice command transmission operation is realized.

As in the case of transmitting the SAC number (13 bits), the sequence code number (13 bits), and the control data (standby information, loop information, etc.) associated therewith, the write data has a multi-byte length and is controlled. When the register addresses of the register are continuous, the operation management data A0 to A1 of [01] are repeated in the order of [00] → [01] → [01] → [01], and a plurality of bytes of write data are transmitted. ..

The voice command transmitted in this way is subsequently activated inside the voice / LED control circuit 2200 unless there is a communication abnormality. However, if a communication abnormality is found, such as data with multiple byte lengths not matching each other, the voice command will not be effective. Then, the error flag of the voice control register is set, and this error flag (status information STS) is an I / OREAD instruction that changes the operation management data A0 to A1 of the address bus from [01] to [10]. Can be received by executing.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the final cycle in which the operation management data A0 to A1 are changed in the order of [00] → [01] → ... [01] → [10], error information (abnormality) having a plurality of bit lengths is used. Time can get FFH). Then, by resending the voice command that could not be properly transmitted in parallel, the voice effect can be appropriately advanced. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness in which the sound production is suddenly interrupted.

On the other hand, in the data reading operation by the I / OREAD operation, the I / OWRITE instruction and the I / OREAD instruction are continuously executed while changing the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice / LED control circuit 2200. It will be realized by. When the read data has a length of a plurality of bytes, the I / OREAD instructions are continued for the required number of bytes.

Specifically, first, as an I / OWRITE operation, for the port number PORT in which the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [00], [the register address of the voice control register that stores the operation status, etc. ( 1 byte length)] is output. Next, if the I / OREAD instruction is executed for the port number PORT in which the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [01], necessary data such as operation status can be acquired from a predetermined voice control register. Can be done.

The audio reproduced by the audio / LED control circuit 2200 having the above configuration is digital audio in the form of a 5-bit signal (SCLK, LRO, SD0, SD1, SD2) as a digital audio signal of the audio / LED control circuit 2200. It is transmitted to the power amplifier 2620, amplified in class D by the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and supplied to each speaker as an analog audio signal. Specifically, the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the lower speaker for bass, and the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the player. Four normal speakers (for example, see FIG. 13 (L0, R0, L1, R1)) and two deep bass (vibration) speakers (for example, see FIG. 13 (SUB0, SUB0,)) arranged substantially aligned in the vertical and horizontal positions. It is supplied to SUB1).

[7. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 51. However, in the following description (explanation of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[7-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on processing (step S10), a setting process related to the set value (step S20), and a game return process (step). S30) and are executed in order. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when a power failure occurs or the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to an OFF operation of the power switch 35 or the like, Performs the processing when a power failure occurs, which will be described later.

[7-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets the initial value in the stack pointer as shown in the figure (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), and then performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S13). After that, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 activates the switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S20. For example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like are used. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 activates the switches involved in the setting (step S15), then performs a read process (step S16) for each switch, and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 31), the game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of the game, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. .. The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag that identifies the status at the time of the previous power failure. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, there is a high possibility that the power is cut off before the setting change process is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game is allowed to be executed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure can be identified. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON before the power is cut. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power is cut off. Further, even when a power failure occurs during the abnormal state of steps S722 to S727, which will be described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. In the initial state where the power has not been turned on yet, or when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long period of time, the power failure status identification flag is OFF. The above "during normal game" means during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S1710, the main CPU 101 moves to step S1720 when the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and when the power failure status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710), the game permission flag. Is turned OFF (step S1750), and then the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The check of this work area also includes a check of whether or not the set value data set is within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in the present embodiment).

The work area of the main RAM 103 is a general work area in which data is cleared when the backup clear process described later is performed, and data is held without being cleared in principle even if the backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. For example, performance display data, set setting value data, and the like are stored in this specific work area. It is the data which shows the set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data of "0" to "5" corresponds to each of the set values "1" to "6" in six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if it is normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740, and if it is not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in this embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In step S1740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned ON. Is determined to be. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or an abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and when the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process is terminated. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process proceeds to step S1770.

In this specification, the power failure that occurs during the normal game, the power failure that occurs during the setting confirmation process, and the power failure that occurs during the setting change process are regarded as normal power failures, and steps S722 to S727 described later are defined as normal power failures. The power failure that occurs in is regarded as an abnormal power failure.

In step S1770, whether or not the power of the main CPU 101 is turned on (the operation of turning on the power switch 35 is performed) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. When it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and when the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1780, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). And step S1790, and when the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

In this way, the main CPU 101 turns on the setting key switch signal (NO in step S1740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the previous power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. If YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is ON, the game permission flag is ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag will not be set from OFF to ON.

In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process, which will be described later, needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S1810, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. When the main CPU 101 performs the process of step S1810, the game permission process ends. By displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336 in this way, the hall personnel are not in a state where the game can be executed by checking the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 (the game permission flag is OFF). It is possible to grasp that. In the present embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is set only when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is ON. It is possible to set it to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. In the above, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed. Instead, after the process of step S1810 is performed, the process returns to step S1740 and the game permission flag is turned ON. Is satisfied (in FIG. 32, until it is determined to be YES in step S1780), the processes of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped.

[7-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S20. The difference between FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B is that the processing when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and other processing (step). The processing of S22 to step S28) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the main CPU 101 first determines in step S21 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. The main CPU 101 moves to step S22 when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S24). The setting process ends without executing any of steps S26).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change process (step S24) and turns on the setting key switch signal (YES in step S22). ) And the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28) and changes the setting (step S28). The setting process ends without executing either S24) or the setting confirmation process (step S26). If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are also not executed).

That is, if the previous power failure is a normal power failure that occurred during the normal game or the setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, YES is determined in step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. If the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag process (step S28). The game returns to the game (step S30) without executing any of the above, and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, even if the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure or the previous power failure is a normal power failure, if the power failure occurs during the setting change process, it is determined as NO in step S21. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. And the backup clear flag ON (step S28) is not executed, and the setting process is terminated. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). (That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and controlled to the setting change state), the set value is confirmed. Only in the case, the setting change process (step S24) is executed to move to the game return process of step S30, and after this game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are performed. ) And the backup clear flag process (step S28) are not executed, and the game returns to the game return process (step S30). However, in this game return process (step S30), the abnormal time process (see step S38 of FIG. 37 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33A, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the power is turned on. Regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of pressing the backup clear switch 330 at that time, any of the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag ON (step S28). The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in other examples of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33 (b), when a power failure occurs during the setting change process and / or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure. In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. You may do so. When a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 are pressed. By forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24) regardless of this, when the power is turned on without operating the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a decision.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 33A, if NO is determined in step S21, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. It is finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 33B, if NO is determined in step S21, neither the operation status of the setting key 328 nor the operation status of the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 is determined. The change process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and regardless of the determination result, the setting process is terminated or the setting change process (step S24). May be executed.

[7-1-2-1. Setting change process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 33) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process can be terminated with the same setting value as the set setting value. .. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, when the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes the backup clear process. This backup clearing process will be described later.

After executing the backup clear process in step S2420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S2430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in a register, and moves to step S2440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing from the start to the end of the setting change process.

In step S2440, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323. The setting change security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2450, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays the set value "4" corresponding to the set value data "3". However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set correspond to each other, the number does not necessarily have to be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data "0" to "5" are associated with "A" to "F", respectively, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, "3", the corresponding "D" is used. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In this step 2450, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but it is determined in advance because the previous data is discarded. The initial value (for example, "1") may be displayed. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a performance display monitor such as a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8"). It may be controlled so as to be displayed at 334. When the main CPU 101 displays a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. It may be.

In step S2460, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting change process is in progress by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520 and the set value stored in the register is stored. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), steps S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step). The processes of S2440 to S2470 are repeated).

When the setting switch 332 is pressed (determined to be YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in the subsequent step S2450. ..

Further, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register is set to "0" to "5". (If the setting switch 332 is pressed while the set value data is "5", it returns to "0"). As a result, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased from "5" to "0", or the circulation may be increased and circulated depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. It may be possible to perform both reduction and reduction.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2480. Moving to step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of step S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470.

In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed, the set value is fixed. That is, in the setting change process, the set value is determined based on the execution of the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determined as YES in step S2470), and the setting key switch signal is turned off. If the setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (step S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is only updated. The set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Even if the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470 and then the setting key 328 is returned again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). The set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the setting key 328 is returned again), the main CPU 101 is set to be stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal is turned off.

By the way, the operation status and backup of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on after the power is turned on (when the power is restored) when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure. When the setting change process (see FIG. 34) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the press operation of the clear switch 330 (the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 33 (b)). The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned on (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). In this way, when the setting change process (step S24) is executed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 uses the setting key in step S2470. It is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then turned OFF without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470). Move to S2480 (determine the set value). In this case, the main CPU 101 detects that the setting key switch signal is turned on, and further detects that the setting key switch signal is turned off, so that it can be determined as YES in step S2480. Alternatively, even if it is not detected that the setting key switch signal has been turned ON, it may be determined as YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal has changed from ON to OFF.

In the above, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is stated that the setting change process is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. In addition, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure is restored in the setting change state when the power failure occurs (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, and then the state is maintained. At the time of recovery from power failure, the process of returning to the held state may be executed regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from power failure).

In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. End the process.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470, the command indicates that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, as a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed. The initialization command will be sent to the host control circuit 2100.

When the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) is completed, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 30) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30).

If the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) is executed, the game can be executed in a certain period after the game is started, or the game. Information that suggests that the setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of, information that suggests that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change process, and the setting value has been changed by two or more steps (for example, setting 6 to setting 4) by the setting change process. The information related to the setting change process, such as information suggesting that there is a possibility, may be displayed on, for example, the display device 16. For example, the variation pattern of the effect or decorative pattern performed on the display device 16 or the like can be changed between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or changed to a higher setting value by the setting change process. It is possible to make a difference between when it is set and when it is changed to a low setting value, and when the setting value is changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed by multiple steps or more. Is also good.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting change security signal and the period during which the setting changing code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end process of the setting change process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. Further, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S24 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, and when the process in step S2480 is executed. As a result, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may notify that the setting is being changed, that the set value has been changed, that the setting change has been completed, and the like.

[7-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clearing process in step S2420 (see FIG. 34). This backup clear process is a process of clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear process, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

First, in step S2421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), step S2422 Move to.

In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear process was executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, the work area of the main RAM 103 should be cleared together with the backup clear process executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. In this backup clear process, it may be only partially cleared.

In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. To. Further, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game is permitted unless the game permission flag is turned off and the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 34) is performed. You may not turn on the flag.

In step S2423, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF and ends the backup clear process. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is, for example, a command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 10) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on, for example, the display device 16.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 34), in step S2450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the setting value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Set notification. Similarly to this, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, it is preferable to set the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[7-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 33) is a process for confirming the set setting value. The set value is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 323. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2630, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating the set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays "4" corresponding to the set value data "3" as information indicating the set value.

In step S2640, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person concerned with the hall can grasp that the setting confirmation process is in progress by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2650, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

In step S2650, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2660. When moving to step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends each process of steps S2620 to S2650.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2650) in step S2650, a power failure recovery command is issued to the host control circuit 2100 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed in step S37 described later. Will be sent to.

In step S2660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and sets confirmation processing. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 33) is completed, the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 30) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30).

[7-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 30), a process of returning to a state in which the game can be executed is performed on the premise that the game permission flag is ON. The game return process will be described below.

First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the error processing in step S38. This abnormal processing will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 moves to step S32 and performs a process of activating all the switches.

In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 moves to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON. If the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If a power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power failure occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of power failure recovery.

Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power failure is a high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also includes set value information about the set value. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30), and a series of power-on processes are completed. As a result, the game can be executed. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure recovery has occurred or a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the backup clear process in step S39. Since this backup clear process is the same as the backup clear process (backup clear process shown in FIG. 35) in step S2420 shown in FIG. 34, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear process in step S39 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S40 and performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30), and a series of power-on processes are completed. As a result, the game can be executed. The above initialization command is a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed (the backup clear process has also been executed), or a command indicating that the backup clear process has been executed without the setting change process. Function.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end process of the setting confirmation process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

[7-1-3-1. Processing when abnormal]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of abnormality. As described above, the abnormal processing in step S38 (see FIG. 37) is executed when it is determined in the processing in step S31 (see FIG. 37) that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31). It is a process.

First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the host control circuit 2100 receives an abnormal command, it determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the display device 16 under the control of the host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300). It becomes.

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to transmit an abnormal command. For example, the host control circuit 2100 has a backup failure when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may decide that.

In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal plate 323.

In step S383, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the error code indicating that the game execution is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the game cannot be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. Then, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S385 and executes the power failure occurrence processing. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops in steps S382 to S384 (the processing of steps S382 to S384 is repeated).

[7-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, the process when a power failure occurs is performed.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S3851). Then, the checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly held at the time of power recovery. In this way, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to retain various game data stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure status identification flag in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 identifies the situation at the time of power failure if the power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. Set the flag to ON and set it to OFF if it occurs during the setting change process.

When the main CPU 101 finishes the processes of steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply.

When the game permission flag is OFF in this way, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. It has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process when a power failure occurs is started, it is possible to recover from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but when the processing when a power failure occurs is entered, the update is not performed. As a result, the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure, and even if the infinite loop shown in FIG. 39 is entered, the reset is performed after the elapse of a predetermined period, and the main CPU 101 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

Instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103), a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is an advantage that a constant power supply is not required to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by the constant supply of electric power. In this case, when the power is cut off, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processes can be reduced.

[7-1-4. Flow of power-on process as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process as seen from the operator (for example, a person involved in the hall) will be briefly described.

[7-1-4-1. Flow of setting change process]
First, the setting change process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value, it is first necessary to perform a power off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, while the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled and the setting is changed. The process is started and the settings can be changed.

When the setting change process is started, the error notification monitor 336 displays a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change process, the backup clear process, that is, the initialization process of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notifying the clear of the work area of the main RAM 103, initializing the work area of the main RAM 103, commands at the time of initializing the RWM). When transmission) is executed, a voice indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the display area indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed, but instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24, the display area 16 indicates that the backup clear processing has been executed. It may be displayed in.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically increased and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but when the set value is "6", the information indicates the setting switch 332. When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state ends and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting changing code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

In this way, during the setting change process, only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches are enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. .. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[7-1-4-2. Flow of setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process that is executed on the condition that the game permission flag is internally ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

In order to confirm the set value, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is turned on while the power is not turned on, provided that the game permission flag is turned ON internally. The power switch 35 is turned on without being pressed.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 is enabled among all the switches, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. It becomes.

When the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Appears and all switch operations are enabled.

As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, in the setting confirmation process, the process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[7-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal processing]
As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally turned off, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. And, when the operation for executing the setting confirmation process is performed without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35, the backup process without the setting change process (details will be described later) is performed, or simply. If only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the error processing is executed. The flow of processing at the time of abnormality will be described below.

After turning on the power switch 35, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches are enabled (internal). The processing at the time of abnormality is started). The reason why the operation related to the setting is enabled is that the game permission flag can be turned ON by executing the setting change process.

When the error processing is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating that an error has occurred.

Furthermore, when the abnormal processing is started, the operations related to the setting are also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal processing is started, no response is made regardless of which operation is executed, and the pachinko game is in a state where the game can be executed unless the power switch 35 is turned off and the above-mentioned setting change processing is performed. Machine 1 cannot be restored. Note that the operation of all switches is invalidated in a situation where each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, or each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example,). LED25) includes those in a controllable state.

[7-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer 700, and the like. To.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the values of the saved registers (step S57). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[7-2-1. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes the start opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting port winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S64). In the ball passing detector passing detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game (not shown) is based on the fact that the passing detection of the game ball to the passing gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is detected by the ball passing detector (not shown). Random value) is extracted. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[7-2-1-1. Start opening prize detection process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (step S71). When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S81.

In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S74). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S75. When the number of reserved balls is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the process of step S80.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. (Step S76). As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the jackpot random number determination table for the first special symbol, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type are determined based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S78). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25), and selects the fluctuation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , Perform the process of determining.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 25, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process. The pattern specification command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (step S79). The hold number increase command of the first start opening winning is a command indicating that the hold number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Is sent.

In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold quantity overflow command for the first start opening winning, and proceeds to step S81. The hold quantity overflow command of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the first start opening prize has been made when the hold number of the first special symbol is the upper limit (for example, 4), and the command is sent to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 42, the pending number overflow command for the first start port winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 because the set value data is normally determined in the setting check process in step S72, which will be described later. Is a prerequisite.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S82. When the game ball is not detected by the second start port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the start port winning detection process.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as in step S72.

In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S84). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S85. When the number of reserved balls is 4 (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. (Step S86). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). The second special stop symbol determination process is also the same as the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value and symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol, and the second special symbol. With reference to the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the jackpot selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S88). This variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). Then, as a result of the jackpot determination, a process of selecting a fluctuation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening winning (step S89). The hold number increase command for the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the hold number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

If the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check process in step S72 or the setting check process in step S82 is performed. You may try to do only one of them.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is four (NO in step S84). However, the main CPU 101 starts by discarding various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 without transmitting the hold number overflow command of the second starting port winning to the sub control circuit 200. The mouth prize detection process has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[7-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101, and this setting check process is the same process in step S72 and step S82 (both see FIG. 42). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set setting value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 32) may be performed, but in the present embodiment, the set setting value is set. The emphasis is on checking whether it is normal or not.

As shown in the figure, first, in step S721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the setting value data corresponding to the setting values “1” to “6”. Therefore, here, the setting value data is “ Whether or not it is within the range of "0" to "5" is determined. When the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S721), the setting check process ends. If the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is in the variable display (YES in step S723), the process proceeds to step S724, and when it determines that the special symbol is not in the variable display (NO in step S723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S725.

In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 42) has elapsed with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S726.

For example, if a game ball wins in the starting ports 420 and 440 while the main CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the step is performed during the variation display of the special symbol (before the variation display of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol during the variable display is not displayed even if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Even), the game permission flag is turned off, and abnormal processing is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off and the setting change process is executed, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol in the variable display is cleared in the backup clear process including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, the payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) controls the launch solenoid (not shown) so that power is not supplied. Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired and the game cannot be played.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball in step S726, the main CPU 101 shifts to the abnormality processing in step S727.

In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, even if the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. When the main CPU 101 finishes the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 moves to step S726.

In the abnormality processing in step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same processing as the abnormality processing in step S38 (see FIG. 37). That is, the processes of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 38 are performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence process of step S385, that is, FIG. The processes of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in 39 are performed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 is subjected to the setting check process. If the stored set value data is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the game execution, if the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. The game cannot be performed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S721 that the set value data is not appropriate, even if the variation display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless it is input and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 related to the above hold are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data held are based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 or the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, all of them are It will be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various data related to the above hold from being processed based on the setting values that are not normal, and it is possible to improve the security.

Further, as described above, the setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 is set in step S724. Prohibits the stoppage of the second special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol is the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), in step S725. , The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol is the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed not only when the power is turned on (see step S1730 in FIG. 32) but also when the game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. Not limited, for example, at the time of setting confirmation processing (see step S24 of FIG. 33), at the time of setting change processing (see step S26 of FIG. 33), at the time of executing backup clear processing (see FIG. 35), variable display of special symbols starts. When the movement of the special symbol is stopped, the passage is detected by the passing gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, and the setting check process is performed at a predetermined timing. You may do it. The above-mentioned predetermined timing is an example list. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or a part of the above timings). Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed, for example, in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, it is not possible to immediately turn off the game permission flag and proceed with the game regardless of whether or not the game is in the jackpot game state. It is possible, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process and the timing at which the game cannot be executed may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable that various determination processes (for example, big hit determination process) are performed when the set value data is not normal, the change display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time without performing various determination processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol by losing it.

Although not shown in FIG. 43, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the normal symbol is also prohibited from stopping if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. .. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[7-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a main control main process by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S91), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 receives the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S93 and S94. A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[7-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) shown in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 45, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes of steps S102 to S110 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S102 to S110 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process in steps S102 to S110. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S102). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of pending items is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained in the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variation display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S103). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag is set to the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S103 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is determined when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S103 elapses. Determine if the result is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S105) described later, and sets the jackpot start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end processing described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and is large when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, this process is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large prize opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in step S107 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S107 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S108). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S106) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S109). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”), and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S109. When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-8, and Special Figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 controls to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. , When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, and the special figure 2-1 the control to set the gaming state to the low probability gaming state (probability change flag OFF) is performed. Do.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "miss" (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. To do. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S110, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S102) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "miss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", "02", and "08". Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and special symbol game end process (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", "03". To do. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and jackpot start interval management process (step S105). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening (step S107), and the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S106), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S107), big hit end interval processing (step S109), and special symbol game end processing (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 51 described later) in step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 44 also branches the processing flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[7-3-1-1. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads out the control state flag from the predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by the load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is "0" (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and the number of reserved second start opening prizes is not "0". If it is determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0" (NO in step S114), it proceeds to the process of step S115 and determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0". If it is determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved first start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol is held. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. Is included.

Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is set to the jackpot determination random value that is extracted at the time of winning the start opening and is set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot judgment table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (big hit determination) whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss" based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets in the waiting time timer the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (both see FIG. 42). .. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved second start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol is held. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the second start port 440. Is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117, executes the processes of step S118 and step S119, and then ends the special symbol memory check process.

[7-3-2. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S140.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction number counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 22, FIG. 26 or FIG. 27), and the upper limit of the number of rounds corresponding to the special symbol (type of the symbol designation command) (upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time saving number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[7-3-2-1. Time saving number subtraction process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction becomes 0. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of times set as the time reduction counter is 100 times or 10000 times.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as the time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[7-3-3. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step S168). If it is a probability variation jackpot (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S169. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, referring to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 22, FIG. 26 or FIG. 27), the jackpot with 100 time reductions (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 2-1) When it is (for example), 100 times are set in the time reduction counter, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2). Etc.), set 10000 times in the time reduction counter. However, the time reduction counter is not limited to 10,000 times when the time reduction is continued until the next big hit game state is executed, and even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall. Any number of times that cannot occur realistically will do. In this way, by setting the number of times that cannot actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall in the time reduction counter, the time reduction is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. Will be done. Furthermore, when the jackpot is 100 times of time reduction, counter processing is performed (100 times is set in the time reduction counter), and when the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game state is executed, flag processing is performed. (As long as the time saving flag is ON, the time saving game state is continued).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF.

In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[7-3-3-1. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S182. When the power is not turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). The table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is OFF (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).

[7-4. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 51 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any of the processes of steps S162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of reserved symbols in the variable display, and the number of pending symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the determined variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol control state flag will be added to the normal symbol control state flag, which will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 is a big hit when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 elapses. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the normal electric accessory release process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag (step S195). "03") is set. That is, this process is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the big hit determination is determined to be "big hit" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes during the opening of the normal electric accessory 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of pending fluctuation display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. Update memory to. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol memory check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[8. Sub-control main processing]
On the other hand, the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) including the sub CPU processor executes the sub control main process. This sub-control main process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control main, and this process is started when the power is turned on. It should be noted that each of FIGS. 61, 72, 73, 74 and 98, which will be described later, is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control main process executed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on. However, FIG. 52 is one of the typical examples.
It is a process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the host control circuit 2100 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201). ).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). When the watchdog timer is started, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power interruption process is executed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the operation means input process (step S203).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process for determining the effect mode displayed on the display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the above effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set setting value. This setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. For example, the host control circuit 2100 counts the overflow points of the first start winning opening, and when the hold number overflow command of the first starting opening winning is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the first starting winning opening overflow point is reached. Add 1 Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 decides to execute the setting suggestion effect in the above-mentioned effect mode determination process. In a non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is OFF, such as in a normal game state, it is not easy to win a game ball in the first start winning port 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's disappointment cannot be measured. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player without directly causing a loss to the hole by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state. It will be possible. In addition, some players suspend the launch of the game ball when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this respect, it is possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the above setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the overflow point of the first start winning opening reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggestion effect is not necessarily limited to this, and the first start winning opening winning is performed. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the hold quantity overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to guess only once. For example, it is difficult to guess the setting only from the information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to estimate the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

Further, as described above, the hold number overflow command for the first start port winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 on the premise that the set value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process in step S72. is there. Therefore, when it is not determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. , The host control circuit 2100 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the overflow point of the first starting winning opening reaches a predetermined point when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (for example, a predetermined point). When the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit at 49 points with respect to 50 points), the setting check process of step S72 (FIG. 42). If it is determined that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the host control circuit 2100, and it is impossible to proceed with the game. It becomes.

Further, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 42), on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is the same as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make a suggestion effect.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the host control circuit 2100 selects a specific winning opening among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). For example, it is randomly determined by lottery. Then, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 during the execution of the reach effect, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, among the players, there is a player who interrupts the launch of the game ball when the reach effect having a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. Further, in the reach production, it may be immediately found that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, the player may not start the variable display next time until the reach effect is completed, and the interest may be reduced. In this respect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. Moreover, if the game machine management manager can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko machine in which he / she plays the game is low. According to the example of, such a fear can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the specific winning opening is randomly selected from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5), for example, by lottery. It is preferable to keep it secret without disclosing which is a specific winning opening. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning openings are the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Among them, for example, it is decided at random by lottery, but it is not always limited to randomly determining a specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as a specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting suggestion effect, but the main CPU 101 may determine it. ..

If the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning slot during the execution of the reach effect, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (both refer to FIG. 42) is performed if the specific winning slot is the starting slot. Be told. Then, the setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined to be normal in the above setting check process (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the above setting check process (NO in step S721), it not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect, but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner by the process of step S734. To do. Further, the host control circuit 2100 also continues the variable effect of the decorative symbol even during the variable effect of the decorative symbol accompanied by the reach effect. However, the host control circuit 2100 may stop the output of the sound effect by the voice / LED control circuit 2200, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 executes the drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 2300 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 executes the voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 executes a control process regarding the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the accessory control process (step S210). In this accessory control process, the operating accessory and the operating member constituting the accessory among the accessories constituting the accessory group 1000 are operated based on the effect designation information via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. This is a process for controlling the drive of the effect drive motor, and the details will be described later. In such a sub-control main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[8-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process by the host control circuit 2100. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the subwork RAM 2100a after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data is correct or missing.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the host control circuit 2100 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of production (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) is selected as the production pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as the effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 42) during the execution of the game, and the set value data is "0" to "5" in this setting check process. (NO in step S721 in FIG. 43), the process of steps S722 to S726 is executed, and then the error processing of step S727 is executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value data is "0" even though the setting check process is not executed in step S72 or step S82, or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the value is within the range of "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S721), the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. .. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball is won in the first start port 420 and the second start port 440, and the variation display of the special symbol is suspended. A command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the host control circuit 2100 that has received this command determines the suitability of the set value information (hereinafter, referred to as "this time set value") indicated by the command received this time. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "previous set value") indicated by the command received last time and the set value this time match.

Then, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and if the previous set value and the current set value do not match, the set value is abnormal. Is determined to be.

Further, when the received set value information is abnormal, the host control circuit 2100 executes the set value abnormality processing. In this abnormal execution process, for example, an image for notifying that the set value is abnormal is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and instead or in addition to this, the display area for notifying that the set value is abnormal is notified. It is a process to output the sound to be performed.

The suitability judgment of the above-mentioned set value information is not limited to the judgment of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, all of the set value information received three times or more match. It may be determined whether or not there is, or the setting value information of a part of the setting value information received multiple times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received two times before and the setting value this time) matches. It may be determined whether or not there is. However, when the host control circuit 2100 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 33) has been executed, the set value is set to the subwork RAM 2100a this time. It is only stored in, and it is not determined whether or not the past set value including the previous set value and the current set value match.

Further, it is preferable that the above-mentioned setting determination process (adequacy determination of the set value information) is executed not only during the execution of the game but also when the power is turned on after the power is cut off as long as the setting change process is not executed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

The setting determination process executed by the host control circuit 2100 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[8-2. Command transmission process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the host control circuit 2100. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the subwork RAM 2100a. Do. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes the directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting a direct table corresponding to the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information in a predetermined area of the subwork RAM 2100a. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

[8-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the host control circuit 2100. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting the presence / absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the directory buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, the presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message setting process.

[8-2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a directory table registration process by the host control circuit 2100. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as the slave table (step S274). When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the directory table registration process.

[8-2-3. Message sending process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the host control circuit 2100. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direction buffer corresponding to the direction table, the host control circuit 2100 will perform each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. A process of transmitting a message to is performed (step S281).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary directory table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message transmission process.

[9. Expandability of the game machine according to this embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction) are shortened according to the set value. The inrush rate) was changed, but it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of these may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "normal hit"), the normal electric accessory 46 is predetermined. It changes from the closed state to the open state only for the period of. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the open state to the closed state (that is, the launch timing of the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the launch timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of notifying the launch timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. Since this backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S24) is executed, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always performed. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process is set. You may make them different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, the game is set to a high-probability game state until a predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times), and the game state is low after the execution of the predetermined number of games is completed. In a pachinko game machine (so-called "ST machine") that shifts to the probability game state, when the game is controlled to the high probability game state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change process is performed. When the backup clear process is performed without the above, the probability change flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probability change flag is set to ON (the rest of the high probability game state). You may try to keep a memory of the number of games). Furthermore, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the ON setting of the probability change flag is continued, and when the setting value is different from the previous time. May set the probability change flag to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the big winning opening 540 is in an open state when the count of the game balls winning in the big winning opening 540 reaches 10. When either of the conditions when the time reaches 30 sec is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the big winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for changing the large winning opening 540 from the open state to the closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of different expected values of the number of game balls that can be won by the large winning opening 540 during one round). (Prepare conditions), and by changing the conditions according to the set value, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select the condition with the higher expected value. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the large winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the higher the setting value is, the longer the opening time of the large winning opening 540 is likely to be. Be done. In addition, by changing the count of the game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is closed from the open state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to make it.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in the normal hit mode, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, but is normally electric. By making the time (opening time) in which the accessory 46 is in the open state different according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is a jackpot with the probability change flag ON as shown in Special Figure 1-2 and Special Figure 1-4, the next jackpot game is executed after the jackpot game state ends. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played, but it is not always limited to this, and when the game ball is won at a specific timing (for example, the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. At that time, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), a transition lottery for whether or not to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, the transition probability from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state differs according to the set value, so that the higher the setting value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability gaming state (from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state). (Lower the probability of transition to). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed when a game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. This setting check is performed. When it is determined that the process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also turned off). Set).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction inrush rate) are changed according to the set value. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above has been described, the provision of setting differences is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and some configurations may be changed. An example of another extension whose configuration has been partially changed will be described below. The configurations not particularly mentioned in the description of the other extended examples below are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment, but in the following, except for the step numbers, each member such as the main CPU is intentionally designated with a reference numeral. Not done.

[9-1. Expansion example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, after the jackpot gaming state ends, a high-probability game is performed until the next jackpot gaming state is started. A so-called "probability variation loop machine" in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the jackpot gaming state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number") can be changed according to the set value (such a gaming machine is a "limiter"). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Note that FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the expansion example 1 has a loop count checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a limiter count for drawing a limiter count when the loop count is 0. The lottery means, the loop number counting means that increments the number of loops when the number of loops is within the specified range (within the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the number of loops is the specified value (the limiter upper limit of 5 in this example). If this is the case, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the jackpot game state ends to a low probability state, and the loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value are provided. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, at the start of the jackpot game state, during the jackpot game state, or at the end of the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 58, in setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and three times with a probability of 25%. There is a 15% chance that it will be decided 4 times, and a 5% chance that it will be decided 5 times. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 25% probability, twice with a 25% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 20% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 15%, determined twice with a probability of 25%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 20%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 15% probability. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 15% probability, twice with a 20% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 25% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a 15% probability. In setting 5, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 20%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 25%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 10%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 30%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expectation that the number of limiters will be determined.

In this way, by making the expectation for the number of limiters different according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state can be repeated, one chance (big hit). It is possible to make the amount of prize balls given to the player different according to the set value (an opportunity until the player is controlled to the low-probability gaming state when he wins once). Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters differs depending on the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the set value from being guessed by the player depending on the number of limiters. It has become.

In the above expansion example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value, but the lottery is not always essential. For example, although there is a concern that the set value may be guessed by the player, the setting value is set. The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for 1 and 2, 4 times for settings 3 and 4, and 5 times for settings 5 and 6.

The number of limiters described above may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, when the number of limiters described above is set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the number of first limiters for the first special symbol Is determined, and when the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is controlled during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is controlled during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is not incremented, and the number of second limiters for the second special symbol is not incremented. To determine. In this case, the loop may be terminated (controlled to a low-probability gaming state) when either the first limiter count or the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, or the first limiter count and the second limiter count may be terminated. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of times of the above limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When is a big hit, the number of limiters is determined, and during the loop, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the loop Increment the number of times. Then, when the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 1 is a so-called probabilistic loop machine, but it does not necessarily have to be a probabilistic loop machine. For example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine". You can also do it. The "ST machine" controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number of times"). It is a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the variable display of the special symbol (referred to as) is performed, and when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the low-probability gaming state is controlled. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be changed according to the set value. That is, the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that one chance (an opportunity to be controlled to the low-probability gaming state when one jackpot is won). ), The amount of prize balls given to the player can be changed according to the set value.

In the so-called "ST machine", the "ST number" can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the ST number can be changed according to the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the "ST machine" can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by the lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and setting 6 By setting the number to 75, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of STs. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of STs is different depending on the set value, it is preferable that the number of time reductions is common to all the set values. For example, when the expected value of the number of STs or the number of STs is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. , It is conceivable to set the number of time reductions to, for example, 60 times, which is common to all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect of grasping that the game is in a high-probability gaming state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games) on, for example, the display device 16, and when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games, Regardless of whether or not the game is in the high-probability gaming state, it is preferable to perform an effect that makes it difficult to grasp the high-probability gaming state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. As a result, it is possible to make the ST number of times and the expected value of the ST number of times different according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even during the loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The number of loops does not reach the number of limiters, and the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[9-2. Expansion example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 2 has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 2, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. Based on the small hit game execution means for executing the small hit game and the game ball winning a prize in the specific area which became the open mode by executing the small hit game, the payout / launch control circuit is used. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

Further, in the extended example 2, the number of time reductions is set to, for example, 5 times, and a specific port is provided in the specific area. Then, for example, in a time-saving game state of 5 times, a normal hit occurs and the game ball wins a prize at the starting port. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific mouth, the main CPU executes the jackpot game. Further, when the normal hit is not achieved in the time-saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time-saving game state and controls the non-time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed firing toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time-saving game state, the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area. The game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 2, at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game is made different according to the set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly performed, for example, a time-saving game state. In the above, it is possible to make the opening frequency of the specific area and thus the payout different according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and setting 6. To make it a quarter. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting port. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of winning the game ball in the specific area, and by extension, it is possible to set a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability change flag may be set to ON in the time-saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability change flag to ON.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. When the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the above small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol displayed in the variable display is a small hit.

[9-3. Expansion example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 2-2 includes a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU makes a big hit determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and wins the game ball to the second starting port. Based on this, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed.

Further, the main CPU is in the first gaming state (for example, the probability change flag) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. A normal game state in which both the time saving flag and the time saving flag are set to OFF) and a second game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is ON). A game state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states including (an advantageous game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF) is provided. In this pachinko gaming machine, if a jackpot is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the second gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, a normal gate is provided in the right side area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is held. When the result of this ordinary lottery is a specific result (for example, ordinary hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), which facilitates winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Will be done. Therefore, when the game is played by firing the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, the second starting port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area and the game is played. The frequency of winning game balls is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of this jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is used for a plurality of rounds. A first jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a number is provided.

Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is opened. A second jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, and when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit. It also has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU has the first big hit game execution means for executing the big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds, and the result of the second special lottery. It has a second big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when the big hit is made. Even if the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit are common big prize openings It may be good, or it may be a different big prize opening.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, and 1/7 for setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. , Setting 4 is 1/6, and setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set set value, but any set value is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same large winning opening as the large winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins a prize in this large winning opening, the payout / launch control circuit operates a payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be won in the big prize opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, the main CPU makes a small hit determination in which the small hit probability is 0 when the result of the large hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit that involves the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit that involves the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU is based on the first special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. The second special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the second special symbol is provided. The first special symbol variation display control means changes and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time, and then stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the game ball wins the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. However, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If the game ball wins the first starting port while the second special symbol is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Further, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the fluctuation display control means is remarkably different between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. The special lottery (1st special lottery, 2nd special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when the game ball wins the second starting port in the first game state, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable amount of time for the result of the second special lottery to be displayed. It becomes.

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area and the game ball wins the second starting port, the second special symbol is displayed. It takes time until the variable display of is stopped. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit). Even if the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is confirmed as a small hit. Therefore, it is also difficult to perform so-called aiming, such as having a game ball win a prize at the large winning opening aiming at the timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when the game ball is launched toward, for example, the right side area of the game area, a warning sound is output from the speaker, for example, under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, the game is performed by firing the game ball toward, for example, the left side area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated through the normal lottery by passing the game ball through the normal figure gate, but also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. In addition to being as short as 1 sec, in the second special lottery, a small hit is won with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value, so a game in which a game ball is launched toward, for example, the right side area of the game area is Will be done.

The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state (for example, 1000 sec) is, for example, 50 times or more the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state (for example, 10 sec). Is preferable, but it is preferably at least 10 times or more.

The sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means for controlling the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). To be equipped. However, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins the second starting port, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation of the decorative symbol in a conspicuous manner in synchronization with the second special symbol. 1 When the game ball wins a prize at the starting port, the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the example of the above "conspicuous aspect", the liquid crystal display device has, for example, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) at substantially the center of the display area. Can be displayed in a variable manner to display the result of the special lottery. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ○ or Δ) that can be changed (for example, blinks) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first to third symbols occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is closer to the first to third symbols than the fourth symbol. It will be suitable. Then, for example, in the first game state, when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port, the sub CPU does not change the first to third symbols and displays only the fourth symbol in a variable manner, while the sub CPU displays the fourth symbol in a variable manner. 1 When a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, the 1st to 3rd symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the 4th symbol is also displayed in a variable manner. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins at the second start port, the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not conspicuously displayed, and the game ball is at the first start port. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner when the prize is won.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 2-2, in the first gaming state, even if the gaming ball wins the second starting port, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second game state, when the game ball wins the second starting port, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. Since it is higher than the probability of becoming (1 / 30th to 1 / 25th depending on the setting), the big winning opening is frequently opened by the small hit game, and the time saving flag is not set (that is, the normal lottery). It is possible to increase the chances that the game ball as a prize will be paid out (without increasing the execution frequency of). Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit differs depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the ball is ejected according to the set set value. Can be made different.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. Therefore, the main CPU performs the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 even when the game ball wins the first start port during the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, in the second game state. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormal time process. That is, in the second game state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU performs the above small hit. The game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time processing is executed without executing the small hit game based on the hit. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner in the second game state is a small hit, the information indicating that the second game state is included and the information indicating that the second special symbol is a small hit are included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[9-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area provided with a specific opening. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 3, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece and operates the inside of the specific area. It is provided with a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area due to the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way and the game ball that has entered the inside of the specific area is detected to enter (accept) the specific port, the main The CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a jackpot, the main CPU performs a first jackpot game in which a round game for opening the jackpot is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state and the game ball entering the specific mouth when the small hit game is executed, the round game for operating the predetermined movable piece is performed over a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state to be performed.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this expansion example 3, the ease of winning a game ball at the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of a small hit game and the opening pattern of an ordinary electric accessory) is set as a set value. It is different according to. In addition, also in this extended example 3, the result of the normal symbol determination performed based on the fact that the main CPU detects the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits the right is a normal hit. Occasionally, the normally electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it becomes easy to win a game ball at the starting port. As a method of making the execution frequency of the small hit game different according to the set value, for example, if the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination is different according to the set value, or if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value. It can be realized by making it.

As a method of making the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port different according to the set value, a method of making the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination different according to the set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and setting 6. Is 1/10. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting port. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the small hit game, and by extension, the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

Also in this extended example 3, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the in-CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is performed. Will be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol displayed in the variable display is a small hit.

[9-5. Expansion example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is not immediately controlled to the jackpot game state by itself, but the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. The condition device is operated based on the above, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device has been operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuously operating right gate, and FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuously operating left gate.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4 includes a bonus continuous operation left gate 1100 and a bonus continuous operation right gate 1110 in the game area. Further, the distribution device 1120 capable of distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 is the accessory continuous operation gate 1100, It is located above 1110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 are provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (neither shown) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball, respectively. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled from the passage detection of the game ball, and are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, the game ball moves one of the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection that it has passed.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls, for example, the 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU is in a 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which a two-round round game is executed, and 16 rounds. The 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the jackpot game state determined in the lottery is controlled.

It should be noted that the big hit is when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the game state is the same.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball that has reached the upper part of the distribution device 1120 to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the right gate 1110 (see FIG. 59), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game ball is useful. Object continuous operation It is easy to pass through the left gate 1100 (see FIG. 60).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing the game ball differs between the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, in setting 1, the operation of the sorting device 1120 is repeated with the first posture of 0.5 seconds and the second posture of 1.5 seconds, and in setting 2, the first posture is 0.7 seconds and the second posture is 1.3. The operation of repeating seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture of 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot game state according to the set value.

In the extended example 4, the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating left gate 1100, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the jackpot game state is the same as when it is played. That is, although it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot game state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left gate sensor Is paid out in the jackpot game state when the player detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, either the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). Is determined by a lottery performed with the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 1110, which is the continuous operation of the accessory, the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). It is also possible to decide which of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the amount of game balls to be paid out as the prize ball is controlled to the higher expected value of the big hit game state. It is possible to increase the possibility of

Further, in the extended example 4, when the game ball passes through any one of the two gates (the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation is performed. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is activated based on the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball can be used in either of the above two gates. A game ball may win a prize at the starting port before passing. In this case, under the condition that the condition device is activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process (for example, based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port). (See step S72 in FIG. 42) may be executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 43). In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

Further, in the extended example 4, two gates (continuous operation of the accessory) in which the continuous operation device of the accessory is activated when the passage of the game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating below the distribution device 1120. The left gate 1100 and the right gate 1110) are provided, but the one provided below the distribution device 1120 is not necessarily limited to the continuous operation gate of the accessory, for example, a starting port and a general winning opening. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120 uses a regular operation to move the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120 into a start port that triggers a jackpot determination of a special symbol and a general prize that does not trigger a jackpot determination. Distribute to one of the mouths. Then, the operation of the sorting device 1120 is repeated, for example, in setting 1, 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture, and in setting 2, 0.7 seconds in the first posture and 1 in the second posture. The operation of repeating 3 seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. In setting 5, the first posture is 1.3 seconds and the second posture is 0.7 seconds, and in setting 6, the first posture is 1.5 seconds and the second posture is 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value, the player can launch the game ball at any set value. It is possible to have the fun of being able to aim for a prize at the starting port.

[9-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not make the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but makes it possible to change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. .. In this extended example 5, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of the five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five stages, and may be a plurality of stages. Can be determined arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a probability special symbol of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 5 rounds. Control the jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to setting 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, but the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is relatively small, so-called Amadeji. It becomes possible to execute a game in a game-like manner.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to the high-probability gaming state, and when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state ends and becomes the low-probability gaming state. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this game machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The game state after the state ends is controlled to a high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probabilistic loop machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this game machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The game state after the state ends is controlled to a high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot game state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the jackpot game state. Control the gaming state to a low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called limiter machine. In the above game characteristics, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, the present invention may be a so-called ST machine in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is terminated after a predetermined period elapses and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this game machine, the main CPU always or with a certain probability sets the probability change flag ON when the big hit game state ends, and when the probability change flag is set ON, the game state after the big hit game state ends. , Control to high probability gaming state. Further, in the high probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when determining a big hit of a special symbol, and when it is determined to shift the game state in the game state transition lottery, the probability change flag is set to OFF. , Execute control to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it is possible to execute the game in a game-like manner in which the lottery for shifting to the low-probability gaming state is performed in the high-probability gaming state.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine can be changed according to the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, and the pachinko machine has a wide variety of game characteristics. It is possible to run the game with one machine.

In the above, in setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called Amadeji game, in setting 2 it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine, and in setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine. It is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a probabilistic loop machine, and in setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a so-called limiter machine, and in setting 5, it is low in a high-probability game state. It is possible to execute a game in which a lottery for transition to a stochastic game state is performed, but it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game characteristics according to a set value. However, it is preferable that the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine can be switched and executed according to the set value. Both the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine are common in that they may be controlled to a high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the high-probability gaming state is It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends halfway. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that are similar at first glance but are substantially different, the manager of the game machine can use the pachinko game machine more widely. At the same time, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can improve the interest.

[9-7. Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and benefits are given based on the result of the game. That is, not only is the game played by the game medium being launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit 100 itself is The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

When the game media management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages the game media management device, the game media management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). Operation) or when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout action of the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player is performed, and the necessary game medium is acquired. It is sufficient that the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays, for example, the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the game medium management device described above, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the player not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above with respect to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the game medium management device. Here, obtaining a holding ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game media management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. Further, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball held (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball held. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the game machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

[10. Processing executed by the host control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the various control circuits in the sub-board 2020 of the sub-control circuit 200 (see, for example, FIG. 10) will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 (see, for example, FIG. 10), and performs various processes based on the various commands.

In the following, first, the processes related to various devices and the like will be described, and then the processes related to the hall menu task will be described. Both the processing related to the hall menu task and the processing related to various devices and the like are processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100) and the like. Each will be described using a separate flowchart.

[10-1. Processing related to various devices, etc.]
The processes related to various devices and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 99. In addition, FIG. 61, FIG. 72, FIG. 73, FIG. 74, and FIG. 98, including FIG. 52 described above, are examples of sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows. All of these are processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100), but for convenience of explanation, the processes are appropriately omitted depending on various situations. For example, in FIGS. 52 and 61, the accessory control process (step S210, step S1213) is shown, but in FIGS. 72, 73, 74 and 98, the accessory control process is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 61, 72, 73, 74 and 98, even if the processing is the same, different reference numerals are given for convenience of explanation. For example, when the initialization process is described as an example, the various initialization processes (step S1201) of FIG. 61, the initialization process of FIG. 72 (step S1381), the initialization process of FIG. 73 (step S1391), and the initial stage of FIG. 74 The conversion process (step S401) is substantially the same initialization process. Taking the accessory control process as an example, the accessory control process of FIG. 52 (step S210) and the accessory control process of FIG. 61 (step S210) Step S1213) is substantially the same process.

As shown in FIG. 61, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initialization processes (step S1201). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initial setting processes such as hardware initialization process, device initialization process, various application initialization process, backup data recovery initialization process, and RTC acquisition process. Do. When the game data is erased by clearing the RAM, the random number initialization process is also performed. Further, the host control circuit 2100 clears the watchdog timer counter each time each initialization process is completed. At startup, the reset time of the watchdog timer is set, and if the service pulse is not written after that (at the time of timeout), the power interruption process is performed. The timing for clearing the watchdog timer is at the start of each process in the main loop in the sub-control main process, at the start of each initialization process, and at the time of transition to the power interruption process.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 enters the main loop and performs an RTC acquisition process based on the RTC time, that is, a process of acquiring the current time (step S1202).

The host control circuit 2100 performs a random number initialization process in step S1203. This random number initialization process will be described later.

The host control circuit 2100 acquires the accessory control code in step S1204 and performs synchronous processing between the accessory and the solenoid (step S1205). These processes will be described in the "accessory solenoid control process" described later.

The host control circuit 2100 performs the sub-device input process in step S1206. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs information acquisition processing of the operation content based on the input state of the operation means and the like (determination process of whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation means such as a button). And so on. This sub-device input process (step S1206) includes adjusting the brightness of the LED or the like by the operation of the player or the like.

The host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes in step S1207. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes such as sound request control process, LED request control process, accessory request control process, and accessory control process. The sound request, LED request, accessory request, and the like are stored in a buffer and output to each device after the bank flip in step S1214, which will be described later. As a result, synchronization with drawing can be achieved. The bank flip is a process of switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function.

By the way, the accessory control process is performed in various request control processes (S1207), and is also shown in FIG. 61 to be performed in step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212). It is not essential that this be done in step S1213 after step S1212). Considering that the character request stored in the buffer is output in the animation construction process (step S1210) one frame before and the animation update process (step S1211) in the character processing, the animation construction processing (step S1210) Is preferably done before. However, when the accessory request stored in the buffer is output in the same frame as the frame stored in the buffer, the accessory control process is performed in step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212). Is also good.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 enters the packet reception loop in the main loop and performs command control processing between main and sub (step S1208). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a command data reading process (command receiving process) when command data is received from the main CPU 101 and a command data storage process (received data storage process) in the subwork RAM 2100a.

The host control circuit 2100 performs a game data backup process in step S1209. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first data (magic code, program version and SUM value) and the second data (both are information set in the hall menu) are the game data used for the RAM clear determination. And SUM value) are prepared. Then, in the game data backup process, after the first data is stored in the game data, it is backed up to SRAM 2100b (see FIG. 10). In addition, the game data is backed up (mirrored) in another area of the SRAM 2100b. After the power is turned on, the game data is restored from the data backed up in the SRAM 2100b. At this time, the first data is used to check whether the backed up data is damaged. If the backed up data is corrupted, check if the second data is corrupted. At this time, the data stored in all the SRAM 2100b such as the hall menu information is also initialized.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1210). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs command analysis, state setting, and lottery processing, and in response to these, generates an animation request necessary for performing effect control using the display device 16, and this animation request. In response to the effect control (display) in the display device 16 executed based on the above, various requests (drawing request, sound request, LED request, and accessory request) for operating the various effect devices are generated.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of steps S1208 to S1210 until it is executed for the number of received commands, and exits the packet reception loop when it is executed for the number of received commands. After that, the host control circuit 2100 goes through an animation update process (step S1211), a drawing control process (step S1212), an accessory control process (step S1213), and a bank flip / bank flip end wait (step S1214) in the main loop. Each process is repeated.

The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly executes the processing (main loop processing) of the above-mentioned example of steps S1202 to S1214 in a predetermined FPS cycle. The FPS cycle is set to, for example, about 16.7 msec (60 FPS), about 33.3 msec (30 FPS), and the like. The predetermined FPS cycle is time adjusted in step S1214.

Below, timer interrupt processing, sub-device input processing, backlight control processing, backlight and various LED brightness adjustment, RTC acquisition processing, composition playback control, sound amplifier control processing, sound request control processing (for the same channel) (When there are a plurality of sound requests), sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), LED brightness adjustment processing, accessory solenoid control processing, data load processing, and sub-random number processing will be described in this order. The description order of each of the above processes is different from the process order for convenience of explanation.

[10-2. Timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs interrupt processing at a cycle of 1 msec. The interrupt processing will be described in each process described later, but here, an example of a typical interrupt process will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit). In the timer interrupt process described briefly with reference to FIG. 62 and the timer interrupt process described later (see FIGS. 69 and 71), even if they are the same process, different reference numerals are given for convenience of explanation. For example, when the accessory motor control is described as an example, the accessory motor control of FIG. 62 (step S1251), the accessory motor control of FIG. 69 (step S1352), and the accessory motor control of FIG. 71 (step S1371). Is substantially the same process but has a different reference numeral.

With reference to FIG. 62, in the timer interrupt process, the host control circuit 2100 first controls the accessory motor (step S1251). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs an input state determination process based on the input information of the subdevice (step S1252). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs control processing such as the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 based on the brightness value (step S1253). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sound amplifier check process (step S1254).

[10-3. Sub-device input processing]
In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 creates subdevice input discrimination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the subdevice detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec, and this is created. The sub-device is controlled based on the sub-device input discrimination information.

When the host control circuit 2100 detects the input state of the subdevice by a timer interrupt every 1 msec, the subdevice input information and the subdevice are used as the above subdevice input determination information created in the main process based on the detection result. Input ON edge information, sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function), and sub device input OFF edge information are created.

The sub-device input process shown in FIG. 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. The sub-device is controlled by the host control circuit 2100 based on input (eg operation) information, such as a push button. Note that FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example for explaining the created subdevice input determination information, (a) a diagram showing the input state of the subdevice detected by the timer interrupt, and (b) created by the main process. A diagram showing the sub-device input information to be generated, (c) a diagram showing the sub-device input ON edge information created by the main process, and (c) a sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) created by the main process. The figure which shows, (d) is the figure which shows the sub device OFF edge information created by the main process. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-device input process. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. FIG. 66 shows an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the sub-device input information created in the main process is created according to the sub-device input state (see FIG. 63 (a)) detected by the timer interrupt. That is, when the subdevice input state detected by the timer interrupt is ON, 1 is set. Further, when the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt is OFF, 0 is set.

As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the sub-device input ON edge information is only one frame in the main process when it is detected that the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt has changed from OFF to ON. Is set.

The sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) is information used for control, for example, when debugging or when the operation button is pressed and held for a long time, and is detected by a timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 63 (d). When it is detected that the input state of the sub-device is changed from OFF to ON, 1 is set for one frame in the main process. If the input state of the sub-device continues to be ON after that, 1 is set in one frame after 10 frames have elapsed in the main process, for example, as a fixed time until the start of key repeat, and after that, in the main process, for example. 1 is set every 4 frames. In this way, the reason why only the first frame is lengthened to 10 frames is to make it possible to determine whether or not the subdevice has been long-pressed, and if the first frame is short, it is determined that it is not long-pressed. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 63 (e), the sub-device input OFF edge information is only one frame in the main process when it is detected that the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt has changed from ON to OFF. Is set.

In the present embodiment, assuming that there are a plurality of sub-devices, the host control circuit 2100 manages the sub-device input determination information in bit units. For example, bit0 is the main button, bit1 is the left button, bit2 is the right button, and so on. Sub-device input discrimination information for up to 32 devices can be managed, for example.

Next, the sub-device input process (see, for example, step S1206 in FIG. 61) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. In this sub-device input process, the sub-device input discrimination information includes sub-device input information, sub-device input ON edge information, sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function), and sub-device input OFF edge information, for example, 4. This is the process of creating type information.

First, the host control circuit 2100 creates input information of the current subdevice based on the input state of the current subdevice (step S1301). Specifically, 1 is set when the sub device is in the ON state, and 0 is set when the sub device is in the OFF state.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 updates the input information of the subdevice in accordance with the current subdevice input information, that is, the input information of the subdevice created in step S1301 (step S1302).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is 1 (step S1303). If the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is 1 (YES in step S1303), the host control circuit 2100 sets the subdevice input ON edge information to 1 (step S1304), and steps. Move to S1306. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is not 1 (that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and / and the current subdevice input information is 0), the host The control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information to 0 (step S1305), and proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0. If the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0 (YES in step S1306), the host control circuit 2100 sets the subdevice input OFF edge information to 1 (step S1307), and steps. Move to S1309. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is not 0 (that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and / and the current subdevice input information is 1), the host The control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input OFF edge information to 0 (step S1308), and proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, the host control circuit 2100 performs subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. Details of this sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described later.

When the subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in step S1309 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 sets the input information of the current subdevice to the previous subdevice input information (step S1310), and inputs the subdevice. End the process.

Next, the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the previous sub-device input information is 0 (step S1321). .. If the previous sub-device input information is 0 (YES in step S1321), the process proceeds to step S1322.

In step S1322, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the sub-device input information this time is 1. If the current sub-device input information is 1 (YES in step S1322), that is, if the previous sub-device input information is 0 and the current sub-device input information is 1, the process proceeds to step S1323. On the other hand, if the current sub-device input information is not 1 (NO in step S1322), that is, if the previous sub-device input information is 0 and the current sub-device input information is 0, the sub-device input is ON. Ends edge information (with repeat function) processing.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) to 1 (step S1323), sets 10 frames as elapsed frames (step S1324), and sets the sub-device input ON edge information. (With repeat function) Ends the process.

If the previous sub-device input information is 1 in step S1321 (NO in step S1321), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1325 in FIG.

With reference to FIG. 66, the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1325 whether or not the sub-device input information this time is 1. If the current sub-device input information is 1 (YES in step S1325), that is, if the previous sub-device input information is 1 and the current sub-device input information is 1, subtract 1 from the elapsed frame. (Step S1326), the process proceeds to step S1327.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1327 whether or not the elapsed frame is zero. If the elapsed frame is 0 (YES in step S1327), the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) is set to 1 (step S1328), and the elapsed frame is set to 4 (step S1329). Input ON Edge information (with repeat function) processing ends.

In step S1325, if the current subdevice input information is not 1 (NO in step S1325), that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0, the host control The circuit 2100 sets the elapsed frame to 0 (step S1330) and proceeds to step S1331.

When the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) is set to 0 in step S1331, the host control circuit 2100 ends the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing.

In this way, the host control circuit 2100 creates the above-mentioned four types of sub-device input discrimination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the sub-device detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec. By controlling the sub-devices based on these four types of sub-device input discrimination information, it is possible to easily control the sub-device's repeated hitting effect, long-press effect control, time setting control, and other operation control. It becomes possible.

[10-4. Backlight control process]
Next, the backlight control process (for example, the backlight control process for controlling the backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example for conceptually explaining the backlight control process. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the backlight control process.

The backlight control process of the present embodiment uses the function of SPI asynchronous data write (SPI + DMA) to continuously and continuously from the serial output terminal of, for example, the Serial Peripheral Interface (hereinafter referred to as "SPI"). A signal equivalent to pulse width modulation (hereinafter referred to as "PWM") is output so that the duty (brightness) can be changed. This makes it possible to perform backlight control without using a driver for backlight control.

In the present embodiment, for example, the frequency of the SPI clock is 100 kHz, the SPI1 clock is 0.01 msec, the time required for data transmission of 16 bits (1 data of the brightness data is 16 bits) is 0.16 msec, and the host control circuit 2100 is scheduled. The interrupt is 1 msec, and the number of brightness data transmitted from the SPI between the scheduled interrupts of the host control circuit 2100 is 100 bits. Therefore, the number of luminance data transmitted between the scheduled interrupts of the host control circuit 2100 is 6.25 (100/16) (see FIG. 67). Therefore, for example, the number of scheduled interrupts executed until 32 luminance data are replenished in the FIFO (First In First Out) data area where 64 16-bit luminance data can be set (stored) is 5 to 6 times. it is conceivable that. The number of times varies depending on the time of the scheduled interrupt of the host control circuit 2100.

For example, if the number of brightness data set (stored) in the FIFO (First In First Out) data area that can set (store) 64 16-bit brightness data is less than 32, the callback function is called, so the FIFO data. The area is not always filled. Therefore, if the process of setting (storing) the luminance data in the FIFO data area does not take time in other processes in the main process executed in the cycle of 33.3 msec, the FIFO data area becomes empty. (The backlight goes black).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, first 64 pieces of 1 data 16 bit brightness data are set to fill the FIFA data area, and then 32 pieces of brightness data set in the FIFA data area are set. When the value falls below, the callback function is called, and 32 data are set in the callback function so that the FIFA data area is not emptied.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is the process at the time of initial setting (step S1341). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one of the processes in step 201 of FIG. 61) (YES in step S1341), 64 luminance data having a luminance of 0 are stored in the data area of the FIFO. It is set (step S1342), and the process proceeds to step S1343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the process at the time of initial setting (that is, the process of step S1253 in FIG. 62) (NO in step S1341), the process of step S1342 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1343.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1343 whether or not the luminance value has been changed. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the luminance value has been changed (YES in step S1343), the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is changed (step S1344), and the process proceeds to step S1345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the luminance value has not been changed (NO in step S1343), the process of step S1344 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1345.

In step S1345, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than (YES in step S1345), 32 brightness data are set in the FIFO data area, that is, replenished (step S1346), and the backlight control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is more than 32 (NO in step S1345), the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight processing.

In this way, by processing the brightness data set in the FIFO data area so that it does not become empty, it is possible to continuously and continuously output a signal equivalent to PWM from the serial data output terminal of the SPI, and back up. Backlight control can be performed without going through a light control driver.

The processing of steps S1343 to S1346 of the backlight control processing of the present embodiment can be replaced as follows. That is, after setting 64 pieces of data having a brightness of 0 (see step S1342), a process of determining whether or not the number of brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO is less than 32 pieces is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not the brightness value has been changed, and when it is determined that the brightness value has been changed, 32 pieces of brightness data according to the setting are set in the FIFA data area, and when it is determined that the brightness value has not been changed, the previous time. 32 pieces of the same luminance data as are set in the FIFA data area. In this way, the luminance data may be set in the FIFO data area and the backlight control process may be terminated.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than 32 (half the number of data that can be set in the FIFA), 32 pieces of brightness data are replenished. The timing of replenishing the data and the number of brightness data to be replenished are not limited to this, and when the brightness data set in the FIFA data area falls below a predetermined number, the predetermined number of brightness data may be replenished. Further, the brightness data to be replenished in the FIFA data area does not have to be the above-mentioned predetermined number. For example, when the brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number, the number of the second number is increased. The brightness data may be supplemented. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the brightness data set in the FIFA data area from being set too frequently and the brightness data set in the FIFA data area not being emptied, the above-mentioned predetermined number or the first one. The number is preferably about half the number of brightness data that can be set in the FIFA data area, but is not limited to this as described above. The above "about half" is sufficient as long as the frequency of setting the brightness data in the FIFO data area does not become too high and the brightness data set in the FIFO data area is not emptied. There are various judgment methods such as less than half or less than half depending on the consumption speed of the brightness data set in the data area of. For example, since the FIFA data area in the present embodiment can set up to 64 16-bit brightness data, one or more new ones or more when the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is 1 to 64. It is possible to set the brightness data, but from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the brightness data set in the FIFA data area becomes 0), the FIFO data. When the number of brightness data set in the region is two or more, it is preferable to newly set one or more brightness data. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

[10-4-1. Modification example of backlight control processing]
Next, a modification of the backlight control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing accompanying a modified example of backlight control processing. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the backlight control process.

In a modified example of the backlight control processing, when the processing may take a long time in the timer interrupt processing of 1 msec, whether or not a predetermined time or more has passed since the data was set in the data area of the FIFO in the backlight control processing. It is determined whether or not the data is set in the data area of the FIFO when a predetermined time or more has elapsed.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 first performs the backlight control process (step S1351). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the backlight control process in step S1351 will be described with reference to FIG. 70 before the processes after step S1352 are described.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is the process at the time of initial setting (step S1361). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one of the processes in step 201 of FIG. 61) (YES in step S1361), 64 luminance data having a luminance of 0 are stored in the data area of the FIFO. It is set (step S1362), and then the process proceeds to step S1366. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the process at the time of initial setting (that is, the process of step S1351) (NO in step S1361), the process proceeds to step S1363.

In step S1363, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than (YES in step S1363), 32 pieces of brightness data are set or replenished in the data area of the FIFO (step S1364), and the process proceeds to step S1365. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is more than 32 (NO in step S1363), the process proceeds to step S1366. As described above, the above 32 pieces are half of the number of data that can be set in the FIFO.

In step S1365, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1365) and starts timing the elapsed time (step S1366). When the time counting of the elapsed time is started in step S1366, the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight control process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control after completing the backlight control process in step S1351 (step S1352).

In this modification, whether or not the elapsed time at which the time counting is started in step S1366 has elapsed more than a predetermined time after the host control circuit 2100 has performed a process such as the accessory motor control which may take a long time. (Step S1353). If a predetermined time or more has passed (YES in step S1353), 32 luminance data are set in the FIFO data area (step S1354). On the other hand, if the predetermined time or more has not passed (NO in step S1353), it is not necessary to replenish the luminance data in the FIFO data area, so the process proceeds to step S1357.

As described above, since the time required for 16-bit (1 piece of luminance data is 16 bits) data transmission in SPI is 0.16 msec, it is considered that 5.12 msec is required to transmit 32 luminance data. Be done. Therefore, in this modification, in step S1353, it is determined whether or not 5.12 msec or more has elapsed as a predetermined time.

After performing the process of step S1354, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1355) and restarts the time counting of the elapsed time (step S1356). Then, when the time counting of the elapsed time is started in step S1356, the host control circuit 2100 performs the input state determination process (step S1357) and ends the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when the brightness data is set in the FIFA data area, the time counting is started, and after the processing that may take time, the brightness data is replenished if the above time counting time elapses for a predetermined time or more. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the brightness data in the FIFO data area from becoming empty.

In this modified example, an example in which the processes of steps S1353 to S1357 are performed after the accessory motor control (step S1352) has been described, but this is merely an example. That is, from the viewpoint of preventing the luminance data set in the FIFO data area from becoming empty, if the processing of steps S1353 to S1357 is performed after the processing that may take time. Often, such processing is not limited to a particular processing.

[10-5. Brightness adjustment of backlight and various LEDs]
Next, variations of brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs will be described. The various LEDs correspond to board-side LEDs (for example, LEDs arranged on the game board unit 17), frame-side LEDs, and the like, and in this specification, lamp groups 25 and the like including LEDs (for example, see FIG. 9). Corresponds to. Further, in the present specification, as variations of brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs, three variations of the first embodiment to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74, respectively. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process showing the backlight control process. FIG. 72 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining the first embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 73 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a second embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 74 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a third embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. However, in FIGS. 72 to 74, only the processes necessary for the explanation are shown, and the other processes are omitted. In the first to third embodiments described below, as described above, the host control circuit 2100 enters the FIFO data area when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is reduced to about half. Replenish the brightness data.

The timing of replenishing the luminance data in the FIFO data area is not limited to the time when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is reduced to about half. In the FIFA data area of the present embodiment, for example, up to 64 16-bit luminance data can be set. Therefore, when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 1 to 64, one or more new luminance data can be set. Brightness data may be set. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the luminance data set in the FIFO data area becomes 0), the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 2. When there are more than one, it is preferable to newly set one or more luminance data. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

(First Example)
For example, when the brightness of the backlight (for example, the backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) is adjusted by the operation of a player or the like, the brightness of the backlight is changed. At this time, the control of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is performed. May affect. In this embodiment, in such a case, the brightness setting of the backlight and the brightness setting of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are set in common, and the backlight, the panel side LED, and the frame side LED are set according to the setting. It is designed to control. As a result, even if the update timing of the backlight control and the update timing of the control of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are different, it is possible to facilitate the processing.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order.

As shown in FIG. 72, the host control circuit 2100 performs the initialization process (step S1381), then moves to the main loop and performs the LED request control process (step S1382). The LED request made in step S1382 was created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1386 described later).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S1382, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-mentioned subdevice (button) input determination information generation process (step S1383) based on the input state of the subdevice, and proceeds to step S1384.

In step S1384, the host control circuit 2100 determines the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the player or the like operates the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16). To set. The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1384 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop, and first, the brightness values of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are set according to the effect mode to be executed and the setting of the brightness value. (Step S1385). Similar to the backlight, the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is also set to, for example, three levels of strong, medium, and weak.

Here, by setting the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED and the setting of the brightness of the backlight as a common setting, the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED can be suppressed while suppressing the increase in the control load. Both the setting and the brightness setting of the backlight can be changed by the operation of the player or the like. For example, the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness value of the backlight based on the player or the like operating the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 (step S1384). The brightness values of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are also changed (step S1385). At this time, the stage of the brightness value of the backlight and the stage of the brightness value of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are also common. For example, if the stage of the brightness value of the backlight is medium, the stage of the brightness value of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is also in the middle. As shown in FIG. 72, since the brightness update timing of the backlight and the brightness update timing of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are different, after the brightness of the backlight is updated, the panel side LED and the frame side LED The brightness of is updated. However, the brightness update timing of the backlight and the brightness update timing of the panel side LED and the frame side LED may be controlled to be the same.

The brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are changed based on the player or the like operating the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the brightness of the backlight, the brightness of the panel side LED and the brightness of the frame side LED may be changed based on the operation of the push button for the effect. In this case, since it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a period (push button valid period) that functions as a push button for production, the brightness of the board side LED and the frame side LED is adjusted in the main flow. It is necessary to control the backlight according to the brightness of the LED.

The host control circuit 2100 performs the animation construction process in step S1386. In the animation construction process of step S1386, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1382) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processes of steps S1385 and S1386 according to the received packets.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1387), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1388).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats each process of steps S1382 to S1388 in the main loop at a cycle of 33.3 msec.

(Second Example)
For example, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED may be affected as described above. In this embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a player or the like performs a brightness adjustment operation, the brightness value of the backlight is changed immediately, but the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED is a special symbol. It is designed to be executed after the end of the fluctuation or between bank flips.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71. Do.

As shown in FIG. 73, the host control circuit 2100 performs the initialization process (step S1391), then moves to the main loop and performs the LED request control process (step S1392). The LED request made in step S1392 was created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1395 described later).

When the process of step S1392 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 generates the above-mentioned sub-device (button) input discrimination information (step S1393) based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like). ), And the process proceeds to step S1394.

In step S1394, the host control circuit 2100 sets the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, a brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1394 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop and performs the animation construction process (step S1395). In the animation construction process of step S1395, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1392) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the process of step S1395 according to the received packet.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1396), then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1397), and proceeds to step S1398.

In step S1398, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the variation of the effect identification displayed on the liquid crystal display device as the display device 16 has been completed, that is, whether or not the variation time of the effect identification symbol has elapsed. (Step S1398). If the variation of the effect identification symbol is completed (YES in step S1398), the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED according to the set value at that time (step S1399). On the other hand, if the variation of the special symbol is not completed (NO in step S1398), the processes of steps S1392 to S1399 in the main loop having a cycle of 33.3 msec are repeated. The process of step S1399 may be performed during the bank flip of step S1397 instead of or in addition to when the change of the special symbol is completed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 determines the brightness of the backlight that directly affects the eyes of the player based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like). Is controlled so as to be changed immediately, but the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is changed after the brightness of the backlight is changed and after the variation of the effect identification symbol is completed. To control. In addition, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like while the identification symbol for production is fluctuating, the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED needs to be changed by the LED request control process, but the backlight Can be changed immediately. Therefore, the brightness of the backlight is controlled to be changed immediately based on the input state of the sub-device, but the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is changed by the LED request control process to control the load. Can be minimized. That is, for example, it is possible to change the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED while minimizing the control load by performing the brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like only once.

When the brightness of the backlight is changed based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like), the host control circuit 2100 transmits the brightness data related to the changed brightness to the FIFO. Set in the data area.

(Third Example)
For example, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED may be affected as described above. In this embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a player or the like performs a brightness adjustment operation, the brightness value of the backlight is changed, and the effect of the board side LED and the frame side LED is limited. This is what I did. The term "limited" means, for example, limiting the number of LEDs that emit light in the effect of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, limiting the number of effects performed by the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, and the like. .. Limiting the number of effects means, for example, that the effects 1 to 5 are originally performed, but only the effects 1 to 3 are performed, and the effects 4 and 5 are not omitted. As a result, the effects of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are restricted without directly changing the brightness value, so that the intensity of the light received by the player from the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is suppressed. Become. Further, even if the update timing of the backlight control and the update timing of the control of the panel side LED and the frame side LED are different, the processing can be facilitated.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71. Do.

As shown in FIG. 74, the host control circuit 2100 performs the initialization process (step S1401), then moves to the main loop and performs the LED request control process (step S1402). The LED request made in step S1402 is created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1407 described later).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S1402, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-mentioned subdevice (button) input determination information generation process (step S1403) based on the input state of the subdevice, and proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the host control circuit 2100 sets the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, a brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set in three stages, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

When the process of step S1404 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the brightness setting has been changed (step S1405). If there is a change in the luminance setting (YES in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 limits the luminance of the panel side LED and the frame side LED according to the setting at that time (step S1406), and moves to the packet reception loop. On the other hand, if there is no change in the brightness value setting (NO in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 shifts to the packet reception loop without performing the process of step S1406.

Moving to the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1407). In the animation construction process of step S1407, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1402) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the process of step S1407 according to the received packet.

When the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop, it performs animation update processing (step S1408), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1409).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processes of steps S1402 to S1409 in the main loop having a period of 33.3 msec.

Regarding the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs described above (first to third embodiments), the backlight control process of the present embodiment uses the function of the SPI asynchronous data light (SPI + DMA) as described above. For example, a signal corresponding to PWM is continuously and continuously output from the serial output terminal of SPI. On the other hand, with respect to the panel side LED and the frame side LED, for example, as shown in step S1382 of FIG. 72, the LEDs are controlled based on the LED request created one frame before the main loop. Therefore, even if the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs is adjusted, the timing at which the brightness of the backlight is changed is different from the timing at which the brightness of the panel-side LED or the frame-side LED is changed.

[10-6. RTC acquisition process]
Next, the RTC acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. 75. As described above, the RTC acquisition process is performed both in the various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) and in the main loop (see step S1201 in FIG. 61). Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the RTC acquisition process.

For example, when communication with the RTC cannot be performed, or when an abnormality has occurred in the RTC itself, or when an accurate time cannot be obtained due to the RTC abnormality, the time is not updated and remains at the previous time. Therefore, when the RTC effect (for example, an effect related to Christmas at Christmas time) is executed based on the RTC time, if an RTC abnormality occurs, the RTC effect may not be executed. Further, when the RTC or more occurs, the RTC time is not updated, so that the RTC effect may remain executed or the RTC effect may be executed at an unexpected time.

Therefore, in the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, when the RTC is abnormal, that is, when the previous RTC time and the current RTC time are different, the RTC effect is executed based on the current time. The RTC is provided with a secondary battery, and it is possible to manage the time even when the power supply of the host control circuit 2100 is turned off. Further, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the time from the RTC and manages the error occurrence time and the like.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the RTC acquisition process, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (step S1412), and then proceeds to step S1413.

The host control circuit 2100 updates the previous time in step S1413. In this update of the previous time, the current time updated in step S1416 described later is updated as the previous time. After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the RTC is abnormal (step S1414). If the RTC is abnormal (YES in step S1414), the current time is maintained (step S1415), and the process proceeds to step S1417. On the other hand, if the RTC is not abnormal (NO in step S1414), the current time is updated (step S1416), and the process proceeds to step S1417.

In the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, after updating the previous time (step S1413), it is determined whether or not the RTC is abnormal (step S1414), but instead of this, the previous time is updated. It may be determined before whether or not the RTC is abnormal, and if the RTC is not abnormal, the previous time may be updated to control so that the current time is not maintained.

In step S1417, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current time is a designated time (for example, a time when the RTC effect is executed). If the current time is the designated time (YES in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1418, and if the current time is not the designated time (NO in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1420.

In step S1418, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous time and the current time do not match. If the RTC is abnormal, the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S1418). If the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S1418), the RTC effect execution flag is set to 1 (step S1419). That is, in the case of an RTC abnormality, the RTC effect is executed when the current time reaches the designated time. Then, when the process of step S1419 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process. On the other hand, if the previous time and the current time do not match (NO in step S1418), the process proceeds to step S1420.

The host control circuit 2100 sets the RTC effect execution flag to 0 in step S1420. Then, when the process of step S1420 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the RTC effect is not executed by executing the RTC effect when the current time reaches the designated time. ..

[10-7. Composition playback control]
Next, composition reproduction control will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

The composition is scene data in which material data for forming an image (movie) displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as, for example, a display device 16 is combined, and is generally composed of a plurality of layers. Layers include animations, vector graphics, still images, lights, and more.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the animation control main process executed by the display control circuit 2300. This animation control main process is executed based on the input of the control signal of the drawing request output in the animation construction process (see step S1211 in FIG. 61) executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIG. 76, the display control circuit 2300 first clears the composition reproduction information (step S1431). Then, the display control circuit 2300 executes the composition reproduction control process (step S1432). This composition reproduction control process will be described later. After that, the display control circuit 2300 executes the top-level direct drawing function (step S1433), and ends the animation control main process.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of composition reproduction control processing executed by the display control circuit 2300. As shown in FIG. 77, the display control circuit 2300 first determines whether or not the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (step S1441). If the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (YES in step S1441), the process proceeds to step S1442. The number of priorities is the number of layers of the composition to be played back at the same time, and the upper limit of the number of priorities is predetermined based on the composition to be played back. Therefore, as long as the processing by the host control circuit 2100 is normal, the determined number of priorities does not exceed the upper limit of the number of priorities. Therefore, when the determined priority number exceeds the upper limit of the priority number (NO in step S1441), the display control circuit 2300 ends the composition reproduction control process.

In step S1442, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the determined number of displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of usable displays, that is, the determined number of displays is a display that can be used (for example, mounted) on the system. It is determined whether or not the number is less than (or less than or equal to) the number (step S1442). If the determined number of displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of usable displays (YES in step S1442), the process proceeds to step S1443.

In step S1443, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the used display number is not 0, that is, whether or not there is a usable display number. If the display number used is not 0 (YES in step S1443), that is, if a usable display number exists, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1444. On the other hand, if the display number used is 0 (NO in step S1443), that is, if there is no usable display number, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1459.

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes two frame buffers as frame buffers in which compositions are registered. These two frame buffers are used by switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function by bank flip. Hereinafter, in this specification, a frame buffer having a display function is simply referred to as a “frame buffer”, and a frame buffer having a drawing function is referred to as a “drawing result output destination buffer”.

In step S1444, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition is registered in the drawing result output destination buffer. In the determination process of step S1444, it is determined whether or not all the compositions are registered (that is, whether or not there are any unregistered ones). If all the compositions are registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (YES in step S1444), the display control circuit 2300 sets the drawing target (step S1445). Setting a drawing target is a process of setting a display to which drawing is performed. If the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (NO in step S1444), that is, if there is an unregistered composition, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1450.

In step S1446, the display control circuit 2300 sets the drawing result output destination buffer as the frame buffer. That is, the process of step S1446 is a process of switching the drawing result output destination buffer to the frame buffer by the bank flip. At this time, the composition registered in the drawing result output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer is cleared. After that, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 has a pause flag (step S1447). The pause flag is a flag of the debug function that pauses the image, and when this pause flag is present (YES in step S1447), the display control circuit 2300 is the drawing output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer by the bank flip in step S1446. The composition reproduction information is registered in (step S1448) and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). On the other hand, if there is no pause flag (NO in step S1447), the process proceeds to step S1459. The composition reproduction information includes, for example, the frame buffer size, the composition size, the coordinates of the four vertices of the image to be reproduced, the composition registration information, the loop composition to be reproduced, the composition length, and the start frame setting. , Loop playback flag, etc. Further, the registration of the reproduction information of the composition is to collect the reproduction information of the composition, and the composition reproduction is to register the reproduction information of the collected composition. When the playback information of the composition is registered, the previous playback information is cleared.

In step S1450, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or greater than the upper limit (that is, whether or not the number of reproduced frames exceeds the number of frames possessed by the composition). Determine. If the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (NO in step S1450), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1457 and registers composition reproduction information in the drawing result output destination buffer (step). The composition is regenerated together with S1457) (step S1458).

When the display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1450 that the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or greater than the upper limit (YES in step S1450), the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1451.

In step S1451, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction (YES in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 reproduces from the beginning at the time of loop reproduction (step S1452), and then proceeds to step S1457. .. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not loop reproduction (NO in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 shifts to step S1453.

In step S1453, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display (YES in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 reproduces the final frame at the time of frame continuous display (step S1454), and then in step S1457. Move to. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not frame continuous display (NO in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 shifts to step S1455.

In step S1455, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is shot reproduction. If the reproduction mode is shot reproduction (YES in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300 clears the composition at the time of shot reproduction (step S1456), and then proceeds to step S1459. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not shot reproduction (NO in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300 shifts to step S1457.

The composition reproduction information registration in step S1457 is, in principle, a process performed when the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (when NO is determined in step S1444). However, as described above, the display control circuit 2300 also has a pause flag in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer in the bank flip in step S1446 (YES in step S1447), and the frame in the bank flip in step S1446. The composition reproduction information is registered in the drawing output destination buffer switched from the buffer (step S1448), and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). As described above, when the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer in the bank flip in step S1446 has a pause flag (YES in step S1447), the composition reproduction information is immediately registered in the drawing output destination buffer (YES in step S1447). Since the composition is regenerated together with step S1448) (step S1449), quick processing can be performed.

The display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the number of displays determined in step S1459, and returns to step S1442.

When the display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1442 that the determined number of displays exceeds the upper limit of the number of usable displays (NO in step S1442), the display control circuit 2300 executes the direct drawing function if there is data to be directly drawn. (Step S1460). After that, the display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the determined priority number (step S1461), and returns to step S1441.

As described above, in the composition reproduction control of the present embodiment, in principle, the reproduction information of a new composition is not registered in the state where the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer. However, the composition is not registered only when the specific condition is satisfied (when YES is determined in step S1447, that is, when the composition registered in the drawing output destination buffer has a pause flag). It becomes possible to perform the processing (composition reproduction information registration) of the time. In other words, while the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer, it is possible to register the composition again at any timing, so it depends on the contents of the (newly) registered composition. , It is possible to overwrite the effect, skip the effect, and stop the effect.

Further, the process of step S1441 (processing for determining whether or not the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (whether the number of determined displays is less than (or less than or equal to) the number of usable displays). The process of determining whether or not the display is performed) is higher than the process of step S1442. Therefore, by returning to step S1442 from the process of step S1459 and performing the process, the number of priorities determined in step S1441 is displayed on a plurality of displays. On the other hand, it can be standardized and the processing load can be reduced.

[10-8. Sound amplifier check process]
Next, the sound amplifier check process shown in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. In this sound amplifier check process, it is determined whether or not the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (hereinafter referred to as "sound amplifier") is in an abnormal state (for example, overcurrent abnormality, high temperature abnormality, DC detection abnormality in which the audio signal does not change, etc.). Also, the setting information of the sound amplifier is confirmed. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal amplifier check process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of a deep bass amplifier check process.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes, as a sound amplifier, a normal amplifier that amplifies normal audio data and a deep bass amplifier that amplifies deep bass audio data.

As shown in FIG. 78, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier check process (step S1471) and a deep bass amplifier check process (step S1472).

As shown in FIG. 79, in the normal amplifier check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting has been made from the binary file (step S1481). If there is a binary file at the time of initialization, the settings will be made from the binary file. The process at the time of initialization is executed not only when the power is turned on but also when a problem is found in the amplifier check and the setting is made again. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting is made from the binary file, but the setting is not limited to this, and a storage area different from the read setting such as the binary file may be used.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the register as a reference of the register value to be checked is normal (step S1482), and then performs a determination process. , Step S1483. In the determination process of step S1482, the register values are checked in the order of the address, so it is determined whether or not there is a register value for starting the check, and whether or not the value is normal.

In step S1483, the host control circuit 2100 rearranges the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register with the received data (step S1484), and performs a determination process of whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1485). When the determination process of step S1485 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier check process.

On the other hand, if the setting is not made from the binary file in step S1481 (NO in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value with the set value (step S1486), and performs a normal amplifier check process. To finish. When the normal amplifier check process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 performs the deep bass amplifier check process.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the deep bass amplifier check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting has been made from the binary file (step S1491).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of determining whether or not the register to be checked is normal (step S1492), and then proceeds to step S1493. ..

In step S1493, the host control circuit 2100 clears registers 0x17-0x25 with an appropriate value (binary file information) in consideration of a case where the value cannot be read due to a hardware defect.

In step S1494, the host control circuit 2100 rearranges the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register with the received data (step S1495), and updates the RAM address (step S1494). When the host control circuit 2100 performs the update process of step S1496, the deep bass amplifier check process ends.

On the other hand, if the setting is not made from the binary file in step S1491 (NO in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value with the set value (step S1497), and checks the amplifier for deep bass. End the process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs the sound amplifier check process in the interrupt process of 1 msec. By the way, such a sound amplifier check process can also be performed in the main loop. However, when the sound amplifier check process is performed in the main loop, if the sound amplifier check process takes time, it may put pressure on other processes. Therefore, by performing the sound amplifier check process in the interrupt process as in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the sound amplifier check process without overwhelming other processes in the main loop.

Further, the sound amplifier check process shown in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62) is, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, in the 1 msec interrupt process, the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (batch) check process (step S1497). ) May be performed. The normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (batch) check process (step S1497) is a process of collectively performing the normal amplifier check process (see FIG. 79) and the deep bass amplifier check process (see FIG. 80).

However, if the sound amplifier check process is performed in the interrupt process of 1 msec, it may not be possible to execute all of the sound amplifier check process. Therefore, a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process. FIG. 84 shows an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier check process, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 83.

In a more preferred embodiment of the sound amplifier check process, as shown in FIG. 82, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process (step S1498). The details of this normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (split) check process will be described later, but the range that can be performed within 1 msec of interrupt processing by dividing each check process of the normal amplifier and each check process of the deep bass amplifier. The check process is performed within, and the subsequent process is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In other words, out of all the check processing of the normal amplifier and all the check processing of the deep bass amplifier, only a part of the check processing is performed in the one interrupt processing, but all the checks should be performed over multiple interrupt processing. It is the one that was made. By doing so, in the interrupt processing, it is possible to execute all of the check processing of the normal amplifier and the check process of the deep bass amplifier without ending in the middle.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting is made from the binary file (step S1501).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been made from the binary file (YES in step S1501), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the check status is 0 (step S1502). When the check status is 0 (YES in step S1502), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the register value checked by the normal amplifier is normal (step S1503). After performing the process of step S1503, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 1 (step S1504), and ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1502 that the check status is not 0 (NO in step S1502), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1505. The process of step S1503 may be performed by further dividing each register into determining whether or not each register value among the plurality of registers is normal.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1505 whether or not the check status is 1. When the check status is 1 (YES in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 performs a sorting process of the received data from the binary file (step S1506). After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register of the normal amplifier with the received data (step S1507), and determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1508). ). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 2 (step S1509), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division). ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. To finish. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 1, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 1 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1505 that the check status is not 1 (NO in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1510. The process of step S1508 may be performed by further dividing the process of comparing the RAM value of each register among the plurality of registers with the received data for each register.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1510 whether or not the check status is 2. When the check status is 2 (YES in step S1510), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1511). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1512). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 3 (step S1513), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division). ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. To finish. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 2, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 2 again in the next and subsequent frames. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1510 that the check status is not 2 (NO in step S1510), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1514 (see FIG. 84).

With reference to FIG. 84, the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1514 whether or not the check status is 3. When the check status is 3 (YES in step S1514), the host control circuit 2100 performs a determination process of determining whether or not the register value checked by the deep bass amplifier is normal (step S1515). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S1516). If the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 4 (step S1517), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (YES in step S1516). (Split) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. End the process. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 3, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 3 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1514 that the check status is not 3 (NO in step S1514), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1518.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1518 whether or not the check status is 4. When the check status is 4 (YES in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 clears the register value of the deep bass amplifier with an appropriate value (step S1519). After that, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 5 (step S1520), and ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1518 that the check status is not 4, (NO in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1521.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1521 whether or not the check status is 5. When the check status is 5 (YES in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 performs a sorting process of the received data from the binary file (step S1522). After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register of the deep bass amplifier with the received data (step S1523), and updates the RAM address (step S1524). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S1525). If the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S1525), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the update of the RAM address is completed (step S1526), and sets the check status. It is set to 0 (step S1527), and the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process is completed. When the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is not executed in step S1525 (NO in step S1525), and when it is determined in step S1526 that the update of the RAM address is not completed (NO in step S1526). , The host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process without updating the check status. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 5, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 5 again in the next and subsequent frames. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1521 that the check status is not 5 (NO in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier / deep bass amplifier (division) check process.

As described above, in a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process, each check process of the normal amplifier and each check process of the deep bass amplifier can be divided into 1 msec interrupt process (that is, within one frame). The check process is performed within the range, and the subsequent process is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In this way, since a part of the check process of the normal amplifier and the check process of the deep bass amplifier are performed over a plurality of frames within one frame, the entire check process of each amplifier can be executed over a plurality of frames. It will be possible.

When the check status is 4, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed (for example, if the check status is 3, the processing in step S1516 is equivalent). Absent. This is because the processing of step S1519 performed when the check status is 4 can be performed in a short time so as not to affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec. In other words, the process performed when the check status is 4 (step S1519) is the process performed when the check status is 0 (step S1503) and the process performed when the check status is 1 (step S1506). And step S1507), the process performed when the check status is 2 (step S1511), the process performed when the check status is 3, (step S1515), and the process performed when the check status is 5 (step). This is because the time required for processing is shorter than that in S152 to step S1524), and it does not affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed in consideration of the time required for the processing (whether or not it affects the interrupt processing of 1 msec). I have decided whether or not. However, whether or not the processing for the number of divisions is executed even if the processing does not affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec (for example, the processing such as step S1519 performed when the check status is 4). The determination may be made.

In each process of step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515, it may be possible to further divide each register into determine whether or not each register value among the plurality of registers is normal. In this case, the progress of the further divided determination may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the processing of the major classification shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 and the check status (second check status) related to the processing of the minor classification obtained by further dividing the processing of the major classification. Therefore, the progress of processing can be managed. Similarly, in each of the processes of steps S1506 to S507 and steps S152 to S523, the process of comparing the RAM value of each register among the plurality of registers with the received data is further divided for each register. You may. In this case, the progress of the further divided processing may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the processing of the major classification shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 and the check status (second check status) related to the processing of the minor classification obtained by further dividing the processing of the major classification. Therefore, the progress of processing can be managed. For example, even if a power failure occurs during the sub-classification process or judgment, the progress of the sub-classification process or judgment is checked by the first check status and the second check status after the power is restored. It may be controlled to restart each process and each determination.

Further, the check status can be set to 0 when the power is turned on, and when the power is cut off during processing, various settings can be made such as starting from the check status at the time of the previous power cut after the power is restored. Of course, if a power failure occurs, the power is turned on, or backup clear (ram clear) processing is performed, the check status is set to 0 after the power is restored, and all processing and judgment are performed again ( Alternatively, as one of the initialization processes, all processes or determinations or some processes or determinations may be performed again).

[10-9. Sound request control processing (when there are multiple sound requests for the same channel)]
Next, regarding the sound request control process shown in FIG. 61, a sound request control process when there are a plurality of sound requests (also referred to as SAC requests) for the same channel will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same playback channel in the same frame of the main loop performed in a cycle of 33.3 msec, for example, a mute command of 2 msec is performed between the SAC request and the SAC request. Is registered with. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game sound output based on the SAC request from being covered with other game sounds, and it is possible to output a highly accurate game sound. However, in this case, although there is an advantage that the game sound is not overwritten, there is a possibility that the processing will take time. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC numbers are specified (registered) in the same virtual track in the same frame of the main loop, the SAC of the second arrival is spaced apart from the first SAC request. There is a case where a request is made and a case where a second-arrival SAC request is made without a gap between the first-come-first-served SAC number and the first-come-first-served SAC number. Specifically, it will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the sound request control process (when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel), the host control circuit 2100 first confirms the SAC number and the playback channel (step S1541). Then, the process proceeds to step S1542.

In step S1542, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same reproduction channel. For example, since the SAC numbers are different between SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction, a plurality of SAC numbers may be specified for the same reproduction channel without intervals. When there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same reproduction channel (YES in step S1542), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1543. On the other hand, if there are not a plurality of SAC requests for the same playback channel (NO in step S1542), the sound request control process ends. In this embodiment, since one virtual track corresponds to one playback channel, the determination process in step S1542 is synonymous with the determination as to whether or not there is a SAC request for the same virtual track. Is. That is, the "track" is an interface for decoding and reproducing the "phrase", and the "playback channel" is the concept of reproducing the "phrase". That is, when a "playback channel" is specified and a "phrase" is requested to be played back, the phrase is played by being assigned to the corresponding "track". The "virtual track" is an "interface for controlling phrase playback". There are 128 virtual tracks, which can be automatically assigned to 32 phrase reproduction channels. However, since this function is not used in this embodiment, "virtual track" = "reproduction channel".

In step S1543, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction are chain reproductions. In the case of chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction (YES in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 executes the SAC request of LOOP reproduction one frame later (33.3 msec later) (step S1544), and controls the sound request. End the process. In the case of chain playback of SHOT playback and LOOP playback, by executing the SAC request of LOOP playback with a delay of one frame, the sound of SHOT playback is prevented from being overwritten, and the sound of SHOT playback is prevented from becoming difficult to hear. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if it is not a chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction (NO in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1545.

In step S1545, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the mute command between SACs is a mute setting for all playback channels. For example, when the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol ends, a mute command is uniformly set between SACs for all playback channels. Then, when the mute command between SACs is the mute setting of all the reproduction channels (YES in step S1545), the host control circuit 2100 performs the SAC data corresponding to the first-come-first-served SAC request so that the mute is executed. The SAC data corresponding to the subsequent SAC request is set (step S1546) without overwriting the mute command, and the sound request control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the mute command between SACs is not set to mute all the playback channels (NO in step S1545), the mute command of each playback channel corresponds to the later SAC request so that quick processing is performed. Overwrite with SAC data and set (step S1547), and the sound request control process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same playback channel in the same frame of the main loop, when the plurality of SAC requests are SHOT playback and LOOP playback chain playback. , The SAC number of the LOOP reproduction is delayed by one frame (for example, 33.3 msec) so as not to cover the sound of the LOOP reproduction with respect to the SHOT reproduction. SHOT reproduction is, for example, one-time reproduction of a phrase, and LOOP reproduction is, for example, LOOP reproduction (reproduction of a plurality of times) of a phrase.

In addition, when the mute command between SACs is the mute setting of all playback channels, the SAC data corresponding to the SAC number is input to the mute command without overwriting the SAC data of the subsequent arrival so that the mute is executed. sign up. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, it is possible to secure the period until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the mute command between SACs is not set to mute all the reproduction channels, the mute command of each reproduction channel is overwritten with the SAC data corresponding to the later SAC request so that the mute is not executed. In this way, by executing or not executing muffling depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing (quickness by overwriting the muffling) while making the best use of the game sound effect of muffling. ing.

[10-10. Sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed)]
Next, with respect to the sound request control process shown in FIG. 61, variations of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed will be described. In the present specification, as variations of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted, five variations of the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90, respectively. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a first embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a second embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a third embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a fourth embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a fifth embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted.

(First Example)
As shown in FIG. 86, in the first embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume is adjusted), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the voice data specified by the SAC number (when the volume is adjusted). Step S1551). Then, the process proceeds to step S1552. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

In step S1552, the host control circuit 2100 designates the output destination speaker based on the voice data designated by the SAC number, and proceeds to step S1553. In this first embodiment, the audio data designated by the SAC number incorporates information on which speaker to output from. Speakers are, for example, a shared speaker that is used for general purposes (used to output normal sounds that are sounds other than specific sounds) and dedicated speakers that are used to output specific sounds (error sounds, warning sounds, etc.). It has a speaker (for example, a speaker for deep bass). The host control circuit 2100 sets which of the plurality of speakers is to be the dedicated speaker in various initialization processes (see, for example, various initialization processes in FIG. 61 (step S1201)).

In step S1553, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1553), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1554), and the process proceeds to step S1556. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1553), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1555), and the process proceeds to step S1556.

In step S1556, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1557.

In step S1557, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. The specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound. In addition, the voice data commanded by the SAC number incorporates information that the output destination of the normal sound is a shared speaker and information that the output destination of the specific sound is a dedicated speaker. There is.

When it is determined in step S1558 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1558). ), The process proceeds to step S1560. In the volume control in step S1558, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1557 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1559) and step S1560. In the volume control in step S1559, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1560 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in the present embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1560 (YES in step S1560), the volume control incorporated in the voice data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1561), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1560 (NO in step S1560), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1557 and determines YES in step S1560 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed. Until this is done), the processes of steps S1557 to S1560 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 86, considering that the SAC number is specified corresponding to each channel, the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1561. good.

(Second Example)
As shown in FIG. 87, in the second embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume is adjusted), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the voice data specified by the SAC number (when the volume is adjusted). Step S1571). Then, the process proceeds to step S1572. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

In this second embodiment, for example, a shared channel used for general purposes (used for outputting a normal sound that is a sound other than a specific sound) and a specific sound (error sound, warning sound, etc.) There is a dedicated channel used for output. The host control circuit 2100 includes a dedicated channel (CH31, CH32) used for outputting a specific sound among a plurality of channels (CH1 to 32) and a shared channel (CH1) used for a sound other than the specific sound. ~ CH30) are set in various initialization processes (see, for example, various initialization processes in FIG. 61 (step S1201)).

In step S1572, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1572), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1573), and the process proceeds to step S1575. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1572), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1574), and the process proceeds to step S1575.

In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1576.

In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the second embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1577). ), The process proceeds to step S1578. In the volume control in step S1577, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1579) and step S1582. In the volume control in step S1579, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1578, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the playback is on a playback channel (for example, CH31, CH32) that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1578), a constant volume is specified (step S1580). If the playback is on a playback channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) that receives volume adjustment (NO in step S1578), the volume is set according to the user volume (step S1581). When the process of step S1580 is completed or the process of step S1581 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1582.

In step S1582, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1632 (YES in step S1582), the volume control incorporated in the voice data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1583), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1582 (NO in step S1582), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1576 and determines YES in step S1582 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed. Until this is done), the processes of steps S1576 to S1582 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 87, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1583.

(Third Example)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the third embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume is adjusted), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the voice data specified by the SAC number (when the volume is adjusted). Step S1591). Then, the process proceeds to step S1592.

In step S1592, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1592), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1593), and the process proceeds to step S1595. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1592), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1594), and the process proceeds to step S1595.

In step S1595, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1596.

In step S1596, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the third embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1597). ), The process proceeds to step S1599. In the volume control in step S1597, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1598) and step S1599. In the volume control in step S1598, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1599, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the data in the reproduction channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1599), the next time, a constant volume is specified for the reproduction channel (step S1600). If the data in the reproduction channel is the data to be adjusted in volume (NO in step S1599), the next time, the volume in the reproduction channel is set according to the volume adjustment (step S1601). When the process of step S1600 is completed or the process of step S1601 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1602.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1602 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1602 (YES in step S1602), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1603), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1602 (NO in step S1602), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1599 and determines YES as the volume control for the number of channels is performed (YES in step S1602). Until this is done), the processes of steps S1599 to S1602 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 88, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1603.

In this third embodiment, in step S1599, it is determined whether or not the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment, and the determination result in step S1599 is obtained. If YES, a constant volume is set for the next playback channel (step S1600), and if the determination result in step S1599 is NO, the volume according to the volume adjustment is set for the next playback channel. Alternatively, the modification described below may be used. That is, in this modified example, as the processing of the next step of step S1597 and step S1598, the audio data set this time and the audio data already being reproduced on the reproduction channel in which the audio data is set are volume-adjusted. After performing the process of checking whether the data is not affected, the process of determining whether the volume adjustment setting of the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting of the previous audio data are the same. I do. If the volume adjustment setting of the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting of the previous audio data are the same, a process of determining whether or not the data is not affected by the volume adjustment is performed. If the volume adjustment setting for the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting for the previous audio data are not the same, the volume adjustment will not be affected after the volume adjustment setting for the audio data set this time. Move on to the process of determining whether or not the data is data. Move on to the process of determining whether or not the data is not affected by the volume adjustment. Then, if the data is not affected by the volume adjustment, a process of setting a constant volume is performed on the playback channel, and if the data is affected by the volume adjustment, the volume adjustment is applied to the playback channel. Performs the process of setting the volume. After that, it is advisable to move to the process of determining whether or not the number of channels has been set, as in step S1602. In this modified example, the processing different from that of the third embodiment is only the processing described above, and the other processing is the processing of the third embodiment (processes of steps S1592 to S1598 shown in FIG. 88, processing of step S1602, and so on. And the process of step S1603).

(Fourth Example)
As shown in FIG. 89, in the fourth embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the SAC number is the SAC number affected by the volume adjustment. Confirm whether or not (step S1611). Then, the process proceeds to step S1612.

In step S1612, the host control circuit 2100 updates the flag indicating whether or not the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment, and inputs the voice data specified by the SAC number (step S1613). Specifically, the flag is set to ON when the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment (the flag is OFF when the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment).

In step S1614, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1614), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1617. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1614), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1616), and the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1617, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1618.

In step S1618, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the fourth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1619). ), The process proceeds to step S1620. In the volume control in step S1619, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1622) and step S1624. In the volume control in step S1622, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. Control to output a constant volume before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1620, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined in step S1612 whether or not the flag is set to ON. When the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1620), a constant volume is specified for the reproduction channel (step S1621), and the process proceeds to step S1624. When the reproduction is not performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1620), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel (step S1623), and the process proceeds to step S1624.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1624 whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1624 (YES in step S1624), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1625), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1624 (NO in step S1624), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1618 and determines YES in step S1624 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed. Until this is done), the processes of steps S1618 to S1624 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 89, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1625.

(Fifth Example)
As shown in FIG. 90, in the fifth embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume is adjusted), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the voice data specified by the SAC number (when the volume is adjusted). Step S1631). Then, the process proceeds to step S1632.

The host control circuit 2100 confirms whether the audio data is audio data for which each channel undergoes volume adjustment (step S1633). Specifically, when the audio data specified by the SAC number is the audio data affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (the audio data specified by the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment). If it is voice data, the flag is OFF).

In step S1633, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume is controlled by the hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1633), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1634), and the process proceeds to step S1636. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1633), the user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1635), and the process proceeds to step S1636.

In step S1636, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1637.

In step S1637, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the fifth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control of the specific sound is not performed (NO in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1638). ), The process proceeds to step S1639. In the volume control in step S1638, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control of the specific sound is performed (YES in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13). Step S1640) and step S1643. In the volume control in step S1640, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, the operation is concerned. A constant volume is output before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1639, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined in step S1632 whether or not the flag is set to ON. If the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1639), a constant volume is set for the playback channel (step S1641). If the channel is affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1639), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the playback channel (step S1642). When the process of step S1641 is completed or the process of step S1642 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1643.

In step S1643, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume is set for the number of channels in step S1643 (YES in step S1643), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1644), and the sound request control process is completed. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1643 (NO in step S1643), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1637 and determines YES in step S1643 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed. Until this is done), the processes of steps S1637 to S1643 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 90, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is also performed in the process of step S1644.

According to the sound request control process (1st to 5th examples) when the volume adjustment is performed as described above, when the volume adjustment is performed, the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is output for the normal sound. On the other hand, for a serious specific sound such as an error sound, even if the volume is adjusted, it is possible to easily perform voice control such as outputting a constant volume from the speaker.

[10-11. LED brightness adjustment process]
Next, the brightness adjustment of the LED will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 91. FIG. 91 is an attenuation table showing an example of the luminance attenuation values of each color (red, green, blue) according to the emission intensity of the strong, medium, and weak LEDs. This attenuation table is stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 (see, for example, FIG. 10).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the brightness of the LED can be adjusted in three stages by, for example, an operation of a player or the like. Specifically, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed on the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs the attenuation table switching process shown in FIG. 91. For example, when an operation of changing from strong to medium among the three levels of brightness is performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of switching the reference table from strong to medium in the attenuation table of FIG.

The LED whose brightness can be adjusted by the operation of a player or the like may be, for example, an LED provided on a glass door 13 (see, for example, FIG. 2), or may be, for example, a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16. It may be. The brightness adjustment of the LED is not limited to three steps, and may be configured so that the LED brightness can be adjusted in more steps, for example.

The output value of the LED is represented by the following equation (1).
LED output value = brightness value based on LED data x (100-luminance attenuation value) / 100 ... Equation (1)
The output value of the LED of the above formula (1) can also be set for each reproduction channel of the LED. The parameter changed by the player's operation is the luminance attenuation value. For example, when the brightness attenuation value is 0, the brightness is the strongest, and when the brightness attenuation value is 100, the brightness is the weakest and the light is turned off. Further, the calculation of the output value of the LED is performed inside the sequencer 2260b (see FIG. 11).

For the LED data table that defines LED data and playback patterns, a BLD file (LED animation) is created using tools such as ActiveLED (UE) and LEDMaker (UE), and information is added to the created BLD file. While doing so, it is created by converting with the LED list (Excel macro) (UE).

By the way, in the case of a three-primary-color full-color LED, if the brightness attenuation values of red, green, and blue are uniformly the same, the white balance may be lost, and for example, what was white may turn yellow. For example, when the brightness of the LED is reduced, it is necessary to make the brightness attenuation value of blue the largest among red, green and blue, and it is preferable to make the brightness attenuation value of red the smallest.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, even when the brightness of the LED is changed by the operation of a player or the like, the brightness attenuation value is set for each of the 1024 ports, for example, so that the white is white. It is configured to maintain the balance as much as possible.

Specifically, when the brightness of the LED is adjusted to one of strong, medium, and weak by the operation of a player or the like, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 refers to the attenuation table of FIG. The brightness of the LED is controlled based on the brightness attenuation values set for each of green and blue. Since the attenuation table is prepared for each of 1024 ports (for each LED), for example, the attenuation value can be set for each port.

For example, when the brightness of the LED is set to be strong by the operation of a player or the like, the sequencer 2260b of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 has a red brightness attenuation value of 0, a green brightness attenuation value of 5, and a blue brightness attenuation value of 25. Is substituted into the above equation (1) to calculate the output value of the LED. Similarly, in the sequencer 2260b of the voice / LED control circuit 2200, when the brightness of the LED is set to the middle by the operation of a player or the like, the brightness attenuation value 50 for red, the brightness attenuation value 53 for green, and the brightness attenuation value for blue are set. When 63 is substituted into the above equation (1) and the brightness of the LED is set to be weak by an operation of a player or the like, the brightness attenuation value 80 of red, the brightness attenuation value 81 of green, and the brightness attenuation value of blue 85 are obtained. Substituting into the above equation (1), the output value of the LED is calculated. Then, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 controls the light emission of the LED based on the output value of the LED calculated in this way.

In this way, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 calculates the LED output value based on the brightness attenuation values set corresponding to each of red, green, and blue, and based on the calculated LED output value. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to maintain the white balance as much as possible even if the brightness of the LED is changed by an operation of, for example, a player or the like.

[10-12. Accessory solenoid control process]
Next, the accessory solenoid control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 61, 62, and 92. FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state between the LED port and the LED and the solenoid.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the movements of the movable body (role) provided in the game area are diversified, and the control of the movable body is complicated accordingly. Therefore, for simple movements among a wide variety of movements of the movable body, the control load of the movable body is suppressed by operating the members constituting the accessory with a solenoid or by providing the accessory with a locking mechanism. I am trying to. When the motor driver that operates the accessory receives a motor operation request (accessory request), the motor driver outputs the contents of the motor operation data in order. The output of the motor driver and the determination of the end of motor operation are performed by a timer interrupt process of 1 msec as shown in FIG. 62. In the timer interrupt process, the output determination and the end determination (that is, the determination of the start and end) of the accessory motor are performed, and the synchronous control of a plurality of motors is also performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 of the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the LED on the frame side connected to each LED port and the LED on the frame side based on the command from the host control circuit 2100. The light emission of the LED on the board surface side (for example, the LED arranged on the game board unit 17 or the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) is controlled via the LED driver. Then, among the LED ports (Port 0 to Port 23) controlled by the LED driver, the above solenoid is connected to Port 6, and the LED is connected to the other Port.

The voice / LED control circuit 2200 receives a command from the host control circuit 2100 and executes the light emission of the LEDs connected to the ports of the frame side LED and the board side LED via the LED driver. By connecting the solenoid to the port 6, the operation of the solenoid can also be executed via the LED driver. As a result, even if the number of solenoids increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, it is possible to suppress the control load for operating the accessory while maintaining the diversity of the movement of the accessory. ..

By the way, when the operation of the solenoid is executed via the LED driver as shown in FIG. 92, it is necessary to synchronously control the operation of the motor for operating the accessory and the operation of the solenoid. It should be noted that the operation of the accessory is performed by interrupt processing of 1 msec including synchronous control of a plurality of motors.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a control code is added to the accessory sequence table, and when it is desired to synchronously control the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory, a value larger than 0 is added to the control code. I try to set it. Then, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the control code of the accessory being reproduced by the accessory device in the processing of the main loop (see step S1204 of FIG. 61), and the acquired control code has a value larger than 0. In this case, the control of the LED port corresponding to the control code (for example, Port 6 to which the above solenoid is connected) is executed (see step S1205 in FIG. 61). This makes it possible to execute synchronous control between the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory.

The control of the LED port corresponding to the control code is executed in the main loop so as not to affect the normal LED control executed by the interrupt process of 1 msec.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the solenoid is connected to some of the LED ports (Port0 to Port23), for example, the brightness of the LED described above is adjusted by the operation of a player or the like. Then, the voltage to the solenoid is also reset, but it is considered that the influence on the solenoid is small because the operation of the solenoid is only ON / OFF. Further, when the synchronization effect for synchronizing the light emission of the LED and the operation of the solenoid is executed, it is possible to easily execute such a synchronization effect.

[10-13. Data load processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a data load process is performed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) executed when the power is turned on. In addition, data loading processing may be performed during the game. These data load processes include data transfer from the ROM to the RAM or buffer (eg, data transfer from the sub-main ROM 2050 to the SRAM 2100b, data transfer from the CGROM 2060 to the built-in VRAM 2370 (eg, all see FIG. 10)), that is. , A process of loading data stored in a ROM into a RAM or a buffer (data load process).

If the amount of data to be transferred is large, the above data load process takes a long time to load, and the watchdog may be reset to end the data load process. When the watchdog is reset, it is difficult to determine whether the cause of the reset is simply because the amount of data is large and it takes time, or because an error has occurred during data loading. Further, when the data loading process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 cannot determine whether the loading is completed or the loading is unsuccessful, and continues to wait for the loading completion, so that the automatic recovery cannot be performed. There is a risk of becoming.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the time required for the data load processing exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the data load process is terminated as an error and the data is reloaded. Hereinafter, the data loading process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a data load process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 93, the host control circuit 2100 first sets the upper limit of the transfer time (step S1651). The transfer time is the time required to load data from the ROM to the RAM. The upper limit of the transfer time varies depending on the amount of data to be transferred, but in the present embodiment, it is determined by the following equation (2).
Upper limit of transfer time = (transfer data amount per unit time) x (transfer time guideline + α) ...
Equation (2)
The transfer data amount and transfer time guideline per unit time of the above equation (2) may be set in advance based on the transfer data amount, or may be set in advance based on the transfer data amount, for example, the host control circuit 2100. It may be calculated by. Note that α is a time for allowing a margin for data loading.

When the process of step S1651 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1652 and starts loading data from the ROM to the RAM.

After starting the data loading (step S1652), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data loading is completed (step S1653). If the data loading is not completed (NO in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1654. On the other hand, if the data load is completed (YES in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 ends the data load process.

In step S1654, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value. If the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (YES in step S1654), the watchdog timer is cleared at regular intervals (step S1655). On the other hand, if the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (NO in step S1654), the host control circuit 2100 determines that an error has occurred and executes error processing. The error processing executed here is a processing of resetting the load data by watchdog reset (step S1656) and reloading without performing the watchdog timer clearing processing. After that, the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1654. That is, when the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (NO in step S1654), the data is reloaded as an error process.

In this way, when performing data load processing, the host control circuit 2100 keeps clearing the watchdog timer at regular intervals while waiting for the completion of loading so that the watchdog reset does not occur during normal loading. I have to. However, when the data load process exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the host control circuit 2100 resets the load data and reloads the data. As a result, even if it takes time to load the data, it will be automatically restored by reloading.

[10-14. Sub-random number processing]
Next, the sub-random number processing executed in the main loop by the host control circuit 2100 will be described.

The sub-random number processing includes a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) when the power is turned on, a random number periodic update process executed periodically, and a random number periodic update process. It includes a random number acquisition process that is executed when a random number is used. The sub-random number process is different from the lottery of special symbols by the main CPU 101 (see, for example, FIG. 9) related to the ball ejection, and is a process for random numbers used for determining, for example, an effect mode, which does not affect the ball ejection. However, the sub-random number processing described below may be applied to the random number processing executed by the main CPU 101. The above-mentioned sub-random number processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number periodic update process. FIG. 96 shows (a) a flowchart showing an example of random number 1 acquisition processing, (b) a flowchart showing an example of random number 2 acquisition processing, (c) a flowchart showing an example of random number 3 acquisition processing, and (d) random number 4 acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, four random numbers are used (random numbers 1 to 4), and the initialization processing for these four random numbers is performed by clearing the game data RAM as shown in FIG. It is executed at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the random number initialization process, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (minutes / seconds) (step S1671), and then enters the loop for the number of random numbers.

In the loop for the number of random numbers, the host control circuit 2100 first creates a random number SEED (step S1672). The random number SEED creation in the random number initialization process is executed based on the following equation (3).
SEED (random numbers 1 to 4) = (RTC time (seconds) + (RTC time (minutes) x 60) + random number number (random numbers 1 to 4)) x initial prime number ... Equation (3)

The host control circuit 2100 creates a random number SEED in step S1672, and then stores the random number SEED created in step S1672 in a random number backup, that is, SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1673). The random number SEED backed up here is the random number SEED created this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be deleted or may be continuously stored.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of steps S1672 and S1673 for the number of random numbers (four random numbers 1 to 4 in this embodiment), the host control circuit 2100 exits the loop for the number of random numbers and ends the random number initialization process.

As described above, the minutes and seconds of the RTC time are used in the random number initialization process. Therefore, the random number SEED at the time of initialization is involved in the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds.

Next, the random number periodic update process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. The random number periodic update process is a process of periodically updating the random numbers 1 to 4 even if none of the random numbers 1 to 4 is used in the waiting for the end of the bank flip shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the random number periodic update process, the host control circuit 2100 has a random number 1 acquisition process (step S1681), a random number 2 acquisition process (step S1682), a random number 3 acquisition process (step S1683), and a random number 4 acquisition process. The processing (step S1684) is performed in this order. The random number periodic update process is always executed while waiting for the end of the bank flip. Further, even if the bank flip end wait does not occur due to any processing failure in the main loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs random number periodic update processing once in one frame.

As shown in FIG. 96A, the random number 1 acquisition process updates the random number 1 (step S1685), that is, after acquiring the random number 1, the random number 1 is updated. After that, the acquired random number 1 is stored in the random number 1 backup, that is, SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1686). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the random number 2 acquisition process updates the random number 2 (step S1688) and backs up the random number 2 (step S1688). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the random number 3 acquisition process updates the random number 3 (step S1689) and backs up the random number 3 (step S1690). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the random number 4 acquisition process updates the random number 4 (step S1691) and backs up the random number 4 (step S1692). The random numbers backed up in step S1686, step S1688, step S1690, and step S1692 are the random numbers acquired this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be deleted or may be continuously stored. ..

Note that any of the random numbers 1 to 4 is obtained from the random numbers generated in the range of 0 to 32767, but the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the random number acquisition process executed when the random number is used, the host control circuit 2100 first performs the random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693). This random number 3 acquisition process is a process of acquiring a random number to be used for determining the random number to be used among the random number 1, the random number 2, and the random number 4. When the random number 3 acquisition process of step S1693 is executed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1694.

In step S1694, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the remainder number (hereinafter, simply referred to as “remainder number”) when the random number acquired in the random number 3 acquisition process in step S1693 is divided by 4 is 0 or 1. To determine. If the remainder number is 0 or 1 (YES in step S1694), the random number 1 acquisition process is performed (step S1695). On the other hand, if the remainder number is neither 0 nor 1 (NO in step S1694), the process proceeds to step S1696.

In step S1696, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the remainder number is 2. If the number of remainders is 2 (YES in step S1696), the random number 2 acquisition process is performed (step S1697). On the other hand, if the remainder number is not 2 (NO in step S1696), the process proceeds to step S1698.

In step S1698, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the remainder number is 3. If the number of remainders is 3 (YES in step S1698), the random number 4 acquisition process is performed (step S1699). On the other hand, if the remainder number is not 3 (NO in step S1698), this means that there is no remainder number 0 to 3, so the process is repeated from step S1693.

The random number 1 acquisition process (step S1695), the random number 2 acquisition process (step S1697), the random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693), and the random number 4 acquisition process (step S1699) are all as shown in FIG. ..

In this way, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the selected random number among the random numbers 1, the random number 2, and the random number 4 is updated, but the unselected random number is updated. Not done.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a random number initialization process is performed when the power is turned on, and when a random number is used, a random number acquisition process is performed for the selected random number, waiting for the end of the bank flip or the end of the bank flip. Even if the wait does not occur, the random number periodic update process is performed.

The calculation formula at the time of random number update is as shown in the following formula (4).
This update value = (previous update value x prime number of each random number) + 1 ... Equation (4)
Here, the return value of the random number acquisition process is a value of 0 to 32767 that is right-shifted and returned from 32 bits to 16 bits. That is, the current update value calculated based on the above equation (4) is represented by 32 bits, and the current update value of the 32 bits is right-shifted and returned from 32 bits to 16 bits. Then, the 16th bit is masked, and the value shown in 1 to 15 bits (any of 0 to 32767) is determined as the update value this time.

By performing the above-mentioned sub-random number processing, the acquired random numbers can be made random, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of bias in the acquired random numbers. In particular, since the random number SEED at the time of initialization is involved in the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to make the initial value different each time.

[10-14-1. Modification example of sub-random number processing]
Although the sub-random number processing in the present embodiment has been described above, the sub-random number processing (modification example) described below may be performed in place of or in combination with the above-mentioned sub-random number processing. Further, the sub-random number processing (modification example) described below may be applied to the random number processing executed by the main CPU 101. A modification of this sub-random number processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. Note that FIG. 98 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a modified example of the sub-random number process. However, in FIG. 98, only the processing necessary for the explanation is shown, and the other processing is omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the reception interrupt process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

The host control circuit 2100 first performs a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) (step S1701). In this random number initialization process, for example, a random number seed of a power of 2 (a perfect power) and a current random number seed number are prepared, and a predetermined initial value is set in the stack pointer.

When the random number initialization process of step S1701 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 enters the main loop, performs input processing of the subdevice (step S1702), and then performs various request control processes (step S1703). In this various request control process (step S1703), the output is output to various devices based on the request created in step S1705 described later one frame before.

When the input process of the subdevice (step S1702) and various request control processes (step S1703) are performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a random number table creation process (step S1704). In the random number table creation process of step S1704, a new random number table is created by updating the random numbers registered in the random number table having a power of 2 size at the drawing timing. To acquire the random numbers registered in the random number table, for example, among the random number seeds of powers of 2, a random number seed determined based on the current random number seed number is used. For example, when the random number seeds a to h of 23 (8) are prepared, if the current random number seed number is 4, the random number seed of d is used.

In step S1704, the host control circuit 2100 can create a random number table having a size of, for example, 25 (32), and 32 random numbers are registered in this random number table. When the random number is registered in the random number table, the host control circuit 2100 updates the value of the random number seed. The random number seed is updated by adding 1 after multiplying the previous update value × the prime number, as in the above equation (4). In this modification, the size of the random number table may be a power of 2 (pieces), and 25 (32) is adopted, but any power of 2 (pieces) may be used. ..

As shown in FIG. 99, the random number seed used for creating the random number table in step S1704 is, for example, the value of the CPU counter by the CPU processor of the host control circuit 2100 when receiving a serial command (step S1801). It is updated using (step S1802). In the random number seed update process of step S1802, the random number seed number used for creating the random number table is updated by incrementing the random number seed number and using the incremented random number seed number as the current random number seed number.

Returning to FIG. 98 and performing the random number table creation process in step S1704, the host control circuit 2100 enters the packet reception loop.

In the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1705) for creating a request for animation for moving image production, and performs a random number acquisition process when a random number is used (step S1706). The request created in step S1705 is output in the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

The host control circuit 2100 acquires a random number from the random number table created in step S1704 in the random number acquisition process of step S1706. The random numbers acquired here are used in a lottery related to the effect executed by the host control circuit 2100 (for example, a lottery for determining an animation for moving image effect). When the host control circuit 2100 acquires a random number from the random number table in step S1706, the host control circuit 2100 updates (increments) the reference position of the random number table. The reference position of the random number table is only performed when a random number is acquired from the random number table, and is not performed in the random number table creation process in step S1704.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processes of steps S1705 and S1706 for the number of received packets. When the processing of step S1705 and step S1706 is performed for the packet reception, the host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation update processing (step S1707), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1708).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processes of steps S1702 to S1708 in the main loop having a period of 33.3 msec.

According to the above-mentioned modification of the sub-random number processing, even if there are multiple random number acquisition opportunities in the packet reception loop, only the random number is acquired by changing the reference position using the same random number table already created. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load of the host control circuit 2100 while giving irregularity to the acquired random numbers.

[10-15. Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and benefits are given based on the result of the game. That is, not only is the game played by the game medium being launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit 100 itself is The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device attached (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

When the game media management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages the game media management device, the game media management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for a game medium lending operation (that is, a player performs a game medium loading operation). Operation) or when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout action of the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player is performed, and the necessary game medium is acquired. It is sufficient that the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays, for example, the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game media handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the game medium management device described above, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the player not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above with respect to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the game medium management device. Here, obtaining a holding ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game media management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. Further, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball held (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball held. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the game machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

[10-16. Processing related to the operation of the character in the character group]
The processing related to the operation of the accessory (the accessory (including the operating member constituting the accessory) constituting the accessory group 1000) in the accessory group 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 107. The accessory referred to here is a movable accessory that can be operated by driving various power sources such as a motor and a solenoid, and does not include a non-movable decorative accessory. The accessory is driven based on the control signal and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100, but the excitation data includes the number of steps (for example, when the power source is a stepping motor). The data is not limited to specific data as long as it has a unit representing the magnitude of power such as excitation time and excitation time.

The processing related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group 1000 is largely the initial operation process of the accessory performed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on and the sub-control main process (or sub-control main) by the host control circuit 2100. There is an accessory control process performed in various request control processes in the process). Hereinafter, the accessory initial operation process and the accessory control process will be described in order.

[10-16-1. Character initial operation processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 100, the accessory initial operation process performed by the host control circuit 2100 as one of various initialization processes (see, for example, step S1201 in FIG. 61) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory initial operation process executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

First, the host control circuit 2100 sets the number of operations of the motor used to operate the accessory, that is, the initial position recovery counter to "0" (step S1901).

After the process of step S1901, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory of the accessory group 1000 is in the initial position (step S1902). In the process of step S1902, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not the accessory is in the initial position of the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (specifically, whether or not the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is in the initial position). The determination is made based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor) provided corresponding to the accessory that is the determination target.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902), whether or not the number of operations is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), that is, the value of the initial position recovery counter is "10". It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than that (step S1904).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the number of operations is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 performs an initial position movement operation (step S1906). This initial position moving operation is an operation of driving the motor so as to move the accessory to the initial position.

After the process of step S1906, the host control circuit 2100 adds "1" to the number of motor operations, that is, the value of the initial position recovery counter (step S1907), and proceeds to step S1902. Therefore, as long as it is determined that the accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902) until the number of times the motor is operated reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 has step S1902, step S1904, and step. The initial position movement processing of S1906 and step S1907 will be repeated.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1904 that the number of operations is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial position movement process and sets the transition to the error motor operation stop state. The process is performed (step S1905). When the error motor operation is shifted to the stopped state, the operation of all the accessories is stopped, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory initial operation process, and returns the process to the sub-control main process (see, for example, FIG. 61).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1902 that the accessory is in the initial position (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1901 and determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position for the next accessory. Determine (step S1902). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the motors for operating the accessory to be used are in the initial positions (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 performs a power-on processing (step S1903) to perform the accessory initial operation process. Is terminated, and the process is returned to the sub-control main process (see, for example, FIG. 61).

The power-on processing in step S1903 is a process of moving the accessory to the initial position after moving the accessory to the maximum range of motion in order to confirm the operation of the accessory. In the power-on processing of step S1903, the operation of moving the accessory to the maximum range of motion and then moving it to the initial position may be performed simultaneously for all the accessories, or one or a plurality of accessories may be performed in order. It may be.

In the process of turning on the power in step S1903, that is, the process of moving the accessory to the maximum range of motion and then moving it to the initial position, it is sufficient if the operation of the accessory can be confirmed. When there is an accessory to be driven (for example, an accessory that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves from the first stage to the second stage), as an operation check of the accessory, the first stage from the initial position. It may be controlled to execute the first operation check that moves to the first stage and the second operation check that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves to the second stage.

Further, for example, a first accessory that is driven stepwise (for example, a first accessory that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves from the first stage to the second stage) and from the initial position. When there is a second accessory that drives to a predetermined position, as an operation check of the accessory, a first operation check is performed in which the first accessory moves from the initial position to the first stage, and then the first operation is confirmed. A third operation check is performed in which the second accessory moves from the initial position to a predetermined position, and then a second operation check in which the first accessory moves from the first stage to the second stage is performed. You may. In this case, by performing the third operation check between the first operation check and the second operation check, it is possible to efficiently check the operation of a plurality of accessories.

As described above, in the accessory initial operation processing, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position when the power is turned on (specifically, among the accessory detection sensor group 1002). , The accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the target of determining whether or not it is in the initial position) (step S1902), and if all the accessories are in the initial position, when the power is turned on. The process (step S1903) is performed. Then, when there is an accessory that is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902), the initial position movement process (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). If there is no accessory in the initial position even after performing the initial position movement processing (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) a specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 causes an error. The transition setting process to the motor operation stop state is performed (step S1905). As a result, when the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not the motor for operating the accessory operates normally, and to move the accessory to the initial position when the accessory is not in the initial position. Can be done. Moreover, if the accessory happens to be in the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the accessory cannot return to the initial position while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

[10-16-2. Character control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the accessory control process performed in step S210 during the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory control processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current operation status is a command reception standby operation capable of receiving a command from the main control circuit 100 (that is, whether or not the command reception standby flag is ON). (Step S1911).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation status is not in the command reception standby operation from the main control circuit 100 (that is, the command reception standby flag is OFF) (NO in step S1911), the accessory control The processing is completed, and the processing is transferred to the sub-control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation status is in the reception standby operation of the command from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1911), whether or not the host control circuit 2100 has received the command related to the effect from the main control circuit 100. Is determined (step S1912). The commands related to the effect to be judged in this process are, for example, a special symbol fluctuation start command, a special symbol fluctuation stop command, a demo command, a fluctuation confirmation command, and a jackpot command, and these commands are the hosts. When received by the control circuit 2100, each accessory in the accessory group 1000 is driven.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the command related to the effect has not been received from the main control circuit 100 (NO in step S1912), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and performs the process as the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). Move to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the host control circuit 2100 has received the command related to the effect from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the host control circuit 2100 performs the effect command reception time process (step S1913). In this effect command reception time processing, as shown in FIG. 102 described later, according to the command related to the effect received from the main control circuit 100, the variation start command reception time accessory processing (step S19133), the initial position restoration accessory Each process of operation processing (step S19134), demo command receiving accessory processing (step S19136), fluctuation confirmation command receiving accessory processing (step S19138), and hit command receiving accessory processing (step S19139) is performed. It is said. Details of each of these processes will be described later.

In the present embodiment, an example in which each of the processes of step S19133, step S19136, step S19138, and step S19139 is performed in the accessory control process is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and commands related to the production are not limited to this. Are received, each of these processes may be performed as an interrupt process, or the command analysis process described above (step S204 in FIG. 52).
Each of these processes may be performed immediately after (see).

After executing the effect command reception processing (step S1913), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set (step S1914).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the acceptance permission for the accessory request is not set (NO in step S1914), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set (YES in step S1914), the host control circuit 2100 acquires the accessory request stored in the accessory request buffer in the animation construction process of FIG. 61. Process (step S1915).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of step S1915, the host control circuit 2100 generates a request for effect control in order to synchronize the effect operation by each accessory in the accessory group 1000 with the effect operation by the display device 16. After two frames have elapsed, the above-mentioned acquisition process of the accessory request is executed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 transmits excitation data to the motor driver via the I2C controller 2610 based on the acquired accessory request (step S1916), and then sets the command reception standby flag to ON (step S1917). ). Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (step S1918). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 may determine whether a communication error between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 or an error of the I2C controller 2610 is detected (acquired or input).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (YES in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 sets the communication controller error (step S1921). Then, after the process of step S1921, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the communication error signal is not received from the I2C controller 261 (NO in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the address of each motor driver can be accessed (step S1919).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the address of each motor driver cannot be accessed (NO in step S1919), it sets a connection error (step S1922). Then, after the process of step S1922, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the address of each motor driver can be accessed (YES in step S1919), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the operation of each accessory (each motor) is normally completed (step S1920).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the operation of each accessory (each motor) has ended normally (YES in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and performs the process as the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of each accessory (each motor) is not normally completed (NO in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 sets a data error (step S1923). Then, after the process of step S1923, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process and shifts the process to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

[10-16-3. Processing when receiving production commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the effect processing at the time of receiving the effect system command performed in step S1913 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of receiving a production command. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the effect system command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 sets the command reception standby flag to OFF in step S19131. Then, the host control circuit 2100 executes each process according to the command of the effect system received in step S1912. Specifically, when the command received in step S1912 is the variation start command (YES in step S19132), the accessory process at the time of receiving the variation start command (step S19133) is executed. After that, the host control circuit 2100 executes the initial position restoration accessory operation process (step S19134), and ends the process at the time of receiving the effect system command.

If the command received in step S1912 is a demo command (NO in step S19132 and YES in step S19135), the demo command reception accessory processing (step S19136) is executed, and the production command is received. End the process.

If the command received in step S1912 is a fluctuation determination command (NO in both steps S19132 and S19135 and YES in step S19137), the variable start command reception accessory process (step S19138) is executed. Then, the processing when the production command is received is terminated.

Further, when the command received in step S1912 is neither a fluctuation confirmation command, a demo command, or a fluctuation confirmation command (NO in step S19132, step S19135, and step S19137), it is determined that the hit system command has been received. , The accessory process at the time of receiving the hit system command (step S19139) is executed, and the process at the time of receiving the effect system command is completed. If the command received in step S1912 is neither a fluctuation confirmation command, a demo command, or a fluctuation confirmation command, the command received in step S1912 is the hit command instead of determining that the hit command has been received. It is also possible to execute the accessory process (step S19139) at the time of receiving the hit system command based on the determination that the above is true.

The above-mentioned variable start command received accessory process (step S19133), initial position recovery accessory operation process (step S19134), demo command received accessory process (step S19136), variable start command received accessory process (step S19138). ) And each process of the accessory process at the time of receiving the hit system command (step S19139) will be described below.

[10-16-4. When the fluctuation start command is received, the accessory processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the accessory processing at the time of receiving the change start command of the special symbol performed in step S19133 during the processing at the time of receiving the effect system command (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the change start command of the special symbol. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the special symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories (including the operating members constituting the accessories) of the accessory group 1000 are in the initial positions (step S19141). In the process of step S19141, the host control circuit 2100 determines based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor group 1002 that detects that each accessory exists at the initial position.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the accessories are in the initial positions (YES in step S19141), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19142). When the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set, the control state of each accessory of the accessory group 1000 shifts from the command reception standby state to the accessory request acceptance permission state.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the initial position recovery counter to “0” (step S19143). Then, after the process of step S19143, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory process at the time of receiving the variation start command.

On the other hand, in step S19141, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is an accessory that is not in the initial position, that is, that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19141), the initial position recovery counter is set to ". 1 ”is added (step S19144).

After executing the process of step S19144, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the initial position recovery counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (step S19145).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position recovery counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (YES in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operation of all the accessories is stopped. After the processing of step S19146, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the variation start command.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position restoration counter is not more than the specified number of times (NO in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 sets the transition to the initial position restoration operation state (step S19147). In the initial position recovery operation state, the initial position recovery operation process described later is executed.

In this way, in the accessory processing when the variation start command is received, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions when the variation start command of the special symbol is received by the accessory detection sensor group 1002. (Step S19141) If there is an accessory that is not in the initial position, the setting is made so that the acceptance of the accessory request is not permitted (prohibited) and the transition to the initial position restoration operation state is performed (step S19147). Then, when the number of times of the bonus processing at the time of receiving the variation start command, which is determined in step S19141 that one or more bonuses are not in the initial position, reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) continuously, the host control circuit 2100 causes The transition to the motor error operation stop state is set. That is, even if there is an accessory that is not in the initial position at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the variation of the special symbol starts continuously within the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) in the situation that there is an accessory that is not in the initial position. Up to that point, the setting is made to shift to the initial position restoration operation state, and when the specified number of times is reached, the setting is made to shift to the error motor operation stop state. Therefore, if there is an accessory that does not return to the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the accessory that cannot return to the initial position while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state. If it continues, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

[10-16-5. Initial position recovery accessory operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the initial position restoration accessory operation process performed in step S19134 during the production command reception process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the initial position restoration accessory operation process. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the setting for shifting to the initial position restoration operation state in step S19147 of the accessory process at the time of receiving the variation start command (see FIG. 103).

First, whether or not the host control circuit 2100 is in the initial position restoration operation state, that is, whether or not the transition setting to the initial position restoration operation state is made in step S19147 of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command (see FIG. 103). Whether or not it is determined (step S19151).

If it is not in the initial position restoration operation state (NO in step S19151), the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial position restoration accessory operation process.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is in the initial position restoration operation state (YES in step S19151), it determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position in the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (specifically, the accessory detection sensor group 1002). Of these, the accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the target of determining whether or not the accessory is in the initial position) detects the accessory, and determines whether or not the accessory is in the initial position (step S1952).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not in the initial position (YES in step S1952), the host control circuit 2100 executes the initial position movement operation process (step S19153). This initial position movement operation process is a process of driving the motor to return the accessory to the initial position.

The processes of steps S19152 and S19153 are performed for the number of motors that drive the accessory.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is in the initial position (NO in step S1952), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the next accessory is in the initial position without performing the process of step S19153. (Step S19152).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the processes of step S19152 and / and step S19153 for the number of motors for driving the accessory, the initial position restoration accessory operation process ends.

[10-16-6. When receiving a demo command, processing the accessory]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the demo command reception accessory processing performed in step S19136 during the production command reception processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory processing at the time of receiving a demo command. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the receipt of the demo command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (step S19161). In this process, for example, the host control circuit 2100 causes various errors (communication controller error, connection error, data error) set in the processes after step S1918 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101). Determine if it is.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, no error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19161), the accessory excitation is performed. The opening process is performed (step S19162). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 stops outputting excitation data to all motor drivers.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19163).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial positions (YES in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19164). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the demo command.

On the other hand, in step S19161, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (NO in step S19161), the accessory request is not accepted. Permission is set (step S19165).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 stops all the motors (step S19166), performs the motor driver reset process (step S19167) after the process of step S19166, and ends the accessory process at the time of receiving the demo command.

As described above, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the demo command, the host control circuit 2100 performs an error check (step S19161) of the motor driver for driving the accessory, and if an error is detected, the accessory request is performed. Is prohibited (step S19165), and the motor driver reset process (step S19167) is performed. If no error is detected, the bonus detection sensor group 1002 determines whether or not all the bonuses are in the initial position after performing the release process (step S19162) for releasing all the excitations of the bonuses. When it is detected (step S19163) and all the accessories are in the initial position, the acceptance of the accessory request is permitted.

[10-16-7. When the fluctuation confirmation command is received, the accessory processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the accessory processing at the time of receiving the change determination command of the special symbol performed in step S19138 during the processing at the time of receiving the effect system command (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the change determination command of the special symbol. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the special symbol variation determination command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (step S19171). In this process, the host control circuit 2100, similarly to step S19161 (see FIG. 105), for example, various errors (communication controller error,) set in the processes after step S1918 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101). Determine if a connection error, data error, etc. has occurred.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, no error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19171), the number of continuous errors is determined. The indicated continuous error counter is set to "0" (step S19172).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19173).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial positions (YES in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19174). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessories are not in the initial position (NO in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command.

On the other hand, in step S19171, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (NO in step S19171), the control to stop all the motors. Is executed (step S19175).

After the process of step S19175, the host control circuit 2100 performs a motor driver reset process (step S19176), adds 1 to the number of continuous errors, that is, adds "1" to the value of the continuous error counter (step S19177).

After the processing of step S19177, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the value of the continuous error counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (step S19178).

When the value of the continuous error counter is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19179). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operation of all the accessories is stopped. After the processing of step S19179, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous error counter is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs the transition setting process to the accessory request acceptance disallowed state (step S19180). ..

The number of continuous errors, that is, the value of the continuous error counter indicates the number of times that the accessory processing at the time of receiving the variation determination command, which is determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19171), is continuously performed.

As described above, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, the host control circuit 2100 performs an error check of the motor driver for driving the accessory (step S19171), and when an error is detected, the motor driver (Step S19176), and the acceptance of the accessory request is prohibited (step S19180). Then, when the number of times of the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation determination command determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19161) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 is in the error motor operation stopped state. (Step S19179), the operation of all the accessories is stopped. Further, when it is determined that there is no motor error (YES in step S19171), the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S19173), and all of them. When the accessory is in the initial position, the acceptance of the accessory request is permitted (step S19174). Therefore, if it happens to be a motor error due to a minor trouble (error), the motor error continues while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state by keeping it with the disapproval of the accessory request acceptance. In that case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

The initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 (see FIG. 103) described above corresponds to the first restoration process of the present invention, and the motor driver reset process in step S19176 (see FIG. 106) is the second of the present invention. Corresponds to recovery processing. However, in addition to the initial position restoration operation transition setting, the first restoration process may be various operations such as motor error cancellation and restoration operation such as moving the accessory from the standby position to the drive position. Similarly, regarding the second recovery process, in addition to the motor driver reset process, the process in the sub control circuit 200 is executed again, the parameters are set again regarding the operation of the motor, and the same as in the first recovery process. Various processes such as control may be performed.

Further, the process of step S19144 described above corresponds to the first counting means of the present invention, and the process of step S19177 described above corresponds to the second counting means of the present invention. Strictly speaking, neither the first counting means nor the second counting means counts the number of games played. However, the above-mentioned first recovery process can be performed each time a fluctuation start command is received, and the above-mentioned second recovery process can be performed each time a fluctuation confirmation command is received. Therefore, the first counting means and the second counting means do not strictly count the number of games as described above, but substantially count the number of games (variation number). it can.

Further, if the above-mentioned first counting means has a specification that the initial position recovery counter is reset only when the power is turned off, the number of consecutive games (number of fluctuations) does not have to be, and "power is supplied from the time the power is turned on. It can be expressed as "the number of games in which the accessory did not exist at the initial position before being refused". Further, if the initial position recovery counter is reset by, for example, the presence of the accessory in the initial position, the number of consecutive fluctuations in which the accessory does not exist in the initial position and the first counting means are used. It is possible that the counted number will be the same value. Further, since the above-mentioned second counting means is the number of times the motor error has occurred continuously, it may be substantially the same value as the number of games (number of fluctuations) in which the motor error has occurred continuously. , If the power is turned off between the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the end of the fluctuation, and then the power is restored, the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means are reset during the fluctuation of the special symbol. Will be done. Therefore, in such a case, when the sub-control circuit 200 receives the fluctuation determination command indicating the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the counting value by the first counting means is changed to 0 and the counting value by the second counting means is changed to 1. Therefore, there may be a difference between the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means. Considering this way, the counting value counted by the first counting means and the second counting means can be expressed as the number of games, and the first counting means is the number of games that start the game to change the special symbol. It is the same, and it can be expressed that the second counting means is the same as the number at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed. However, the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means are not reset by simply turning the power on and off. For example, a reset button provided on the main control board 30 (not shown). ) And other operating means related to the setting (setting key 328 and setting switch 332) while performing power operation (power on operation and power off operation), setting confirmation processing and / and setting It may be reset only when the change process is performed.

Regarding the number of games (number of fluctuations), it may be defined that one game (one symbol variation) was performed at the start of the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). , It may be defined that one game was played at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (when the result of the special lottery is derived), or after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol The entire game until the end of the variable display may be defined as one game.

[10-16-8. When a hit command is received, the accessory processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the hit-type command reception-time accessory processing performed in step S19139 in the production-type command reception-time processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of accessory processing at the time of receiving a hit system command. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the hit system command transmitted from the main control circuit 100. The hit-type commands correspond to, for example, a command for shifting to a jackpot game state (a command for starting a jackpot game), a command for starting a round game, a command for inter-round games (for example, an interval time, etc.), a command for ending a jackpot game state, and the like.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions (step S19181).

When it is determined that all the accessories are in the initial positions (YES in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 sets the acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19182). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory process at the time of receiving the hit system command.

As described above, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the hit system command, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial positions by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S19181), and all the accessories are released. If it is in the initial position, it is allowed to accept the character request (step S19182), and if it is determined that one or more characters are not in the initial position, it is a hit system without permitting the acceptance of the character request. When a command is received, the accessory processing is terminated.

It should be noted that it is determined whether or not the number of operations in step S1904 (see FIG. 100) is equal to or greater than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) through all the processes related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group, and step S19145 (FIG. Determining whether the initial position recovery counter of (see 103) is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, and whether the value of the continuous error counter in step S1968 (see FIG. 105) is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more. In the determination of whether or not, the specified number of times is the same (10 times) in each case, but it goes without saying that the specified number of times may be different in each process.

Further, if the error continues in the initial operation processing of the accessory (see FIG. 101), the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command (see FIG. 103), and the accessory processing at the time of receiving the variation confirmation command (see FIG. 106), the motor It has been explained that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to the error operation stop state, but the following errors can be exemplified as the occurrence of a serious error.

For example, a predetermined accessory (including an operating member constituting the accessory) is provided so as to be able to operate from a specific position (for example, an initial position) to a predetermined position (for example, a maximum range of motion). The predetermined accessory is operated by, for example, a motor. Then, when a predetermined accessory is present at a specific position, the predetermined accessory is locked by a locking member (for example, a solenoid). The lock member is located at a lock position for locking a predetermined accessory in a normal state (for example, when not energized), and normally operates at an unlocked position to unlock the predetermined accessory. The locking member is energized, for example, by the host control circuit 2100 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 (both see FIG. 10). Then, the host control circuit 2100 energizes the lock member when the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position to the specified position, and the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position to the specified position. It is configured to end the energization of the lock member after the start. That is, after the predetermined accessory moves toward the specified position, the lock member is in the lock position when returning to the specific position, and is locked when the predetermined accessory is pushed into the specific position. .. In such a configuration, if a motor error (for example, an error in which a motor drive command to the motor driver cannot be transmitted due to a communication error) occurs, the motor cannot be driven. On the other hand, although the lock member is energized, the predetermined accessory does not start operating toward the specified position. Therefore, the energized state of the lock member continues (the lock member continues to stay in the unlocked position), and the lock member may be disconnected due to an overcurrent. Therefore, when such an error occurs, the error motor operation stop is not set until the error reaches the specified number of times, but if such an error continues to occur the specified number of times, the error motor operation stop. By setting the transition to, the motor error operation stop state will not be entered even if a minor error occurs, and if the error occurs continuously for the specified number of times, the motor error operation stop state will be entered. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors such as the lock member being disconnected due to overcurrent.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect system command is received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the effect system command reception time process (step S1913) is executed according to the received effect system command, and then the effect system command is executed. The process of determining whether or not the transfer permission of the accessory request is set (step S1914) is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a command reception standby operation is in progress between steps S1913 and step S1914. A process for determining whether or not a command may be received (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a "command reception standby operation determination process (not shown)) may be executed. The processing method in this case may be any of the following first processing methods to third processing methods.

The first processing method is a control that shifts from the status during the command reception standby operation to one of the statuses of the character request acceptance permission, the error motor operation stop, the initial position recovery operation, and the character request acceptance disapproval. This is the processing method by the host control circuit 2100 in the case, and the processing is executed by the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to the process of step S1911).
(B) When the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, and hit command has been received. To do.
(C) When a production command is received from the main control circuit 100 (corresponding to YES in step S1912), the variation start command is processed when the command is received, the demo command is processed when the command is received, and the variation is confirmed according to the received command. Executes the accessory processing when receiving a command or the accessory processing when receiving a hit command, and from the status of waiting for command reception, the accessory request acceptance is permitted, the error motor operation is stopped, the initial position recovery operation and the accessory request acceptance are not permitted. After shifting to one of the statuses, execute the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown). When all the accessories are restored to the initial positions as a result of the initial position restoration accessory operation processing, they are controlled during the command reception standby operation.
(D) When it is determined that the command reception standby operation is in progress in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown in the figure), another command is executed by executing the process of step S1912 with all the accessories in the initial positions. It may be determined whether it is being received, whether it is receiving the next fluctuation start command, etc., and if it is based on the currently received fluctuation start command, for example, during one fluctuation (with one fluctuation start command), for example. The process of step S1912 may be executed 10 times.
(E) If NO is determined in the process of step S1914 (process of determining whether or not the transfer permission of the accessory request is set) executed after the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown), the error motor If the operation is stopped, the motor is stopped until the power is turned off. In addition, if the character reception is not permitted, the character will not be activated, but when the fluctuation start command etc. is received, it is determined whether or not all the characters are in the initial position, and the character request is accepted. It may be controlled to the permitted state.

The second processing method is a command reception standby operation in which the production system commands (variation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, hit system command) are not received as commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100. This is the processing method in the case of, and the processing is executed by the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to the process of step S1911).
(B) When the command reception standby operation is in progress (corresponding to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation start command, demo command, fluctuation confirmation command, and hit command has been received. To do.
(C) When a production command is received from the main control circuit 100 (corresponding to YES in step S1912), the status shifts from the command reception standby status to the command reception non-standby operation status.
(D) Depending on the received production command, the variable start command received bonus process, the demo command received bonus process, the variable confirmation command received bonus process, or the hit command received bonus process is executed.
(E) If none of the variable start command received bonus processing, the demo command received bonus process, the variable confirmation command received bonus process, and the hit command received bonus process is executed, the command is received. Return to standby status. If any one of the variable start command reception bonus processing, demo command reception bonus processing, fluctuation confirmation command reception bonus processing, and hit command reception bonus processing is performed, the command Since the status shifts to a status other than reception standby, it is determined as NO in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown).

The third processing method is based on the premise that a plurality of types of commands are received as production commands, for example, depending on the type of the received command, the variable start command reception accessory processing, the demo command reception accessory processing, and the like. This is a processing method that loops the accessory processing when receiving a variable confirmation command and the accessory processing when receiving a hit command. Since the command reception standby operation is canceled when the variation start command reception accessory processing, demo command reception accessory processing, fluctuation confirmation command reception accessory processing, and hit command reception accessory processing are looped. If there is, the above looping process may be performed when YES is determined in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown).

[10-17. Hall menu task processing]
Next, processing related to the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the host control circuit 2100 at a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in this embodiment.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of a hall menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S301). Specifically, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 at the time of turning on the power is received.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it determines that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu display process in step S302. This hall menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying the hall menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300. The hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 even when the process of step S312 described later is executed. However, the hall menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hall menu displayed in step S312 are displayed. There are some differences from the screen, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed. 110 and 111 are diagrams showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, when the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the hall menu screen has a hall menu item display area 1610 in the left side area of the screen, an operation explanation area 1620 in the lower left-right direction, and a preview arranged in the center of the screen. It has a display area 1630 and.

Each item of the hall menu is displayed in the hall menu item display area 1610. In FIGS. 109 to 111, for convenience, only the time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hall menu items, but these items are shown. In addition, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume control setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, it is not possible to end the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items in the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 1620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. In the hall menu screen, the activated operation buttons and the disabled operation buttons in the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be distinguishable. For example, in FIGS. 109 to 111, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b are enabled), and the disabled operation buttons are displayed. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

By operating the activated select buttons (up / down select buttons 664a, 664b), one of a plurality of hall menu items can be selected. In FIGS. 109 and 110, the hall menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hall menu item. For example, FIG. 109 shows that the "time setting" surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 111, it is shown that the “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item. However, the highlight display is not always limited as long as the selected item can be easily grasped by the operator. The screen in which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 109 and 110) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1630, a preview screen for a selected item among a plurality of hall menu items is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 109 and 110), and when the "setting change / confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is made. The change / confirmation history screen is previewed (see FIG. 111). However, it is preferable not to display the set value on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It should be noted that the operation cannot be performed in the above preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is previewed, the time setting operation cannot be performed on the preview displayed time setting screen, and the time setting displayed as a hall menu item is selected and decided. You can set the time on the time setting screen displayed by.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 is set in the display area of the display device 16 together with the hall menu screen, for example, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. "Confirming" is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10) so that a voice such as "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed" is output from the speaker 24. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes a control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10). In this way, the operator is made to grasp whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without hindering the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu process in step S303. Details of this hall menu process (step S303) will be described later.

After executing the hall menu process (step S303), the host control circuit 2100 executes a command (initialization command) indicating whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, the setting change process is completed. It is determined whether or not a command (power recovery command) indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command is received (NO in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 continues to execute the hall menu process in step S303.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the host control circuit 2100 at the same timing as the command.

The changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timings as long as it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command, it is not necessary to transmit the set value information to the host control circuit 2100 because the set value has not been changed, but the set value information is also the host control circuit 2100. It may be sent to.

When the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed in step S304, that is, when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is determined whether or not the number of histories is a predetermined number N or more (step S305). This records the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data to the free area according to the number of histories stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. This is to prevent the situation where you cannot record when you want to. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, but is set to 500, for example, in the present embodiment.

If the number of histories of the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is a predetermined number N or more (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, and the history information overwriting process (step S306) is executed. The history information overwriting process in step S306 overwrites the history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in order from the earliest stored history (oldest history information). It should be noted that the above-mentioned history information includes history information of the error motor operation stop state, history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and history information of disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request. The history information of the error motor operation stop state is the date and time information set to shift to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146 in FIG. 103, step S19179 in FIG. 106) and the error motor operation stop state is released (FIGS. 108 and 114). Step S311) Date and time information and the like. The history information of the initial position restoration operation transition setting is the date and time information of the initial position movement operation (step S1906 in FIG. 100) and the initial position restoration operation transition setting (step S19147 in FIG. 103). The history information of disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request is date and time information or the like in which the accessory request is disapproved (step S19165 in FIG. 105, step S19180 in FIG. 106). However, strictly speaking, the error motor operation stop state is released in step S311 described later. However, since the process of step S311 is always performed when controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the date and time information controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is used as the date and time information when the error motor operation stop state is released. Should be overwritten.

Further, in the above, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and the history information of disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in step S306 or step S307. However, when "error information history" is selected in the hall menu processing in step S302 (YES in step S3008 in FIG. 115), it is reflected in the error information history screen (see FIG. 116) displayed on the display device 16. From the viewpoint, between step S301 and step S302, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and the history information of the disapproval of acceptance of the accessory request are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is preferable to carry out the treatment of causing.

In addition, as described above, by making it possible to view the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting and the history information of the disapproval of acceptance of accessory requests, although it has not led to a serious error such as an error motor operation stop. The game machine manager can grasp in advance the possibility of leading to a serious error such as an error motor operation stop, and can appropriately manage the pachinko game machine 1.

In the history information overwriting process in step S306, the history information already stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is overwritten with new history information, and as a result, the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is eventually overwritten. It is designed to be erased, but it is not limited to this. For example, if there is a risk that the predetermined upper limit will be exceeded if new history information is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received, at least the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a The history information may be stored after erasing a part of the information. Further, even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, when there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, the setting history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a may be exceeded. At least a part may be erased.

If the number of histories stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is less than a predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S307 and records the history information in the free area of the subwork RAM 2100a. The recording process (step S307) is executed. The history information recorded in step S307 also includes history information about the error motor operation stop state.

In this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S306 and the history information recording process in step S307 may be collectively referred to as history recording process.

The history information is the time information measured by the RTC209 and the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or setting confirmation) when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101. Information that the process has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information that the setting change process is executed, and the setting value information after the setting change sent from the main CPU 101 are used. The information associated with is the history information. Further, when the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 correspond to each other. The attached information is history information. When the power recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the history information, but it is transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process. It is preferable to include the current set value information in the history information. Further, the browsing history is also included in the above history information, and if the setting change / confirmation history is browsed in the hall menu process (step S303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306. Alternatively, in step S307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the free area of the subwork RAM 2100a.

In the normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, power failure recovery command, setting operation command, etc.) is immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the host control circuit 2100 is started. However, when the host control circuit 2100 does not receive a command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since it was started, it determines that the host control circuit 2100 is abnormal, and puts the game stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side. Each aspect of the display output, the sound output, and the LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, stores not only the date and time information but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour, minute and second.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the process of step S306 or step S307, and then proceeds to step S308.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S308 whether or not the setting has been changed, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S304 (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting change start command, the power failure recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. Further, in the process of step S308, since it is sufficient for the host control circuit 2100 to determine that the setting has been changed, instead of determining whether or not the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, after the change. It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the setting value information of.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change has been made (YES in step S308), the host control circuit 2100 performs the setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

In step S310, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the error motor operation is stopped (step S310). That is, if the processes of step S1905 (see FIG. 100), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179 (see FIG. 106) are performed, it is determined that the error motor operation is stopped.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the error motor operation stop state is determined (YES in step S310), the host control circuit 2100 releases the error motor operation stop state (step S311). When the error motor operation stop state is released, all the accessories can be operated.

On the other hand, if the error motor operation is not stopped (NO in step S310), it is determined whether or not the accessory request is disallowed (step S322), and if the accessory request is disallowed (YES in step S322). ), Release the disapproval of the accessory request, reset the initial position recovery counter, reset the number of consecutive errors (step S323), and move to step S312. If the accessory request is not permitted (NO in step S322), the process proceeds to step S312 without performing the process of step S322.

The release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is executed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting. It may be canceled when the change process is performed and may not be canceled when the setting confirmation process is performed.

Further, as described above, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is also performed, but the release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is executed when the setting change process is performed, while the setting is performed. It is preferable not to execute the backup clear process without the change process (for example, the backup clear process executed at the time of NO determination in step S22 of FIG. 33). Since the production using the character group is an important factor for enhancing the game interest, it is undeniable that the interest is lowered when the game is played on the game machine in which the character cannot operate normally. Therefore, important decisions such as whether or not to operate a game machine whose accessory has become inoperable should be made by an authorized hall official, and the error motor operation stop state cannot be canceled by an unauthorized person. I have to. However, it is convenient when a serious error such as an error motor operation stop state has not occurred, such as cancellation of disapproval of accessory request, reset of initial position recovery counter, reset of number of continuous errors (step S323). From this point of view, it is preferable that the backup clear process is executed not only when the setting change process is performed but also when the backup clear process is performed without the setting change process.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the hall menu redisplay process in step S312. At this time, the hall menu screen that is redisplayed is different from the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) that is displayed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. It is a screen displayed in a state where it can be executed (or during the game return process in step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 112, an item for ending the hall menu is displayed as one of the items in the hall menu. Will be done. Note that FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu redisplay process of step S312 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the operator's intention, but the setting change process. The hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S312), which is redisplayed after the end of, is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be ended at the will of the operator. The hall menu screen displayed in step S302 (see, for example, FIG. 110) and the hall menu screen displayed in step S312 (see FIG. 112) can be operated by selecting and determining any one of the items. (For example, the functional aspect such as being able to browse the setting change / confirmation history screen) and the like are common.

Further, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been changed in step S308 (YES in step S308), in the hall menu redisplay process in step S312, the display area of the display device 16 is combined with the hall menu screen. Then, for example, a character such as "setting has been changed" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, "Change the setting" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the screen. "Is done" is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10) to output a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized" from the speaker 24. To do. This makes it possible for the operator to know that the setting has been changed (and the backup clear process has been executed) without interfering with the operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. It becomes. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes a control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S308), that is, when the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 The game screen return process of step S317 is executed without executing the processes of steps S309 to S316. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hall menu redisplay process (step S312) is not executed. In addition, characters indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed are not displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the host control circuit 2100 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the voice / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

By the way, when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S312 is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, but the process of step S302 is executed. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, the game cannot be executed, whereas when the process of step S312 is executed, the game can be executed. However, as described above, the mode of displaying characters in the display area of the display device 16 when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S312 is executed (not displayed when the setting confirmation is completed). , The mode of the sound output from the speaker 24 and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are significantly different. Therefore, even if the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, operations on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the hall menu item can be displayed. It is easy to grasp from the appearance whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be executed or not, without hindering the operation for selecting or updating the page. It is possible.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the process of step S312, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S313 and executes the hall menu process. The hall menu processing in step S313 is basically the same as that in step S303, but the processing when YES in step S3072 in FIG. 118, which will be described later, is different, and this will be described later.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not "Hall menu end" is selected on the redisplayed hall menu screen in step S314. When it is determined that "end of hall menu" is selected (YES in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 performs the game screen return display process (step S317). In this game screen return display process, the host control circuit 2100 operates the display area of the display device 16 for a predetermined period of time to display an effect image or a pachinko game machine 1 (for example, a firing handle 32). Display the initial image that will be displayed if there is none. Then, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S318 after executing the game screen return process in step S317.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S314 that "end of hall menu" is not selected (NO in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds). Step S315). Although not shown in FIG. 108, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304) and the hall menu redisplay processing (step S312) is executed, the hall menu processing (step S313) When any of the hall menu items is selected in the above, the time counting is started based on the operator performing some operation, and in the process of step S315, is the time counting time elapsed for a predetermined time? It is a process of determining whether or not, and if the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or more, the host control circuit 2100 determines YES in step S315.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S315), the host control circuit 2100 ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and returns to the game screen in step S317. Execute the process.

Further, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S315), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step). S316). The command to generate the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed. For example, a symbol fluctuation start command, a symbol fluctuation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game A command indicating the number of rounds in, a round interval command in a big hit game, an end command of a big hit game, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S316 that it has received any of the commands for generating these effect control objects, it ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen and ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and the game screen in step S317. Execute return display processing. As a result, the game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and for example, an image unrelated to the game is displayed even though the game by the main CPU 101 is progressing. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being played. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S316), the process returns to step S313.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the game screen return display process (step S317), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S318 and executes the hall menu display prohibition process. This hall menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hall menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the display device 16. That is, when the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) is executed, the hall menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, and the power OFF operation is performed to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless this is done, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

As described above, the hall menu screen is, in principle, a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 during the execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the "Hall menu end" item on the hall menu screen (NO in step S314), none. Under certain conditions such as the operation time not elapsed for a predetermined time (NO in step S315) and the command to generate the effect control object not being received (NO in step S316), the processes of steps S313 to S316 are repeatedly executed. And the hall menu screen will be displayed continuously. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen), the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to allow the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "End Hall Menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the Hall Menu screen or the screen of the selected Hall Menu item ends and the game is played. Since the screen return process (step S317) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a game machine administrator) can easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. It is not possible to do so, and it is possible to ensure security.

In the present embodiment, in step S316, when it is determined that the command to generate the effect control object has been received, the game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) are performed. Not necessarily limited to this, for example, the game screen is based on the reception of a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as the reception of a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated. The return process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) may be performed.

Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process that does not involve a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, where (a) a screen showing that a backup clear process without setting change process has been executed, and (b) a start port abnormality. Both a screen indicating that a winning error has occurred and a backup clearing process without setting change processing has been executed, (c) a backup clearing process without setting change processing has been executed, and a start port error winning error It is a figure which shows the screen after the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) which shows that the backup clear process was executed with the occurrence of.

As shown in FIG. 113, when a plurality of errors occur, the host control circuit 2100 displays all the error contents generated in the display area of the display device 16 and controls the voice and LED in the order of the error with the highest priority. The sound is output from the speaker 24 via the circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10), and the light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the sound / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

When the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, if no other error has occurred, the host control circuit 2100 has the display area of the display device 16 as shown in FIG. 113 (a). It is controlled so that the characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed inside, and the sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24. Furthermore, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 Control is performed to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via (see FIG. 10). The characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed using an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 112) in which the characters such as "settings have been changed" are displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is always executed (see FIG. 34), and in the hall menu redisplay process of step S312 executed after the setting change process is completed, as described above, " Although the text "Settings have been changed" is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed, and "Settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized." The sound such as "wa" is only output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the host control circuit 2100 uses an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 112) in the display area of the display device 16. The characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are controlled to be displayed, and the voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 113 (a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear process that involves the setting change process is to change the setting value (not the backup clear process), whereas the main purpose of the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is the backup clear process. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the execution of the backup clear process is conservatively notified in a manner that does not interfere with the operation of the redisplayed hall menu screen. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process is executed is notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the backup clearing process from being executed illegally.

If, for example, a start port abnormal winning error has also occurred as another error after the backup clear process has been executed, it means that, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), a starting port abnormal winning error has occurred. , Both that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the display device 16. At this time, since the backup clear process has a higher priority than the start port abnormal winning error, the characters indicating that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed at the top regardless of the order in which they occurred. .. In addition, a voice notifying that the backup clear process having a high priority has been executed is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is emitted in a manner indicating that the backup clear process has been executed.

In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed while both the backup clear process has been executed and the start port abnormal winning error has occurred, the backup clear process has occurred. Is deleted from the display area of the display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start opening abnormality winning error is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Further, the voice output from the speaker 24 changes from the voice notifying that the backup clear process has been executed to the voice notifying that the start port abnormality winning error has occurred, and the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is also backed up and cleared. The mode changes from the mode indicating that the process has been executed to the mode indicating that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred. In this way, the content of the error that has occurred can be easily grasped.

In the above, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed. However, it is advisable to execute it even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed. In the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process, when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 when the power is not turned on. It is executed (see FIG. 33). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the host control circuit 2100. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 that receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command is accompanied by the setting change process. It can be determined that no backup clear processing has been executed, and the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S303) can be executed.

[10-17-1. Other examples of hall menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission processing (step S17) of the power-on processing (see FIG. 31). (See step S1730 in FIG. 32), for example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of “0” to “5” in this embodiment), it is determined that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (see step S1730). NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the work area check process (step S1720) of the RAM 103 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, similarly to the above-mentioned setting determination process executed during the execution of the game, the set value may not be executed in step S1720, or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is in the range of "0" to "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S1730), the setting determination process (step) for determining the suitability of the set value information by the host control circuit 2100. The processing of S319 and step S320) may be executed. The hall menu task in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 114 is another example of a hall menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart in the case where the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. Other examples of hall menu tasks will be described below. However, the description of the process common to FIG. 108 will be omitted, and only the setting determination process will be described.

First, even when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed, the main CPU 101 uses the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game. It is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 that has received the power interruption recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S319. In step S319, the host control circuit 2100 executes the set value check process. In this set value check process (step S319), the current set value information (the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power failure and stored in the subwork RAM 2100a) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 are performed. This is a process for confirming (set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power failure). When it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processes of steps S309 to S316 are not executed.

After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S319), the host control circuit 2100 performs the set value suitability determination process, that is, whether or not the set value is appropriate. Is determined (step S320). At this time, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined that the value is appropriate (YES in step S320), and the process proceeds to step S317. The processing after step S317 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined that it is inappropriate (NO in step S320), the process proceeds to step S321, and the host control circuit 2100 sets the set value. Executes abnormal processing.

The above-mentioned processing when the set value is abnormal is a process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the display device 16. In this set value abnormality processing (step S321), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal, a voice notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. The process may be executed.

In this way, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting determination process (processes in steps S319 and S320). When it is determined that the set value is not appropriate (NO in step S320), the game machine administrator can be notified that the set value is not appropriate by executing the set value abnormality processing (step S321).

The above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S319 and step S320) is executed when the setting confirmation process is completed, but the setting change process is performed without executing either the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. When the backup process (when the power is not turned on, the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328) is executed, or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only the input is input. Unless the setting change process is executed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting value information received before the power failure and the setting value information received after the power failure match. This is because it is possible to determine the suitability of.

[10-18. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hall menu processing (step S303) in the hall menu task (see FIGS. 108 and 114) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of hall menu processing executed by the host control circuit 2100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 selects a hall menu item for which various information / settings are confirmed and various settings are changed based on the operation of the select button 664 and / and the main button 662 by the operator. The hall menu selection process is performed (step S3001). In the hall menu selection process of FIG. 115, the hall menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, and so on. The case of checking the operation of the accessory, setting the liquid crystal brightness, and setting the volume control will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "time setting" (step S3002). When it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S3002), the host control circuit 2100 performs the time setting process (step S3003). In this time setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S3002), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "prize ball information". Determine (step S3004). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "prize ball information" (YES in step S3004), the host control circuit 2100 performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In this prize ball information processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize ball information. The prize ball information includes, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, information on the difference between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of daily prize balls paid out in the past few days. Information, difference information (daily) between the number of prize balls paid out in the past few days and the number of prize balls fired.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "prize ball information" (NO in step S3004), whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "setting change / confirmation history". (Step S3006). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "setting change / confirmation history" (YES in step S3006), the host control circuit 2100 performs setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007). In this setting change / confirmation history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) described later in the display area of the display device 16, and the operator sets the settings. It is possible to check the confirmation history, change history, and browsing history.

Further, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 is operated and the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the host control circuit 2100 displays the display area of the display device 16. The setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) is displayed, and the operator displays the setting (setting value) change history, the setting (setting value) confirmation history, the browsing history, and the confirmed setting (setting value). ) And the changed settings (set values) can be confirmed. The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "setting change / confirmation history" (NO in step S3006), whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "error information history". (Step S3008). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hall menu is "error information history" (YES in step S3008), the host control circuit 2100 performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 116) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check or change the error information history. And.

The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as an error history when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the host control circuit 2100 may determine that the backup is defective when the abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (FIG. 6) without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. It may be a time when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to 9) is started.

As shown in FIG. 116, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a cancellation date and time column in which the date and time when the error is cleared is displayed. For example, "MOTOR ERR" is shown in the error content of No. 2 on the error information history screen of FIG. 116, which is, for example, step S1905 (see FIG. 100), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179. It shows the date and time information that the process of (see FIG. 106) was performed. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the date and time information (strictly speaking, the date and time information controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state) in which the error motor operation stop state release process (step S311) is performed is the release date and time. Shown in the column. In addition, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up / down / left / right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and the determination can be made by operating the main button 662. It is shown that it can be done.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "error information history" (NO in step S3008), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "monitoring history". (Step S3010). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "monitoring history" (YES in step S3010), the host control circuit 2100 performs monitoring history processing (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "monitoring history" (NO in step S3010), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "warning display setting". (Step S3012). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "warning display setting" (YES in step S3012), the host control circuit 2100 performs the warning display setting process (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check and change the warning display setting.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "warning display setting" (NO in step S3012), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "notification setting". (Step S3014). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "notification setting" (YES in step S3014), the host control circuit 2100 performs the notification setting process (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "notification setting" (NO in step S3014), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is in the "power saving mode". (Step S3016). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is in the "power saving mode" (YES in step S3016), the host control circuit 2100 performs the power saving mode processing (step S3017). In this power saving mode processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the power saving mode setting. To do.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not in the "power saving mode" (NO in step S3016), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "maintenance". (Step S3018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S3018), the host control circuit 2100 performs maintenance processing (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S3018), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "confirmation of accessory operation". (Step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "confirmation of accessory operation" (YES in step S3020), the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory operation confirmation process (step S3021). In this accessory operation confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the operation of the accessory. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "confirmation of accessory operation" (NO in step S3020), whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "liquid crystal brightness setting". Is determined (step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "liquid crystal brightness setting" (YES in step S3022), the host control circuit 2100 performs the liquid crystal brightness setting process (step S3023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the display device 16. And.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "liquid crystal brightness setting" (NO in step S3022), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "volume adjustment setting". Determine (step S3024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 performs the volume adjustment setting process (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the display device 16, and the operator confirms and changes the volume of the sound output from the speaker 24. Make it possible.

After processing in step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025, and the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "volume adjustment". If it is determined that it is not "setting" (NO in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 ends the hall menu processing and returns the processing to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 108).

[10-19. Modes of various devices when changing settings / checking settings, etc.]
The modes of various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change / setting confirmation are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. To do.

First, the time of changing the setting will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16 and the speaker 24 are not turned on unless the power is turned on. , The LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change state has been controlled (the setting change state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300 and says "settings are being changed". Display characters. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" from the speaker 24 by the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and lights the LED 25 in white by the voice / LED control circuit 2200. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, the set value has not been finalized yet at this stage. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Further, in the display area of the display device 16, the hall menu screen is displayed, and characters such as "setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a voice such as "setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is only stored in the register until it is confirmed and is not stored in the main RAM 103. It may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the set value is updated by operating another operating means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do so.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, the host control circuit 2100 displays at least for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) unless the game execution is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received). The control circuit 2300 displays the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) in the display area of the display device 16, and displays a character such as "setting has been changed". It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized." From the speaker 24 by the voice / LED control circuit 2200 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). At the same time, the LED 25 is fully lit in red by the voice / LED control circuit 2200. Such display in the display area of the display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red are continued as long as some operation is performed on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. It ends when the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, it was decided that the backup clear process was not displayed, but the host control circuit 2100 displays "RAM has been cleared" in addition to the display "The settings have been changed". May be written together.

In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, the text display such as "The setting has been changed", the voice output such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized.", And the entire red color of the LED25 By lighting for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen etc. by an unauthorized third party. Become. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above is the mode of various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) when the setting is changed.

Next, the time of confirming the settings will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16 and the speaker 24 are not turned on unless the power is turned on. , The LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and sets operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting confirmation state has been controlled (the setting confirmation state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300 and "setting is being confirmed". Is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a voice such as "setting is being confirmed" from the speaker 24 by the voice / LED control circuit 2200, and lights the LED 25 in white by the voice / LED control circuit 2200. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power failure recovery command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting confirmation state has been completed based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the game can be executed. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes the game screen return display process (step S318) based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the host control circuit 2100 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the host control circuit 2100 lights all the LEDs 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and ends all the red lights of the LEDs 25 when the game execution is started. The performance display monitor 334 displays the base value by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, by performing all the red lighting of the LED 25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen or the like is authorized. It is possible to suppress what is done by a third party who does not have. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the game is stopped without receiving any command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since it was started, it is determined that the game is stopped. To do. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 2300 and the voice / LED control circuit 2200 output a display and a voice saying "Please determine the set value", and the voice / LED control circuit 2200. The LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) is made to blink in white. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the host control circuit 2100 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above is an aspect of various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[10-20. Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hall menu processing (see step S303 in FIG. 108) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the setting change / confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 as the setting change history, the setting value confirmation history, and the browsing history of setting changes and confirmations. Displayed as "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information"). In the following, before explaining the setting change / confirmation history processing, first, the setting change, the setting confirmation, and the browsing will be described.

In the present embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, for example, by pressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of "1" to "6", and when the desired setting value is reached, the setting key switch signal is output. When the operation is set to OFF, one of the plurality of set values to be used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process ends.

In order to make it possible to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes an initialization command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed after executing the setting change processing, and the changed setting value information It is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives an initialization command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed) and the setting value indicating the setting value after the setting change have been performed. The information and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received, are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 3" and "No. 4" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later. To do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when confirming the set value, it is necessary for the main CPU 101 to execute the setting confirmation process as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated so as to be OFF, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned on again. As you did.

Further, in order to make it possible to display the history of setting confirmation, as described above, the main CPU 101 issues a power failure recovery command as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed after executing the setting confirmation process, to the host control circuit 2100. Send to. At this time, although the set value has not been changed, the set value information is also transferred from the main CPU 101 to the host control circuit 2100 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (process in step S319 and step S320, see FIG. 114). It is preferable to be transmitted.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed) and RTC209 are currently timed. The date and time data, that is, the date and time data for which the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the “No. 1” column in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later. As shown in the "No. 1" column on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, the setting value information is associated with the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed and the time information. May also be displayed.

The subwork RAM 2100a according to the present embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operator or the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of, for example, setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is retained. ..

In the present embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111), and the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed. It means that the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) showing the setting change / confirmation history information stored in is displayed.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the following processing so that the browsing history (browsing history) can be displayed. That is, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (YES in step S301), the host control circuit 2100 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 (step S301). Then, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the "setting change / confirmation history" (FIG. FIG. 111). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the host control circuit 2100 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, and reads the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119 described later). ) Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and the operation type information (information indicating that the browsing has been performed) and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209, that is, the browsing has been performed. The time (when the main button 662 is pressed) is associated with the date and time data and stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-mentioned history recording process (step S306, step S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the subwork RAM 2100a when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress. When the browsing history is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, the host control circuit 2100 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change / confirmation history information and stores it in the subwork RAM 2100a. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 2" and "No. 5" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119, which will be described later.

Here, the history recording processing of step S306 and step S307 can be summarized as follows. First, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The host control circuit 2100 performs both a setting change history and a browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At that time, the host control circuit 2100 performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the settings. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the host control circuit 2100 Does not perform the browsing history of the setting change history and the browsing history, but only the setting change history. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command, the host control circuit The 2100 does not perform the browsing history of the setting confirmation history and the browsing history, but only performs the setting confirmation history. Therefore, in the history recording process of step S306 and step S307, "setting change / confirmation" is performed in the hall menu process (step S303) regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command. When the "history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

In addition to the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above. When the step S303) is executed, the above-mentioned browsing record is performed, so that the fraudulent monitoring of the amusement store clerk is also performed. That is, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key that has a notch only in the corresponding part of the setting key 328 and is managed by the game machine management manager) is required, and this dedicated key is used. For example, a general store clerk who does not have a key cannot browse, but a general game store clerk or an unauthorized player who does not have a dedicated key can perform the backup process to view the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed, the viewing record is performed by the host control circuit 2100, so that the security camera corresponding to that time (usually the security camera installed in the store) It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the image of the camera) or the like.

In the history recording process in steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the host control circuit 2100, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command. Performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the setting, but the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is When the initialization command is used, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from being unnecessarily increased and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but the setting confirmation history can be used. Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect the possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it is browsed, and when the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is recorded if it is browsed (at least the setting value information is browsed). I tried to record it. This is because it is considered that the person who commits fraud is mainly browsing after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. That is, in the same time zone, if there is no browsing history and only the setting confirmation history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if the number of times of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large, it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud. .. Regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (step). YES in S3006), both the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are recorded, and the setting confirmation process is executed when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The browsing history may also be displayed when the operation type information indicates that the setting has been changed, and the browsing history may not be displayed when the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been executed.

Further, the history recording processing in steps S306 and S307 was browsed a plurality of times between the start of the hall menu display processing in step S302 and the execution of the game screen return display processing in step S317. Even so, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111) (YES in step S3046), the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119) is displayed. However, if you select and confirm "Back" on this setting change / confirmation history screen, you will return to the hall menu screen again. Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and decided on this hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed a plurality of times between steps S302 and S317, the browsing record is only once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the browsing record performed between steps S302 to S317 to one time is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes settings, confirms settings, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase browsing records to increase the number of histories and make it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an act is performed, even if the setting change, setting confirmation, or browsing is performed a plurality of times during the steps S301 to S314, these histories are recorded only once and the power supply is supplied. It is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily by preventing the history from being recorded unless the is turned off and then re-entered.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hall menu redisplay process (step S312) is executed after the setting change process is completed, and the hall menu redisplay process is not executed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The screen return process (step S317) is executed. For example, even after the setting key 328 is turned off to complete the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hall menu is displayed. If the specifications are such that the screen is displayed, the hall menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, each time the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and decided on the hall menu screen displayed again, or the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328 is repeatedly executed, the user browses the screen. Even if there is, it is preferable to record the browsing once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has operating means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330. ing. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. Regarding the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine administrator.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) in which the setting value can be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting value is not displayed. -The confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 124 described later) may be stored as a browsing history.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117, 118 and 119 to 123, the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100 and the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed are executed. The explanation will be given in comparison with the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of.

Note that FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 118 is an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 117. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen (a screen when the screen changes to the setting change / confirmation history screen) of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example when "Clear" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

When "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 115) (YES in step S3006 of FIG. 115), the host control circuit 2100 performs the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051). ). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. "Back" is highlighted on the initial screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen.

The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 includes a setting change / confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, a first selection area 1660a, and the like. It has two selection regions 1660b. In FIG. 119, an example is shown in which "Page" is displayed in the first selection area 1660a and "Clear" and "Return" are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are associated with each other and displayed in a list in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640. In the date and time column, the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, or the browsing was performed is displayed. In the operation type column, the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed. In the setting value column, when the setting is changed, the changed setting value is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and "confirmation" is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. .. Further, when the operation type is a setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process after executing the setting change / confirmation history screen display procedure (step S3051) (step S3052). This timekeeping process is a process of starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100. Here, the timer is started to be timed after the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 119). ) Is displayed), and when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3053 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3053), the process proceeds to step S3071 described later, and it is determined whether or not "return" is determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the select button 664 is not operated and the main button 662 is pressed, it is determined to be "Back". Will be done.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3054). For example, when the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which "back" is highlighted, the highlight display moves from "back" to "page" (see FIG. 119). See FIG. 120).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3054) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3055). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3052 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3056 whether or not it has been determined to be "Page". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Page" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 causes the host control circuit 2100 to move. It is determined that "Page" has been determined.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "Page" has been determined (YES in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update screen display process (step S3057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On the page update screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen, images imitating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, and "next page" and "previous page" are displayed on the left and right of the notation of "Page". As a result, the operator understands that when the left select button 664c is operated, the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page, and when the right select button 664d is operated, the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the next page. can do. If the left select button 664c is operated while the first page of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, the final page is displayed, and if the right select button 664d is operated while the final page is displayed, one page is displayed. Convenience can be enhanced by cyclically displaying the eyes so that they are displayed.

On the other hand, if it is not determined as "Page" (NO in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S3065 described later and determines whether or not it is determined as "Clear" on the setting change / confirmation history screen. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update screen display process (step S3057), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3058). This time counting process is a process of clearing the timer timing started in step S3055 and starting the timer timing built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The timer is cleared and the time is restarted after the page update screen display process (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed). ), The hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3059 whether or not the page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process proceeds to step S3062 described later.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update process (step S3060). When the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs page update processing. The setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is updated to the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page and displayed. It should be noted that the illustration of the setting change / confirmation history screen when the setting change / confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is omitted.

In the present embodiment, in the host control circuit 2100, when the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Although the page update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up and down select buttons 664a and 664b, one of "No. 1" to "No. 5" in the setting change / confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated. Moreover, the page update process may be performed when it is determined to be the last line. The same applies to the page update process in the modified example of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update process (step S3060), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3061). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3058 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The timer is cleared and restarted for a predetermined time (after the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed) after the page update process (step S3060) is executed. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within (for example, 30 seconds).

After executing the timekeeping process of step S3061, the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S3059 and determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3062 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3062), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, moving to step S3072 instead of step S3071 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Because it is not.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 121), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “Clear” (see FIG. 122).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3063) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3064). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3061 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is that no processing was performed within the specified time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is sometimes displayed.

After executing the timekeeping process of step S3064, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S3065 and determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear”. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 causes the host control circuit 2100 to move. It is determined that it is determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3065), the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066). This setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the display device 16 are deleted (see FIG. 123). When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process in step S3065 is executed, the item "Return" is highlighted.

In the above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a are deleted, but not necessarily all. The data is not limited to the erasure, and only a part of the data may be erased. As a mode for erasing a part of the data, for example, No. 1-No. A mode in which the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5 are deleted, a mode in which the setting change / confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, and a plurality of operation types (setting change). , Setting confirmation, browsing), out of the mode of deleting the date and time (time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, and the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information. A mode in which only specific information (for example, set value information) is deleted can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without entering the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed only when the correct password is entered. Can be done. This makes it possible to prevent accidentally clearing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data. Further, for example, a person who performs a setting change process or browsing for the purpose of fraud may delete the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data in order to hide his / her fraud. Therefore, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3067). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3064 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The timer is cleared and the time is restarted after the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066) is executed (each history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all are erased.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3068 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3068), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, the reason for moving to step S3071 instead of step S3072 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, unless the select button 664 is operated. .. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3069) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3070). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3067 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3071 whether or not it is determined to "return". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 causes the host control circuit 2100 to move. It is determined that "return" has been decided.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3073), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. This hall menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.

If "return" is not determined in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S3073, exits the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and closes the hall. The initial screen of the menu screen (see FIG. 110) is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not voluntarily select and decide the "return" item, if the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the setting change / confirmation history screen is finished and the initial screen of the hall menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing after step S3053.

In this way, on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display device 16 during setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without any operation being performed. , The hall menu screen is configured to be displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, the host control circuit 2100 controls so that the display of the hall menu screen continues without ending the hall menu screen as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed even if there is no operation. To do. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

The process of moving to step S3073 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072) is the hall menu process (that is, the setting is being changed or is being changed) in step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) described above. It is a process in (setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S313 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process in step S313 (a predetermined time elapses in step S3072 in the hall menu process in step S313) (step S3072). When it is determined to be YES), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S317 (see FIGS. 108 and 114), ends the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen display process (step S317). And the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) is executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again. You will not be able to.

Further, regarding the process of returning to step S3053 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S3072), the hall menu process (that is, setting) of step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) described above is also performed. It is a process during the change (during change or setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S313 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) (not shown). Specifically, even if the non-operation period does not reach the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process in step S313 (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. The game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) are executed based on the fact that a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that the command has been received is satisfied. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again even if the non-operation time does not reach the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the above-mentioned predetermined end condition Unless is satisfied, the processes of steps S3053 to S3072 are repeatedly executed.

In this way, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator has a grace period for viewing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and the predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds), the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends and the game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S318) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a game machine administrator) cannot easily browse confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, and security can be ensured.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value are set regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing). A list screen showing all the information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is changed is displayed, and the time information and the set value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. The second information to be displayed (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 119) and the third information in which the time information and the set value information at the time of browsing are displayed (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119). 2, No. 5) and are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, the game machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to display the specific operation type information. Therefore, a screen in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list (see, for example, FIG. 119), the above-mentioned first information, the above-mentioned second information, and the above-mentioned third information Of these, the narrowed-down screen narrowed down to only specific information may be selectively displayed in the display area of the display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is highly convenient in terms of business because it is possible to know not only fraudulent detection but also information such as how many days the business has been conducted with the set value. Since the above narrowing screen can be displayed by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information unrelated to the operation type (for example, current time information) may be displayed.

[10-21. Other examples of display screens displayed in setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 128. However, the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 is the same as that in FIGS. 117 and 118. Therefore, in another example, the screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 will be described. The description of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. FIG. 125 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 126 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when the set value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 127 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 128 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 124, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, but the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed. In addition, the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed is displayed in the date / time column where the time information is displayed, and the operation type (setting change, setting change,) is displayed in the operation type column where the operation type information is displayed. Setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed.

Further, on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, in addition to "clear" and "return", "setting display" is also displayed in the second selection area 1690b. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, "Back" is selected and displayed (highlighted). In this other example as well, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the select button 664.

When the select button 664 is operated to select "setting display", "setting display" is highlighted (see FIG. 125). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting display" is selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information. The setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen), which displays a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information, is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. 126). In this way, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and deciding "Setting display", it is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The new set values will be displayed in a list. When the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. 126, " Back is highlighted.

On the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 126) in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, when "Page" is selected by operating the select button 664, "Page" is highlighted. (See FIG. 127). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the host control circuit 2100 executes the page update process. When this page update process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 128) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On this page update screen, the next page or the previous page can be updated by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d.

In addition, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 124) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. However, the page update process is executed by the host control circuit 2100. However, when this page update process is executed, the page update screen on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 although the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. Is displayed. On this page update screen, by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed.

In this other example, for example, as shown in FIG. 124, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen, and as shown in FIG. 126, for example, the time information and the operation type information. And the screen in which the set value information is displayed in a list can be selectively displayed, but the screen in FIG. 124 is one or two of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

In addition, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by those who meet specific conditions (for example, those who have entered an appropriate password). However, this will be described later.

FIG. 129 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set value can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until it is displayed. As shown in FIG. 129, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a hall menu when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed as a first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured so that it can be used.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, but the setting is not limited to this. It may be an operation performed when executing at least one of the change process and the setting confirmation process. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third step, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 111) displayed in the second step. When pressed, the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On this setting change / confirmation history screen, date and time data, an operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and a set value are associated with each other.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) displayed through the first to third steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of setting change, viewing of setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit for performing the data, and the host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit for controlling the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 which is a setting means for enabling the above, a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100, and a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means. The main CPU 101 includes a sub-work RAM 2100a that functions as a backup memory capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. And the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100, and the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting and confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a when the data received by the data receiving means changes the setting or confirms the setting. It also has a setting display function that stores the date and time data from RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data stored in the subwork RAM 203 on the display device 16, and changes or sets the setting. It has a configuration in which the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed when the main button 662 is operated while the confirmation and the date and time data are displayed.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC209 are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change / confirmation history information. When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may acquire the date and time data for which the set value is received from the RTC209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent activities such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history. Browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. The main CPU 101 and the host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit is a setting that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, which is a means, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100 are provided, and the display control unit has a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 sends a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is changed or confirmed, the host control circuit 2100 transmits and changes the setting or confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a, and changes the setting and the date and time data from the RTC209. It has a setting display function that stores as confirmation history information and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16, and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed on the display device 16. When displayed in, the date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachi-slot machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 is acquired from the RTC209, and the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other. May be.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information and the date and time data are associated with each other. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[10-22. Maintenance process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, a maintenance process (step S3019) executed by the host control circuit 2100 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed. Will be explained in comparison. Note that FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of maintenance processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 132 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the host control circuit 2100 displays the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16. In this maintenance process, devices (for example, various sensors, various operating accessories, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100, such as an effect button switch 621, an effect group 1000, and other effects, are subject to maintenance processing. Then, the operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation status display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the substantially center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132). .. In this operation status display table, for example, a name string in which the names of 28 various devices are displayed and a number string in which serial numbers (1 to 28) attached to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. And an operating state sequence indicating the operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operating status column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is input from various devices, the display of the operating status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, when the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is being displayed, the host control circuit 2100 changes the display of the operation status column of the effect button 1 from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above "input from each device" is based on the detection of an input port or the like by the host control circuit 2100. Further, each of the effectable objects has an accessory detection sensor group 1002 (see FIG. 9) for detecting the presence at least in the normal position (for example, the initial position), and when the sensor for detecting the normal position is ON. It is assumed that the display is turned off and the display is turned on when the accessory detection sensor group 1002 for detecting the normal position is OFF, that is, when the effecting accessory moves.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hall menu screen is returned (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 132, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 130), the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the sub-device input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is the detection result of the operating state of various devices assigned serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. 132. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state with an input or an off state with no input.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub-input state information editing process for reading out the sub-input state information in the acquired sub-device input information (step S3082).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a maintenance screen display process for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16 based on the sub-input state information read in step S3082 (step). S3083). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen and the update of the display (for example, change from "OFF" display to "ON" display) are performed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (step S3084). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (YES in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 115). The process returns to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 108).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 returns the process to step S3081.

By the way, some pachinko machines and pachislot machines in recent years have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect button 62 is provided with a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting and moving upward based on the lottery result of a special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 executes maintenance for the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "effect button 2" of the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 projects and moves the effect button 62 upward to perform maintenance on the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is a normal determination, the host control circuit 2100 executes the maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes the maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display). ). When the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the "effect button 2" is determined to be normal, for example, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. 132. If this is done, the host control circuit 2100 returns to the normal state (the state before protruding upward) when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time and the maintenance mode ends. Be controlled.

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines, some pachinko machines and pachislot machines are provided with a plurality of effecting objects having different driving means. In such a gaming machine, a plurality of producing objects having different driving means are simultaneously operated. Maintenance may be executed, a plurality of effectors having different driving means may be operated at different timings to perform maintenance, or they may be independently operated to perform maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine provided with the effectors 1 to 3 having different drive means, for example, when the "effector 1 + 2" of the serial number 14 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 sets the host control circuit 2100. The production accessory 1 and the production accessory 2 are operated at the same time to perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the serial number 17 “effect 1 → 2” shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 first activates the effect 1 and then operates the effect 2. Let me perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing accessory 1” having the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 operates the producing accessory 1 independently to perform maintenance. In addition, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable. For example, "effect 1 + 3" of serial number 15 in FIG. 132 cannot be selected, or even if it is selected, it cannot be determined. (The operation of the main button 662 is not enabled). In FIG. 132, the serial number 15 “directing accessory 1 + 3” is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 are operated at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, the effect 1 is first operated and then the effect 1 is operated). If it does not interfere with the effect (when operating the effect 3), for example, it is preferable to enable selection and determination of “effect 1 → 3” of serial number 18 shown in FIG. 132. In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of production objects in a plurality of manners, to operate them at different timings, or to operate them independently, and at the same time when they interfere with each other when they are operated at the same time. By making it inoperable, it is possible to improve maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of troubles.

Although not shown in FIG. 132, a game ball or medal payout sensor, a payout collateral ball sensor, a lending button (also called a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachislot settlement button, and the like are enclosed. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables games by circulating the game balls, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game balls is also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100 have been described as the targets of maintenance processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the devices are connected to the main CPU 101. Devices (for example, power switch 35, first start port switch 421, second start port switch 441, etc.) may be subject to maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, it is simulated between the ball lending machine and the pachinko game machine (in the case of CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button and the return button of the CR card. Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from "OFF" display to "ON" display).

[10-23. Mobile terminal cooperation function]
Next, the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko game machine 1 is a function of linking the pachinko game machine 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko game machine 1, detailed information about the game played by the player can be recorded, and the function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko game machine 1 can be customized by satisfying predetermined conditions. Can be done.

Predetermined conditions include, for example, that the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and that a specific effect is executed. Further, as a function of customizing a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high probability game state may be changed to a special song, or the display device 16 may be used. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed in.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, the guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. If, for example, a pressing operation is performed on the main button 662 while the decorative symbol displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is not variablely displayed, the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)", the characters "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 133, the items of the guide menu include "start Unimemo", "big hit symbol / number of rounds", "model site", and "return to game". In the initial guide image, "Start Unimemo" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of guide menus can be selected by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 133, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “Start Unimemo” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When "big hit symbol / number of rounds" is selected, the jackpot symbol / number of rounds is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown). Then, when "model site" is selected, the model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the display device 16, the image for effect displayed when the game is played, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 is displayed. Also, the demo video that is displayed when you do not win a prize for a specified period is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the display device 16 displays the effect image to be displayed when the game is played and the above demo image. Will be done.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. In the initial image of Unimemo, the characters "Unimemo", the characters "Customize your favorite character", and the Unimemo menu are displayed. The items of the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to the game", and "return". In the initial image of Unimemo, "Enter password" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of Unimemo menus can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 134, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "password input" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when "password input" is selected and determined, the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 135).

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The password display image includes the characters "Enter password" and a password entry menu.

In the password input menu, a plurality of password input menu items are displayed. The items of the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated, the item is selected. , Determined by the highlighted number or alphabet. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "Enter" is selected and determined from the password input menu, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected from the password input menu, the characters are deleted from the password display image one by one from the last input character.

When "Return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the display area of the display device 16 may display an image for production when the game is played, the firing handle 32 may not be operated for a predetermined period, or the first A demo image displayed when a prize is not won for a predetermined period is displayed in either the starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. When "Back" is selected from the password input menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

[10-24. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described below.
[10-24-1. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 1]
First, a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141.

The setting change / confirmation history processing in this modification 1 is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, except that it has an authentication function for viewing the setting value. .. In the following, the points different from the setting change / confirmation history processing described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 1, when the time counting process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in, the description of the timekeeping process will be omitted in the following description.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. In this setting change / confirmation history process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 115. It is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change / confirmation history process is started, the host control circuit 2100 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication process will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the authentication process, the host control circuit 2100 first puts a password in the display area of the display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, for example. The password request screen to be requested is further displayed (step S3101). FIG. 138 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a figure which shows the example. FIG. 139 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

In this modification 1, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed, and the password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request may be performed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the host control circuit 2100 executes the password input process (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the entered password is correct, and if the entered password is correct (YES in step S3103), the authentication process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, the screen shown in FIG. 140, for example, is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Here, FIG. 140 is an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the entered password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a figure which shows.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication process in step S3100 and determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is correct (YES in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S3110). , Step S3120. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the entered password is appropriate when, for example, the main button 662 is pressed after the password is entered on the password request screen. If the entered password is inappropriate or the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the authentication NG process in step S3103 described above is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed. Can be done. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

In step S3120, the host control circuit 2100 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process. At this time, in the display area of the display device 16, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119) is displayed in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the set value are shown in association with each other.

After the setting change / confirmation history screen display process in step S3120, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3130). When it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3130), the page update process is executed (step S3140), and then the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process proceeds to step S3150.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" in step S3150. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 122) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3150), the setting change / confirmation history data clear process is executed (step S3180), and the process proceeds to step S3180. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the display device 16 are deleted (see, for example, FIG. 123). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3150), the process proceeds to step S3170.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3170 whether or not it has been determined to "return". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to "return".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3170), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3180), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130 and the process of shifting to step S3130 is continued.

FIG. 141 shows a setting change / setting change that allows the setting value to be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the confirmation history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 141, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured so that it can be used.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the password (see FIGS. 138 and 139), and determines the suitability of the input password.

As a fourth step, if the password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 126) in which the corresponding operation type) and the set value are associated with each other is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) displayed through the first to fourth steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of setting change, viewing of setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit for performing the data, and the host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit for controlling the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 which is a setting means for enabling the above, a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100, and a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means. The main CPU 101 includes a sub-work RAM 2100a that functions as a backup memory capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time, and the main CPU 101 changes or confirms the settings by means of data transmission means. And the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100, and the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting and confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a when the data received by the data receiving means changes the setting or confirms the setting. It also has a setting display function that stores the date and time data from RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data stored in the subwork RAM 203 on the display device 16, and changes or sets the setting. It has a configuration in which the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed when the main button 662 is operated while the confirmation and the date and time data are displayed.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC209 are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change / confirmation history information. When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may acquire the date and time data for which the set value is received from the RTC209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent activities such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history. Browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation unit such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for controlling the game. The main CPU 101 and the host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit is a setting that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, which is a means, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100 are provided, and the display control unit has a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 101 sends a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is changed or confirmed, the host control circuit 2100 transmits and changes the setting or confirms the setting in the subwork RAM 2100a, and changes the setting and the date and time data from the RTC209. It has a setting display function that stores as confirmation history information and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16, and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed on the display device 16. When displayed in, the date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachi-slot machine according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 is acquired from the RTC209, and the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other. May be.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not it has been done, but also can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[10-24-2. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 2]
Next, a modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146.

The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “loud”. , "Medium", and "Small" to switch to one of the three volume positions, and to switch to multiple volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is set in advance. When the order is matched, the user is authenticated as a user with administrator authority. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning the jog dial and the volume may be fixed by pressing the jog dial.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process has an authentication processing function for performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the change order of the volume position. In this modification 2, for example, a control program in which the authentication processing function is added to the voice / LED control circuit 2200 is stored, and the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the volume switch 108 that generates the volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 143) in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. is there. The volume switch 108 is arranged in, for example, the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and a slide operation for setting an initial setting value is possible. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "large". In addition to the switching operation, the switching operation is sequentially performed to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of "large"-> "medium"-> "small"-> "medium". That is, the host control circuit 2100 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user with administrator authority (administrator authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. Operate with a pattern and store the multiple volume positions and operation order in the memory. Then, when administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set value, the volume switch 108 is operated with a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable viewing of the change history of the set value.

The authentication operation pattern includes, for example, an operation pattern representing a position change from the volume position 2 (volume “medium”) in FIG. 142 to the volume position 1 (volume “low”), or a volume position 2 to the volume position 3 (volume position 3 (volume “low”). It is possible to hold in advance an operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to the volume “loud”).

As a result, the host control circuit 2100 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and has management authority depending on whether or not the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern. It is possible to judge whether or not it is from a person.

As described above, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. In this authentication process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 110) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 115 (YES in step S3006), and "setting change / confirmation" is displayed on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 while the "history" is highlighted (see FIG. 111).

When this authentication process is started, the host control circuit 2100 displays a screen prompting the input of the volume password in the display area of the display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed (step S3201). To execute.

FIG. 144 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a figure which shows the example. FIG. 145 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, in the volume password request display process in step S3201 of FIG. 143, the host control circuit 2100 enters the password in the display area of the display device 16, for example, by operating the volume switch. A message such as "The set value will be displayed after entering the password." Is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information.

In this modification 2, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed, and the volume password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the host control circuit 2100 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the operation pattern (step S3202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the host control circuit 2100 extracts the operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and sets the authentication operation pattern in advance. And it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed depending on whether or not they match (step S3203). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 executes the processes after step S3120 in FIG. 136.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 displays the authentication NG display process in the display area of the display device 16 to indicate that the authentication is NG. (Step S3204). As a result, the host control circuit 2100 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of step S3110 in FIG. 136. In the above authentication NG display process, a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

In FIG. 142, an example in which a volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be any three or more arbitrary operation switches. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the host control circuit 2100 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information detected by this position detection function (volume position information is acquired, and the acquired order and subwork). The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a may be displayed on condition that the operation order is matched with the predetermined operation order stored in the RAM 2100a in advance.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIG. 146, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, a hole is formed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured so that it can be used.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the volume password (see FIGS. 144 and 145), captures the input volume password, and determines the suitability of the captured volume password. The suitability of the volume password is determined by collating the captured volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when both match and authentication is OK, the volume password is considered to be appropriate. to decide.

As a fourth step, if the volume password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 126) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type of the above is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a display device 16 for displaying various images, at least a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving operations of the player. It includes a non-game operation unit that the player does not operate, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the game, and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6) and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. The transmission means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the set value to the host control circuit 2100, and the host control circuit 2100 sends the setting change or setting confirmation to the subwork RAM 2100a when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or setting confirmation. It has a setting display function that stores setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16. , The non-game operation unit is configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on condition that the operation units are operated in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or you will be able to determine whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the subwork RAM 2100a when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, and the display device 16 The browsing history may be displayed on the screen.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, it is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to the authorized person, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. This operation order is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the host control circuit 2100 sets each volume position of the operation switch. Further equipped with a detectable position detection function, the setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the order of the acquired volume position information matches the predetermined operation order stored in advance. May be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the condition that.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance to identify the authorized one. It is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to an authorized person without adding an operation switch.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of determining whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only those who have the authority regarding the set value in the hall can display the setting change / confirmation history information. Although the configuration has been described, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information as in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below, the input unit in the pachinko game machine 1 is used. It may be configured to authenticate using the entered password.

[10-24-3. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 3]
Next, a modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 154.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game system 210 according to the third modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. The gaming system 210 includes a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged in the network 230. As will be described later, the gaming system 210 cooperates with the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 to perform an authentication process related to confirmation of setting change / confirmation history information.

In the game system 210, the pachinko game machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko game machine 1 described above. It has a function of displaying the code in the display area of the display device 16A (see FIG. 150). Specifically, the setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is information content such as that displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, and includes the setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generation means for generating the two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 222 has the functions of the display unit and the operation unit, and is composed of a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a or the like (see FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display operation unit 222 and the camera unit constitute the operation display unit and the imaging means in the present invention, respectively.

The control unit 221 has a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like, and the CPU controls various operations according to, for example, a storage device or a control program stored in the RAM. Do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL, and inputs the password to the operation display unit 222 (the figure to be described later). Input screen display control unit that displays (see 153), an authentication result acquisition unit that sends the input password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the above URL, and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240. It has a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a manner including the set value when the acquired authentication result is correct. The extraction unit, display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application installed in advance in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the components of the control unit 221 according to the present invention, are the extraction means, the input screen display control means, and the authentication result, respectively, in the present invention. The acquisition means and the history information display control means are configured.

The server device 240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for an authentication service identified by the above URL, receives an input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 that has accessed the above URL, and has a preset password. It is equipped with an authentication service function that determines whether or not the password is correct and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constituting the gaming system 210 according to the modification 3. This setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by "setting change / confirmation" from among a plurality of hall menu items displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 109) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It is started on condition that the "confirmation history" is selected and determined, and the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted (see, for example, FIG. 111) on the hall menu screen.

In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 3, when the time counting process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the above, the description of the timekeeping process is omitted in the description in this modification 3.

When this setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site of the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 161a (see FIG. 150) is performed (step S3301). Next, the host control circuit 2100 displays the setting change / confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a in the display area of the display device 16A in the manner shown in FIG. 150, for example. Is executed (step S3302).

After executing the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 can accept a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to the possible state. The main button 662 is a button for making a processing return request. The select button 664 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Further, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the host control circuit 2100 performs the processes of steps S3303 to S3305. Although the processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 117 are omitted in FIG. 148, in order to perform these processes, there is a gap between steps S3302 and S3303 of FIG. 148, which is shown in FIG. 117. The processing of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in is added.

In FIG. 148, after the two-dimensional code display process of step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear” in step S3303. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to be "clear".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3303), the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area 16 of the display device 16 is deleted (see FIG. 123). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3303), the process proceeds to step S3305.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3305 whether or not it is determined to "return". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been determined to "return".

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3305), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3306), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S3305), the process proceeds to step S3303 and the processing after step S3303 is continued.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3303), the setting change / confirmation history displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 150) is displayed. You may try to clear the information. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change / confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This process is started on condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the display device 16A (for example, a liquid crystal display device) of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the image data and displays the image data on the display operation unit 222 based on the image data, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 222a is performed (step S3401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores the URL in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. The two-dimensional code acquisition process to be held is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 153), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (step S3403).

After executing the password input display process in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 cooperates with the server device 240 and performs the password authentication process through the following steps S3404 and S3405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors whether or not a password has been entered in the password display field 222c (see FIG. 153) (step S3404), and from the ten-key 222b. Performs the process of accepting the input of the password of. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), the control unit 221 transmits the input password to the server device 240.

The server device 240 collates the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 with the registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or NG depending on whether or not the two match. The server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the above determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 returns only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 transmits the input password received in step S3404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S3405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S3405), the control unit 221 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying a message or the like indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 222 (NO). Step S3410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is correct (YES in step S3405), the control unit 221 is set to display the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in step S3402 on the display operation unit 222. The change / confirmation history display process is performed (step S3406). In this setting change / confirmation history display process, the control unit 221 embeds (arranges) the setting change / confirmation history information held in step S3402 according to a preset display format for display information. It is created, and based on this display information, the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display operation unit 222 (see FIG. 154).

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to the modified example 3.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the host control circuit 2100 has a setting change / confirmation history in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) of FIG. 148. The setting change / confirmation history screen including the information and the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen includes the setting change / confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. There is.

When displaying the two-dimensional code 161a in the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 148) in step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 displays, for example, "* 2D code on a mobile terminal in the display area of the display device 16A." It may be configured to display a message prompting the transition to the authentication service, such as "Please read and access the authentication service."

FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the modification 3. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of this embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 152 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code reading and display processing of S1101.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. In the password input display process (see FIG. 149) in step S3403, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 153 on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 153, on the password input screen, a numeric keypad 222b having keys "0" to "9", "*", and "#", and a password display field 222c displaying a password entered by the numeric keypad 222b are displayed. , The message field 222d is displayed. In the message field 222d, a message prompting the password to be entered is displayed, for example, "* Please enter the password. The set value will be displayed after the password is entered." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 153, the password converted into the hidden character "*" can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password is input by operating the numeric keypad 222b.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the game system 210 according to the modification 3. As shown in FIG. 154, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g displays the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in S1102, for example, equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 154, the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the above-mentioned display format, the above-mentioned display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 154, the scrolling of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supports. As a result, the control unit 221 determines that the setting change / confirmation history display process in S11 07 is performed during the setting change / confirmation history process in FIG. 149, and then the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display operation unit 222 together with the setting change / confirmation history information. The state shifts to an acceptable state in which a page update request based on the operation of the button 222e and the select button 222f can be accepted.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3407). To determine whether or not the page update operation has been performed, when it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407), and the page is determined. The update process is executed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the page refresh operation is performed (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the last line is reached), scrolling of the page is continued. Page update processing is performed (step S3408).

When the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, when the operation of the select button 222f is stopped and the decision button 222e is not pressed, the process proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in step S3409 that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071), the control unit 222 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" is not determined (NO in step S3409), the control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1A side converts the setting change / confirmation history information into a two-dimensional code as the so-called raw data and displays it in the display area of the display device 16A (FIG. 148). Step S3301 and step S3302), the process of photographing the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko game machine 1A on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 side and returning the setting change / confirmation history information to the raw data. (See step S3401 and step S3402 in FIG. 149).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped as standard with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code.

Regarding this point, in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the dedicated application makes it possible to display in the same display format as the pachinko gaming machine 1A side.

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it should be viewed in the same display format as the pachinko machine 1A side. It is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only an authorized person can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the set value, which is sufficient confidentiality. Can be secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, but the above data is as shown in FIG. 154 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Is displayed in. Therefore, if you do not have a dedicated application that has the display format, even if you read it with a general-purpose barcode reader, you will not be able to understand what kind of display the character string that reads the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be ensured. The application is distributed at the time of delivery of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and can be obtained only by an authorized person.

In the present embodiment, the password is authenticated by receiving the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and determining whether the password is correct or not depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 may receive the password from the server device 240, determine that the entered password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether the entered password is correct or not. If you want to further secure the confidentiality, you can use the dedicated application to be installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 by encrypting the setting change / confirmation history information on the pachinko game machine 1A side, then generating and displaying a two-dimensional code. The configuration may be such that a setting change / confirmation history information decryption function corresponding to the above encryption is added.

Next, the procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 151.

As shown in FIG. 151, as the first procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A executes a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. The hall menu screen is displayed when this is done. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on by turning it in one direction, and turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning it to its original position). It is configured so that it can be used.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 111) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third step, the pachinko game machine 1A is mainly in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 111) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the subwork RAM 2100a is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (FIG. 150). reference).

As a fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 152). After shooting the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and the password is entered from the password input screen (see FIG. 153) provided by the dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the game system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the game system 210 or each pachinko game machine 1A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 receives the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and collates it with the registered password to perform password authentication. Here, the server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 to that effect when the authentication is OK.

As a sixth step, when the authentication is OK in the fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth step on a screen in a predetermined display format (FIG. 154). (Refer to), the content including the set value is displayed on the display operation unit 222. As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1A according to the present embodiment includes a display device 16A for displaying various images, a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving various operations, and a control for controlling the game. A main CPU 101, which is a unit, and a host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16A, are provided, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit, and the display control unit writes the reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and even in a non-energized state. A subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the stored information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the host control circuit 2100 sets the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC209 in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is equipped with a setting display function that displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in the display area of the display device 16A, and the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed by the setting display function. Therefore, when the main button 662, which is an operation unit, is operated, the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code.

With this configuration, the subwork RAM 2100a stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means as the setting change / confirmation history information, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. Then, when the main button 662 is operated, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed by the two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the two-dimensional code is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the display is permitted after the password is authenticated, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed by the setting display function, the host control circuit 2100 uses the displayed date / time data as the browsing history. It may be configured to store in the subwork RAM 2100a and display the browsing history in the display area of the display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16A. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment has a mobile wireless communication based on information from a predetermined server device 240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. The terminal 220 may be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the entered password matches. Therefore, since it is possible to authenticate with a password known only to an authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized one to the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. This password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only those who have the authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, the game system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachinko game machine 1A and a server device 240 connected to the network 230 and managing a site for authentication, and the pachinko game machine 1A is a sub. It also has a generation function to generate the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 2100a and the two-dimensional code of the site URL, and the server device 240 uses the password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 as a preset password. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has an authentication service machine that compares and authenticates and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result, and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has a display operation unit 222 having a display and operation function and a display area of the display device 16A. A camera unit that captures the displayed two-dimensional code, an extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change / confirmation history information and URL, and an input screen that displays a password input screen for entering a password. When the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit that sends the password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and the acquired authentication result are correct. The configuration includes a history information display control unit that displays setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the present embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and after authentication by the server device 240, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. Setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also to make an illegal operation. You will be able to judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1A and a gaming system 210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

The gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its action and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[10-25. Application example to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to pachislot machines. When the invention according to the present embodiment is applied to a pachislot machine, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In pachislot, the setting change process is performed on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is off, and the set value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or it is detected that the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachislot has made the above-mentioned setting changes, input a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the setting key, and then operate the start lever. When the indicated signal is received, data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachislot machine constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting has been changed and RTC. The date and time data currently clocked by, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the setting change confirmation history information. The pachislot sub CPU constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In pachislot, checking the set value means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and displaying the current set value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. In this way, the pachislot shifts to the setting confirmation process on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON in the power ON state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The pachislot setting switch constitutes a setting means that enables the change or confirmation of the set value together with the main CPU.

In order to be able to display the confirmation history of the set value, the main CPU confirms the set value by the above operation, and when the signal generated from the setting switch is input by the operation of the setting key, the set value is confirmed. And the setting confirmation command which is the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting confirmation) indicating that the set value has been confirmed, and The date and time data currently timed by the RTC, that is, the date and time data for receiving the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a functioning as a backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information. The subwork RAM 2100a can store and retain the written information even in the non-energized state.

The sub CPU that has received the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. Then, when the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hall menu display process for displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachislot machine. The hall menu screen displayed on the pachislot is "total" instead of the "prize ball information" displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as "medal information" being displayed, the screen is basically the same as the hall menu screen displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

In pachislot, browsing means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. The setting change confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed as, for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen on condition that the main button is pressed in this state.

The pachislot sub CPU executes the same processing as the processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, such as hall menu processing, setting change / confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. can do. Further, when the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to the pachislot machine, the hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are applied. , A screen similar to the screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, etc. is displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In pachislot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the game machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in pachislot, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the precursor games of "SBB" and "BB" are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Further, in pachislot, the first ART ("SBB", "BB", "RB") and the second ART are ended on the condition that the games of the number of staying games are exhausted, respectively, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, "100", and like "BB", the number of games added to the number of staying games in "SBB" is increased. It may be configured to be added (added).

Further, in pachislot, the number of games for producing additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" may be set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for which the additional additions A, B, and C are produced may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additions A, B, C).

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games in the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games, for example, "50", or instead, a predetermined number of games is set as one set (for example,). , 1 set "50" games), the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set "50" games, that is, a total of "100" games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided in which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. In addition, a lottery for the number of additional games may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the end of this predetermined period (when the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the irregular push is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachislot machine, as an accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a rotating accessory unit 122 having a rotating accessory 123 that is rotated by being driven by a stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving, for example, a stepping motor or a solenoid.

[11. Addendum]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[11-1. Each game machine of Appendix 1-1 to Appendix 1-8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, structural factors that influence the ball entry rate and the ball ejection tendency to the ball entrance port. Alternatively, the state of the control element can only be changed according to the set value, and the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game interest is not necessarily large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably changing the state of a game element according to a setting while improving the interest. is there.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 1-1 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) and
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variation display of a symbol (for example, special symbol) is performed in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time.
A variation pattern determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines a variation pattern performed in the display means based on the result of the lottery, and
A variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern, and
A symbol display control means (for example, a symbol display control means that displays a variation of the symbol (for example, a variation display of a special symbol) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means, and stops and displays the result of the lottery. For example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93 and
With
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
A fluctuation pattern table defined so that the probability that the fluctuation time is relatively determined to be a short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases (for example, FIG. It is characterized in that it stores the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol shown in 23).

According to the game machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time. Therefore, the higher the set value, the larger the number of lottery times per unit time, and eventually the lottery result. Expectations will be raised, and it will be possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time is further provided, and the lottery is further provided.
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
Another variation pattern table defined so that the probability of being determined by the short variation pattern becomes higher than that of the variation pattern table as the set value set by the setting change control means increases (for example, FIG. 25). The fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more is further stored.
The fluctuation pattern determining means is
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery count means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a big hit lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the big hit game state ends), It is characterized in that the fluctuation pattern can be determined by using the other fluctuation pattern table.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using another fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the greater the number of lottery times per unit time, and when the number of times the lottery is executed is a specific number of times the lottery is executed, the player's expectation is raised, and it is possible to improve the game interest. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, when a jackpot lottery for a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the jackpot game state ends, but is not limited to this.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the variable display of the symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol) is performed, the suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. May be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbol, if it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability / unsuitability for the game information, It is configured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 1-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-2 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) and
A display means (for example, a display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed by a predetermined symbol and the result of the lottery can be shown depending on the stop mode of the symbol.
A stop mode determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be shown in the display means based on the result of the lottery.
A stop mode table storage means (for example, sub-main ROM 2050) for storing a stop mode table (for example, the decorative symbol determination table of FIG. 24) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determining means.
A symbol effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S207) that controls the symbol to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means.
When the symbol is displayed in an aspect (for example, a first aspect, a second aspect, a specific aspect) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of benefits advantageous to the player. (For example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot), and a profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 20).
With
The profit-giving means
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit) and the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of benefits Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) with a relatively high advantage.
The stop mode determining means
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the probability that the stop mode of the symbol will be stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the stopping mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be enhanced.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the more the symbol stop mode is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of benefits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The stop mode determining means
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the set value set by the setting change control means has the same probability that the specific profit is given regardless of the set value. It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the value increases.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, big hit), the setting is changed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means increases, the probability of being stopped in the specific stop mode increases, so that it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means when the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. Even if it is determined by the stop mode determining means that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means (for example, the process of step S722) for controlling the game cannot proceed is executed. Main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is being performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if the result of the lottery is a specific result and it is determined that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, it is inappropriate in determining the suitability / unsuitability of the game information. If it is determined that the game cannot proceed, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-3 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118, including both a jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery).
A lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of FIG. 26 or FIG. 27 is a jackpot).
At least a display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) in which a variable display of a symbol is performed, and
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays a variation of the symbol and stops and displays the result of the lottery.
The symbol is in an aspect (for example, Special Figure 1-1 to Special Figure 1-8, Special Figure 2-1 to Special Figure 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, a profit-giving means (for example, FIG. 20) that grants one of a plurality of profits advantageous to the player (for example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot). Main CPU 101) that executes jackpot game control, and
With
The lottery table storage means
A plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) having a relatively high advantage among the plurality of profits differ depending on the set value are stored.
The lottery means
It is characterized in that the lottery can be performed using the lottery table according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits having a relatively high advantage differ according to the set value, the lottery is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to make the degree of profit given to the player different according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The profit-giving means
As the specific profit, at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player and a high-probability gaming state in which the profit is given to the gaming state after the special gaming state ends with a relatively high probability are given. And
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables whose probabilities of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differ depending on the set value are stored.

According to the game machine of the above (2), since the probability of being controlled to the high probability game state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The profit-giving means
As the specific profit, a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) in which the lottery is promoted is further given.
The lottery table storage means
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables whose probabilities of being controlled to the specific gaming state differ depending on the set value are stored.

According to the game machine of the above (2), since the probability of being controlled to the specific game state differs depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. Even if the result is the result of granting the specific profit, the game control means for controlling the game from proceeding (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) and
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (4) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery related to the variable display of the symbol is the result of giving a specific profit, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-4 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area, and
The main capable of executing the processing of the special lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83, step S118) in which the special lottery is performed in different lottery modes based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into each of the plurality of start ports. CPU101) and
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit).
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game, and
With
The special lottery means
When the special lottery is performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port, the probability that the specific result will be obtained depends on the set value set by the setting change control means. Can be done differently
The specific game execution means is
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the frequency is higher when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. It is characterized in that it is configured so that the specific game can be executed.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the probability of a specific result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, the first The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. That is, if a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value on the premise that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port" is the first. When the game ball enters the starting port of, a winning judgment (including a probability of 0) is made for a specific result, but the probability that a specific result will be obtained in the winning judgment is that the game ball has entered the second starting port. It includes not only a mode lower than the case, but also a mode in which a winning judgment situation for a specific result is not performed when the game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 20).
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), the start variable control means (for example, the start variable control means) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start port. , Main CPU101) and
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (first start port 420), the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, and the game ball enters the second start port (first start port 440). A special symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that displays variation of the second special symbol based on the approach, and
A normal game in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF so long that the time for displaying the variation of the second special symbol (for example, an average time of 1000 sec) affects the progress of the game. The second gaming state (for example, the average time of 1 sec) is shorter than the time of the variation display of the first special symbol (for example, an average time of 10 sec). A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON and the time reduction flag is set to OFF).
Is further provided.

According to the game machine (2) above, in the second game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is shorter than the time of the variable display of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. , It is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the appropriate determination means is unsuitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start port (for example, the second start port). Even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the game cannot proceed without executing the specific game by the specific game executing means. (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, even if the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second start port), a special lottery (for example, for example) is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the start port. Before the result of the second special lottery) is shown (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even so, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, a small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-5 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A start port provided in the game area and
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, and
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit), and
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal start port (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 20).
Based on the result of the ordinary lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), the start variable control means (for example, the start variable control means) capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the start port. , Main CPU101) and
Within a specific area where a specific opening is provided based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port is a specific result (for example, a small hit). A specific area variable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that the game ball can easily enter (for example, accept) the game ball.
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the acceptance of the game ball in the specific mouth provided in the specific area, and a second special game execution means.
With
The specific area variable control means
It is configured that the predetermined movable piece can be operated so that the ease of entering the game ball into the specific area may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, it is determined according to the set set value. The operating frequency of the movable piece is different, and as a result, the opportunity for which the privilege is given can be made different according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means
The ease of entering (for example, accepting) the game ball into the starting port is made different according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of normal hit is made different, of the ordinary symbol By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is set. It is characterized in that it is performed so that it can be different depending on the situation.

According to the game machine of (2) above, it is normal so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of benefits given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will differ depending on the set value set, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means
Ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area by making the probability of obtaining the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery different according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Is characterized in that is performed so as to be different depending on the set value set.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is usually different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area differs according to the set set value, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
If it is determined by the appropriate determination means that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start port. Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means (for example, the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without operating the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means. The main CPU 101) to be executed and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (4) above, even if the game ball enters the starting port, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is shown (for example, a special symbol). During the variable display), the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result, it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate. Is configured so that the game cannot proceed before a predetermined movable piece is activated. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-6 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) and
The special game state control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20) that can be controlled to the special game state (for example, the big hit game state) is executed based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). Main CPU101) and
A game state control means (for example, in step S169) capable of controlling the game state after the special game state is ended to an advantageous game state (for example, a high probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The main CPU101), which advances the game after setting the flag,
A counting means (for example, main) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) that the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled by the normal game state after being controlled to the special game state. CPU101) and
With
The game state control means
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, the special gaming state can be controlled and the result can be controlled.
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the end of the special game state is controlled to the normal game state.
The specified number of times
It is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated up to a specified number of times, and this specified number of times differs depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
The specified number of times determination means
It is characterized in that the lottery for determining the specified number of times is performed so that the expected value for the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Since it differs depending on the game, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the counting means counts even if the number of times counted by the counting means is less than the specified number of times. A game control means for controlling the number of times counted by the player so that the game cannot proceed without reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).
It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated (that is, the number of loops) without being controlled by the normal gaming state has not reached the specified number of times (that is, during the loop). ), The suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without the number of loops reaching the specified number of times. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-7 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
With a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440) (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118). ,
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). Main CPU 101) to execute and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300)) capable of at least executing an opening effect performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state.
With
The lottery means
The higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the advantage of the lottery.
The effect control means
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed so that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be lengthened as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. It is characterized in that it is configured to do so.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the lottery is performed in a manner in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is higher. Therefore, at a high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time while improving the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
With more
The lottery means
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special gaming state, a random number can be extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, and a random number can be extracted.
The appropriateness determination means
Even when the game is controlled to the special game state, it is configured so that the suitability / unsuitability of the game information can be determined.
The game control means
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game progress is not permitted to control the game so that it cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state. It is characterized by having means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).

According to the game machine of (2) above, even when the game is controlled to the special game state, the suitability / unsuitability of the game information may be determined. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so that security is ensured. At the same time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In order to solve the first problem, the game machine of Appendix 1-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 1-8 are
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100) and a second entrance (for example, the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110).
An approach permitting means (for example, a distribution device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances and exits.
Different benefits (for example, if the number of rounds is different and there is a starting port below the entrance, a lottery will be held) when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. A profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 20) capable of giving the player a profit-giving means (for example, whether or not the game is executed) and
With
The entry allowance means
A feature of the first entrance and the second entrance is that the ease of entry of the game ball can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. To do.

According to the game machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance is configured to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the game interest. Can be preferably changed.

It should be noted that "a different benefit can be given to the player when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance" means, for example, a game at the first entrance. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the big hit game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is a starting port that triggers a lottery, and the other entrance is a lottery. This is the case when it is a general winning opening that does not trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 420, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that draws a lot based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port.
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
Game information related to the progress of the game including the information of the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). With a game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
Appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player is notified. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without giving a profit.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance but no profit has been given while the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information being played may be determined. In this case, even though there is a possibility that a profit may be given to the player, when it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the game proceeds without giving a profit to the player. It is configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, an approach enabling means (for example, a main operating a condition device) for enabling the entry of a game ball at least for the first entrance and the second entrance. With CPU101)
The profit-giving means
When the game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player, and the player can be given a predetermined profit.
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R jackpot game state) having a profit degree higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the player will play the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a larger profit may be given, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. It becomes.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 1-1 to Appendix 1-8 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[11-2. Appendix 2 game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(Second issue)
However, according to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, for example, an abnormality may occur in the game setting value or the like, and security is perfect. Is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of changing the state of a game element according to a setting while improving security.

In order to solve the second problem, the game machine of Appendix 2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 2 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118) that draws a lot based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440).
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
With appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining the suitability / non-suitability of the game information at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving the game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information is inappropriate while the symbol variation display is being performed, it is assumed that the symbol variation display has been performed. The game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of the above (1), the suitability / unsuitability of the game information may be determined when the variable display of the symbol is performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is disallowed even if the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It becomes possible to improve.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 2 of the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

[11-3. Game machine of Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(Third issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the ball ejection tendency for each game console can be arbitrarily set, changing the ball ejection tendency according to the set value does not necessarily have a light design load. It's hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably changing the state of a game element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem, the game machine of Appendix 3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 3 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A random number generating means for generating a random number with a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 that generates a random number value by executing a program) and
Random number extraction means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S73) that extracts random numbers based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
With a table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) that stores a lottery table (for example, a big hit random number determination table) that defines a total random number (for example, a range of random numbers for big hit determination) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data). ,
A lottery (for example, the process of step S118) is performed using the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means, and when the extracted random numbers are specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data), the special gaming state is controlled. Possible special game state control means and
With
The table storage means
A lottery table in which at least the total number of random numbers is different according to the set value set by the setting change control means is stored.
The random number generation means
It is characterized in that it is configured to generate a total random number of a number specified in the lottery table according to a set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (that is, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for big hit judgment) having more digits than the numerator (number of big hit judgment value data)) Since the jackpot probability) will be changed, it is possible to set the jackpot probability for each set value more finely than the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the random number for jackpot judgment as a fixed value. It will be possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A symbol variation display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays variation of symbols based on the result of the lottery, and
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
When a random number is extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, an appropriate determination means (step) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the total random number generated by the random number generation means by the time the variable display of the symbol is started. The main CPU 101) that performs the processing of S72 and step S82, and
When the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, the game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so as not to proceed, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when it is determined that the total random number generated by the random number generating means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed. Therefore, the set value is set while ensuring security. It is possible to set the jackpot probability for each in detail.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 3 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[11-4. Each game machine of Appendix 4-1 and Appendix 4-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(Fourth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, while the ball ejection tendency for each game console can be arbitrarily set, the player becomes suspicious because the ball ejection tendency can be arbitrarily set. , There is a risk that the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a game element according to a setting. There is.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the game machine of Appendix 4-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 4-1 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first starting opening 420, second starting opening 440, general winning openings 53 to 56) provided in the game area, including a starting opening,
A privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 350) that grants a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the acceptance of a game ball in any of the plurality of winning openings.
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118).
A display means (for example, a display device 16) at which at least a pattern variation effect performed based on the result of the lottery is performed, and
When the variable effect of the symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening among the plurality of winning openings A setting suggesting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of suggesting set value information about a set value set by the setting change control means based on the acceptance of the game ball.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, setting change control is performed based on the fact that a game ball is accepted in a specific winning opening when a symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since the set value information about the set value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming suspicious. In addition, if the pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Further provided with a specified number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery.
Specific mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) for determining whether or not to perform the variation effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect), and
When it is determined by the specific mode determining means that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific mode, the specific winning opening determining means for randomly determining any one of the plurality of winning openings in the specific winning opening. (For example, main CPU 101) and
Is further provided.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the specific winning opening is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning openings instead of the fixed winning opening, it is possible to enhance the game interest. It is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning openings are kept secret without being disclosed. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening, it is set by the setting change control means. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value.
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the game information is stored when the pattern variation effect is performed or when the game ball is accepted in a specific winning opening but the set value information is not yet suggested. Appropriate / unsuitable for the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the set value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate or unsuitable, the set value set by the setting change control means is used. It is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information of. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the game machine of Appendix 4-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 4-2 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 420, second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that draws a lot based on the acceptance of the game ball at the starting port.
Display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) in which variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery.
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit). Main CPU 101) to execute and
A setting for a set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port (for example, the overflow point reaches a predetermined point). Setting suggestion means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of suggesting value information, and
It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the current set value (set value set by the setting change control means) is based on satisfying the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port. Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming a suspicious demon. In addition, the execution of the game is urged so that the game ball is accepted at the starting port. It should be noted that "satisfying the predetermined conditions for accepting the game ball to the starting port" is held because, for example, the holding limit was reached even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. It is assumed that there is no such thing, or that points are accumulated and the points reach the specified points when the game ball is not held because it was held at the upper limit even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port. However, it is not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, the lottery result for the reserved storage and the variable display, the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) and
Appropriate determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining suitability / unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing, and
With more
The game control means
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is accepted at the start port (). For example, even if the overflow point reaches a predetermined point, the game progress disallowance means (for example, the game progress disapproval means) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. , The main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S722.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability or unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition may be satisfied when the game ball is accepted at the start port, in the determination of suitability / unsuitability of the game information performed by the game ball being accepted at the start port. If it is determined to be unsuitable, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 4-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 4-2 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

[11-5. Appendix 5 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As a game machine of this type, a game setting value in which the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the ball ejection tendency is input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko gaming machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, since the ball ejection tendency for each game table can be arbitrarily set, it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even so, it is possible to prevent uniform ball ejection tendency for each game store or game table.

(Fifth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball ejection tendency for each game console, there is a risk that the ball ejection management will not be easy.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

In order to solve the fifth problem, the game machine of Appendix 5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 5 is
Data related to the progress of the game is obtained based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on). A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six stages of setting 1 to setting 6).
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
A payout means (for example, a payout device 350) that pays out the game medium based on a prize as a result of the game,
A special game execution means (for example, a special game execution means) capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of winning is increased based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition being a specific result (for example, a big hit). The main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 20 and
A data aggregation means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of aggregating data related to the game medium paid out by the payout means, and
A data display control means (main CPU 101) that displays the data aggregated by the data aggregation means in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334), and
With
The data aggregation means is
A total history aggregation means that aggregates the data based on the total game history,
It has a history totaling means for each set value that aggregates the data based on the game history for each set value.
The data display control means
It is characterized in that the data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and / and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means can be displayed.

According to the game machine of (1) above, it is possible to display either one or both of the data aggregated by the total history aggregation means and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means. Ball management can be easily performed.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 5 having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball ejection management.

[11-6. Appendix 6 game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. If the above jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game is controlled to a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so that the storage means for storing the effect data necessary for executing the effect can be exchanged. Is no longer necessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a risk that it will be uninteresting just by changing the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, the game machine of Appendix 6 having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The game machine of Appendix 6 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game can be played according to the set value. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 6-step setting values of settings 1 to 6) having different values.
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means.
With
The game control means
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, processing of step S73, step S83, and step S118) based on the game characteristics according to the set value set by the setting change control means.
Based on the result of the lottery, a special game executing means capable of executing a special game (for example, the jackpot game control of FIG. 20) in which a privilege according to a set value set by the setting change control means is given, and a special game executing means.
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the game machine of (1) above, it is possible to execute a game with different game characteristics based on the set value set by the setting change control means with one game machine, and the game machine management manager or the like can execute the game. It is possible to have a wide range of ways to utilize the game machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The game control means
When the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state is obtained. The first game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes the game under the game nature (for example, ST specification) that ends the game.
When the second set value is set among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game control player (for example, main CPU 101) stage that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, probability variation loop specification), and
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the game machine of (2) above, both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are common in that they are controlled to a high-probability gaming state, but the first game control means. The high-probability game state may end halfway without continuing until the next big hit game state, and the high-probability game state is controlled to the next special game state in the game property by the second game control means. It differs greatly in that it is continuously executed until. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that are similar at first glance but are substantially different, the manager of the game machine can use the pachinko game machine in a wider range of ways. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 6 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[11-7. Appendix 7-1 to Appendix 7-12]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(7th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems such as changes will occur.

Further, since the above set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person, and convenience is also required for the management.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 7-1 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
It is characterized by having a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the process has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The display control means
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen that limits the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Having a limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316). It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-2 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, the setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed, and the one set value It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting the set value information of the above.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing the set value information as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The display control means
A first screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) in which history information that does not include the set value information among the history information is displayed based on the predetermined operation. (For example, the host control circuit 2100 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) and
A second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which history information including at least the set value information is displayed on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, the host control circuit 2100 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) is provided.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the set value information are shown as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) showing the history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is displayed, and the first screen is displayed. On condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which the history information including the setting value information is displayed is displayed.

The transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the set value information together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The second screen display control means
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine of (2) above, only when a specific condition is satisfied, a second screen showing history information including setting value information is displayed, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. It is not possible to prevent the setting value information from being browsed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, the case where an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The display control means
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 7-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 7-3 are
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received) A second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store the information as history information.
A display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating an effect control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. It is characterized by having an information screen display restricting means for restricting screen display (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a hall menu display prohibition process in step S318).

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, although the displayed information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the predetermined conditions are met, the information screen cannot be viewed, and even if an unauthorized person attempts to view it illegally, it cannot be easily viewed and security can be ensured. It becomes.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the process has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 7-4 are
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A normal screen (for example, a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a game machine administrator) can be viewed only. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which history information is displayed on the display means. Have,
The display control means
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on at least when the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). It is characterized in that it is configured to be displayed in.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a game machine manager). An information screen that can be viewed only is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and at least the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated. If not, it is configured not to be displayed. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing.

By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being able to be viewed by an unspecified person when, for example, only the player who has registered as a member can view it, but as long as the member is registered, it may not be possible to view it. Since anyone can view it (that is, if they have the intention to view it), it can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by a person having authority such as a game machine administrator.

Further, since the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the process has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The display control means
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen limiting means for limiting the display of the information screen during execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301). It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined, and a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-5 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation, and
It has an information erasing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as step S3066 and step S3160) that erases the history information from the second storage means when receiving a specific operation.
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to accept the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the "clear" item) is accepted, the history information is deleted, and the specific operation is specific. It can be accepted only when the conditions are met (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to delete the history of changing the set value, confirming the set value, or browsing for the purpose of fraud, such deletion cannot be executed unless specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraud history from being intentionally deleted. In addition, for those who have authority, the history information can be deleted, which can enhance convenience.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the process has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The transmission means
It is possible to further transmit the setting value information about the above-mentioned one setting value.
The second storage means
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which the setting value information is included in the history information.
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that the history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The information erasing means is
When erasing the history information from the second storage means, it is characterized in that only a part of the history information stored in the second storage means can be erased as the history information.

According to the game machine of the above (3), since the authorized person can select the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means, the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed in association with one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information (see, for example, FIG. 126). The information erasing means may delete the associated history information (for example, for each No. shown in FIG. 126), or may delete each item of the information of a plurality of items included in the history information (for example, for each item). For example, all of the date and time items, the operation type items, and the set value items shown in FIG. 126 may be deleted).

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-6 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.
The setting operation information is
It is information that can distinguish the operation type whether it is the information indicating that the one set value has been changed or the information indicating that the one set value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means
A list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information regardless of the type of the setting operation information.
It is possible to selectively display the setting operation information, the time information, and a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting value information is displayed as history information, which corresponds to a specific type of the setting operation information. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Moreover, regardless of the type of setting operation information, the information screen of the list in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information, and the setting operation information correspond to a specific type. Since the setting operation information, the time information, and a specific information screen in which the set value information is displayed as history information can be selectively displayed, the convenience of the operator (for example, the game machine administrator) is enhanced. Can be done.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the process has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The display control means
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

According to the game machine (2) above, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, the case where an appropriate password is entered.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The transmission means
It is possible to further transmit the setting value information about the above-mentioned one setting value.
The second storage means
The set value information can also be stored as the history information and can be stored.
The display control means
It is characterized in that an information screen including the set value information in the history information can be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, even such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, so that convenience can be enhanced.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-7 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not shown, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (for example, a information screen in which the history information is shown) is displayed. For example, a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen) and
The information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. Information screen display limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316).
The second storage means
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Even if the information screen is displayed a plurality of times by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it is regarded as one browsing history. It is characterized by being configured to be memorized.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, although the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

Further, the information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it is recorded as one setting history information. Will be done. This makes it difficult for a person who changes settings, confirms settings, browses information screens, etc. for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create a large number of browsing histories. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or checking the set value, browsing is performed multiple times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). The effect is great because it is possible to do so and therefore it is easy to intentionally create a large number of histories.

The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the process has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-8 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example,) that can distinguish whether the one set value has been changed or the one set value has been confirmed (for example, It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting a setting operation command).
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). A second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can be stored as history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information.
A normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed based on a predetermined operation, and an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen For example, it has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen).
The second storage means
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information.
Further, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one set value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed, while the browsing history information is displayed.
When the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, when fraud involving setting changes is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but regarding fraud that involves setting confirmation history. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. In addition, it is considered that the person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the settings rather than browsing after changing the settings. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated and one setting value is confirmed and the information screen is browsed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are both. Is displayed, and when one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. As a result, the amount of history information displayed on the display means can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the total number of histories from being unnecessarily increased, making it difficult to detect fraud.

In addition, "when the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information is displayed among the setting change history information and the browsing history information" is described as ". By storing only the browsing history information among the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed "and" both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it is stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these information may be displayed by the control by the display control means ”, but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means. Therefore, the former is preferable.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-9 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-9 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, , And a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of the command output port 106 and step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation, and
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, history erasing means (for example, a history erasing means) that executes control to erase at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. , And a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S306.

According to the game machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the subwork RAM 2100a), but since there is an upper limit to the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means. If the amount of history information is large, there is a possibility that the history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to be recorded in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, new history information is recorded by erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. It prevents situations such as being unable to do so.

In addition, "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" is the second. By overwriting the new history information with respect to the history information already stored in the storage means, the history information may be deleted as a result, or the new history information is stored in the second storage means. When there is a risk of exceeding a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be erased and then the history information may be stored. Further, even when new history information is stored in the second storage means, it is stored in the second storage means when there is a risk that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the second storage means. At least a part of the existing history information may be deleted.

In addition, the setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the process has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The display control means
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Having a screen limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316). It is characterized by.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-10 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-10 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the power is turned on at least in the state where the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed or the setting value in the one is confirmed. A setting state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) that controls the setting confirmation state that can be performed, and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting change state and / and the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the setting change state and / and the setting It has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of restricting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state is completed.
The display control means
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without limiting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends (for example, step S312 and step S313). It is possible to execute the processing of
Even if the setting change state ends, it is possible to control so that the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends ( The process of step S313 to step S316 can be repeated).

According to the game machine of (1) above, at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed as history information on the information screen, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, security is ensured, for example, an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. Moreover, at least when controlled to the setting change state, the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as the predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time elapses after the setting change state ends. , It is also possible to improve the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The transmission means
At least when the one set value is changed, the set value information about the one set value can also be transmitted.
The display control means
In the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, the information screen in which the setting value information for the one setting value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when displaying the history screen, the setting value information about one setting value is also displayed, so that the authorized person can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The display control means
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means, the information screen is displayed. It is characterized by having a forced termination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S316).

According to the game machine of (3) above, even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forced when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means. Because it ends in a targeted manner, the execution of the game is not hindered. Therefore, while ensuring the state in which the game can be executed, it is possible to ensure the convenience of operation by an authorized person and to suppress fraud by an unauthorized third party.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
On the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, it is possible to grasp that the game is in a state in which the game can be executed without interfering with the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example,). , While the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the LED 25 is fully lit in white, while when the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed, the LED 25 is fully lit in red).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (4) above, on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, the game can be executed without hindering that the predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed without being able to grasp the game even though the game can be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-11 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 7-11 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
Setting state control means for controlling at least the setting state in which the setting value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) and
A first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information for at least one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
In the set state, there is a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen, a hall menu item screen) on which various information can be displayed on the display means. And
The information screen is
A history screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall) in which the history information is displayed by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. Has multiple information screens, including at least a menu screen)
The display control means
A screen update means (for example, a step) for controlling the display of another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while the information screen of any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display means. A host control circuit 2100) that executes processing such as S3051, step S3057, and step S3073).
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, the hall menu display process in step S302 is executed. When none of the items is selected in the process of step S303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed.) On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or longer. For example, it is characterized by having a specific display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when it is determined to be YES in step S3072) that controls the display of the history screen to be terminated. ..

According to the game machine of (1) above, at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed as history information, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been performed by viewing the history screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

In addition, the non-history screen that does not show history information is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed, but the history screen that shows history information ends if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer. To do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being viewed by an unauthorized third party due to the continuous display. The above-mentioned "continuous display" includes temporarily ending the display and redisplaying. That is, it is important whether the display is displayed or the display is not performed even when the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The transmission means
At least when the one set value is changed, the set value information about the one set value can also be transmitted.
The display control means
When displaying the history screen on the display means in the setting state, the setting value information for the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when displaying the history screen, the setting value information about one setting value is also displayed, so that the authorized person can view more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 7-12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 7-12 are
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and it is possible to store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. A first control means having one storage means (for example, a main control circuit 100) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the first storage means, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
When the specific operating means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting changing state in which the one set value can be changed is entered. A setting change state control means to be controlled (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting change information (for example, the setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is changed, and the setting value for the one setting value. When the erasing process for erasing the information (for example, the set value information after the change when the set value is changed) and the information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. It has a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting information indicating that (for example, an initialization command).
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting change information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
An information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information on the display means at least in the setting change state.
Erasing execution information notifying means capable of notifying that the erasing process has been executed (for example, a display control circuit 2300, a voice / LED control circuit 2200 that controls the voice output of the speaker 24, and a voice / LED that controls the lighting mode of the LED 25. It has a control circuit 2200) and
The erasure execution information notification means
When the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the first aspect (for example, in the display area of the display device 16) can be grasped that the erasing process is executed. The first notification means (host control circuit 2100) that notifies by the character display such as "RAM has been cleared", the audio output such as "RAM has been cleared", and the LED 25 is fully lit in red).
When the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, it is more difficult to grasp that the erasing process is executed so as not to hinder the visibility of the information screen than in the first aspect. A second notification means (host) that notifies in a mode (for example, no display is performed on the display device 16, only a voice output such as "setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized" and all red lighting of the LED 25). It is characterized by having a control circuit 2100).

According to the game machine of (1) above, at least the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information can be viewed as history information on the information screen, so that various problems related to the setting value can be viewed. It becomes possible to correspond to. In particular, when there is a possibility that the set value has been changed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the above fraud has been committed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

Further, the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, or is controlled by the setting change state. May be executed. When the erasure process is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the erasure process is executed by, for example, an unauthorized third party because it is notified in the first mode in which it can be grasped that the erasure process has been executed. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is done. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one setting value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second aspect, which is more difficult to grasp than the first aspect. Further, when the erasing process is executed while being controlled to the setting change state, the information screen showing the history information is displayed, but in the second aspect, the visibility of the information screen is not hindered. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
In addition to further providing an audio output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined audio,
The second control means
Further, it has a voice control means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling the voice output from the voice output means.
The first notification means is
The fact that the erasing process has been executed is notified by using both the display means and the voice output means.
The second notification means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the erasing process has been executed by using only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, it is notified using both the display means and the voice output means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means is used for notification, so that the visibility of the information screen is hindered. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the erasing process from being performed, and it is possible to improve the convenience and suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, an unauthorized third party.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 7-1 to Appendix 7-12 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-8. Appendix 8 game machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(8th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. Is changed, and there is a concern that various problems may occur such as the control board being replaced illegally.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the eighth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 8 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
With
The first control means
When at least the setting operation means is operated, the setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. )When,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the set value information for the one set value, and
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the set value information about the one set value can be transmitted (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55). And have
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the set value information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
Based on the reception of the set value information by the receiving means, the suitability of the one set value is determined by using the received set value information and the set value information received prior to the set value information. Setting determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that determines whether or not the previously set value and the current set value match) and
It has an abnormal time processing execution means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a set value abnormal time processing) that executes an abnormal time processing when the setting determination means determines that the one set value is inappropriate. It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability for one set value by using the set value information for one set value transmitted from the first control means a plurality of times. It becomes possible. That is, even if it is possible for the first control means to determine the suitability of one set value, for example, when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value is normal. Regardless of whether it is abnormal or abnormal, the first control means determines that one set value is normal. Therefore, by enabling the second control means to determine the suitability for one set value, for example, even when the first control means is illegally replaced, the one set value can be determined. It is possible to immediately discover the suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The transmission means
It is also possible to send setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the above-mentioned one setting value has been changed or confirmed.
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information are stored as history information different from the storage means. Means (eg, subwork RAM 2100a) and
Having a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by.

According to the game machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse an information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales.

When the transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means transmits both the setting operation information and the set value information, these information may be transmitted together or separately. The setting operation information is the setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value is confirmed when the setting value is confirmed. This is the set value confirmation information indicating that. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set one setting value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be the time information in which the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 8 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-9. Appendix 9 game machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a plurality of functions with one device has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, in order to be pressed by a player and to give an impact to the player, it is made to jump out to a position greatly protruding from the main body of the game machine regardless of the operation of the player. The push button is disclosed.

(9th issue)

By the way, when checking the operation of accessories, various sensors, etc., the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions, such as the push button described in JP2012-170505, deteriorates. There is concern about the risk.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving maintainability of a device having a plurality of functions in one device. is there.

In order to solve the ninth problem, the game machine of Appendix 9 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 9 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
A character that can operate based on the result of the lottery (for example, a character group 1000) and
A compound means having a plurality of functions in one (for example, an effect button 62) and
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421, etc.) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
At least, the maintenance item determining means (for example, the process of step S3084) for determining the maintenance item to be executed among the plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the accessory, the function confirmation of the composite means, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Executable host control circuit 2100) and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, FIG. 132) in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the composite means, and detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected can be selected. A maintenance screen display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S3083) that displays at least a maintenance screen), and
With
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means
The combined means having one but having a plurality of functions is configured to be displayable so that an item can be selected for each function on the selection screen (for example, with the item of "effect button 1" in FIG. 132). It is displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, for a composite means having a plurality of functions even though it is one, an item can be selected for each function on a selection screen in which one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The combined means
At least, it has an operation function and an effect function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery.
The maintenance item determination means is
When the operation function item (for example, the effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the effect function item (for example, the effect button 2) is selected. The feature is that the maintenance items related to the effect function can be determined.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is selected. Since it is configured to be decidable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 9 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-10. Appendix 10 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a game machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on the result of a lottery performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game machine having a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery has been known. There is.

As a game machine of this type, as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of a lottery, a gaming machine including a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory having different drive sources is disclosed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273).

(10th issue)
By the way, in the gaming machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273, which includes a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is especially noticeable when a plurality of movable objects having different drive sources may interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to reduce the troublesome maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessories having different drive sources are provided. It is to provide a game machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, the game machine of Appendix 10 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 10 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and performing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery.
The first accessory and the second accessory, which can operate based on the result of the lottery and have different drive sources,
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421, etc.) and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A maintenance item determining means (for example, a step) for determining a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including at least the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. A host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the processing of S3084 and
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example,) in which one of a plurality of maintenance items including the operation confirmation of the first accessory, the operation confirmation of the second accessory, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors can be selected (for example). , A maintenance screen display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S3083) that displays at least the maintenance screen of FIG. 132.
With
The maintenance item determination means is
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means.
The maintenance screen display control means
Not only the operation check of the first accessory and the second accessory alone, but also the operation check when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated is selected on the selection screen. It is configured to be displayable so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of "directing accessory 1 + 2" in FIG. 132 is displayed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, not only the operation check of each of the first and second bonuses independently, but also the operation check when both the first and second bonuses are operated. Can be selected on the selection screen, so that the troublesome maintenance work can be reduced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The maintenance screen display control means
It is configured so that the operation check when the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Direction accessory 1 → 2" in FIG. 132). Items etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (2) above, even if the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since the operation check when the is operated can be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesome maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
A third accessory that can operate based on the result of the lottery and has a different drive source from both the first accessory and the second accessory is further provided.
The maintenance screen display control means
When there is a possibility that the first accessory and / and the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory and / and the second accessory The selection screen is configured to be displayable in a manner in which neither the third accessory nor the third accessory can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of "directing accessory 1 + 3" in FIG. 132 cannot be selected. )
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility that the first accessory and / or the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the first accessory is displayed on the selection screen. Since it is not possible to select a mode in which either the 1st accessory or / or the 2nd accessory and the 3rd accessory are operated, it is possible to improve maintainability.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 10 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-11. Each game machine of Appendix 11-1 and Appendix 11-2]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(11th issue)

By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the ball output. However, for example, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 11-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 11-1 is
Control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value can be stored. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, a state control means (for example, a state control means that controls the setting changing state in which the one set value can be changed). , The main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S24,
The state control means
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is controlled to the setting change state. It is possible to restore power in the above-mentioned setting change state when the power supply is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, even if, for example, a power failure occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored in the state where the setting is changed when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is maintained properly. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The control means
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one setting value is changed in the setting change state, the setting value determination means for fixing the one setting value to the changed setting value (for example). , Further has a main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2480.
The set value determining means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. After that, when the OFF operation is further performed, the above-mentioned one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is made. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, the game machine of Appendix 11-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 11-2 is
Control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value can be stored. A control means having the means (for example, the main control circuit 100) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
The state after the power is turned on according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means, the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed and the one setting. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing processes such as step S24, step S26, and step S28) that can control any of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state in which a value can be confirmed. And
The state control means
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, the control is performed in one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. (For example, the processes of steps S22 to S28 are executed), and
When the power supply was stopped in the setting change state and then the power was turned on, the controllable or power supply was stopped in the setting change state regardless of the operation states of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. It is possible to restore power in the state of changing the setting at the time (for example, when NO is determined in step S21, the process of step S24 is executed).
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of the above (1), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the set value is not set due to the occurrence of power failure or the like while ensuring the convenience of the operator. That is, since the setting confirmation state is a state in which one setting value can only be confirmed and one setting value cannot be changed, for example, even if an unintended power failure occurs, one setting value cannot be changed. Is unlikely to affect. On the other hand, since the setting change state is a state in which one setting value can be changed, for example, if an unintended power failure occurs, the one setting value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is turned on after that, one of a plurality of states is set according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. By recovering the power, the convenience of the operator is ensured, and the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power failure or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The state control means
When the specific operating means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is turned ON, the setting is controlled to the changed state.
The control means
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one setting value is changed in the setting change state, the setting value determination means for fixing the one setting value to the changed setting value is further added. Have
The set value determining means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. After that, when the OFF operation is further performed, the above-mentioned one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is made. Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to determine one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

According to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 11-1 and Appendix 11-2 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[11-12. Appendix 12 game machines]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(12th issue)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the ball output. However, there is a risk that the set value may become abnormal due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, the game machine of Appendix 12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 12 is
Control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value can be stored. A control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103) and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
Specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used for the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means, and
A power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on, and
With
The control means
When the specific operation means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned ON, the setting change state control means for controlling the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
Appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S721) for determining the suitability / non-suitability of the information stored in the storage means, and
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is inappropriate, it is controlled to an abnormal state (for example, a state in which the process of step S722 to step S727 is executed). Main CPU 101) that executes
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state and the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed. Control so that the game cannot be executed (for example, the process of step S1790 is not executed when NO is determined in step S1770), while the game is controlled so that the game can be executed when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on (for example, step It is characterized by having a game execution means (for example, a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S17) that executes the process of step S1790 when it is determined to be YES in S1770 and YES in step S1780).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity, and the power supply is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In that case, even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, the game cannot be executed, and the game can be executed when the setting is changed after the power is turned on. .. When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that the one setting value information stored in the storage means is abnormal, so only when the setting change state is controlled so that the one setting value is always changed. It is intended to enable the game to be executed and to maintain the set value properly.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 12 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining the set value.

[11-13. Appendix 13 Game Machine]
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability of being involved in the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine whose progress is controlled based on a set value is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set value can be set by an authorized person such as a game machine manager in the hall.

(13th issue)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person illegally changes the set value or confirms the set value, or the set value is caused by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems such as changes will occur.

Further, since the above setting value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, it should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, the game machine of Appendix 13 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 13 is
A first control means (for example, the main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and
A predetermined display means (for example, a display device 16) and
A second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) capable of at least performing display control of an image displayed on the display means, and
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for the operation related to the one set value, and
When the power is turned on, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means, and
With
The first control means
At least when the power is turned on with the setting operation means turned on (for example, the setting key is ON), the state control means for controlling the setting value so that the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing processing such as step S24, step S26, and step S28) and
A game execution means that can be controlled so that the game cannot be executed in the set state but can be executed when the set state is completed (for example, the game is executed in the setting process of step S20 in which the game return process of step S30 has not yet been executed). When the setting process of step S20 is completed, the game return process of step S30 is executed to execute the power-on process that enables the game to be executed, although it cannot be done.
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed can be transmitted (for example, the transmission means). It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55.
The second control means
A receiving means (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting means, and
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, the setting operation effect executing means (for example,) that can execute the effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed in the set state in which the game cannot be executed. , And a host control circuit 2100) that executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 in red via the voice / LED control circuit 2200.
The setting operation effect executing means is
Even if the set state ends and the game can be executed, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed until the predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a set state in which the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the set state ends and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect such fraud when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed illegally, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The setting operation effect executing means is
An aspect in which it is possible to visually grasp that the game can be executed by the effect indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value has been performed after the set state is completed and the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable in.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner in which it is possible to visually grasp that the game can be executed, one of the above. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The state control means
It has a setting change state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the setting change state capable of changing the one set value, and also has
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and the time information related to the setting operation information (for example, the time information when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received). With a storage means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a) that can store as history information.
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state is completed. Further, it has a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of limiting the display.
The display control means
When the receiving means receives the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses. The information screen can be displayed (for example, the processes of steps S312 to S316 can be executed).

According to the game machine of (3) above, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the set state, and the display of the information screen is restricted when the set state is completed. Therefore, in the set state, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value by browsing the information screen showing the history information. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, whether or not the above fraud has been committed by browsing the information screen. It becomes possible to track the. In addition, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be used for hall sales. Furthermore, while the display of the information screen is restricted when the setting state ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display the information screen. Therefore, even if the fraud is committed, it is possible to easily find the fraud and to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 13 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

[11-14. Appendix 14 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a big hit game is performed when the result of this lottery is a big hit.

As a game machine of this type, a long-press effect is performed on the operating means to change the execution mode of the specific game effect on condition that the player performs a predetermined long-press operation, which is shorter than the long-press operation. There is known a gaming machine capable of executing a continuous striking effect on condition that a continuous striking operation of performing a pressing operation a plurality of times is performed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-055977). In the gaming machine of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, if the long-press operation is performed within the long-press operation acceptance valid period for determining whether or not the long-press operation is performed, the long-press effect is executed.

(14th issue)
It is not preferable to control by determining whether a long press operation is performed or a continuous striking effect is performed on the operating means as in the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, because the control load becomes large. ..

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a game machine that can enhance the interest by producing a production that can give a further visual impact.

In order to solve the above-mentioned fourteenth problem, the game machine of Appendix 14 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 14 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a main process (for example, a main loop process) in which various processes (for example, various request control processes) are performed every predetermined time (for example, 33.3 msec).
With a predetermined operating means (for example, the main button),
A control capable of performing interrupt processing every time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 1 msec) and generating input information in the main process based on the input state of the operating means detected by the interrupt process. Means (eg, host control circuit 2100) and
With
The control means
As the input information, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state,
As the input information, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the ON state has continued for a certain period of time (for example, 10 frames), and then the input state of the operating means is described. Input information that generates information that can be periodically determined to have occurred (for example, ON edge information with a repeat function) as long as the ON state continues for a time shorter than a certain time (for example, 4 frames). A generation means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1309) and
Having a device control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of executing control of a predetermined device based on the information generated by the input information generation means (for example, the ON edge information with a repeat function). It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the ON state is constant after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state based on the input state of the operating means (for example, the input information of the subdevice). By generating information that can be determined to have occurred periodically as long as the input state of the operating means continues to be ON for a time shorter than a certain period of time after it is determined that the time has continued. It is possible to easily perform control such as control of the continuous hitting effect of the sub-device and control of the long-pressing effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 14, it is possible to execute control according to the mode of the operating means while reducing the control load.

[11-15. Each game machine of Appendix 15-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine including a display device that emits light by a backlight is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159026).

(15th issue)
However, for example, if the brightness of the light emitting means of the backlight is unstable, the display of the effect image on the display device may become unstable, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the fifteenth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 15-1 is
A light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data (for example, luminance data) corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the light emitting means, and
A data setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means, and
With
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be set in the predetermined area, a new drive data is set. And.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 of the above (1), when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area can be stored in the predetermined area becomes the reference data number, new drive data Is set, so that a control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means is transmitted via a driver. It is possible to emit light stably without using it.

The above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is up to 64, for example. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 15-2 is
A light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data (for example, luminance data) corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the light emitting means in a predetermined area (for example, a FIFO data area).
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in a predetermined area of the data storage means to the light emitting means, and
A data setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means, and
A timekeeping means capable of measuring the elapsed time since the drive data is set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1356).
With
The data setting means is
It is characterized in that the driving data can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (the process of step S1354 can be executed) based on the elapse of a predetermined time or more by the time counting means. And.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2 of the above (1), the driving data is data based on the elapsed time from the setting of the driving data in the predetermined area of the data storage means to the predetermined time or more. It is set in a predetermined area of the storage means. For example, when some processing takes time, the driving data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means disappears until the timing of setting the driving data in the predetermined area of the data storage means is reached. There is a risk that it will end up. In this regard, according to this gaming machine, even if it is not the timing to set the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage means, the drive data is determined by the data storage means based on the elapse of the above time or more. Since it is set in the area of, it is possible to prevent the drive data set in the predetermined data area from becoming empty. Therefore, a control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can be stably output without using a driver. It is possible to make it emit light.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2, it is possible to suppress the unstable light emission of the light emitting means.

[11-16. Appendix 16-2 for each game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a production image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of this lottery.

As a game machine of this kind, a game machine used for directing or decorating by emitting light in a predetermined mode by a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side is known. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(16th issue)
By the way, in recent years, the production has become flashy, including a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the brightness of the light emitting device is high, it may be stressful for some players. If the brightness of the light emitting device can be operated by the player or the like, the player can adjust the brightness to a desired brightness, but that alone may not be sufficient.

In order to solve the 16th problem, the game machine of Appendix 16-1 and the game machine of blow 16-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 16-1 is
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages, and
A host control circuit that executes the process of step S1384, which can change the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages based on the operation of the operating means. 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
A second light emitting control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1385) capable of changing the brightness of the second light emitting means, and
With
The second light emission control means
The brightness of the second light emitting means is changed to one of the plurality of steps at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the game machine (1), when the operating means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the second light emitting means is changed at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed. While the brightness of the light emitting means is also changed, the brightness of the second light emitting means is also changed to one of a plurality of stages, so that the degree of freedom for the player to change the brightness can be further increased. ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means, and
With
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the brightness is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It becomes possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is up to 64, for example. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 16-2 is
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S45) that draws a lot based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and
A display means for displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) and
Based on the result of the lottery, the variable display control means (for example, the display control circuit 2300) that displays the variable of the symbol (for example, the identification symbol for effect) in the display means,
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages, and
Host control for executing the process of the first light emitting control means (for example, step S1394) in which the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed to any one of a plurality of stages based on the operation of the operating means. Circuit 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
A second light emitting control means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1392) that controls the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means based on a predetermined request, and
With
The second light emission control means
Based on the operation of the operating means, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variation display of the symbol is completed. (For example, the process of step S1399 is executed).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed when the operating means is operated. Further, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variation display of the symbol is completed. Here, since the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is controlled based on a predetermined request, the control load is minimized by changing the brightness of the second light emitting means after the variable display of the symbol is completed. It is possible to change the brightness of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means while suppressing the limit.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means, and
With
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the brightness is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It becomes possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is up to 64, for example. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

Further, according to the game machine of Appendix 16-1 and the game machine of Appendix 16-2, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the player or the like can more preferably adjust the brightness of the light emitting device.

[11-17. Appendix 17 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a production image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of this lottery.

As a game machine of this kind, a game machine used for directing or decorating by emitting light in a predetermined mode by a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side is known. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(17th issue)
By the way, in recent years, the production has become flashy, including a light emitting device composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the intensity of the light received from the light emitting device is high, it may be stressful for some players.

In order to solve the 17th problem, the game machine of Appendix 17 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 17 is
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined embodiment,
An operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as a display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages, and
A host control circuit that executes the process of step S1394 (for example, a host control circuit that can change the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of stages based on the operation of the operating means. 2100) and
A second light emitting means (for example, a panel side LED or a frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
A second light emitting control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1406) capable of changing the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means, and
With
The second light emission control means
The mode of the light emitting effect executed by the second light emitting means is limited and executed at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine (1), when the operating means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the mode of the light emitting effect executed by the second light emitting means is limited. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the intensity of the light received from the second light emitting means by a simple process.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) that stores drive data corresponding to a light emitting mode emitted by the first light emitting means in a predetermined area, and
A light emitting drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emitting means, and
A data setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means, and
With
The data setting means is
When the number of drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set and new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the brightness is changed is set as the new driving data.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the number of drive data set in the predetermined data area reaches the reference number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, new drive data is set. , A control signal output by the light emitting driving means (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) can be output, and the light emitting means can emit light stably without going through a driver. It becomes possible to make it. Moreover, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can be stably emitted according to the set brightness.

The above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 data if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, the FIFA data area) is up to 64, for example. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number of data is two or more. Further, the number of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more luminance data can be set. When the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is, for example, two or more, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFA data area is less than the first number (for example, two), the second number is obtained. The brightness data (for example, one) may be supplemented.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 17, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player or the like can suitably adjust the intensity of the light received from the light emitting device.

[11-18. Appendix 18 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, a gaming machine in which an effect depending on an RTC (real-time clock) is performed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, the RTC abnormality is determined when the power is turned on, and if there is an abnormality, the date and time are notified, and if an RTC abnormality is found, a gaming machine that can quickly deal with this is available. It is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-51853 (for example, paragraph [0094])).

(18th issue)
According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-51853, if there is an abnormality in the RTC, the date and time will be notified, so there is a possibility that it can be dealt with quickly, but if the date and time cannot be obtained due to the RTC abnormality, it depends on the RTC. There is a risk that it will not be possible to perform the production.

In order to solve the above-mentioned eighteenth problem, the game machine of Appendix 18 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 18 is
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) that can output time information,
A time information management means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1413) capable of acquiring time information from the real-time clock and updating the acquired time to the current time information.
An effect executing means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, RTC effect) based on the current time information being specific time information (for example, a designated time).
An abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality of the real-time clock (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1414) and
With
The time information management means
When it is determined that the real-time clock is abnormal, the previous time information previously acquired by the time information management means is maintained as the current time information (for example, step S1415), and it is determined that the real-time clock is normal. Then, the previous time information can be updated to the current time information (for example, the process of step S1416).
The effect executing means is
The specific effect is executed on the condition that the current time information is the specific time information (YES in step S1417) and the previous time information and the current time information do not match (YES in step S1418). ) Is characterized.

According to the game machine of the above (1), even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to preferably perform an effect depending on the RTC.

[11-19. Appendix 19-1 and Appendix 19-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and an effect image is displayed on a display device or the like based on the result of this lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine in which compressed image data is decoded, the decoded image data is appropriately converted, stored in a frame buffer, and output to a display device. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-87402 (see, for example, paragraph [0100])).

(19th issue)
In recent years, the variation of the effect image displayed on the display device has increased, and the control of the effect image tends to be complicated. In such a case, it is desired to efficiently control the effect image.

In order to solve the 19th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 19-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 19-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 19-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a process of switching between functions (for example, bank flip) between a drawing output destination buffer having a drawing function and a frame buffer having a display function.
Image information related to the effect image displayed on a predetermined display means (for example, composition)
With a registration means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 capable of executing step S1449 and step S1458) that can be registered in the drawing output destination buffer.
After the drawing output destination buffer is switched to the frame buffer (for example, after the process of step S1446 is performed), the effect image is displayed on the predetermined display means based on the image information registered by the registration means. An effect image display control means (for example, display control circuit 2300) that controls the display, and
With
The registration means
When the image information registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer includes image information for pausing the image (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S1447), the said. A first registration means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1449) for registering image information in the drawing output destination buffer, and
Even if there is no image information registered in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, even if NO is determined in step S1444), the effect image displayed in the predetermined display means is registered in the frame buffer. When the upper limit of the image information is reached (for example, when YES is determined in step S1450), the second registration means (for example, step S1458) for registering the image information in the drawing output destination buffer can be executed. It is characterized by having a display control circuit 2300).

According to the game machine of (1) above, while the image information is registered on the condition that the image information is not registered, even if the image information is registered, it is specific to the registered image information. Since the image information is registered when the image information is included, it is possible to efficiently control the effect image.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 19-2 is
A plurality of display means (for example, a display) capable of reproducing a predetermined effect image, and
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of controlling image information related to an effect image reproduced by the plurality of display means, and a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300).
With
The display control means
A layer number determination means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1441) for determining the appropriateness of the number of layers related to the image information reproduced at the same time in the display means, and
When the number of layers is appropriate (for example, when YES is determined in step S1441), the number of display means determining means (for example, step) for determining the appropriateness of the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image. A display control circuit 2300) that executes the processing of S1442, and
When the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image is appropriate (for example, when YES is determined in step S1442), there is a display means for determining the existence of the display means for which the image information is to be registered. A determination means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1443) and
When there is a display means for which the image information is to be registered (for example, when YES is determined in step S1443), the image information registration means for registering the image information to be reproduced in the display means (for example, step S1449). And a display control circuit 2300) that executes the process of step S1458 and
After the image information to be reproduced in one of the plurality of display means is registered by the image information registration means, the image information is registered in another display means different from the one display means. It is characterized in that the determination by the display means number determination means and the determination by the display means existence determination means (the process of step S1459 is executed and then the process of returning to step S1442 is performed).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when there are a plurality of display means and the number of layers required for the image information is appropriate, the image information related to the effect image displayed on one display means is registered. Since the image information related to the effect image displayed on another display means different from one display means is registered, it is possible to efficiently register the image information determined to have an appropriate number of layers. Become.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 19-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 19-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently controlling the effect image.

[11-20. Appendix 20-1 and Appendix 20-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, a sound effect is also output.

As a game machine of this type, it is determined whether or not the timing for determining an abnormality of the digital amplifier has been reached. For example, when the operation determination timing determined at a time interval of about several seconds has been reached, the input port Pi2 is used. A gaming machine that acquires an abnormality notification signal ERR and determines whether or not the digital amplifier is at an abnormal level is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-209723 (for example, paragraphs [0178] and [0179])).

(20th issue)
In recent years, due to an increase in variations of production images displayed on liquid crystal displays and the like, the production content has become more sophisticated and the interest has been improved. However, with the sophistication of the production content, the production content of the game sound tends to be more sophisticated, and in order to output a normal game sound, it is necessary to appropriately perform the determination process of the amplification device that amplifies the game sound. There is.

In order to solve the twentieth problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 20-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 20-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means, and
An abnormality determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515) that performs abnormality determination processing as to whether or not the amplification hand is normal, and
With
The abnormality determination means is
The abnormality determination process can be divided into a plurality of times of abnormality determination processes (for example, processes of step S1503, step S1511, step S1515, etc.) and can be executed.
In one predetermined process (for example, one frame) executed within the predetermined time, a part of the abnormality determination process (for example, step S1503, step S1511, step S1515) divided into a plurality of times is executed. It is characterized in that a part or all of the remaining abnormality determination processing can be executed in the predetermined processing from the next time onward.

According to the game machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination process of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). , It becomes possible to execute all of the abnormality determination processing of each amplification means over a plurality of frames.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine in Appendix 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means, and
The setting information confirmation means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S1506 to S507, steps S152 to S523, etc.) for confirming the setting information about the amplification means, and the setting information confirmation means.
With
The setting information confirmation means is
The confirmation process can be divided into a plurality of confirmation processes and can be executed.
A part of the confirmation process (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S1506 to S507, steps S152 to S523, etc.) in the one predetermined process executed within the predetermined time. Is executed, and a part or all of the remaining confirmation processing can be executed in the predetermined processing from the next time onward.

According to the game machine of (2) above, a part of the confirmation process of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to execute the entire confirmation process of the setting information of each amplification means over a plurality of frames.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 20-2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means, and
The abnormality determination process of whether or not the amplification means is normal can be executed by dividing it into a plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, processing of check status = 0, 2, 3), and the plurality of abnormalities can be executed. An abnormality determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processes such as step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515) that performs the determination process a plurality of times over the predetermined process.
A progress management means for managing the progress of the abnormality determination process (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for managing the check status) and
With
The progress management means
It is possible to determine whether or not one of the plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, check status = 0, 2, and 3 processes) is completed in one predetermined process.
The abnormality determination means is
When the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) is completed in the one predetermined process, another abnormality determination process different from the one abnormality determination process is performed in the next and subsequent predetermined processes (for example, after the next frame). When the abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 2) is executed and the abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) is not completed in the one predetermined process, in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. It is characterized in that the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) can be executed again.

According to the game machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination process of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). , It becomes possible to execute all of the abnormality determination processing of each amplification means over a plurality of frames. Moreover, when one abnormality determination process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the one abnormality determination is performed in the next or subsequent (for example, next frame or later) predetermined process. Since the processing is executed again, any abnormality determination processing will be executed until it is completed.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine in Appendix 20-2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing predetermined processing (for example, main processing, interrupt processing, etc.) every time a predetermined time elapses.
An output means capable of outputting game sounds (for example, a speaker 24) and
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means, and
The confirmation process of the setting information about the amplification means can be executed by dividing it into a plurality of confirmation processes (for example, a process of check status = 1, 5), and the plurality of confirmation processes can be performed a plurality of times of the predetermined process. Setting information confirmation means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as steps S1506 to S507 and steps S152 to S523) and
A progress management means for managing the progress of the confirmation process of the setting information (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for managing the check status) and
With
The progress management means
It is possible to determine whether or not one of the plurality of confirmation processes (for example, check status = 1,5 processes) is completed in one predetermined process.
The setting information confirmation means is
When the one confirmation process (for example, the process of check status = 1) is completed in the one predetermined process, another confirmation process different from the one confirmation process (for example, check status = 1) in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. 5) is executed, and when the one confirmation process is not completed in the one predetermined process, the one confirmation process can be executed again in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. ..

According to the game machine of (2) above, a part of the confirmation process of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, a normal amplifier or a deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within a predetermined process (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to execute the entire confirmation process of the setting information of each amplification means over a plurality of frames. Moreover, when one confirmation process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, main process or interrupt process of one frame), the one confirmation process is performed in the next or later (for example, next frame or later) predetermined process. Since it is executed again, each confirmation process will be executed until it is completed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 20-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 20-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately performing the determination process of the amplification device.

[11-21. Each game machine of Appendix 21-1 and Appendix 21-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine that operates a simple access controller by writing a SAC number to a voice control register and outputs voice data such as game sounds from a voice memory (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-97971 (see).

(21st issue)
In recent years, as the variation of the production image has increased, the variation of the game sound has also increased. However, for example, when a plurality of game sounds overlap, the effect of the game sound may be halved.

In order to solve the 21st problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 21-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 21-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 21-1 is
Setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) that can assign and set sound information (for example, SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel, and
A sound output means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit) capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel, and
With
The setting means is
When allocating sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when it is determined to be YES in the process of step S1542),
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction chain reproduction), the sound information of any one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is provided for at least a predetermined time. A first setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) for setting with a delay of (for example, one frame) or more, and
On condition that the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, it is determined as NO in the process of step S1543), without delaying for the predetermined time or more (for example). For example, it is characterized by having a second setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1546 and step S1547) for setting the plurality of sound information (in the frame).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when a plurality of sound information is set in one channel, if the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, one of the sound information is delayed. Since it is set, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect by delaying (for example, the sound effect by muting). On the other hand, if the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the plurality of sound information is set without delay, so that the processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific sound information is
It includes at least the first sound information (for example, SHOT reproduction) that is reproduced only once and the second sound information (LOOP reproduction) that is reproduced multiple times.
The first setting means is
It is characterized in that the second sound information can be set with a delay of a predetermined time or more after the first sound information is set.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the first sound information to be reproduced only once is set and then delayed by a predetermined time or more, the second sound information to be reproduced a plurality of times is set. It is possible to prevent the first sound information, which is reproduced only once, from becoming difficult to hear.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 21-2 is
Setting means (for example, voice / LED control circuit) that can assign sound information (for example, SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel and set it,
A sound output means capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel, and
With
The setting means is
When allocating sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when it is determined to be YES in the process of step S1542),
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, SHOT + loop chain reproduction), the sound information of any one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is provided for at least a predetermined time (for example, loop reproduction). A first setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) for setting with a delay of one frame or more
On condition that the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, it is determined as NO in the process of step S1543), without delaying for the predetermined time or more (for example). For example, a second setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1546 or step S1547) for setting the plurality of sound information (in the frame), and
Have,
The second setting means is
When mute is set for all channels (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S1545), sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting (for example, the process of step S1546 is performed). On the other hand, when the muffling setting is not for all channels but for one channel (for example, when NO is determined in step S1545), the muffling setting is overwritten and the sound information is set (for example, step S1547). It is characterized by being configured so that it can be processed.

(1) According to the game machine of 1 above, when a plurality of sound information is set in one channel, if the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, one of the sound information is delayed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect by delaying (for example, the sound effect by muting). On the other hand, if the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the plurality of sound information is set without delay, so that the processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the speed of processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay. Furthermore, when a plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, when the mute setting is set for all channels, the sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting, and the sound information is set instead of the mute setting for all channels. When the mute setting is for a channel, the mute setting is overwritten and the sound information is set, so that the sound information is set for the required time (for example, until the change display of the next special symbol is started when the change display of the special symbol ends. ) Can be secured.

As described above, according to the gaming machines of Appendix 21-1 and Appendix 21-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably outputting game sounds.

[11-22. Appendix 22 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that outputs a sound that excites the game in conjunction with an effect image displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144066).

(22nd issue)
However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144066, the secondary volume is maintained at a fixed value and the volume of the effect sound is controlled by the primary volume. Therefore, in order to increase the variation in the volume of the effect sound. There is a limit.

In order to solve the 22nd problem, the game machine of Appendix 22 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 22 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
Sound data setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of setting sound data (for example, voice data) related to the game sound output from the output means, and
A volume control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request) having a plurality of playback channels (for example, CH1 to CH31) and capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
With
The volume control means
A first volume control means (for example,) capable of changing information related to volume for all of the plurality of playback channels based on a predetermined operation (for example, a hardware switch operation or a screen operation by a user). , Volume control 2810 by hardware switch, user volume control 2820 by volume setting screen, and host control circuit 2100) that executes debug volume control 2830 during debugging.
A second volume control means (for example, a first playback channel primary control 2840, a second playback channel primary control 2850, and a second playback channel primary control 2850,) capable of changing information related to the volume for each of the plurality of playback channels. The host control circuit 2100)) that executes the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the voice data, and
The volume output from the output means can be changed by multiplying the information related to the volume by the first volume control means and the information related to the volume by the second volume control means. ,
The second volume control means
Volume control (first playback channel primary control 2840) that controls information related to the volume to be changed when the predetermined operation is performed for each playback channel.
A volume that controls the output of information related to a certain volume (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) before and after the predetermined operation is performed for each playback channel. It is characterized in that the control (second reproduction channel primary control 2850) and the control (second reproduction channel primary control 2850) can be executed.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the game sound output from the output means is defined by multiplying the information related to the volume by the first volume control means and the information related to the volume by the second volume control means. Therefore, it is possible to give diversity to the volume of the game sound. Moreover, the second volume control means controls each reproduction channel so that even if a predetermined operation is performed, information related to a certain volume is output before and after the operation is performed. As a result, even if a predetermined operation is performed, it is possible to control the output of information related to a certain volume before and after the operation is performed only on a specific playback channel instead of the entire channel. ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The first volume control means
The feature is that the information related to the volume can be controlled by the debug volume control at the time of debugging.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and the work efficiency at the time of debugging can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 22, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a variety of variations in the volume of the effect sound.

[11-23. Appendix 23-1 to Appendix 23-58]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display. In addition to such an effect image, a game sound is also output from the speaker.

As a game machine of this type, a game machine capable of adjusting the volume of a game sound output from a speaker by a player's operation is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229766).

(23rd issue)
However, if the volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by operating the game sound, it may affect sounds that you do not want to change, such as error sounds and warning sounds. , Not preferable.

In order to solve the 23rd problem, the game machines of Appendix 23-1 to Appendix 23-5 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 23-1 is
A plurality of output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means, and
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Voice signal to be output) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the primary control 2840 of the first reproduction channel) having volume information changed based on the operation of the operation means. Being done
The plurality of output means include a dedicated output means used for outputting a specific sound (for example, a dedicated speaker) and a shared output means used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound (for example, a shared speaker). And at least are included,
The sound control means
Regarding the dedicated output means, even if the operation means is operated, the specific sound control means (for example, a step) capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. The host control circuit 2100) that executes S1559 and
Regarding the shared output means, a non-specific sound control means (for example, a host that executes step S1558) that can execute control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a control circuit 2100).

According to the game machine of (1) above, with respect to the dedicated output means used for outputting a specific sound, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if an operator who can control the volume is operated. It is controlled to be done. That is, although the volume can be controlled, a constant volume is output without changing the volume before and after the operation of the operating means. Further, as for the shared output means used for outputting sounds other than a specific sound, the second information whose volume information is changed based on the operation of the operator who can control the volume is output. It becomes possible to preferably adjust the volume.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The dedicated output means is a speaker for vibration.

According to the game machine of (2) above, it is possible to output a specific sound (for example, an error sound, a warning sound, etc.) from the vibration speaker at a constant volume.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
When the power is turned on (for example, during various initialization processes of step S1201), the dedicated output setting means (for example, the process of step S1201) for setting which of the plurality of output means is to be the dedicated output means is executed. Host control circuit 2100)
The data related to the specific sound (for example, the voice data related to the specific sound specified by the SAC number) is characterized in that it is specified that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated output means. And.

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the power is turned on, the output destination of the data related to a specific sound is defined by the dedicated output means, so it is possible to set which output means is used as the dedicated output means. At the same time, since it is stipulated that the audio data related to a specific sound to which a constant volume is output is output from the dedicated output means, it is possible to enhance the versatility.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 23-2 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a plurality of playback channels and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Voice signal to be output) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the primary control 2840 of the first reproduction channel) having volume information changed based on the operation of the operation means. Being done
The plurality of playback channels include at least a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound.
The sound control means
Regarding the dedicated channel, even if the operation means is operated, the specific sound control means (for example, step S1580) capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. Host control circuit 2100) that executes
Regarding the shared channel, a non-specific sound control means (for example, host control for executing step S1581) capable of executing control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a circuit 2100).

According to the game machine of (1) above, even if the operating means is operated for the dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound, it is controlled so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. .. That is, although the volume can be controlled, constant volume information is output without changing the volume before and after the operation of the operating means. In addition, for shared channels used to output sounds other than specific sounds, it is preferable to adjust the volume because the volume is controlled so that it is changed based on the operation of the operator who can control the volume. It becomes possible to do it.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
When the power is turned on, a dedicated channel (for example, CH31, CH32) used for outputting the specific sound and a shared channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound are set. Channel setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1201) and
Sound information registration means (for example, a host for registering a SAC number) for registering sound information (for example, SAC number) related to data of the specific sound and sounds other than the specific sound to the dedicated channel or the shared channel. Control circuit 2100) and
Is further provided.

According to the game machine (2) above, when the power is turned on, a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound are set and specified. Since the sound information related to the data of the sound of and the sound other than the specific sound is registered in each channel, it is possible to enhance the versatility.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 23-3 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a playback channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Voice signal to be output) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the primary control 2840 of the first reproduction channel) having volume information changed based on the operation of the operation means. Being done
The sound control means
A data determination means for determining whether or not the game sound data being reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific data of the specific sound (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1599).
When the data discriminating means determines that the data of the game sound being played on the playback channel is the specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation even if the operating means is operated. Specific sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1600) capable of executing control to output the first information
When the data discriminating means determines that the data of the game sound being played on the playback channel is non-specific data, the second information is changed so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized by having a non-specific sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1601) capable of executing output control.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when it is determined that the data of the game sound being played is specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. When it is determined that the game sound data being played is non-specific data, the volume is controlled to be changed based on the operation of the operating means, so the volume can be adjusted. It becomes possible to carry out suitably.

(1) The game machines in Appendix 23-4 are
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a playback channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. (Voice signal to be output) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the primary control 2840 of the first reproduction channel) having volume information changed based on the operation of the operation means. Being done
The sound control means
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced in the reproduction channel is specific sound information, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. The specific sound control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes step S1621) capable of setting the first information in the reproduction channel, and
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information, the reproduction is performed so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a non-specific sound control means capable of setting the second information in a channel (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing step S1623).

According to the game machine of (1) above, if the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced on the reproduction channel is specific sound information, a constant volume is produced even if the operating means is operated. If the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound played on the playback channel is non-specific sound information while being controlled to be output, the volume will be increased based on the operation of the operating means. Since it is changed, it becomes possible to preferably adjust the volume.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 23-5 is
An output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound, and
An operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of controlling the volume output from the output means,
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) having a playback channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means.
With
The volume output from the output means is output by at least the first information (for example, the second reproduction channel primary control 285) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. The audio signal to be generated), the second information having the volume information changed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840), and the above. Third information having volume information incorporated in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel (for example, an audio signal output by the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data. ) And
The sound control means
When the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel is specific sound data (for example, sound data that is not affected by the volume adjustment), the specific sound data is used. With identification information setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1632) that presets identification information (for example, a flag indicating whether or not each channel is affected by volume adjustment) that can be identified as being present. ,
When setting the volume of the playback channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) can be identified as the specific sound data by the identification information (for example, YES is determined in step S1637). (When), even if the operating means is operated, the first volume setting means (for example, step) that can set the first information to the playback channel so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. A host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the processing of S1641 and
In setting the volume of the playback channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information can be identified by the identification information if it is not the specific sound data (for example, when it is determined as NO in step S1637), the operation. A second volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S1638) capable of setting the second information to the reproduction channel so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the means.
When setting the volume in the reproduction channel, it is characterized by having a third volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S1644) for setting the third information in the reproduction channel.

According to the game machine of (1) above, identification information that can identify that the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel is specific sound data is set in advance, and is specified from the sound information. When the sound information can be identified as specific sound data by the identification information, it is set so that a constant volume is output even if the operating means is operated. In addition, the volume is set to be changed based on the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel. Further, the third information having the volume information incorporated in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is set in the reproduction channel. In this way, the volume can be preferably adjusted.

In the above-mentioned game machine, when the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel can be identified as the specific sound data by the identification information (for example, YES in step S1637). Even if the operating means is operated, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. However, the constant volume in this case is always information related to the maximum volume. Is also good. However, even if the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the playback channel is specific sound data (first information related to a certain volume), the sound information registered in the playback channel (for example, SAC number). ) Is multiplied by the volume incorporated in the sound data specified from), so the output volume may not be a constant volume.

As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 23-1 to Appendix 23-5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably adjusting the volume.

[11-24. Appendix 24 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which a light emitting means composed of a light emitting body such as an LED is provided on the front side of the game machine and the light emitting means is turned on or blinks in a predetermined mode is known. ing.

As a game machine of this type, a game machine capable of adjusting the brightness of the light emitting means by, for example, an operation by a player or the like is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(24th issue)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551, the brightness of the light emitting means can be challenged by an operation by a player or the like, but when the light emitting means can emit light in full color, it emits light when the brightness is changed. Even the color may change significantly.

In order to solve the above-mentioned twenty-fourth problem, the game machine of Appendix 24 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 24 is
With a predetermined light emitting means (for example, lamp (LED) group 25),
An operating means that can be operated so that the brightness of the light emitting means can be selected (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16).
A storage means (for example, an attenuation table) that stores a luminance information table (for example, an attenuation table) in which luminance information is set for each of a plurality of colors (for example, RGB) as the luminance information (for example, the luminance attenuation factor) related to the luminance of the light emitting means. Sub-main ROM 2050) and
When the luminance is selected by the operating means, the luminance control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the luminance of the light emitting means based on the luminance information table
With
The storage means
A luminance information table in which the luminance information is set for each of the plurality of colors is stored according to the luminance that can be selected by the operating means.
The brightness control means is
Based on the luminance information table corresponding to the luminance selected by the operating means, the luminance of the light emitting means can be controlled so that the attenuation rate of blue is the largest and the attenuation rate of red is the smallest among the plurality of colors. It is characterized by being configured in.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the light emitting means is used so that the blue attenuation factor is the largest and the red attenuation factor is the smallest among the plurality of colors based on the luminance information set for each of the plurality of colors. Since the light emission is controlled, for example, even if the brightness of the light emitting means is changed by an operation of a player or the like, it is possible to suppress the change in the light emitting color, that is, to maintain the white balance.

As described above, according to the game machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide a game machine capable of changing the brightness while suppressing the change of the emission color.

[11-25. Appendix 25 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As a game machine of this type, a game machine in which a movable body is arranged on a game board and the movable body is operated to give an impact to the player and increase the motivation for the game has been proposed. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-288649).

(25th issue)
For example, in a game machine in which a movable body is operated as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-288649, the movement of the movable body has been diversified in recent years, and the control for operating the movable body has become complicated accordingly. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a game machine capable of suppressing a control load while giving diversity to the movement of a movable body.

In order to solve the 21st problem, the game machine of Appendix 25 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 25 is
With the prescribed character
A control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the operation of the predetermined accessory, and
An operating member (for example, a solenoid) capable of operating a member constituting the accessory, and
With multiple light emitting means (eg, LEDs),
A plurality of connection portions (for example, Port0 to Port23) capable of transmitting a signal to the connected light emitting means by being connected to any of the plurality of light emitting means.
A light emitting control means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling the light emitting means by transmitting a signal to the light emitting means through the connecting portion.
With
The operating member
It is connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions, and is configured to be able to operate a member constituting the accessory by a signal from the light emitting control means.
The control means
It is characterized in that the operating member connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions can be operated in synchronization with the predetermined accessory.

According to the game machine of (1) above, even if the number of operating members increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, the control for operating the accessory while maintaining the diversity of the movement of the accessory. It is possible to suppress the load and synchronize the accessory and the operating member.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a control load.

[11-26. Appendix 26 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and based on the result of this lottery, an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display.

As this type of gaming machine, image data to be read from a CGROM that stores compressed data of still images and moving images displayed on a liquid crystal display, decompress the read compressed data, and output to the liquid crystal display. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159026).

(26th issue)
However, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159026, for example, when the compressed data is read from the CGROM and the image data to be output is generated, if the amount of data is large, the loading process takes time. .. In this case, the watchdog reset may be applied even though the load process is proceeding normally, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the above-mentioned 26th problem, the game machine of Appendix 26 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 26 is
A read-only storage area (for example, sub-main ROM 2050 or CGROM 2060) in which game data related to the game is stored, and
A volatile storage area (for example, SRAM 2100b or built-in VRAM 2370) capable of reading and writing game data related to the game, and
A transfer execution means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the data load process of FIG. 93) that executes a load process that reads the game data stored in the read-only storage area and writes the game data to the volatile storage area.
Watchdog timer and
A clearing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) that clears the clock of the watchdog timer after a lapse of a predetermined time, and
With
The transfer executing means is
It is characterized by having a load reprocessing means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1656) that resets the watchdog timer when the load process exceeds a predetermined time and executes the load process again.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the time required for the load process by the transfer executing means exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the load process is terminated and the load process is executed again. Therefore, the load process is performed. Even if it takes time, it is possible to automatically recover.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 26, even when the loading process takes time, the loading process can be suitably advanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The clearing means
When the load process does not exceed the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is cleared (for example, the process of step S1655), and only when the load process exceeds the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is clocked. It is configured so that error processing (for example, processing in step S1656) is executed without clearing.
The transfer executing means is
It is characterized in that the load process is executed again as the error process.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the watchdog timer is cleared when the load process does not exceed the predetermined time, but the watchdog timer is not cleared only when the load process exceeds the predetermined time. Since the error processing is executed in, it is possible to grasp that the loading processing could not be completed due to the occurrence of the error.

[11-27. Appendix 27-1 and Appendix 27-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a big hit game is performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Further, for example, a liquid crystal display for displaying the effect image is provided, and the effect image determined by lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display.

In this type of gaming machine, lottery is performed in various situations, and such lottery is performed by generating and acquiring random numbers. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-023629, the number of digits of a newly acquired random number value is determined, one digit is calculated from the reference random number value by the determined number of digits, and the calculated value is used as each digit. It describes how to place and get new numbers.

(27th issue)
In the random number acquisition process for acquiring random numbers, it is required that the acquired random numbers are less likely to have regularity. However, if the processing is complicated, the control load becomes large, which is not preferable. Therefore, it is preferable to perform a random number acquisition process in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in the control load.

In order to solve the 27th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 27-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 27-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 27-1 is
It is a game machine that draws lots using a predetermined random number.
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) that can output time information,
A random number generating means for generating a random number used in a predetermined lottery (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of FIGS. 95 and 96) and
With
The random number generating means
An initialization means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a random number initialization process) that acquires time information from the real-time clock and generates an initial value of a random number using the acquired time information.
A non-stationary update means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of FIG. 96) that updates the random number when the generated random number is used in the lottery, and
A steady-state update means (host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of FIG. 95) that periodically updates the random numbers even if the generated random numbers are not used in the lottery.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the initial value of the random number is generated using the time information acquired from the real-time clock, the acquired random number can be randomized and is biased to the acquired random number. Can be suppressed. In particular, since the initial value of the random number is involved in the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to make the initial value different each time.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 27-2 is
It is a game machine that draws lots using a predetermined random number.
A random number table creating means (for example, step S1704) for creating a random number table in which a plurality of random numbers are registered by using one of a plurality of random number seeds (for example, random number seeds a to h) is executed. Host control circuit 2100) and
Random number acquisition means for acquiring random numbers to be used in a predetermined lottery with reference to the random number table created by the random number table creation means (for example, in the random number acquisition process of step S1706, from the random number table created in step S1704). Host control circuit 2100) that acquires random numbers and
Reference position updating means for updating the reference position of the random number table at a timing different from the timing at which the random number table is created (in step S1706, a host control circuit that updates the reference position of the random number table when a random number is acquired from the random number table. 2100) and
With
The random number acquisition means
After acquiring a random number by referring to the random number table, it is possible to acquire a random number to be subjected to the predetermined lottery by referring to the same random number table whose reference position has been updated without creating the random number table (for example). It is characterized in that it is configured in the packet reception loop of FIG. 98 and the random number acquisition process of step S1706 can be executed).

According to the game machine of (1) above, even if there are a plurality of random number acquisition opportunities, the random numbers are acquired because the reference position is only updated using the same random number table already created and the random numbers are acquired. It is possible to reduce the control load while giving irregularities to random numbers.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 27-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 27-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing processing in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in the control load. ..

[11-28. Appendix 28 Game Machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variable display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on the result of the lottery. Then, when this symbol stops at a specific combination, it shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the variable display of the design is performed, various effects are performed.

As a game machine of this kind, a game machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a game machine that performs an effect using such a movable accessory, a process for returning the movable accessory to the initial position (retry process) when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs. ) Has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-268038).

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2007-268038, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is present at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on the detection result of the reference position sensor. Retry processing is in progress. Then, when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position even if the retry processing is continuously performed, an error is determined and a predetermined error is determined. The process is being executed.

(28th issue)
However, as a defect related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that is resolved when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that an error occurs even when such a minor error occurs, there is a problem that unnecessary error processing increases.

In order to solve the 28th problem, the gaming machine of Appendix 28 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 28 is
A game control means (for example, a game control means capable of executing one game by starting the variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and stopping the variable display of the symbol when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. For example, the main CPU 101) of the main control circuit 100 and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member (for example, a accessory group 1000 or the like), and
With
The game control means
At least, the start information of the variation display of the symbol and the stop information of the variation display of the symbol can be transmitted to the effect control means (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means
A first determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19141) for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started.
If it is determined in the determination by the first determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the first restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147) can be executed so as to be normalized. First recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19147) and
A second determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19171) for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is stopped.
If it is determined in the determination by the second determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the second restoration process (for example, the motor driver reset process in step S19176) can be executed so as to be normalized. It has two recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19176).
The first determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is started.
The first recovery control means
The first recovery process can be executed each time the first determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The second determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the variation display of the symbol is stopped.
The second recovery control means
The second recovery process can be executed each time the second determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A first counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144) that counts the number of times the first recovery process is executed by the first recovery control means.
A second counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19177) that counts the number of times the second recovery process is executed by the second recovery control means.
The result of counting by the first counting means is the first specified number of times (for example, 10 times), and the result of counting by the second counting means is the second specified number of times (for example, 10 times). When at least one of the above is satisfied, the movable member has an inoperable means (for example, the host control circuit 2100) that makes the movable member inoperable (for example, an error motor operation stopped state). It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of the above (1), if it is determined by the first determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled, and the first restoration process is performed. Similarly, if the second determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled, and the second restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of games in which the first recovery process is executed reaches the first specified number of times, or when the number of games in which the first recovery process is executed reaches the first specified number of times, the movable member is moved. It is in an inoperable state. Therefore, it does not become an inoperable state even if a minor error occurs, and it is made into an inoperable state when the first recovery process or the second recovery process is executed over a plurality of games but cannot be recovered. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors.

Moreover, whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal is determined at each of the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is started and the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped. Then, the number of games in which the recovery process and the recovery process are executed is counted separately at the timing when the symbol variation display is started and the timing when the symbol variation display is stopped, and the number of times the recovery process is executed. However, when the specified number of times is reached, the operation is disabled, so that the occurrence of a serious error can be further suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, an initial position), and
A driving means capable of operating the movable member from the specific position toward a specified position (for example, the maximum range of motion), and
With more
The first determination means is
When the movable member does not exist at least at the specific position, it is determined that the movement is not normal.
The second determination means is
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), it is determined that the movable member is not normal.

According to the game machine of (2) above, it is determined whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member, which is performed at the timing when the fluctuation display of the symbol is started, and the timing when the fluctuation display of the symbol is stopped. Since the determination as to whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal is performed from different viewpoints, the accuracy of the error occurrence determination can be improved. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error with higher accuracy while avoiding an inoperable state even if a minor error occurs.

As described above, according to the appendix 28, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing error processing.

[11-29. Appendix 29-1 to Appendix 29-3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variable display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on the result of the lottery. Then, when this symbol stops at a specific combination, it shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the variable display of the design is performed, various effects are performed.

As a game machine of this kind, a game machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a game machine that performs an effect using such a movable accessory, a process for returning the movable accessory to the initial position (retry process) when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs. ) Has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-268038).

In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2007-268038, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is present at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on the detection result of the reference position sensor. Retry processing is in progress. Then, when a problem such as the movable accessory not returning to the initial position occurs, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position even if the retry processing is continuously performed, an error is determined and a predetermined error is determined. The process is being executed.

(29th issue)
However, as a defect related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that is resolved when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that the error is even in the case of such a minor error, unnecessary error processing will increase, which is not appropriate. On the other hand, the production using the movable accessory is an important factor in enhancing the interest of the game, so if the game is played on the game machine in which the error related to the operation of the movable accessory occurs, the decrease in the interest is denied. Absent. Therefore, it is preferable that the gaming machine in which the movable accessory cannot operate normally is managed by an authorized hall-related person, including the determination of whether to continue or stop the operation.

In order to solve the 29th problem, the game machines of Appendix 29-1 to the game machines of Appendix 229-3 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 29-1 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the variable display of the symbol when the end condition is satisfied.
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value, and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
With
The game control means
When the power-on operation is performed at least while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control means (for example, in step S24) for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed. It has a main CPU 101) capable of executing processing, and can transmit various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S19141 and S19147).
When it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal in the determination by the determination means, the restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 and the motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) that can execute
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means.
The determination means
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means for counting the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144 or step S19177).
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor operation stop state) in which the movable member cannot be operated is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the release means for canceling the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, the process of step S311 is executed). It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100) and a host control circuit (2100).

According to the game machine of (1) above, if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the production using the movable member is an important factor for enhancing the interest of the game, it is undeniable that the interest is lowered when the game is played with the game machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the game machine of (1) above, the movable member operates by making it possible to cancel the inoperable state based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. It is possible to make an important decision as to whether or not to operate the game machine that cannot be operated by an authorized hall-related person, and to prevent an unauthorized person from canceling the error motor operation stopped state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting the presence of the movable member at a specific position (for example, an initial position) is further provided.
The determination means
It has a position determining means for determining that the movable member is not normal when it is not present at least at the specific position.
The recovery control means
Each time the position determination means determines that the movable member does not exist at the specific position, a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147) is executed. The position recovery control means means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19147) is provided.
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the one set value has been performed, the number of times the position restoration process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine (2) above, this position restoration process is performed when the position restoration process for returning the movable member to a specific position is executed once or more even if the movable member is not in an inoperable state. Can be reset based on the receipt of setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times the position restoration process is executed is also performed by an authorized hall-related person and is not performed by an unauthorized person, so that the game machine can be appropriately managed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) to a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination means
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
Operation recovery control for executing an operation recovery process (for example, the motor driver reset process in step S19176) for resetting the driver of the drive means each time the operation determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Having means (eg, host control circuit 2100)
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the one set value has been performed, the number of times the operation recovery process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine of (3) above, even if it is not in an inoperable state, this operation recovery process is performed when the operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means is executed once or more. The number of executions can be reset based on the receipt of setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is also performed by an authorized hall-related person and is not performed by an unauthorized person, so that the game machine can be appropriately managed.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 29-2 is
It has a storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on the set value of any one of the plurality of set values and can store the game information related to the progress of the game. A game control means (for example, a game control means capable of executing one game by starting the variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and stopping the variable display of the symbol when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. For example, the main CPU 101) of the main control circuit 100 and
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value, and
At least a specific operating means (for example, backup clear switch 330) operated when erasing the game information stored in the storage means, and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
With
The game control means
When the operation of the specific operation means and the power-on operation are performed while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed is performed. Means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) and
When at least the operation of the specific operation means and the power-on operation are performed, the game information erasing means (for example, the process of step S2420) capable of erasing the game information stored in the storage means can be executed. Main CPU101) and
And various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed, information indicating that the game information has been deleted) is used as the effect control means. It can be transmitted (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S19141 and S19147).
When it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal in the determination by the determination means, the restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 and the motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) capable of executing.
The determination means
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means for counting the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S191444 or step S19177).
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor operation stop state) in which the movable member cannot be operated is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
It has a release means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S311) for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
The release means is
When the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means is not released. It is characterized in that, when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on, the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means is released (for example, the process of step S311 is executed).

According to the game machine of (1) above, if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the production using the movable member is an important factor for enhancing the interest of the game, it is undeniable that the interest is lowered when the game is played with the game machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the game machine of (1) above, when the setting change state is not controlled, the inoperable state is not released even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, and the setting is made. The inoperable state is released when it is controlled to the changed state. As a result, important decisions such as whether or not to operate the game machine in which the movable member cannot operate can be made by an authorized hall official, and the error motor operation stopped state cannot be canceled by an authorized person. Can be done.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
Further provided with a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from the specific position to a specified position.
The determination means
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
Even if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled until the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times). It has a character effect disapproval means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19180) that makes the character effect disapproval state so that the effect using the movable member cannot be executed.
The release means is
When the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means is not released. It is characterized in that the state in which the character production is not permitted by the character production disapproval means can be canceled.

According to the game machine (2) above, even if it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not possible until the number of times the recovery process is executed reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times). The character production is not permitted so that the production using the movable member cannot be performed without setting the state. Then, when the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if the operation of erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the inoperable state is not released, but the character production is not permitted. I am trying to cancel. As a result, important decisions can be made by authorized hall personnel, and when the error is not so serious as to be inoperable, such as when the character production is not permitted, the game information is deleted. Convenience can be ensured by canceling the production disapproval state.

(1) The game machine of Appendix 29-3 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the variable display of the symbol, and
At least the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 328) operated when changing the one setting value, and
A display means (for example, a display device 16) on which a predetermined image is displayed, and
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of a movable member, and
When the power-on operation is performed, the power supply means (for example, the power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means, and
With
The game control means
When the power-on operation is performed at least while the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control means (for example, in step S24) for controlling the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed. It has a main CPU 101) capable of executing processing, and can transmit various information (for example, information related to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55).
The effect control means
A determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S19141 and S19147).
When it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal in the determination by the determination means, the restoration process (for example, the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 and the motor driver reset process in step S19176) is performed so as to be normalized. ) With a recovery control means (eg, host control circuit 2100) that can execute
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means.
The determination means
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game.
The recovery control means
The recovery process can be executed each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further
A counting means for counting the number of times the recovery process is executed by the recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144 or step S19177).
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory inoperable means (for example, an error motor operation stop state) in which the movable member cannot be operated is set. The host control circuit 2100) that executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179, and
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the release means for canceling the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, the process of step S311 is executed). Host control circuit 2100)
The storage means (for example, the history recording process of step S306 and step S307) that can store the time information in the inoperable state as the history information based on the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means Subwork RAM 2100a) that stores history information when it is performed,
A display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that displays the error information history screen of FIG. 116 via the display control circuit 2300) that can display an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by having.

According to the game machine of (1) above, if the determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number of times, the movable member is in an inoperable state. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it does not become an inoperable state, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though it has been executed over multiple games, it becomes an inoperable state, and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since an information screen is displayed in which the time information in the inoperable state is displayed as history information, it is possible to manage the history of serious errors.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting the presence of the movable member at a specific position (for example, an initial position) is further provided.
The determination means
It has a position determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) that is not normal when the movable member is not present at least at the specific position (for example, NO in step S19141).
The recovery control means
Each time the position determining means determines that the movable member does not exist at the specific position (for example, NO is determined in step S19141), a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, for example). It has a position recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) for executing the initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147.
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times the position restoration process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, in step S323). Execute the process),
The storage means
It is possible to store at least one of the position recovery process history information including the time information in which the position recovery process is executed and the position recovery process count reset history information in which the number of times the position recovery process is executed is reset. ,
The display control means
Information indicating at least one of the position recovery processing history information and the position recovery processing count reset history information based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed. The feature is that the screen can be displayed.

According to the game machine of (2) above, every time it is determined that the movable member does not exist at a specific position, a position restoration process for returning the movable member to a specific position is executed, and one set value is changed. Based on what was done, the number of times the location recovery process was executed is reset. Then, based on the change of one setting value, the position recovery process history information including the time information in which the position recovery process is executed and the time information in which the number of times the position recovery process is executed are reset are input. An information screen showing at least one of the reset history information including the number of times of position recovery processing is displayed. Therefore, although it has not reached a serious error such as an inoperable state, it is possible to grasp in advance the possibility of a serious error such as an inoperable state by viewing the position recovery processing history information and the position recovery processing count reset history information. It becomes possible to manage the game machine appropriately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further, a driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) to a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination means
When the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving means (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determining means (for example, when a motor error is detected) is determined to be abnormal. It has a host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171.
The recovery control means
Operation recovery control for executing an operation recovery process (for example, the motor driver reset process in step S19176) for resetting the driver of the drive means each time the operation determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Having means (eg, host control circuit 2100)
The release means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the change of the one set value has been performed, the number of times the operation recovery process counted by the counting means is executed is reset (for example, in step S323). Execute the process),
The storage means
It is possible to store at least one of the operation recovery process history information including the time information when the operation recovery process is executed and the operation recovery process number reset history information in which the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is reset. ,
The display control means
Information indicating at least one of the operation recovery processing history information and the operation recovery processing count reset history information based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed. The screen can be displayed (for example, the hall menu display process in step S302 can be executed).

According to the game machine of (3) above, every time it is determined that the state related to the movable member is not normal, the operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means is executed, and one set value is changed. Based on this, the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is reset. Then, based on the change of one setting value, the operation recovery process history information including the time information in which the operation recovery process is executed and the time information in which the number of times the position recovery process is executed are reset are input. An information screen is displayed showing at least one of the reset history information including the number of operation recovery processes. Therefore, although it has not reached a serious error such as an inoperable state, it is possible to grasp in advance the possibility of a serious error such as an inoperable state by viewing the operation recovery processing history information and the operation recovery processing count reset history information. It becomes possible to manage the game machine appropriately.

As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Appendix 29-1 to Appendix 29-3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing error processing and management of the gaming machine.

[12. Other expansion examples, etc.]
In this embodiment, an embodiment when applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but all the inventions described in the present specification include pachinko machines, game machines, and slots without departing from the spirit of the invention. It can be applied to machines and all other gaming machines.

In addition, each of the above-described embodiments, examples, and modifications, including the above-mentioned appendix, is an example. It goes without saying that the configurations shown in each embodiment, each embodiment and each modification can be partially replaced or combined in other embodiments, other embodiments and other modifications. No. That is, the components described in each embodiment, each embodiment, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

B. Second Embodiment Next, the configuration and various operations of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a method (simultaneous variation type) capable of simultaneously varying a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol).

<Function flow>
First, with reference to FIG. 155, the function of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 155, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is easily performed. Become.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol game, and one condition for variable display of a normal symbol in a normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The "variable display" referred to in the present specification is a concept that is displayed in a variable manner. For example, a "variable display" that is actually displayed in a variable manner and a "stop display" that is actually stopped and displayed. , Etc. are possible. Further, in the "variable display", for example, a "derivative display" in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of a special symbol game can be performed. That is, in the present specification, the operation from the start of the "variable display" to the "derivative display" is referred to as one "variable display". Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" refers to "designs" used in pachinko games such as special symbols, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, and identification symbols, and identification symbols and decorations used in pachislot or slot games. It means that a symbol used when displaying or suggesting the result of the game can be included in the player playing the game, such as a symbol.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[Special design game]
When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, random numbers (big hit determination random value and symbol determination random value) are extracted from the jackpot judgment counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively, and each of the extracted random numbers is extracted. The numerical value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 155).

In the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, as shown in FIG. 155, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is memorized by the special symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is memorized, and the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. It is judged.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed with reference to the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above. To.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. The effect pattern to be executed is determined according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol, In addition, an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has been achieved, the big hit game control process for performing the big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state in the normal state, which is different from the jackpot game state, is managed. As the normal gaming state, for example, in the above-mentioned jackpot determination, a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a "big hit" increases (hereinafter, referred to as a "probability variable gaming state") and a special symbol start winning prize can be easily obtained. A game state (hereinafter referred to as a "short-time game state") and the like can be mentioned. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (random value for jackpot determination, random value for symbol determination, etc.) acquired at the time of the starting prize are obtained. ) Is put on hold. That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and after the currently executed variable display of the special symbol ends. The variable display of the reserved special symbol is started. In the following, the variable display of the special symbol on hold is also referred to as a "holding ball".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. You can get the reserved ball. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 155, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball has been won (whether or not the "big hit" has been won) based on the above-mentioned information on the reserved ball, and further, the determination result is used. It also has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on that, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described below, the variation pattern of the special symbol is divided into the variation patterns of the first half and the latter half, and each variation pattern is determined separately. Here, a method for determining the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern of the special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern table that defines a first half fluctuation pattern, a second half fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern in which these are stored in the main ROM 6102 of the main control circuit 6100, which will be described later.

These tables are referred to for determining the variation pattern type and the first half and second half variation patterns based on the winning type at the time of winning, the symbol designation command, and the like. Further, the main CPU 6101 transmits a combination of commands corresponding to the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns to the sub-control circuit 200 as fluctuation pattern designation commands. In the following description, a combination of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns is simply referred to as a “fluctuation pattern”.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines the type of fluctuation pattern (for example, one of nine types of out-of-order fluctuation patterns and nine types of hit fluctuation patterns) based on the winning type at the time of winning, the symbol designation command, and the like, and further responds. Determine the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern. For example, when the "normal fluctuation" of the out-of-range fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern, "none" of the command "00H" is determined as the first half fluctuation pattern, and the "low accuracy" of the command "00H" is determined as the second half fluctuation pattern. Either "Variation 1 (4.0 seconds)" or "Low probability variation 2 (8.0 seconds)" of the command "01H" is determined. The fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to such "normal fluctuation" is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 as "0000H" or "0001H" in which the commands of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are combined. The variation pattern designation command may be described as, for example, "00H00H" or "00H01H".

The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is the total time of the fluctuation times of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns. For example, the fluctuation pattern specification command "0000H" is the sum of the fluctuation time (0 ms) of the first half fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (4000 ms) of the second half fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "0102H" is the first half. The time (21000 ms) is the sum of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (11000 ms) and the fluctuation time of the latter half fluctuation pattern (10000 ms). In this way, with regard to the fluctuation pattern, after the rough type is determined, the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are determined in stages, so that the combination of fluctuation patterns is diversified, and as a result, the variation of the production pattern can be obtained. It can be easily increased.

Note that FIG. 156 shows only 18 types of fluctuation patterns, including hits and misses, for the sake of convenience, but of course, it may be more than shown in the figure. "Pseudo 1 to 4" and "special pseudo 1 to 3" are fluctuation patterns corresponding to so-called pseudo series. "Pseudo 1 to 4" are provided as a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-ream such as a normal pseudo-ream or a high-speed pseudo-ream. For example, "pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 hits" is, for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a big hit is obtained via normal reach or SP reach after pseudo-continuous execution. "Low probability", "chance time", and "small hit rush" mean "probability change and non-time saving game state", "probability change and time saving game state", and "probability change and non-time saving game state", respectively. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern related to "premier" is set only to the hit fluctuation pattern, but the variation pattern is not limited to this, and is not limited to this, and is "hit" and "small hit rush" or "hit". It may be a fluctuation pattern indicating that there is a richness (high expectation of hitting).

The small hit rush is a game state in which small hits occur more frequently than in the normal game state, and when electric support (support by electric tulips: a state in which the ordinary electric accessory 6046 described later is easier to open than in normal times) is not performed ( It is a gaming state when the fluctuation time of one special symbol (the second special symbol described later in the present embodiment) is short with a normal symbol (low probability). In addition, in the chance time (for example, 20 times of time reduction), when the time reduction is completed, a small hit rush may be entered. Although not shown, in the variation display of the second special symbol, a 10-minute variation (relatively long fluctuation time) may occur in the normal gaming state (low probability of the special symbol, low probability of the normal symbol). is there.

[Normal design game]
When there is a normal symbol start winning prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (flow of the normal symbol start winning process in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 155). reference).

In the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, as shown in FIG. 155, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. It is judged.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the hit determination of whether or not to make a "hit" is performed with reference to the random number value extracted from the hit determination counter. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined with reference to the result of the hit determination.

Next, a variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed with reference to the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol.

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the result is a "hit". In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "hit", a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed. In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, in particular, the possibility of winning a special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not "hit", the hit game control process is not executed. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball is determined by the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "hit". The ease of processing changes.

In this embodiment, as various random number value extraction methods, a soft random number method that generates random number values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random number values may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values. When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

<Structure of pachinko game machine>
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. Note that FIG. 157 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front side. FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 159 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine as seen from the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 157 to 159, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 includes a main body 6002, a base door 6003 that is openable and closable to the main body 6002, and a glass door that is openable and closable to the base door 6003. It is equipped with 6004.

[Main body]
The main body 6002 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 6002a (see FIG. 158). The main body 6002 is made of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 6003 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 6002. The base door 6003 is arranged in front of the main body 6002 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 6001), and by rotating the base door 6003 around one side end of the main body 6002, the main body 6002 The opening 6002a is opened and closed. As shown in FIG. 158, the base door 6003 is provided with a square opening 6003a. The opening 6003a is formed from a substantially central portion of the base door 6003 to an upper region, and is formed in a size that occupies most of the region.

Further, a speaker 6011, a game board 6012, a display device 6013, a dish unit 6014, a launching device 6015, a payout device 6016, and a board unit 6017 are attached to the base door 6003.

The speaker 6011 is arranged at the upper part (near the upper end portion) of the base door 6003. The game board 6012 is arranged in front of the base door 6003 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 6001) and is arranged so as to cover the opening 6003a of the base door 6003.

The game board 6012 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light transmission. As the light-transmitting resin, for example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacrylic resin, or the like can be used.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 6012 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 6001), a game area 6012a on which the game ball launched from the launching device 6015 rolls is formed. The game area 6012a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 6041 (specifically, an outer rail 6041a shown in FIG. 160 described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular. Further, a plurality of game nails (see FIG. 160 described later) are driven into the game area 6012a. The configuration of the game board 6012 (game area 6012a) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 160 described later. Although not shown, the game board 6012 is provided with various sensors such as a magnetic sensor and a vibration sensor for detecting an abnormality.

The display device 6013 is attached to the back side of the game board 6012 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 6001). The display device 6013 has a display area 6013a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 6013a is set so as to occupy all or a part of the surface of the game board 6012. In the display area 6013a of the display device 6013, various images such as an identification symbol for effect, an effect image, and a decorative image (decorative pattern) are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed in the display area 6013a of the display device 6013 via the game board 6012.

In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the display device 6013. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display device such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied as the display device 6013.

Further, a spacer 6019 is provided on the back side of the game board 6012 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 6001). The spacer 6019 is provided between the back surface of the gaming board 6012 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 6001) and the front surface of the display device 6013 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 6001). It forms a space that serves as a flow path for a gaming ball that rolls in the region 6012a. The spacer 6019 is made of a light-transmitting material. The present invention is not limited to this, and the spacer 6019 may be, for example, partially formed of a light-transmitting material or a non-light-transmitting material. ..

The plate unit 6014 is arranged below the game board 6012. The dish unit 6014 has an upper dish 6021 and a lower dish 6022 arranged below the upper dish 6021. As shown in FIG. 157, the upper plate 6021 and the lower plate 6022 are formed with a payout outlet 6021a and a payout outlet 6022a for lending the game ball and paying out the game ball (prize ball), respectively. When the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout port 6021a and the payout port 6022a and stored in the upper plate 6021 and the lower plate 6022, respectively. Further, the game ball stored in the upper plate 6021 is launched into the game area 6012a by the launching device 6015.

Further, the plate unit 6014 is provided with an effect button 6023. The effect button 6023 is mounted on the upper plate 6021. Further, a dial operation unit (jog dial) 6024 is rotatably attached to the peripheral edge of the effect button 6023 with respect to the effect button 6023. The pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed by using the effect button 6023 and / or the dial operation unit 6024, and when performing a predetermined effect, the display area 6013a of the display device 6013 is displayed. An image prompting the operation of the effect button 6023 and / or the dial operation unit 6024 is displayed.

The launcher 6015 is arranged in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) in front of the base door 6003. The launcher 6015 includes a launch handle 6025 that can be operated by the player and a panel body 6026 that engages the lower right corner of the dish unit 6014. The launch handle 6025 is arranged on the front side of the panel body 6026 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 6026.

Although not shown in FIGS. 157 to 159, a solenoid actuator (driving device) for controlling the firing operation of the game ball (game medium) is provided on the back side of the panel body 6026. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 157 to 159, a touch sensor is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 6025, and a launch volume is provided inside the launch handle 6025. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 6025, and changes the electric power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

In the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, when the player's hand comes into contact with the touch sensor of the firing handle 6025, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. As a result, it is detected that the player holds the launch handle 6025, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator. Then, when the player grasps the launch handle 6025 and rotates it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the launch volume changes according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 6025. , The power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 6021 are sequentially launched, and the launched game balls are guided by the guide rail 6041 (see FIG. 160 described later) and discharged to the game area 6012a of the game board 6012.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 157 to 159, a launch stop button is provided on the side portion of the launch handle 6025. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the launch stop button, the launch of the game ball is stopped even in the state where the launch handle 6025 is grasped and rotated.

The payout device 6016 is arranged on the back side of the base door 6003. A game ball is supplied to the payout device 6016 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout device 6016 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 6021 or the lower plate 6022 based on the establishment of the payout condition. Further, as shown in FIG. 159, a power switch 6035 is provided on the back side of the payout device 6016.

The board unit 6017 is arranged on the back side of the base door 6003. Various control boards, various units, various switches, and the like are arranged on the board unit 6017. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control board 6030 and the sub-control circuit 6200 (see FIGS. 161 and 162 described later) on which the main control circuit 6100 (see FIG. 161 described later) are mounted are mounted. A sub-control board 6040, a payout / launch control board 6050 on which a payout / launch control circuit 6300 (see FIG. 161 described later) for controlling payout / launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply circuit 6033 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 6060 or the like having (see FIG. 161) is provided on the board unit 6017.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 6040 is configured as a one-board board (a board in which one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs are provided on one board), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control is not limited to this. The board 6040 may be composed of a plurality of boards (for example, the host control circuit 6210, the audio / LED control circuit 6220, the display control circuit 6230, etc., which will be described later, may be formed of separate boards).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) having different various data (for example, jackpot probability) related to the degree of advantage of the pachinko game are set. It is provided. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player (for example, the jackpot probability is the highest), and as the set value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

Then, although not shown in FIG. 159, in the main board case accommodating the main control board 6030, the setting key 6080 and the setting value operated when the player changes or confirms the set value are changed. A setting switch 6081, a performance display monitor 6070, and an error notification monitor 6071 (all of which are described later with reference to FIG. 161) are accommodated. For example, the performance display data and set values described later are displayed on the performance display monitor 6070. For example, an error code or the like is displayed on the error notification monitor 6071.

The reason why the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 are housed in the main board case is that, in consideration of security, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 (hereinafter referred to as "game machine manager"). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081 from easily accessing the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081. However, the "inside the main board case" referred to in the present specification includes not only the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081 that cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, but also the setting key of the main board case. Notches are provided only at the corresponding installation locations of the 6080 and the setting switch 6081, and the pachinko game machine 6001 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 6001 is installed using the key managed by the game machine manager. It also includes those configured so that the game machine manager can access the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081 when the back surface is exposed.

[Glass door]
The glass door 6004 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially square surface. Further, the glass door 6004 is arranged on the front side of the game board 6012 and has a size of covering the game board 6012. On the front surface of the glass door 6004, a speaker cover 6029 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 6011.

Further, in the central portion of the glass door 6004, an opening 6004a having a size that exposes at least the game area 6012a is formed in the area of the game board 6012 facing the game area 6012a. Then, a protective glass 6028 having light transmission is attached to the opening 6004a of the glass door 6004, whereby the opening 6004a is closed. Therefore, when the glass door 6004 is closed with respect to the base door 6003, the protective glass 6028 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 6012a of the game board 6012.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 6012 will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 6012.

On the front surface of the game board 6012, as shown in FIG. 160, a guide rail 6041, a ball passage detector 6043, a first starting port 6044 (starting area), a second starting port 6045 (starting area), and the like are common. An electric accessory 6046 is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6012, there are a plurality of general winning openings 6051 and 6052, a first large winning opening 6053 (variable winning device), a second large winning opening 6054 (variable winning device), and an out opening 6055. The game nail 6056 is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6012, a first special symbol display device 6061, a second special symbol display device 6062, and a normal symbol display device are located above the display area 6013a of the display device 6013 arranged substantially in the center thereof. A 6063, a first special symbol hold display device 6064, a second special symbol hold display device 6065, and a normal symbol hold display device 6066 are provided.

Although not shown in FIG. 160, a 7-segment counter for directing is also provided on the front surface of the game board 6012. The 7-segment counter for production is composed of a display counter capable of displaying two-digit numbers and two alphabetic characters. Further, in the present embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, and the like are provided. May be good.

[Various components of the game area]
The guide rail 6041 is composed of an outer rail 6041a extending in an arc shape for partitioning the game area 6012a, and an inner rail 6041b extending in an arc shape arranged inside (inner peripheral side) of the outer rail 6041a. Will be done. The game area 6012a is formed inside the outer rail 6041a. The outer rail 6041a and the inner rail 6041b are arranged so as to face each other near the left end portion of the game area 6012a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launcher is placed between the outer rail 6041a and the inner rail 6041b. A guide path 6041c is formed to guide the game ball launched by the 6015 to the upper part of the game area 6012a.

Further, at the tip of the inner rail 6041b located on the upper left side of the game area 6012a, a ball discharge port 6041d is formed by the tip of the inner rail 6041b and a part of the outer rail 6041a facing the tip of the inner rail 6041b. Then, at the tip of the inner rail 6041b, a ball return prevention piece 6042 is provided so as to close the ball discharge port 6041d. The ball return prevention piece 6042 prevents the game ball discharged from the ball discharge port 6041d into the game area 6012a from passing through the ball discharge port 6041d again and entering the guide path 6041c.

The game ball released from the ball discharge port 6041d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 6012a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 6012a such as the plurality of game nails 6056, the first start port 6044, and the second start port 6045, and changes the traveling direction of the game area 6012a. It flows down from the top to the bottom.

A display area 6013a of the display device 6013 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 6012a. An obstacle 6013b is provided at the upper end of the display area 6013a. By providing the obstacle 6013b, the game ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 6013a in the game area 6012a.

The ball passage detector 6043 is arranged near the right end portion of the display area 6013a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 6043 is provided with a passing ball switch 6043a (see FIG. 161 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage detector 6043. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 6043, a lottery for whether or not it is a "hit" is performed, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 6044 is arranged below the display area 6013a, and the second starting port 6045 is arranged below the first starting port 6044. The first starting port 6044 and the second starting port 6045 are composed of members that can accept the game ball. Hereinafter, the entry or passage of the game ball into or passing through the first starting port 6044 or the second starting port 6045 is referred to as "winning". Then, when the game balls win the first starting port 6044 or the second starting port 6045, the first predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of the game balls is paid out. Further, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6044, a lottery for whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed, and the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6045, a lottery is performed to determine whether the ball is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and the special symbol is changed based on the result of the lottery. The display starts.

The first starting port 6044 is provided with a first starting port winning ball switch 6044a (see FIG. 161 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 6044. Further, the second starting port 6045 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 6045a (see FIG. 161 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 6045. The game balls that have won the first start port 6044 and the second start port 6045 are conveyed to the game ball collection unit (not shown) through the collection port (not shown) provided on the game board 6012. ..

The ordinary electric accessory 6046 is provided at the second starting port 6045. The ordinary electric accessory 6046 has a pair of blade members rotatably attached to both sides of the second starting port 6045 and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a (starting port solenoid, which will be described later in FIG. 161) for driving the pair of blade members. See) and. The ordinary electric accessory 6046 is driven by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a, and is in an open state in which a pair of blade members are expanded to facilitate winning a game ball in the second starting port 6045, and the pair of blade members are closed. One of the closed states that makes it impossible to win the game ball is generated at the second starting port 6045. Then, in the time-saving game state, the normal electric accessory 6046 is likely to be in the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory 6046 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize as in the present embodiment, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. It may be.

The general winning opening 6051 is arranged near the lower left portion of the game area 6012a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 6052 is arranged below the ball passage detector 6043, and is arranged near the lower right portion of the game area 6012a when viewed from the player side. The general winning opening 6051 and the general winning opening 6052 are composed of members capable of accepting a game ball. In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the general winning opening 6051 or the general winning opening 6052 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 6051 or the general winning opening 6052, a second predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is paid out.

The general winning opening 6051 is provided with a general winning ball switch 6051a (see FIG. 161 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 6051. Further, the general winning opening 6052 is provided with a general winning ball switch 6052a (see FIG. 161 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 6052.

The first special winning opening 6053 and the second special winning opening 6054 (special electric accessory) are arranged below the ball passage detector 6043 and between the first starting opening 6044 and the general winning opening 6052. The first large winning opening 6053 and the second large winning opening 6054 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first large winning opening 6053 is arranged above the second large winning opening 6054. To. The first prize opening 6053 and the second prize opening 6054 are both so-called attacker type opening / closing devices, and the opening / closing shutters 6053a and 6054a and the solenoid actuator for driving the shutter (the first in FIG. 161 described later). It has a large winning opening solenoid 6053b and a second winning opening solenoid 6054b).

Each of the first prize opening 6053 and the second prize opening 6054 accepts a game ball when the corresponding shutter is open (open state), and when the shutter is closed (closed state), the game is played. Do not accept the ball. In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the first prize opening 6053 or the second prize opening 6054 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the first large winning opening 6053, a third predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second large winning opening 6054, a fourth predetermined number of balls (15 in the present embodiment) are paid out.

Further, the first large winning opening 6053 is provided with a count switch 6053c (see FIG. 161 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 6053. Further, the second large winning opening 6054 is provided with a count switch 6054c (see FIG. 161 described later) for counting the game balls that have won the second large winning opening 6054.

The out port 6055 is provided at the bottom of the game area 6012a. This out port 6055 is a game in which none of the first start port 6044, the second start port 6045, the general winning opening 6051, the general winning opening 6052, the first major winning opening 6053, and the second major winning opening 6054 is won. Accept the ball.

When the arrangement of the various constituent members in the game area 6012a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 160, when the game ball is driven into the area on the right side of the game area 6012a by the player (when the game ball is hit right). The game ball is guided to the second starting port 6045 by the game nail 6056 or the like. In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting port 6044. In the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the player who wins the second starting port 6045 is more likely to receive the lottery of "big hit" which is advantageous for the player than the case where the first starting port 6044 is won. It has become. Therefore, in a time-saving gaming state in which winning a prize in the second starting port 6045 is relatively easy, there is a possibility of winning a prize in the first starting port 6044 by hitting right (a gaming state disadvantageous to the player). Possibility) can be lowered.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 160, the first special symbol display device 6061 and the second special symbol display device 6062 are arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013.

The first special symbol display device 6061 and the second special symbol display device 6062 each variably display the corresponding special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol described later) in the special symbol game (variable display and stop display). It is a display device. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, each special symbol display device is configured by a device that displays a special symbol as a symbol composed of numbers, symbols, or the like. The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The first special symbol display device 6061 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner when the game ball wins the first start port 6044 (special symbol start prize). Then, the first special symbol display device 6061 displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol. In the following, when the game ball wins the first starting port 6044, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

Then, in the first special symbol display device 6061, when the first special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to a state advantageous to the player. It shifts to the big hit game state. That is, in the first special symbol display device 6061, it is a "big hit" that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (big hit symbol) in which the first special symbol shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

The second special symbol display device 6062 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner when the game ball wins the second start opening 6045 (special symbol start prize). Then, the second special symbol display device 6062 displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol. In the following, when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062 is referred to as a "second special symbol".

Then, in the second special symbol display device 6062, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to a state advantageous to the player. It shifts to the big hit game state. That is, in the second special symbol display device 6062, it is "big hit" that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (big hit symbol) in which the second special symbol shifts to the jackpot gaming state. Further, in the second special symbol display device 6062, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specified mode (a mode of "small hit"), the gaming state is a big prize for the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to a small hit game state where the ball cannot be expected. That is, in the second special symbol display device 6062, it is "small hit" that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode (small hit symbol) in which the second special symbol shifts to the small hit game state.

The pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a method (simultaneous fluctuation type) capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, while one of the first special symbol display device 6061 and the second special symbol display device 6062 is performing variable display of the special symbol, the other special symbol display is performed. The device can start the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol start prize.

In the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 6053 or the second big winning opening 6054 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 6044 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the first special symbol display device 6061 (at the time of a big hit). , The first big winning opening 6053 is opened. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display device 6062 in a specific mode or a specified mode (at the time of a big hit or a small hit). , The second big winning opening 6054 is opened.

The open state of each large winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period (for example, 30 sec) elapses. Then, when the elapsed period of the open state of each large winning opening satisfies any of these conditions, the large winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

In the following, a game in which the first prize opening 6053 or the second prize opening 6054 is in a state (open state) in which a game ball can be easily accepted is referred to as a “round game”. During the round game, the big prize opening will be closed. In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

When the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061 is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of "loss"), or on the second special symbol display device 6062, the stop display is displayed. If the second special symbol is in a mode other than the specified and specified modes (the mode of "loss"), the player wins the fall lottery (not performed in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment). The game state does not change except for. That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display device, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 6044 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. Is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045 during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning is suspended. Then, when the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (number of hold) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending special symbols for variable display is eight in total.

Since the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment is a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, when the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are mixed, it is based on the holding ball of one special symbol. During the variable display of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol based on the reserved ball of the other special symbol may be started.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 160, the ordinary symbol display device 6063 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013. Then, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol display device 6063 is arranged on the right side of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 6061 and second special symbol display device 6062) when viewed from the player side.

The ordinary symbol display device 6063 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) ordinary symbols in a normal symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the ordinary symbol display device 6063 is composed of two LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. Then, in the ordinary symbol display device 6063, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of each ordinary symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display device 6063 turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs alternately when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 6043, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 6063 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the ordinary symbol display device 6063, when the stopped-displayed ordinary symbol is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode), the ordinary electric accessory 6046 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 6046 maintains the closed state. That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the ordinary symbol display device 6063, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 6046 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 6043 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of ordinary symbols to be held (that is, "the number of holdings") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[1st special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 160, the first special symbol holding display device 6064 is arranged on the upper side of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013 and on the left side of the first special symbol display device 6061 when viewed from the player side.

The first special symbol hold display device 6064 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol) that is being held. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the first special symbol hold display device 6064 is composed of a first special symbol hold quantity display unit 6064a and a first special symbol hold information display unit 6064b. The first special symbol reservation information display unit 6064b is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display device 6061, and the first special symbol reservation number display unit 6064a is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol reservation information display unit 6064b. Will be done.

The first special symbol reservation number display unit 6064a has four LEDs (first special symbol reservation display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the first special symbol hold display device 6064 displays the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol by turning on / off each of the first special symbol hold display LEDs.

Specifically, when the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol hold display LED (first from the left) located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side. The special symbol hold display LED) lights up, and the other first special symbol hold display LEDs turn off. When the number of the variable display hold of the first special symbol is two, the first and second first special symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other first special symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. To do. When the number of the variable display hold of the first special symbol is 3, the first to third first special symbol hold display LEDs from the left turn on, and the other first special symbol hold display LEDs turn off. .. Then, when the number of the variable display hold of the first special symbol is 4, all the 1st special symbol hold display LEDs are turned on.

The first special symbol hold information display unit 6064b displays information about the hold ball of the first special symbol. For example, the first special symbol holding information display unit 6064b displays information (identification information) regarding the holding ball of the first special symbol to be variablely displayed next by a symbol including numbers and symbols. The configuration of the first special symbol holding display device 6064 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 160, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of holdings of the variable display of the first special symbol. ..

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 160, the second special symbol holding display device 6065 is arranged on the upper side of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013, on the right side of the normal symbol display device 6063 when viewed from the player side.

The second special symbol hold display device 6065 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol) that is being held. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the second special symbol hold display device 6065 is composed of a second special symbol hold quantity display unit 6065a and a second special symbol hold information display unit 6065b. The second special symbol reservation information display unit 6065b is arranged on the right side of the normal symbol display device 6063, and the second special symbol reservation quantity display unit 6065a is arranged on the right side of the second special symbol reservation information display unit 6065b. ..

The second special symbol reservation number display unit 6065a has four LEDs (second special symbol reservation display LED) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the second special symbol reservation quantity display unit 6065a is the same as the display mode of the first special symbol reservation quantity display unit 6064a. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, the second special symbol hold display LED from the second special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of holds is displayed on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side. Lights up.

The second special symbol hold information display unit 6065b displays information about the hold ball of the second special symbol. For example, the second special symbol holding information display unit 6065b displays information (identification information) regarding the holding ball of the second special symbol to be variablely displayed next by a symbol including numbers and symbols. The configuration of the second special symbol hold display device 6065 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 160, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of hold numbers of the variable display of the second special symbol. ..

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 160, the ordinary symbol hold display device 6066 is arranged substantially in the center of the upper part of the display area 6013a of the display device 6013. Then, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol holding display device 6066 is arranged below the first special symbol display device 6061, the second special symbol display device 6062, and the ordinary symbol display device 6063.

The normal symbol hold display device 6066 is a device that displays the number of holds for variable display of normal symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the ordinary symbol hold display device 6066 is composed of four LEDs (ordinary symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the normal symbol hold display device 6066 displays the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol by turning on / off each of the normal symbol hold display LEDs.

The display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 6066 is the same as the display mode of the first special symbol hold quantity display unit 6064a. That is, when the variable display of the normal symbol is held, the normal symbol hold display LEDs located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side to the number of held normal symbols are turned on.

[Display device]
The display device 6013 is composed of a liquid crystal display device as described above, and performs various image display effects in the display area 6013a. Specifically, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061 and the effect image related to the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062 are displayed in the display area 6013a.

For example, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 6061, except for specific cases, for example, a plurality of production identification symbols consisting of numbers 1 to 8 and various characters ( The decorative pattern) is variablely displayed in the display area 6013a. Next, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061, a plurality of decorative symbols (big hit symbols and the like) corresponding to the first special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 6013a.

Then, when the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 6061 has a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"), the player is informed that it is a "big hit". An effect image for grasping is displayed in the display area 6013a. As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols stopped and displayed are arranged in a specific mode (for example, the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect such as displaying an image notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, for example, when the second special symbol is being variablely displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decorative symbols) are variablely displayed in the display area 6013a except in a specific case. .. Next, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062, a plurality of decorative symbols (big hit symbols and the like) corresponding to the second special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 6013a. Then, when the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 6062 has a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"), the player is informed that it is a "big hit". An effect image for grasping is displayed in the display area 6013a.

Further, for example, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in variable display, it corresponds to the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Both of the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols are performed in the display area 6013a.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area 6013a of the display device 6013, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 6064 and the second special symbol hold display device 6065 is displayed. For example, in the display area 6013a, hold information (for example, the same number of hold symbols as the hold number) for notifying the hold number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area 6013a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is in the standby state, an effect image (demo image) for making the player know that the game state is in the standby state is displayed in the display area 6013a. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 6063 is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for causing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area 6013a of the display device 6013. Further functions may be provided.

<Circuit configuration of pachinko game machines>
Next, the configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 161. Note that FIG. 161 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 6001.

As shown in FIG. 161 of the pachinko gaming machine 6001, the main control circuit 6100 that mainly controls the game operation, the sub control circuit 6200 that controls the effect operation according to the progress of the game, and the payout / launch control It has a circuit 6300 and a power supply circuit 6033.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 6100 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 6101, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 6102, a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 6103, an initial reset circuit 6104, an I / O port 6105, and commands. It includes an output port 6106 and a backup capacitor 6107. The main ROM 6102, the main RAM 6103, and the initial reset circuit 6104 are connected to the main CPU 6101.

In the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is performed at the time of winning the first start port 6044 or the second start port 6045, and this lottery process is controlled by the main control circuit 6100. That is, the main control circuit 6100 also serves as a means (determining means) for performing a lottery process as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 6101, the main ROM 6102, the main RAM 6103, the I / O port 6105, and the command output port 6106 may be provided separately. Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration example in which the main ROM 6102 is built in the substrate of the main control circuit 6100 will be described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a ROM board on which the main ROM 6102 is mounted may be connected to the board of the main control circuit 6100. Further, in the present embodiment, the various circuits (various means) in the main control circuit 6100 may be integrally formed or may be formed as separate bodies. Further, the main ROM 6102 does not have to be installed in the game machine, and may have a structure capable of communicating with the game machine.

The main CPU 6101 executes various processes according to the program stored in the main ROM 6102. The main ROM 6102 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 by the main CPU 6101, various data tables, and the like.

The main RAM 6103 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 6101 executes various processes, and stores various random number values, lottery results, various flags and variable values required for the main CPU 6101 for various processes. The memory maps of the main ROM 6102 and the main RAM 6103, and specific examples of various information stored in the main RAM 6103 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 164 and 166 to 169 described later. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 6103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 6101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium can be used as the temporary storage medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium. ..

The initial reset circuit 6104 is a circuit that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. The I / O port 6105 is an interface (input / output port) for signals input / output between the main control circuit 6100 and various devices connected to the main control circuit 6100. The command output port 6106 is an output port used when command data is transmitted from the main CPU 6101 to the sub control circuit 6200. The backup capacitor 6107 is a capacitor for promptly supplying power to, for example, the main RAM 6103 when the power is cut off (power off). By supplying power from this capacitor, various types of capacitors stored in the main RAM 6103 even when the power is cut off. Data can be retained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, various devices that operate in response to the signal output from the main control circuit 6100 are connected to the main control circuit 6100.

Specifically, the main control circuit 6100 includes a first special symbol display device 6061, a second special symbol display device 6062, a normal symbol display device 6063, a first special symbol hold display device 6064, and a second special symbol hold display device. The 6065 and the normal symbol hold display device 6066 are connected. Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the signal output from the main control circuit 6100. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 6100 to the first special symbol display device 6061, the first special symbol display device 6061 determines the first special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Controls the operation of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, the main control circuit 6100 is connected to various switches (sensors) and receives output signals of the various switches. Specifically, the main control circuit 6100 includes count switches 6053c, 6054c, general winning ball switches 6051a, 6052a, passing ball switches 6043a, first starting port winning ball switch 6044a, second starting port winning ball switch 6045a, and the like. Be connected.

The count switch 6053c counts the game balls that have won in the first large winning opening 6053, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 6100. The count switch 6054c counts the game balls that have won in the second large winning opening 6054, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 6100. The general winning ball switch 6051a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6100 when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 6051, and the general winning ball switch 6052a wins the game ball in the general winning opening 6052. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 6100.

The passing ball switch 6043a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6100 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 6043. The first starting port winning ball switch 6044a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6100 when the game ball wins the first starting port 6044. Further, the second starting port winning ball switch 6045a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6100 when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, the main control circuit 6100 is connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a, the first special winning opening solenoid 6053b, and the second special winning opening solenoid 6054b. Then, the main control circuit 6100 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 6046a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 6046 into an open state or a closed state. Further, the main control circuit 6100 drives and controls the first special winning opening solenoid 6053b and the second special winning opening solenoid 6054b, respectively, to open or close the first special winning opening 6053 and the second special winning opening 6054. (The opening and closing control of the special electric accessory (shutters 6053a, 6054a) is performed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, a performance display monitor 6070 and an error notification monitor 6071 are connected to the main control circuit 6100.

Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 under the control of the main CPU 6101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) game balls, and is also called a base value. The display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 will be described in detail later.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 6071. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 6071 displays a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing described later, a setting checking code indicating that the setting confirmation process described later is in progress, and the like. You can also do it. As the setting changing code, a symbol (setting changing symbol) that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, a setting key 6080, a setting switch 6081, and a RAM clear switch 6121 are connected to the main control circuit 6100.

The setting key 6080 is similar to a key or a key that serves as an opportunity to execute a setting change process or a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 6081 can be pressed, and is pressed when the set setting value is changed during the setting change processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the setting key 6080 and the setting are set so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine management manager cannot easily access the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081. The switch 6081 is housed in a main board case.

In the present embodiment, the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 are connected to the main control circuit 6100, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 are power supply circuits described later. It may be configured to be connected to 6033. Also in this case, in order to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine management manager from easily accessing the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081, the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 are predetermined cases. It is preferably housed inside. It should be noted that the “inside the predetermined case” referred to here is not only a configuration in which the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, but also the correspondence between the setting key 6080 and the setting switch 6081 in the case. When the pachinko game machine 6001 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 6001 is installed using the key managed by the game machine management manager, and the back surface is exposed. Also included are those configured to allow the pachinko / pachislot machine manager to access the setting key 6080 and / or the setting switch 6081.

The RAM clear switch 6121 is connected not only to the main control circuit 6100 but also to the payout / emission control circuit 6300, and is a switch that can be operated when the main RAM 6103 is initialized (cleared). When the backup data is cleared in response to the operation of the RAM clear switch 6121 by the manager of the game store, etc. at the time of power failure, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 6100 and the payout / launch control circuit 6300. To.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, the payout / launch control circuit 6300 is connected to the main control circuit 6100. A launching device 6015 for launching a game ball, a payout device 6016 for paying out a game ball, and a card unit 6150 are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 6300, and a rental operation unit 6151 is connected to the card unit 6150. Will be done.

When the payout / launch control circuit 6300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 6100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 6150, the payout / launch control circuit 6300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 6016. The payout device 6016 controls the payout operation of the game ball.

Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 6300, when the launch handle 6025 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the solenoid of the launch device 6015 is operated according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to the actuator (not shown), and the launching device 6015 controls the launching motion of the game ball. As the driving means of the launching device 6015, a motor may be used instead of the solenoid actuator.

When operated by the player, the rental operation unit 6151 outputs a signal requesting the card unit 6150 to rent the game ball. The card unit 6150 determines the number of game balls to be paid out (the number of balls to be rented) based on the signal for requesting the rental of the game balls output from the rental operation unit 6151. Then, when the card unit 6150 receives a signal requesting the rental of the game ball from the rental operation unit 6151, the card unit 6150 transmits a rental ball control signal including information on the determined number of rental balls to the payout / launch control circuit 6300.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, a power supply circuit 6033 is connected to the main control circuit 6100. The power supply circuit 6033 is connected not only to the main control circuit 6100 but also to the sub control circuit 6200, the payout / emission control circuit 6300, and the like. The power supply circuit 6033 generates a power supply voltage necessary for playing a game in the pachinko gaming machine 6001, and supplies the generated power supply voltage to the main control circuit 6100, the sub control circuit 6200, the payout / launch control circuit 6300, and the like.

Further, a power switch 6035 (see also FIG. 159) and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 6033. The power switch 6035 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 6001.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, the main control circuit 6100 includes an external terminal plate 6140 used for transmitting data to the hall computer 6700 that manages the pachinko game machine of the entire hall, a function of calling the hall staff, and the number of big hits. A calling device (not shown) having a function of displaying is connected.

[Performance display monitor]
Here, the contents of the data displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 will be described. The payout / launch control circuit 6300 aggregates the base values based on the past game history, and stores the aggregated results in a specific work area in the work area of the main RAM 6103. This specific work area is an area in which data is not cleared even if RAM clear processing (backup clear processing) is performed. The base value may be aggregated based on the fact that a predetermined operation has been performed, or the base value may be always aggregated so that the base value is always displayed on the performance display monitor 6070. ..

Although not shown, the payout / launch control circuit 6300 aggregates all base values based on the entire game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 6001 is manufactured) to the present. It includes a history aggregation means and a history aggregation means for each set value that aggregates the base value for each set value based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the game machine management manager or the like, the all history totaling means executes the above-mentioned totaling of all the base values. Then, all the base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means are displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 under the control of the main CPU 6101. Further, when the display operation of the base value for each set value is performed, the history totaling means for each set value executes the totalization of the base value for each set value. Then, the set value-based base value aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation means is displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 under the control of the main CPU 6101.

The history aggregation means for each set value can also aggregate only the base value for any set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the currently set setting value but also the base value for other setting values that are not currently set can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 6101 can display the base values for other set values on the performance display monitor 6070 without executing the setting change process.

Further, the main CPU 6101 has both the total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and the set value-specific base value aggregated by the set value-specific history aggregation means, for example, in response to an operation by the game machine management manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 6070, and only one of the two can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 6070.

The main CPU 6101 may display only the base values of specific set values on the performance display monitor 6070, or may display the base values of all the set values on the performance display monitor 6070. Further, the main CPU 6101 may display both the total base value and the base value for each set value on the performance display monitor 6070. Further, when the main CPU 6101 displays the base values of all the set values, or when displaying both the base values of all the set values and the base values of each set value, the main CPU 6101 uses both the performance display monitor 6070 and other display means. You may use it to display these base values.

Further, as described above, the payout / launch control circuit 6300 includes all history totaling means and set value-based history totaling means, but in addition to these, or in place of the set value-based history totaling means, setting change processing The post-setting history totaling means for totaling the base value after the setting change based on the game history from the time when is executed to the present may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 6070 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, all or part of all the base values and the base value for each set value and / or the base value for each set value after the setting change (base value after the setting change) is displayed on the performance display monitor 6070. By doing so, for example, information based on the past game history of the pachinko game machine 6001 can be easily confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 6070 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a special electric accessory (large winning opening) with respect to the total number of game balls to be paid out is described. ), The ratio of the number of game balls (paid out by the accessory) paid out by entering the ordinary electric accessory may be displayed. Further, for example, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the accessory to the total number of game balls fired may be displayed, and further, for example, the game paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning opening). It may display the ratio of the number of balls. Further, these ratios may be displayed for each set value.

[Sub-control circuit]
As shown in FIG. 161, the sub control circuit 6200 is connected to the command output port 6106 of the main control circuit 6100. The sub-control circuit 6200 (host control circuit 6210 described later) controls the entire sub-control circuit 6200 according to various commands (information regarding the progress of the game) transmitted from the main control circuit 6100.

Specifically, the sub-control circuit 6200 controls the sound reproduction operation by the speaker 6011, controls the image display operation by the display device 6013, and lamps including LEDs, based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 6100. The 6018 controls the lamp lighting / extinguishing operation, the accessory 6020 (decorative member) controls the effect operation, and the like. That is, the sub control circuit 6200 controls various effect devices based on the command from the main control circuit 6100, and executes various effects according to the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 6200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 6100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control circuit 6200 can transmit a signal to the main control circuit 6100. It may have various configurations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, an accessory detection sensor 6090 is connected to the sub-control circuit 6200. The accessory detection sensor 6090 is a sensor that detects that the accessory 6020 (movable accessory) is in the initial position. When the accessory 6020 is composed of a plurality of movable parts (when a plurality of motors are included), the accessory detection sensor 6090 is provided for each motor.

Although illustration and description are omitted, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the sub-control circuit 6200 includes a volume switch 108, an effect button switch 621, and a main button switch. Various effect switches such as 6621 and select button switches 6641a to 6641d are connected, and various effect functions for operating these switches based on the on / off state are also provided.

Next, the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit 6200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 162. Note that FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the sub-control circuit 6200 and a connection relationship between the sub-control circuit 6200 and various peripheral devices thereof. In FIG. 162, the accessory detection sensor 6090 is not shown for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 162, the sub-control circuit 6200 includes a relay board 6201, a sub-board 6202, a control ROM board 6203, and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) board 6204. Then, the sub-board 6202 is connected to the relay board 6201, the control ROM board 6203, and the CG ROM board 6204. In the sub-control circuit 6200, the sub-board 6202 and various ROM boards (control ROM board 6203 and CG ROM board 6204) are connected via a board-to-board connector (not shown).

The relay board 6201 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 6100 and transmitting the received command to the sub board 6202.

The sub-board 6202 is provided with a host control circuit 6210, an audio / LED control circuit 6220, a display control circuit 6230, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 6250, and a built-in relay board 6260.

The host control circuit 6210 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub control circuit 6200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 6100, and is composed of a CPU processor. The host control circuit 6210 is connected to the voice / LED control circuit 6220, the display control circuit 6230, and the built-in relay board 6260 in the sub-board 6202. Further, the host control circuit 6210 is connected to the control ROM board 6203.

Further, the host control circuit 6210 has a subwork RAM 6210a and a SRAM (Static RAM) 6210b. The subwork RAM 6210a is a storage device that acts as a temporary storage area for work when the host control circuit 6210 executes various processes, and various flags and variables required when the host control circuit 6210 executes various processes. Memorize the value of. The SRAM 6210b is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the subwork RAM 6210a. In the present embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the host control circuit 6210, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area. ..

The voice / LED control circuit 6220 is connected to the speaker 6011 and the lamp group 6018 via the built-in relay board 6260, and the voice by the speaker 6011 is based on the control signals (sound request and lamp request) input from the host control circuit 6210. This is a circuit that controls the reproduction operation and the light emission operation by the lamp group 6018. Therefore, functionally, the voice / LED control circuit 6220 has a voice controller 6220a and a lamp controller 6220b. The voice controller 6220a and the lamp controller 6220b are substantially included in the sound lamp control module 6226 described later.

In the present embodiment, when the control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the voice / LED control circuit 6220 are transmitted to the lamp group 6018 via the built-in relay board 6260, the voice / LED Communication between the control circuit 6220 and the lamp group 6018 is performed by a communication method (a kind of serial communication method) of SPI (Serial Periperal Interface). Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp group 6018 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED.

The display control circuit 6230 is connected to the display device 6013, and displays an image (decorative pattern image, background image, effect image, etc.) related to the effect based on the control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 6210. It is a circuit for controlling various processing operations when displaying with. The display control circuit 6230 includes a display controller (first display controller 6238 and second display controller 6239) and a built-in VRAM (Video RAM) 6237.

Further, the display control circuit 6230 is connected to the SDRAM 6250 in the sub-board 6202. Further, the display control circuit 6230 is connected to the CGROM board 6204. Further, the display controller in the display control circuit 6230 is directly connected to the display device 6013 without going through the relay board.

The SDRAM 6250 is composed of a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate2) SDRAM. Further, the SDRAM 6250 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing various image data in the drawing process of the image (moving image and still image) displayed by the display device 6013. For example, the SDRAM 6250 is provided with a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer), a motion buffer, and the like.

The built-in relay board 6260 receives various signals and various data output from the host control circuit 6210 and the audio / LED control circuit 6220, and transmits the received various signals and various data to the speaker 6011, the lamp group 6018, and the accessory 6020. It is a relay board for transmission.

Further, the built-in relay board 6260 includes an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 6261, a digital audio power amplifier 6262 (sound amplifier means), and a voltage conversion circuit unit 6269.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the I2C controller 6261, the digital audio power amplifier 6262, and the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 are mounted on the same relay board is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the relay on which the I2C controller 6261 is mounted is shown. A board, a relay board on which the digital audio power amplifier 6262 is mounted, and a relay board on which the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 is mounted may be provided separately. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which a relay board on which the I2C controller 6261, the digital audio power amplifier 6262, and the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 are mounted is provided in the sub-board 6202 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A relay board on which the I2C controller 6261, the digital audio power amplifier 6262, and the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 are mounted may be provided separately from the sub board 6202, and both boards may be electrically connected by wiring or the like.

The I2C controller 6261 is connected to the host control circuit 6210 and the motor controller 6270 of the accessory 6020. That is, the host control circuit 6210 is connected to the accessory 6020 via the I2C controller 6261 and the motor controller 6270. Then, the control signal and data (for example, excitation data) output from the host control circuit 6210 are input to the accessory 6020 via the I2C controller 6261 and the motor controller 6270.

In the present embodiment, the communication between the I2C controller 6261 and the motor controller 6270 is performed by the I2C communication method (a type of serial communication method). Further, although not shown, the accessory 6020 includes one or more motors, and the motor controller 6270 includes one or more motor drivers for driving each motor. Further, FIG. 162 shows an example in which only one accessory 6020 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of accessory 6020s may be provided.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 6210 may directly drive the motor of the accessory 6020 without using the motor controller 6270, or a control circuit for motor control may be separately provided. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of motor drivers (motors) are controlled by one control circuit, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used to control one or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers), or one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used to control one or more motors (motor drivers). It may be configured to control one motor (motor driver), or it may be configured to control one motor (motor driver) by one control circuit.

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 6262 is connected to the voice / LED control circuit 6220 and the speaker 6011. That is, the voice / LED control circuit 6220 is connected to the speaker 6011 via the digital audio power amplifier 6262. Therefore, the audio signal or the like output from the audio / LED control circuit 6220 is input to the speaker 6011 via the digital audio power amplifier 6262.

Although not shown, the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 is connected to the power supply circuit 6033, the speaker 6011, the lamp group 6018, and the motor controller 6270 (accessory 6020). The voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 is a circuit unit (DC / DC conversion circuit unit) that converts an input DC voltage into a lower DC voltage and outputs it. In the present embodiment, the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 converts the + 12V power supply voltage (DC voltage) input from the power supply circuit 6033 into the + 5V drive voltage (DC voltage). Then, the voltage conversion circuit unit 6269 supplies the converted + 5V drive voltage to the speaker 6011, the lamp group 6018, and the motor controller 6270 (accessory 6020).

A sub-main ROM 6205 is provided on the control ROM board 6203. The sub-main ROM 6205 stores various programs and various data tables for controlling the production operation of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 by the host control circuit 6210. Then, the host control circuit 6210 executes various processes according to the program stored in the sub-main ROM 6205.

In the present embodiment, the sub-main ROM 6205 is applied as a storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like used in the host control circuit 6210, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a storage medium that can be read by a computer provided with a control means. Storage medium may be applied. Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the sub-main ROM 6205.

The CGROM board 6204 is provided with the CGROM 6206. The CGROM 6206 is composed of a NOR type or NAND type flash memory. Further, the CGROM 6206 stores, for example, image data displayed on the display device 6013, audio data (access data) reproduced by the speaker 6011, and the like. At this time, various data are compressed (encoded) and stored in the CGROM 6206, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various data may be stored in the CGROM 6206 without being compressed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which various ROM boards (control ROM board 6203 and CGROM board 6204) and the sub board 6202 are connected by a board-to-board connector in the sub control circuit 6200 has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, various ROMs may be directly inserted into a port such as a socket provided on the sub-board 6202 to form the sub-board 6202 with a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself. That is, the sub-board 6202 and various ROMs may be integrally configured. Further, when the sub-board 6202 is composed of a single board having a ROM function or the ROM itself, the sub-control circuit 6200 uses a sub board according to the type of memory used as the CG ROM. A switching means for physically or electrically switching the circuit on the board, or a switching means for switching the information of the circuit on the sub-board to be used depending on the type of memory may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the data communication speed between each of the various storage means (sub-main ROM 6205, CGROM 6206, built-in VRAM 6237, SDRAM 6250) and the corresponding control circuit is determined by the built-in VRAM 6237> SDRAM 6250> sub-main. ROM6205≈CGROM6206. That is, in the present embodiment, the communication speed between the built-in VRAM 6237 and various circuits in the display control circuit 6230 is the fastest, followed by the communication speed between the SDRAM 6250 and the display control circuit 6230. Then, the communication speed between the sub-main ROM 6205 and the host control circuit 6210 and the communication speed between the CG ROM 6206 and the display control circuit 6230 become the slowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit can be arbitrarily set. For example, the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different from that of the present embodiment, or the communication speed between each storage means and the corresponding control circuit. May all be the same.

Here, possible configurations of the various storage means (information storage means) described above will be described. In the present embodiment, information about transparency data that can be used when the storage means (first storage means) of information about image data (compressed (encoded) image data) sets transparency for image data. The configuration is physically the same as that of the storage means (second storage means) of the (alpha table) (CGROM 6206), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first storage means (first information storage means) may be composed of a storage means (storage medium) physically different from the second storage means (second information storage means). ..

Further, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification means not only a storage means such as CGROM 6206, but also a table stored in the storage means, a data storage area in the storage means, and the like. Good. Therefore, for example, the first information storage means and the second information storage means described above may be different data storage areas or different tables in the same storage means. Further, the mode may be stored in different register addresses. That is, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification is different not only when the storage means (storage medium) are physically different, but also when they are physically the same storage means (for example, ROM, RAM, etc.). However, it also includes the case where the data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) are different in the storage means.

The above-mentioned meaning of "information storage means" in the present specification is also applicable to the above-mentioned SDRAM 6250 (third information storage means) and built-in VRAM 6237 (fourth information storage means). Therefore, for example, the above-mentioned first information storage means to the fourth information storage means may be composed of physically different storage means (storage media), or the first information storage means to the first information storage means to the first. The information storage means of 4 may be composed of different data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in one storage means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first information storage means and the second information storage means are configured by different data areas in one storage means (CGROM 6206), and the third information storage means is used. The fourth information storage means is composed of a storage means (SDRAM6250) physically different from the storage means (CGROM6206) including the first information storage means and the second information storage means, and the fourth information storage means is the first information. An example of configuring the storage means (CGROM 6206) including the storage means and the second information storage means and the storage means (built-in VRAM 6237) physically different from the third information storage means (SDRAM 6250) has been described. The invention is not limited to this. Whether the "information storage means" is composed of a data area or a storage means, and how to combine the "information storage means" defined as the data area and the "information storage means" defined as the storage means. It can be appropriately set according to, for example, the configuration (number, type, etc.) of the storage means provided in the game machine. For example, in the present embodiment, the first information storage means to the third information storage means are configured by different data areas in one storage means, and the fourth information storage means is the first. The information storage means 1 to the storage means including the third information storage means may be physically different from the storage means.

<Various registers of the main CPU>
Next, various registers included in the main CPU 6101 will be described with reference to FIG. 163. Note that FIG. 163 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 6101.

The main CPU 6101 has an accumulator A (hereinafter referred to as "A register"), a flag register F, a general-purpose register B (hereinafter referred to as "B register"), and a general-purpose register C (hereinafter referred to as "C register") as main registers. ), General-purpose register D (hereinafter referred to as "D register"), general-purpose register E (hereinafter referred to as "E register"), general-purpose register H (hereinafter referred to as "H register") and general-purpose register L (hereinafter referred to as "L register"). "). Further, as sub-registers, the main CPU 6101 includes an accumulator A', a flag register F', a general-purpose register B', a general-purpose register C', a general-purpose register D', a general-purpose register E', a general-purpose register H', and a general-purpose register L'. As a general-purpose register. Each register is composed of 1-byte registers.

Further, in the present embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “BC register”), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “DE register”). Further, in the present embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “HL register”).

As shown in FIG. 163, predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing and the like is set in each bit of the flag registers F and F'. For example, bit 6 (D6) is set with data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the calculation result is "0" in the calculation result determination process. Specifically, when the calculation result is "0", the data "1" is set in the bit 6, and when the calculation result is not "0", the data "0" is set in the bit 6. Then, in the calculation result determination process, the main CPU 6101 makes a determination with reference to the bit 6 data "0" / "1".

Further, the main CPU 6101 has an expansion register Q (hereinafter, referred to as “Q register”). The Q register is composed of a 1-byte register. In this embodiment, various main CPU 6101 dedicated instruction codes that can specify an address using this Q register are provided on the source program of various processes described later, and by using this instruction code, The processing efficiency has been improved and the capacity of the main ROM 6102 has been reduced. In various main CPU 6101 dedicated instruction codes that specify an address using the Q register, the address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. Further, "F0H" is set as an initial value in the Q register immediately after the reset of the main CPU 6101.

Further, the main CPU 6101 is composed of an interrupt page address register I (hereinafter referred to as "I register") and a memory refresh register R, which are composed of 1-byte registers, and a 2-byte register. It has an index register IX (hereinafter referred to as "IX register"), an index register IY (hereinafter referred to as "IY register"), a stack pointer SP, and a program counter PC as dedicated registers.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as “memory maps”) of the main ROM 6102 and the main RAM 6103 included in the main control circuit 6100 (microprocessor) will be described with reference to FIGS. 164A to 164C. Note that FIG. 164A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 164B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 6102, and FIG. 164C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 6103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 6100, as shown in FIG. 164A, the memory area of the main ROM 6102, the memory area of the main RAM 6103, the built-in register area, and the XCS decoding area are arranged from the head (0000H) side of the address. Each of them is arranged at a predetermined address in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 6102, as shown in FIG. 164B, the program area, the data area, the out-of-area area, the trademark recording area, the program management area, and the security setting area are displayed from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 6102. In order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 6101 in various control processes related to the progress of the game and the playability are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 6101 in various control processes related to the progress of the game and the game playability (for example, a data table such as a jackpot lottery data table, various control commands to the sub control circuit 6200 (for example) Data for sending the command), etc.) is stored. That is, in the game ROM area (game storage area) composed of the program area and the data area, various programs required for the control processing (process related to game playability) related to the game actually performed by the player at the game store and Various data are stored.

Further, in the area outside the area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the game playability) that are not directly related to the game (game progress and game playability) performed by the player are stored. For example, the program and data used in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachinko gaming machine 6001, the checksum generation process at the time of power failure, and the control program used at the thumb check process at the time of power recovery (power recovery). And data, as well as the anti-fraud program and the data required for it are stored in the out-of-area area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 6103, as shown in FIG. 164C, the game RAM area (game temporary storage area) and the out-of-area RAM area (out-of-area temporary storage area) are formed from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 6103. , In this order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

In the game RAM area, for example, various data (various random values, jackpot determination results, etc.) determined by execution of a control program related to the game (game progress and game playability) performed by the player are temporarily stored. A work area and a stack area for storing are provided. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area of a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the out-of-area RAM area is provided with an out-of-area work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the game (game progress and game playability) performed by the player, and an out-of-area stack. In the present embodiment, the out-of-area RAM area is used to perform various processes that are not directly related to the game performed by the player, such as a thumb check process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, in the main ROM 6102, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the game performed by the player are stored in the gaming ROM. It is stored in the out-of-area ROM area (out-of-area storage area) arranged at an address different from the area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the game performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 6103 using an out-of-area RAM area arranged at an address different from the game RAM area.

In such a configuration of the main ROM 6102, programs and data unnecessary for the game itself actually played by the player can be arranged in the ROM area outside the area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

[Modification example of the configuration of the work area in the main RAM]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164, an example is shown in which the work area of the game RAM area is used as one area in the main RAM 6103 arranged in the area within a predetermined range from the address “F000H” in the memory map. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment is provided with the simultaneous fluctuation function, various control processes related to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and various control processes related to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are performed. It is desirable to be able to efficiently switch between. In order to solve this problem, for example, the work area of the game RAM area in the main RAM 6103 is divided into a first work area starting from the address "F000H" and a second work area starting from the address "F100H". 1 Various control processes related to the variation display of the special symbol may be executed using the first work area, and various control processes related to the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed using the second work area.

In this case, for example, an identifier indicating whether to use the first work area or the second work area is added to various data used in various control processes related to the variable display of the special symbol. Then, based on the identifier added to the data to be processed, if the identifier corresponds to the use of the first work area (various control processes for variable display of the first special symbol), the first work The upper level (“F0H”) of the start address of the area is loaded, and various control processes are performed on the data to be processed in the first work area. On the other hand, if the identifier added to the data to be processed corresponds to the use of the second work area (various control processes for variable display of the second special symbol), it is higher than the start address of the second work area. ("F1H") is loaded, and various control processing predetermineds are performed for the data to be processed in the second work area.

When such a configuration of the work area is adopted for the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, between various control processes related to the variation display of the first special symbol and various control processes related to the variation display of the second special symbol. Can be switched efficiently. That is, when the configuration of the work area of the game RAM area of this example is used, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently in the pachinko game machine 6001 having the simultaneous fluctuation function. , The processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 having the simultaneous fluctuation function is shown, but the game is not limited to such playability, and the processing related to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is efficient. You can do it well.

In this example, various control processes related to the variation display of the first special symbol are executed using the first work area, and various control processes related to the variation display of the second special symbol are performed using the second work area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the type of special symbol, which of the first work area and the second work area is used in each processing unit performed in the progress control of the game is defined by the identifier added to the data to be processed. However, the work area to be used in the process may be selected based on the identifier. In such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently select the work area to be used according to the identifier attached to the data to be processed in the processing unit and perform a predetermined process. As a result, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

<Type of game state>
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101 will be described.

First, as the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, there are a "big hit game state" and a "small hit game state" in which the expectations of prize balls are different from each other.

The jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which a round game occurs in which the shutter 6053a of the first winning opening 6053 or the shutter 6054a of the second winning opening 6054 has a long opening period (that is, a period of one round) (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, it is a game state in which a player can expect a big prize ball. That is, in the big hit game state, the repeated mode of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big winning opening becomes advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the small hit game state is a game state in which a round game occurs in which the period of one round is shorter (for example, 1.8 seconds) than the big hit game state, and the player cannot expect a large prize ball. is there. That is, in the small hit game state, the repeated mode of the open state and the closed state of the shutter of the big winning opening is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the big hit game state. In the present embodiment, the small hit game state is when the "small hit" is won in the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 6045. Only, it is a game state to shift.

In the big hit game state, it is possible to perform a round game, while in the small hit game state, basically, the round game is not provided, and the big winning opening where the accessory continuous operation device does not operate is opened and closed. May be possible. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player, but after the end of the small hit game, the game state shifts to a more advantageous game state than before the transition to the small hit game state. It may not be allowed. However, if the large winning opening with a specific area opens during the small hit game state, the condition device operates when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the accessory continuous operation device operates, the small hit After the end of the gaming state, the game may shift to the big hit gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and the number of rounds may be counted even in the small hit gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which a small hit is provided for the first special symbol and a small hit is provided for the second special symbol has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present invention, when a small hit is provided for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a small hit is provided for the first special symbol, and a small hit is not provided for the second special symbol. , And, the same applies to any case where a small hit is not provided for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, as the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, there are "probability variation game state" (high probability game state) and "normal game state" (low probability game state) in which the winning probabilities of "big hits" are different from each other. is there. The probabilistic gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the "big hit" is high, and the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the "big hit" is lower than that in the probabilistic gaming state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the "big hit" in the normal gaming state is, for example, 1/199 (at the time of setting "6") to 1/259 (setting "6") depending on the set value. It changes in the range of 1 ”). On the other hand, the winning probability of the "big hit" in the probabilistic game state changes, for example, in the range of 1 / 39.9 (at the time of setting "6") to 1 / 51.8 (at the time of setting "1").

Further, as the types of game states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, there are "short-time game state" (high winning game state) in which the winning probability of the normal symbol (probability that the normal symbol is in the "hit" mode) is different from each other. There is a "non-time saving game state" (low winning game state).

The "time saving game state" referred to in the present specification is a game state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is high. That is, the time-saving game state is a game state in which the ordinary electric accessory 6046 (blade member) provided in the second start port 6045 is likely to be in an open state (a game state in which a second start port winning is likely to occur). It is a game state that is advantageous for the person. The time-saving game state ends when the "big hit" is determined, or when the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined number of time-saving times (for example, 100 times) is executed.

On the other hand, the "non-time-saving game state" is a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is lower than that in the "time-saving game state". Therefore, the non-time saving game state is a game state in which the normal electric accessory 6046 (blade member) is unlikely to be opened (a game state in which the second start opening winning is unlikely to occur), which is disadvantageous to the player. is there.

Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the combination of the above-mentioned gaming states other than the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state changes. The combination of game states changes according to, for example, an effect mode managed and transition-controlled by the sub-control circuit 6200.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a probabilistic gaming state and a time-saving gaming state occur at the same time (a state in which there is a high-probability time-saving), and a probabilistic gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state occur at the same time. A game state (a state of "high accuracy no time reduction") is provided. In addition, in the state of "high accuracy no time reduction", it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, so it is also called "latent gaming state". Further, in the present embodiment, a gaming state in which a normal gaming state and a time-saving gaming state occur at the same time (a state in which there is a "low probability time-saving") and a gaming state in which a normal gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state occur at the same time (a gaming state in which a normal gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state occur at the same time) A state of "no low accuracy time reduction") is also provided.

<Simultaneous fluctuation function of special symbols>
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a type in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. Then, when the simultaneous fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the following various processes are performed.

If one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is already changing to become a big hit at the start of the change, the change display of one special symbol is a loss or a small hit. It is controlled so that it becomes a variable display. That is, if the other special symbol is already undergoing a big hit at the start of the change of one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol will not be a big hit, and internally, one of them will be a big hit. For the variable display of the special symbol, a lottery of the variable display (missing symbol or small hit symbol) is performed so that the symbol determination process of the loss or the small hit is forcibly performed.

Further, when the symbol of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is confirmed (stop display), one special symbol is a jackpot symbol (specific mode) and the other special symbol is changing. In this case, the symbol determination process is performed so that the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly changed to the variable display of loss (missing symbol).

Further, in the case of shifting to the jackpot operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, a process is performed to prevent the other special symbol from starting to fluctuate. Specifically, when shifting to the jackpot operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, the special symbol pause flag provided for the other special symbol is set to the ON state, and the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. Then, after the jackpot game performed by confirming the jackpot of one special symbol is completed, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state.

Further, in the case of shifting to the small hit operation when the symbol of one special symbol (second special symbol in the present embodiment) is determined, the processing for interrupting the variable display of the other special symbol is performed. Specifically, when shifting to the small hit operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the on state to interrupt the variable display of the other special symbol, and one of them. After the end of the small hit game performed by confirming the small hit of the special symbol of, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state. In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol is interrupted, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is interrupted, and the special symbol is kept changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the fluctuation display time of one special symbol (waiting time for a special symbol described later) has elapsed and the confirmed symbol of one special symbol is a jackpot symbol (at the time of finalizing the jackpot symbol), When the other special symbol shifts from the demo waiting state to the start of fluctuation (the other special symbol wins a prize), that is, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends in the jackpot symbol (specific mode). When the other special symbol starts to change (at the time of winning), the following processing is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 165A, an example of processing in a case where the variation display of one special symbol ends at the jackpot symbol and the variation start of the other special symbol overlaps will be described. FIG. 165A shows the processing contents for each special symbol when the variation display of one special symbol ends in the jackpot symbol (specific mode) and the variation start of the other special symbol (at the time of winning) overlaps. It is a time chart for explaining.

In this case, first, when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed (when the jackpot is confirmed: t1 in FIG. 165A), the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the ON state, and the other special symbol starts to fluctuate. Try not to. Next, after the end of the jackpot game performed by confirming the jackpot of one special symbol (t2 in FIG. 165A), the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state. As a result, the variable display of the other special symbol is started. In addition, in the case of having the game property that the electric support is attached in the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the off state after the end of the game period of the electric support, and the other special symbol is set. Fluctuation display of is started. If the electric support is not attached after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the off state at the end of the jackpot game, and the variation display of the other special symbol is started.

However, in this case, the other special symbol is not forcibly displayed as a variable display in which the stopped symbol is lost or a small hit, and the lottery result of the other special symbol (result of the big hit lottery, etc.) is maintained. , On the other hand, the variable display of the special symbol is not started. Therefore, by performing such a process, it is possible to prevent wastefully digesting one reserved ball of the other special symbol. Further, in this case, when the lottery result of the other special symbol is a big hit, the other special symbol is not forcibly stopped by the lost symbol immediately after the big hit game of one special symbol is completed, so that the other special symbol is not forcibly stopped to change at the same time. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game with respect to the variable function.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation start of the other special symbol (at the time of winning) overlaps, the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not only when the variation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol and when the variation of the other special symbol starts (at the time of winning), but also as shown in FIG. 165B, the other special symbol The timing of the fluctuation start may be the timing from the time when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol (t1 in FIG. 165B) to the predetermined time before (Δt = t1-t0 in FIG. 165B). For example, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol may be set to the on state internally so that the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. In this case as well, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained. The period (Δt = t1-t0) from when the variation display of one of the special symbols ends with the jackpot symbol to a predetermined time before can be appropriately set.

<Structure of special symbol work area table and special symbol related definition data table>
Next, the configuration of each special symbol work area table and each special symbol-related definition data table provided in the main RAM 6103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 169. Note that FIG. 166 is a configuration diagram of the first special symbol work area table, and FIG. 167 is a configuration diagram of the first special symbol-related definition data table. Further, FIG. 168 is a configuration diagram of the second special symbol work area table, and FIG. 169 is a configuration diagram of the second special symbol-related definition data table.

[1st special symbol work area table]
The first special symbol work area table stores various information used in various control processes (various modules) for variable display of the first special symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, in the first special symbol work area table, as a storage area, a first special symbol control state number area, a first special symbol per flag area, and a first special symbol hold number area , 1st special symbol game state number area, 1st special symbol number area, 1st special symbol demo display state flag area, 1st special symbol game state transition offset area, 1st special symbol waiting time management timer area, 1st special A symbol pause flag area, a first special symbol game state designation parameter area, a first special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and a first special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area are provided, and these storage areas are used for the first special symbol work. They are arranged in this order from the start address ("W_T1_YY00") side of the area table. In the first special symbol work area table, as shown in FIG. 166, the address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the first special symbol work area table.

In the first special symbol work area table, the first special symbol waiting time management timer area is composed of a 4-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 1-byte area.

In the first special symbol hit flag area in the first special symbol work area table, information indicating the result (big hit or loss) of the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) performed at the time of winning the first start opening is stored. Stored. Further, in the first special symbol pause flag area, the value (on value / off value) of the special symbol pause flag of the first special symbol used in the processing control at the time of simultaneous fluctuation is stored.

Further, in the first special symbol waiting time management timer area, one timer is configured in the 2-byte area on the upper side (first address side) on the address, and one timer is configured in the 2-byte area on the lower side. In the present specification, the former is referred to as a high-order 2-byte timer, and the latter is referred to as a low-order 2-byte timer. Each 2-byte timer is managed separately, and the count value of the timer is stored in each 2-byte area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the variation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the special symbols (first and second special symbols) is divided into the variation display time of the first half and the variation display time of the second half, and each variation. The display time is managed separately by a 2-byte timer. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) in the first half of the special symbol is managed by the upper 2-byte timer, and the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) in the latter half of the special symbol is managed by the lower 2 It is managed by a byte timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time of the first half of the special symbol may be managed by the lower 2-byte timer, and the variable display time of the latter half of the special symbol may be managed by the upper 2-byte timer.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the control process of the first special symbol, various monitoring times other than the fluctuation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the first special symbol are set in the upper 2-byte timer of the first special symbol. To. For example, as will be described later, the interval time until the big hit game starts (the special symbol hit start display time described later), the interval time until the big hit game ends (the special symbol hit end display time described later), the fixed waiting time of the specific symbol, The display time between rounds is set in the upper 2-byte timer. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which these monitoring times other than the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) are set in the lower 2-byte timer.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which two timers (upper 2-byte timer and lower 2-byte timer) are both configured by 2 bytes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, production specifications and games. The configuration of the two timers can be arbitrarily set according to the nature and the like. For example, each timer may be configured with a number of bytes other than 2 bytes, or the number of bytes of the two timers may be different from each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the variable display time of the special symbol is divided into the variable display time of the first half and the latter half and each time is managed by the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer has been described. Not limited to. The period managed by each of the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer may be different from each other. For example, the period from the start of the variable display time of the special symbol to the time that can be counted by the 2-byte timer is managed by the upper 2-byte timer, and after the counting of the upper 2-byte timer is completed, the remaining period is the lower 2-byte timer. You may manage it with.

Further, in the present embodiment, even for a predetermined monitoring time other than the fluctuation display time of the special symbol, if the time is long (a period that cannot be counted by the 2-byte timer), the monitoring time is concerned. May be divided into two, and the divided monitoring time may be managed by the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer, respectively.

By providing the timer having the above-described configuration, for example, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the system cycle time (processing cycle related to game control) is 6 msec, so the period that can be monitored by the 2-byte timer is 65536 × 6 msec, and 4 when monitoring a longer time. A byte timer is needed. For example, when the entire variation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the special symbol is a long time of about 10 minutes, a 4-byte timer is required. However, if the time that can be monitored by the 2-byte timer, such as the short-time fluctuation display time of the entire special symbol or the interval time until the start of the big hit game, is monitored by the 4-byte timer, it is equivalent to 4 bytes. Of the timer areas of, the timer area for the upper 2 bytes is unused, which is not efficient.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the 4-byte timer is composed of two separate 2-byte timers, and the fluctuation display time of the first half and the fluctuation display time of the second half of the special symbol are set separately (independently). ) When the configuration is managed by a 2-byte timer, both of the two 2-byte timers are used even if the entire fluctuation display time of the special symbol is short, so there are no unused timers. .. Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a short time such as an interval time until the start of the big hit game is monitored by using one of the 2-byte timers. Therefore, in the timer configuration of the present embodiment, various monitoring times can be efficiently managed by using the timer area. That is, in the timer configuration of the present embodiment, various processes performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be efficiently executed, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, for example, when two 2-byte timers are provided and one of the 2-byte timers is used to monitor the fluctuation display time of a special symbol for a short time or the interval time until the start of the big hit game, a long time is used. When monitoring the fluctuation display time of a special symbol, a method of monitoring by adding up the count value of the upper 2-byte timer and the count value of the lower 2-byte timer can be considered. However, as in the present embodiment, the 4-byte timer is composed of two separate 2-byte timers, and the fluctuation display time of the first half and the fluctuation display time of the second half of the special symbol are separately (independently) 2 bytes. In the case of the configuration managed by the timer of, it is not necessary to add up the count value of the upper 2-byte timer and the count value of the lower 2-byte timer. In this case, since the total processing of the count values of the timers can be omitted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, an example in which various times are managed by two timers has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which various times are managed by one timer may be used.

[1st special symbol related definition data table]
In the first special symbol-related definition data table (index table), various information (storage area, storage area,) required when reading information used in various control processes (various modules) of the variation display of the first special symbol from the main RAM 6103 is performed. Data area, address of constant definition value) is stored. Therefore, in various control processes for variable display of the first special symbol, desired information can be read directly from the main RAM 6103 by referring to various addresses defined in the first special symbol-related definition data table. .. The index table referred to here may be a storage body of information in which reference information is stored, or may be a set of structures or variables.

As shown in FIG. 167, the first special symbol-related definition data table includes a storage area for the first special symbol selection value (“0” in the present embodiment) and a second special symbol in the second special symbol work area table. Storage area for the address of the hit flag area (lower address), storage area for the address of the second special symbol pause flag area in the second special symbol work area table, start address of the first special symbol hold storage area (lower address) ) Storage area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the first special symbol hold storage read pointer area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the first special symbol hold storage write pointer area, first special symbol work Storage area for the start address of the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in the area table, storage area for the address of the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table, second special symbol work area Storage area of the start address of the table, storage area of the start address of the first special symbol fluctuation start setting data table, storage area of the start address of the first special symbol confirmation setting data table 1, storage area of the first special symbol confirmation setting data table 2 A storage area for the start address, a storage area for the start address of the first special symbol game end setting data table, and a storage area for the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table are provided, and these storage areas are the first. The data are arranged in this order from the start address ("D_T1_XX00") side of the special symbol-related definition data table. Further, in the first special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 167, the address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table. There is.

In the first special symbol-related definition data table, the storage area of the first special symbol selection value (0) and the address (lower address) of the second special symbol per flag area in the second special symbol work area table are stored. Area, storage area for the start address (lower address) of the first special symbol hold storage area, storage area for the address (lower address) of the first special symbol hold storage read pointer area, and first special symbol hold storage write Each storage area of the address (lower address) of the pointer area is composed of a 1-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 2-byte area.

As described above, the address information of various information required for the control process of the variation display of the first special symbol is collectively stored in the first special symbol-related definition data table. For example, in the first special symbol related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 167, the addresses of the first special symbol waiting time management timer area and the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table. Is stored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the various control processes of the variation display of the first special symbol, the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register or the like in advance, so that the first special symbol-related definition data table is set. The information stored in each storage area in the main RAM 6103 can be directly called from the work area of the main RAM 6103.

That is, by providing the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration, when reading necessary information from the work area of the main RAM 6103, the reference processing of the address data of the information stored in the work area is omitted. be able to. In this case, in various control processes for variable display of the first special symbol, an instruction code for referring to the address data of the necessary information is not required when reading the necessary information. Therefore, when the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167, the first special symbol-related definition data table includes the start address of the second special symbol work area table, the second special symbol per flag area in the second special symbol work area table, and the second. The address of the special symbol pause flag area is stored. When such a configuration is provided, information on the second special symbol hit flag and the second special symbol pause flag in the second special symbol work area table is required in various control processes of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, the special symbol-related definition data table switching process (the process of switching the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table preset in the IX register or the like to the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table) is performed. Information on the second special symbol hit flag and the second special symbol pause flag can be directly read from the second special symbol work area table using the first special symbol related definition data table.

In this case, in various control processes of the variable display of the first special symbol, an instruction code for executing the switching process of the special symbol-related definition data table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, when the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

Further, in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (the last address and the address immediately before it) of the first special symbol-related definition data table, the head of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set. The address is stored. Further, as will be described later, the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table is stored in the storage area for the last two bytes of the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 169 described later). When such a configuration is provided, mutual access is possible between the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

[2nd special symbol work area table]
The second special symbol work area table stores various information used in various control processes (various modules) for variable display of the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the second special symbol work area table, as shown in FIG. 168, the second special symbol control state number area, the second special symbol per flag area, and the second special symbol hold number area are stored as storage areas. , 2nd special symbol game state number area, 2nd special symbol number area, 2nd special symbol demo display state flag area, 2nd special symbol game state transition offset area, 2nd special symbol waiting time management timer area, 2nd special A symbol pause flag area, a second special symbol game state designation parameter area, a second special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and a second special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area are provided, and these storage areas are used for the second special symbol work. They are arranged in this order from the start address (“W_T2_YY00”) side of the area table. In FIG. 168, the offset value from the start address of each storage area in the second special symbol work area table is omitted for convenience of explanation, but each storage in the second special symbol work area table is omitted. The address of the area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the second special symbol work area table.

Further, in the second special symbol work area table, the second special symbol waiting time management timer area is composed of a 4-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 1-byte area. That is, the configuration of the second special symbol work area table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) is the same as that of the first special symbol work area table.

In the second special symbol hit flag area in the second special symbol work area table, the result (big hit, small hit or loss) of the big hit lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) performed at the time of winning the second start opening is displayed. The information to be shown is stored. Further, in the second special symbol pause flag area, the value (on value / off value) of the special symbol pause flag of the second special symbol used in the processing control at the time of simultaneous fluctuation is stored.

Further, the second special symbol waiting time management timer area (4-byte area) is composed of an upper 2-byte timer and a lower 2-byte timer, similarly to the first special symbol management timer area.

Then, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the first half of the second special symbol is managed by the upper two-byte timer, and the fluctuation display time of the latter half of the second special symbol is managed by the lower two-byte timer. Further, in the present embodiment, in the control process of the second special symbol, the monitoring time other than the fluctuation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the second special symbol (for example, the interval time until the start of the big hit game and the end of the big hit game). The interval time, the fixed waiting time of the specific symbol, the display time between rounds, etc.) are managed by the upper 2-byte timer of the second special symbol, but these monitoring times may be managed by the lower 2-byte timer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer configuration and the monitoring time management method of the second special symbol are the same as those of the first special symbol. Therefore, by adopting the timer configuration and monitoring time management method of the second special symbol, the same effects as the above-mentioned various effects obtained by the timer configuration and monitoring time management method of the first special symbol can be obtained. Be done.

[2nd special symbol related definition data table]
In the second special symbol-related definition data table, various information (storage area, data area, constants) required when reading information used in various control processes (various modules) of the variation display of the second special symbol from the main RAM 6103 is performed. Defined value address) is stored. Therefore, in various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, desired information can be read directly from the main RAM 6103 by referring to various addresses defined in the second special symbol related definition data table. ..

As shown in FIG. 169, the second special symbol-related definition data table includes a storage area for the second special symbol selection value (“1” in the present embodiment) and a first special symbol in the first special symbol work area table. Storage area for the address of the hit flag area (lower address), storage area for the address of the first special symbol pause flag area in the first special symbol work area table, start address of the second special symbol hold storage area (lower address) ) Storage area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the second special symbol hold storage read pointer area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the second special symbol hold storage write pointer area, second special symbol work Storage area for the start address of the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in the area table, storage area for the address of the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table, first special symbol work area Storage area for the start address of the table, storage area for the start address of the second special symbol fluctuation start setting data table, storage area for the start address of the second special symbol confirmation setting data table 1, and storage area for the second special symbol confirmation setting data table 2. A storage area for the start address, a storage area for the start address of the second special symbol game end setting data table, and a storage area for the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table are provided, and these storage areas are the second. The data are arranged in this order from the start address ("D_T2_XX00") side of the special symbol-related definition data table. In FIG. 169, for convenience of explanation, the offset value from the start address of each storage area in the second special symbol-related definition data table is omitted, but in the second special symbol-related definition data table, the offset value is omitted. The address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table.

Further, in the second special symbol-related definition data table, the storage area of the second special symbol selection value, the storage area of the address (lower address) of the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table, and the first 2 The storage area of the start address (lower address) of the special symbol hold storage area, the storage area of the address (lower address) of the second special symbol hold storage read pointer area, and the second special symbol hold storage write pointer area. Each storage area of the address (lower address) is composed of a 1-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 2-byte area. That is, the configuration of the second special symbol-related definition data table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) is the same as that of the first special symbol-related definition data table.

As described above, the address information of various information required for the control process of the variation display of the second special symbol is collectively stored in the second special symbol-related definition data table. For example, in the second special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 169, the addresses of the second special symbol waiting time management timer area and the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table. Is stored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register or the like in advance, so that the second special symbol-related definition data table is set. The information stored in each storage area in the main RAM 6103 can be directly called from the work area of the main RAM 6103.

That is, by providing the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration, when reading necessary information from the work area of the main RAM 6103, the reference processing of the address data of the information stored in the work area is omitted. be able to. In this case, in various control processes for variable display of the second special symbol, an instruction code for referring to the address data of the necessary information is not required when reading the necessary information. Therefore, when the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the second special symbol-related definition data table includes the start address of the first special symbol work area table, the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table, and the first. The address of the special symbol pause flag area is stored. When such a configuration is provided, information on the first special symbol hit flag and the first special symbol pause flag in the first special symbol work area table is required in various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, the special symbol-related definition data table switching process (the process of switching the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table preset in the IX register or the like to the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table) is performed. Without using the second special symbol related definition data table, it is possible to directly read the information of the first special symbol hit flag and the first special symbol pause flag from the first special symbol work area table.

In this case, in various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, an instruction code for executing the switching process of the special symbol-related definition data table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, when the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

Further, in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (the last address and the address immediately before it) of the second special symbol-related definition data table, the head of the first special symbol-related definition data table is set. The address is stored. Further, as described above, the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is stored in the storage area for the last two bytes of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 167). When such a configuration is provided, mutual access is possible between the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

[Various variations of the special symbol work area table]
(1) Modification 1
As described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table are mutually exclusive. Although the same example has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table may be different from each other.

When the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table are the same as in the present embodiment, the start address of the first special symbol work area table is used. The offset value of the address to the storage area of the information of the predetermined item is the same as the offset value of the address from the start address of the second special symbol work area table to the storage area of the information of the predetermined item. In this case, the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from each special symbol work table can be shared, and the capacity of the process program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

However, for example, when the number of information items (types) stored in each special symbol work area table is different from each other, the address from the start address of the first special symbol work area table to the information storage area of a predetermined item. There is a possibility that the offset value of is different from the offset value of the address from the start address of the second special symbol work area table to the information storage area of the predetermined item. In this case, the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from the first special symbol work area table and the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from the second special symbol work area table. Need to be provided separately, which may increase the capacity of the processing program.

FIG. 170 shows a modified example of the special symbol work area table for solving such a problem. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the configuration of the first special symbol work area table in the first modification.

The items (types), arrangement order, and sizes of the storage areas provided in the first special symbol work area table in this example are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 166. Further, although not shown, in this example, the configuration after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area (final address side) in the first special symbol work area table and the second special in the second special symbol work area table. The configuration after the symbol game state specification parameter area is the same, and the configuration on the start address side of the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table is the first in the second special symbol work area table. 2 The configuration on the start address side of the special symbol game state specification parameter area shall be different.

In this example, in the first special symbol work area table, the start address (“W_T1_YY0A”) of the first special symbol work area table is defined as the first start address (start address A), and the first special symbol game The address (“W_T1_YY0B”) immediately before (upper side) of the state specification parameter area is defined as the second start address (start address B). Then, as shown in FIG. 170, the respective addresses are set to the start address for the first special symbol game state designation parameter area, the first special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and the first special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area. It is specified by two types, an offset value from A and an offset value from the start address B.

Further, although not shown, in this example, the start address (“W_T2_YY0C”) of the second special symbol work area table is defined as the first start address (start address C) also in the second special symbol work area table. In both cases, the address (“W_T2_YY0D”) immediately before (upper side) of the second special symbol game state designation parameter area is defined as the second start address (start address D). Then, for the second special symbol game state designation parameter area, the second special symbol effect effect fluctuation table parameter area, and the second special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area, the respective addresses are set to the offset value from the start address C and the start. It is specified by two types of offset values from the address D.

When the configuration of this example is adopted as the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table, each item after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table The offset value from the start address B of the storage area is the same as the offset value from the start address D of the storage area of each item after the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table. In this case, by using the start address B and the start address D as the reference of the offset value, the offset value setting process when reading the information after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area from the first special symbol work area table is performed. , The offset value setting process when reading the information after the second special symbol game state specification parameter area from the second special symbol work area table can be shared. Further, in this case, the information reading process after the first special symbol game state designation parameter area and the information reading process after the second special symbol game state designation parameter area can be shared. Therefore, when the above configurations of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table in this example are adopted, a processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 even if both table configurations are different from each other. Capacity can be reduced.

(2) Modification example 2
In the present embodiment, the configuration has been described in which only the information related to the first special symbol is specified in the first special symbol work area table, and only the information related to the second special symbol is specified in the second special symbol work area table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least a part of the information about the other special symbol is specified in one special symbol work area table, and the storage position of the information about the other special symbol stored in one special symbol work area table is set to one of the same items. It may be set to a position (next storage address) one lower than the storage position (storage address) of information related to the special symbol.

For example, a second special symbol per flag area is provided at the address next to (one lower side) the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table shown in FIG. 166, and the second special is shown in FIG. 168. The first special symbol hit flag area may be provided at the address next to (one lower side) the second special symbol hit flag area in the symbol work area table.

In this case, in the control process of the variation display of the first special symbol, when the first special symbol hit flag (own information) is referred to, the first special symbol work area table is displayed without correcting the address. When reading the 1 special symbol hit flag and referring to the 2nd special symbol hit flag (other party's information), the address is corrected by 1 addition (+1), and the 2nd special is added from the 1st special symbol work area table. Read the symbol hit flag. On the other hand, in the control process of the variation display of the second special symbol, when the second special symbol hit flag (own information) is referred to, the second special symbol work area table is displayed as the second without correcting the address. When the special symbol hit flag is read and the first special symbol hit flag (other party's information) is referred to, the address is corrected by 1 addition (+1), and the first special symbol is added from the second special symbol work area table. Read the hit flag.

That is, in this example, in the control process of the variable display of the first special symbol, the information about the first special symbol (own information) or the information about the second special symbol (information of the other party) is obtained from the first special symbol work area table. Information about the second special symbol (own information) or information about the first special symbol from the second special symbol work area table in the process of reading (address set process) and the control process of the variable display of the second special symbol. Since the process (address set process) when reading (other party's information) is the same, both processes can be shared. Therefore, when the configuration of the special symbol work area table of this example is adopted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

(3) Modification 3
In the present embodiment, the configuration has been described in which only the information related to the first special symbol is specified in the first special symbol work area table, and only the information related to the second special symbol is specified in the second special symbol work area table. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, like the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 167) and the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 169) of the present embodiment, the last two bytes of the first special symbol work area table. The start address of the second special symbol work area table is stored in the storage area (last storage area) of (the last address and the address immediately before it), and the last two bytes of the second special symbol work area table are stored. The start address of the first special symbol work area table may be stored in the storage area. When such a configuration is provided, mutual entry is possible between the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

In the present invention, for example, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table may be a combination of the above-mentioned modification 2 and the above-mentioned modification 3. Also in this case, the same effect as that obtained in the above-mentioned modified examples 2 and 3 can be obtained.

[Modification example of special symbol related definition data table]
As described above, in the present embodiment, an example in which the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table are separately provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table may be configured by one special symbol-related definition data table (index table). Even in such a configuration, the address of each storage area can be specified by the offset value (relative value) from the start address of the special symbol-related definition data table in the special symbol-related definition data table.

In this case, the data for mutual entry (counterpart side) stored in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (last address and the address immediately before it) of each special symbol-related definition data table. The start address of the special symbol-related definition data table) is no longer required, and the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

Further, as described later, in the control process of the variable display of the special symbol, when the process for the first special symbol is performed, the start address of the first special symbol related definition data table is set in the IX register and the second special symbol is set. When processing the symbol, the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register. That is, in the control process of the variable display of the special symbol, the set process of the start address of the special symbol-related definition data table is switched to the IX register according to the type of the special symbol to be processed. However, when the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table are configured as one special symbol-related definition data table, the special symbol-related definition data is used in the control process of the variable display of the special symbol. It is not necessary to switch the set processing of the start address of the table to the IX register, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 6101 of the main control circuit 6100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 204.

[External masqueradable interrupt processing]
First, the external masqueradable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 6101 will be described with reference to FIG. 171. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing a procedure for external masqueradable interrupt processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 saves the protection register (S6001). The protection registers to be saved in this process are accumulators A and A', flag registers F and F', pair registers BC and B'C', pair registers DE and D'E', and pair registers HL and H. 'L', IX register and IY register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 reads out the state of the input port 2 (S6002).

The main control circuit 6100 is provided with three types of input ports: input port 0, input port 1, and input port 2. At input port 0, on / off states such as each start port winning ball switch, setting key 6080, and out ball count switch (not shown) are set. In the input port 1, the on / off states of the count switches 6053c and 6054c, the general winning ball switches 6051a and 6052a, the large winning port switch, the discharge port switch, the passing ball switch 6043a and the like are set. Further, in the input port 2, an on / off state of a power failure signal, a RAM clear switch 6121, a sensor abnormality detection signal, a frame radio wave sensor, an open signal, a magnetic sensor, a vibration sensor, a solenoid monitoring sensor and the like is set.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the power interruption signal is being detected (S6003).

When the main CPU 6101 determines in S6003 that the power interruption signal is not being detected (NO in S6003), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6005 described later. On the other hand, in S6003, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power interruption signal is being detected (YES in S6003), the main CPU 6101 sets the XINT detection flag to the ON state (ON value) (S6004). .. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating whether or not the power is cut off, and its value is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 6103.

After the processing of S6004 or when the determination of S6003 is NO, the main CPU 6101 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S6001 (S6005). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6006) and ends the external masqueradable interrupt processing.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, a system timer interrupt process executed in a cycle of 2 msec (interrupt cycle) under the control of the main CPU 6101 will be described. Note that FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure of system timer interrupt processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 saves the protection register (S6011). The protection registers to be saved in this process are accumulators A and A', flag registers F and F', pair registers BC and B'C', pair registers DE and D'E', and pair registers HL and H. 'L', IX register and IY register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (S6012).

In S6012, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (at the time of power failure detection) (when the determination in S6012 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6026 described later. On the other hand, in S6012, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the XINT detection flag is not in the ON state (NO in S6012), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6013).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of reading the state of the input port (S6014).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game is permitted (S6015). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the value of the activation control flag (activation state).

The start control flag is a flag for determining the type of start state such as power recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clear, and is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 6103. The value of the start control flag is the state information (on value (Low) or off value (High): operation information) of the RAM clear switch 6121 when the power is turned on, and the state information (on value (High)) of the setting key 6080. Off value (Low): Operation information). Then, in the present embodiment, the type of the current start state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined by the combination of both state information (value of the start control flag).

Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 6121 is an off value (High) and the setting key 6080 is an off value (Low) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "10B"), the power is cut off. It is determined that it is time to return. When the RAM clear switch 6121 is the ON value (Low) and the setting key 6080 is the ON value (High) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "01B"), it is determined that the setting is being changed. When the RAM clear switch 6121 is an off value (High) and the setting key 6080 is an ON value (High) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "11B"), it is determined that the setting is being confirmed. .. Further, when the RAM clear switch 6121 is an on value (Low) and the setting key 6080 is an off value (Low) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "00B"), it is determined that the RAM is cleared. Will be done. Then, in the determination process of S6015, if the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating other than setting change and setting confirmation, a YES determination (game permission state) is obtained. In the present embodiment, an example in which the ON value of the RAM clear switch 6121 is set to the Low level and the off value is set to the High level has been described. However, the ON value of the RAM clear switch 6121 is set to the High level and the off value is set to the Low level. May be good. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the on value of the setting key 6080 is set to the High level and the off value is set to the Low level has been described, but the on value of the setting key 6080 may be set to the Low level and the off value may be set to the High level. ..

In S6015, when it is determined that the main CPU 6101 is not in the game permission state (NO in S6015), the main CPU 6101 performs the setting control process (S6016). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing are performed in the system timer interrupt processing performed in the cycle of 2 msec, and are performed in the case where the game is not permitted. The details of the setting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 173, which will be described later. Then, after the processing of S6016, the main CPU 6101 performs the processing of S6026 described later.

On the other hand, in S6015, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is permitted (YES in S6015), the main CPU 6101 adds 1 to the value of the interrupt counter (S6017). The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 182 to 185 described later) described later, and the counting value of the interrupt counter is the work of the main RAM 6103. It is stored in the interrupt counter area in the area.

Next, the main CPU 6101 updates the interrupt cycle timer (S6018). The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 updates various random value values (S6019). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the switch input detection process (S6020). The details of the switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 178, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a winning information command setting process (S6021). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the effect control command (winning information command).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the effect control command transmission process (S6022). In this process, the main CPU 6101 transmits a command reserved for transmission from the main control circuit 6100 to the sub control circuit 6200.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a register save process (S6023). The registers to be saved in this process are the accumulators A and A'and the flag registers F and F'.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs control processing of the performance display monitor 6070 (S6024). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 6070, and the like. Further, this process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 6103. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a restore process of the register saved in S6023 (S6025).

After the processing of S6025 or S6016, or when the determination of S6012 is YES, the main CPU 6101 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S6011 (S6026), and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

As described above, in the system timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, when the current activation state is the game disallowed state (when S6015 is NO determination), the setting control processing (setting change processing or setting confirmation processing) is performed. It does not perform various processes (for example, interrupt cycle timer update process (S6018), random number value update process (S6019), performance display monitor 6070 control process (S6024), etc.) that are executed when the game is permitted. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed when the game is not permitted, and the processing can be simplified. Therefore, by performing the above-described processing in the system timer interrupt processing, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the type of the current start state is used by using the start control flag composed of the combination of the state information of the RAM clear switch 6121 and the state information of the setting key 6080 at the time of turning on the power. (Recovery from power failure / Change setting / Confirm setting / Clear RAM) can be determined. That is, the type of the startup state (return to power failure / change of setting / confirmation of setting / clear RAM) can be discriminated by using a common flag (there is no need to set a discrimination flag for each type of the startup state). In the embodiment, the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

[Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the setting control process performed in S6016 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 172) will be described. Note that FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting control process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S6031).

In S6031, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S6031 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the setting change process (S6032). The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 174 described later.

On the other hand, in S6031, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S6031 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the setting confirmation process (S6033). The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 175 described later.

After the processing of S6032 or S6033, the main CPU 6101 performs the setting operation display processing (S6034). In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the effect control command transmission process (S6035). In this process, the main CPU 6101 transmits a command (initialization command or power failure recovery command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S6032) or the setting confirmation process (S6033) to the sub-control circuit 6200.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs output processing of the WDT (watchdog timer) (S6036). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs the WDT clear register address reading process, the built-in WDT clear process, and the built-in WDT restart process in this order. Then, after the processing of S6036, the main CPU 6101 ends the setting control processing and returns the processing to the processing of S6026 of the system timer interrupt processing (FIG. 172).

[Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the setting change process performed in S6032 during the setting control process (see FIG. 173) will be described. Note that FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 6121 is pressed (S6041). This determination process is performed based on the information on the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 6121 included in the information of the various input ports read.

In S6041, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the RAM clear switch 6121 is not pressed (NO in S6041), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6043 described later. On the other hand, in S6041 when the main CPU 6101 determines that the RAM clear switch 6121 is pressed (YES in S6041), the main CPU 6101 performs the update process within the set value range (S6042).

After the processing of S6042, or when the determination in S6041 is NO, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the setting key 6080 has been turned off (S6043). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the setting key 6080 on / off information included in the input port information read in the system timer interrupt process this time and the input port information read in the previous system timer interrupt process. The on / off information of the setting key 6080 included is compared (masked by the exclusive logical sum operation), and based on the comparison result, whether or not the state of the setting key 6080 has changed from the on state to the off state, that is, , It is determined whether or not the off-edge of the setting key 6080 is detected.

The setting control process is executed by detecting the on-edge of the setting key 6080 (when the state of the setting key 6080 changes from the off state to the on state). At this time as well, the system timer interrupt process of this time is executed. The on / off information of the setting key 6080 read in is compared with the on / off information of the setting key 6080 read in the previous system timer interrupt processing (masked by the exclusive OR operation), and the comparison result is obtained. Based on this, the on-edge of the setting key 6080 is detected. That is, in the present embodiment, in the off-edge and on-edge detection of the setting key 6080, the on / off information of the setting key 6080 read in the current system timer interrupt processing and the setting key read in the previous system timer interrupt processing. By using the comparison result (result of exclusive OR operation) with the on / off information of 6080 as a common flag, the start and end of the setting control process are determined.

In S6043, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 is not turned off (when the determination in S6043 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the setting change process and performs the process in the setting control process (FIG. 173). Return to the processing of S6034.

On the other hand, in S6043, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 has been turned off (when the determination in S6043 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the first normal pre-game processing (S6044). In this process, various setting processes at the time of clearing the RAM are performed. The details of the first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 176, which will be described later. Then, after the process of S6044, the main CPU 6101 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the process of S6034 of the setting control process (FIG. 173).

[Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the setting confirmation process performed in S6033 during the setting control process (see FIG. 173) will be described. Note that FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting confirmation process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the setting key 6080 has been turned off (S6051). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S6043 in the setting change process (see FIG. 174) described above.

In S6051, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 is not turned off (when the determination in S6051 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the setting confirmation process and performs the process in the setting control process (FIG. 173). Return to the processing of S6034.

On the other hand, in S6051, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 has been turned off (when the determination in S6051 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S6052). In this process, various setting processes are performed when the power is restored. The details of the second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 177 described later. Then, after the process of S6052, the main CPU 6101 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the process of S6034 of the setting control process (FIG. 173).

[1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S6044 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 174) will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first normal game pre-processing. As will be described later, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S6044 during the setting change process (see FIG. 174) is a game control-related process during the main control main process (see FIGS. 182 to 185 described later). In the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 187 described later) that is performed before the above, it is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of clearing the RAM.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs the RAM setting process at the time of clearing the backup (S6061). In this process, the main CPU 6101 loads the RAM setting data table at the time of clearing the backup (when the RAM clear switch 6121 is pressed), and stores the data in this data table in a predetermined area in the main RAM 6103. By this RAM setting process, the game is permitted.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the first special symbol address setting process (S6062). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 167) in the main RAM 6103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6063). In this process, the main CPU 6101 generates various data (parameters) for designating the game state, and stores the generated data in a predetermined area in the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 is stored in each of the first special symbol game state number area, the first special symbol game state designation parameter, and the first special symbol effect variation table parameter area in the first special symbol work area table. Data (parameter) is generated and the generated data is stored in the corresponding area.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command (S6064). When the first normal game pre-processing is called in the setting change processing, the transmission of the initialization command reserved in the processing of S6064 to the sub-control circuit 6200 is the setting control processing (FIG. 173). It is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6035) in (see). Further, when the first normal game pre-processing is called in the startup initial setting processing (see FIG. 187 described later) during the main control main processing, the initialization command reserved in the processing of S6064 is used. The transmission to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). That is, in the present embodiment, the process of transmitting the initialization command to the sub-control circuit 6200, which is performed when the RAM is cleared, is also performed when the setting change process is executed.

Then, after the process of S6064, the main CPU 6101 ends the first normal game pre-process and also ends the setting change process (FIG. 174).

[Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S6052 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second normal game pre-processing. As will be described later, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S6052 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 175) is the game control-related process during the main control main process (see FIGS. 182 to 185 described later). In the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 187 described later), which is performed before the above, it is also executed as the initial setting process when the power is restored.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads the RAM setting data table at the time of recovery from power failure (S6071). Further, in this process, the read data is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 6103. By this RAM setting process, the game is permitted.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state) (S6072). This determination process is performed based on the data (special symbol probability change state flag value) stored in the special symbol probability change state flag area provided in the main RAM 6103. The special symbol probability change state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability change game state, and is set to the on state when the current game state is the probability change game state.

In S6072, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the gaming state is not the probabilistic gaming state (low probability gaming state) (when the determination in S6072 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6074 described later. On the other hand, in S6072, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state (YES in S6072), the main CPU 6101 sets the special symbol probabilistic state notification flag value to the on state (on value). (S6073).

The special symbol probability change state notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to notify that the current game state is the probability change game state, and is set to the on state when the current game state is the probability change game state. The flag. Further, the special symbol probability change state notification flag value is stored in the special symbol probability change state notification flag area provided in the main RAM 6103. In the present embodiment, a so-called probabilistic lamp for notifying that the gaming state is in the probabilistic gaming state is provided. When the special symbol probability change state notification flag is turned on at the time of recovery, the lamp lights up, but in other cases, the probability change lamp does not light even if the special symbol probability change state notification flag is on. In the present embodiment, a time-saving lamp for notifying that the game state is the time-saving game state is also provided, and the time-saving lamp lights up during the time-saving game state.

After the processing of S6073, or when the determination of S6072 is NO, the main CPU 6101 performs the transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command (S6074). When the second normal game pre-processing is called in the setting change processing, the transmission of the power interruption recovery command reserved in the processing of S6074 to the sub-control circuit 6200 is the setting control processing (FIG. 6). It is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6035) in (see 173). Further, when the second normal game pre-processing is called in the startup initial setting processing (see FIG. 187 described later) during the main control main processing, the interrupt recovery command reserved in the processing of S6074 is performed. Is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). That is, in the present embodiment, the transmission process of the power failure recovery command to the sub-control circuit 6200, which is performed at the time of power failure recovery, is also performed when the setting change process is executed.

Then, after the process of S6074, the main CPU 6101 ends the second normal game pre-process and also ends the setting confirmation process (FIG. 175).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the setting control processing (setting change processing and setting confirmation processing) is performed in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Further, when the setting control processing is performed, the normal game pre-processing (first or second normal game pre-processing) is performed according to the control type (setting change or setting confirmation) as described above. Then, the normal game pre-processing (first and second normal game pre-processing) performed in this setting control processing is performed before the game control-related processing in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 182 to 185 described later). The process is the same as the normal pre-game process (initial setting process) performed in. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the normal game pre-processing (first and second normal game pre-processing) performed in the setting control processing and the normal game performed before the game control-related processing during the main control main processing. The pre-processing (initial setting processing) can be shared, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

[Switch input detection processing]
Next, the switch input detection process performed in S6020 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 172) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. Note that FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch input detection process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs an abnormal state monitoring process (S6081). The details of the abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 179, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a normal symbol-related check process (S6082). In this process, the main CPU 6101 checks the first starting port winning ball switch 6044a, the passing ball switch 6043a, and the second starting port winning ball switch 6045a (ordinary electric accessory 6046). When the on-edge of the first starting port winning ball switch 6044a or the on-edge of the passing ball switch 6043a is detected in this check process, a random number acquisition process, a random number transfer process, and the like are performed. Further, when the on-edge of the second starting port winning ball switch 6045a is detected in this check process, the ordinary electric accessory winning counter is updated, the winning invalidation process, or the like is performed depending on the situation.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol-related check process (S6083). In this process, the main CPU 6101 checks the count switches 6053c and 6054c, the first starting port winning ball switch 6044a, and the second starting port winning ball switch 6045a. When the on-edge of the count switches 6053c and 6054c is detected in this check process, the special electric accessory winning counter is updated, the winning invalidation process, and the like are performed depending on the situation. Further, in this check process, when the on-edge of each start port winning ball switch is detected (the number of reserved special symbols is updated) and the look-ahead effect is performed, the transmission reservation process of the specific hold addition command is performed. Will be done. On the other hand, in this check process, if the on-edge of each start port winning ball switch is detected (the number of reserved special symbols is updated) and the look-ahead effect is not performed, the transmission reservation process of the hold addition command is performed. ..

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a prize ball-related switch check process (S6084). In this process, the main CPU 6101 updates the data (prize ball management pointer value) stored in the payout management table at the time of the prize ball. Then, after the processing of S6084, the main CPU 6101 ends the switch input detection processing and returns the processing to the processing of S6021 of the system timer interrupt processing (FIG. 172).

[Abnormal status monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the abnormal state monitoring process performed in S6081 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 178) will be described. Note that FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the abnormal state monitoring process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs an abnormal state monitoring pre-processing (S6091). In this process, the main CPU 6101 updates the abnormality detection information (information of various sensor bits of the input port 2). The details of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 180 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing (S6092). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in each monitoring target (each abnormality item). The details of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 181 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs an induced magnetic field monitoring process (S6093). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the induced magnetic field is being detected, and sets the induced magnetic field detection information bit to the ON state (ON value) if the induced magnetic field is not detected. Then, after the processing of S6093, the main CPU 6101 ends the abnormal state monitoring processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6082 of the switch input detection processing (FIG. 178).

[Abnormal status monitoring pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the abnormal state monitoring pre-processing performed in S6091 during the abnormal state monitoring process (see FIG. 179) will be described. Note that FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of reading abnormality detection information (information of various sensor bits of the input port 2) (S6101). Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the door / frame is open (whether or not the base door 6003 and / or the glass door 6004 is open) (S6102).

In S6102, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the door / frame is not open (NO in S6102), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6104 described later. On the other hand, in S6102, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the door / frame is open (YES in S6102), the main CPU 6101 clears the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 (S6103). As a result, the detection level of the magnetic sensor is turned off, and the magnetic sensor does not detect an abnormality.

After the processing of S6103 or when the determination of S6102 is NO, the main CPU 6101 updates the abnormality detection information (S6104). Then, after the processing of S6104, the main CPU 6101 ends the abnormal state monitoring pre-processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6092 of the abnormal state monitoring processing (FIG. 179).

In the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing of the present embodiment, as described above, while the door / frame is open (when the determination in S6102 is YES), the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 is cleared (S6103) to perform magnetism. Although an example of setting the detection level of the sensor to the off state (non-detection level) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be lowered while the door / frame is open. At this time, the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be gradually lowered for each system timer interrupt process (2 msec cycle), and finally the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be turned off. May be lowered to a low level that is not affected by magnetic disturbance when the door / frame is opened, and then control is performed to maintain the detection level. Further, in the present embodiment, an example of clearing the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 (S6103) while the door / frame is open (when the determination in S6102 is YES) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the vibration sensor is provided, not only the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 but also the vibration sensor bit may be cleared while the door / frame is open.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the opening of the door / frame, the detection level of various sensors for abnormality detection (for example, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, etc.) is lowered or turned off in the abnormality state monitoring preprocessing. To do. Therefore, when such a configuration is provided, even if magnetic disturbance or vibration occurs when the door / frame (base door 6003 and / or glass door 6004) of the pachinko game machine 6001 is opened, the game machine It is possible to suppress adverse effects on various provided sensors (for example, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, etc.).

[General-purpose abnormality detection judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process performed in S6092 during the abnormality state monitoring process (see FIG. 179) will be described. Note that FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process.

First, the main CPU 6101 acquires the number of abnormality monitoring targets (the number of abnormal items to be monitored) (S6111). In this process, the main CPU 6101 refers to the address immediately before the start address of the abnormality monitoring table and reads out the number of monitoring targets (the number of monitoring checks) stored in the address. In the present embodiment, the monitoring targets (abnormal items) are, for example, sensor abnormality monitoring, magnetic monitoring, door / frame opening / closing monitoring, saucer full tank monitoring, payout abnormality monitoring, touch state monitoring, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the monitoring target (abnormal item) currently being processed (S6112).

Here, the content of the determination process of S6112 will be described in detail. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a logical product operation of the information stored in the monitored area of the monitored target, which is currently the processing target, and the mask value for detecting an abnormal state (monitoring specific information). The information stored in the monitoring target area of the monitoring target is information indicating the presence or absence of an abnormality in the monitoring target, and the mask value for detecting an abnormality indicates whether or not the monitoring target is a check target for abnormality detection. This is the information to be shown.

The mask value for abnormality detection is composed of, for example, 1-byte data, and it is specified whether or not the corresponding monitoring target abnormality detection check processing is performed on the data of each bit (“0” or “1”). Will be done. Then, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the monitoring target that performs the abnormality detection check processing, and "0" is stored in the bit corresponding to the monitoring target that does not perform the abnormality detection check processing.

Therefore, if the monitoring target currently being processed is the check target and an error has occurred in the monitoring target, the information stored in the monitoring target area of the monitoring target and the abnormal state detection The result of the logical product operation with the mask value is "1", and it is determined that there is an abnormality in S6112. In other cases, the result of the logical product operation is "0", and it is determined that there is no abnormality in S6112. .. That is, when the monitoring target currently being processed is not the target of the abnormality detection check processing, it is determined that there is no abnormality even if an abnormality occurs in the monitoring target. In this case, various processes (processing at the time of abnormality detection) related to the abnormal state flag described later are not performed.

For example, when the number of monitoring targets is "8" and the abnormal state detection mask value is "00111100B", the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing shown in FIG. 181 is the processing of S6112 to S6119 (abnormality detection check processing). Is repeated 8 times, and of these, the abnormality detection check process is actually performed only for the monitoring target that is the target in the 3rd to 6th processes from the start of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process, and the 1st and 2nd times. For the monitoring targets targeted by the 7th and 8th processes, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and the abnormality detection check process is not performed.

Here, returning to the description of FIG. 181 again, when the main CPU 6101 determines in S6112 that there is no abnormality in the monitoring target (when the determination in S6112 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6114 described later. .. On the other hand, in S6112, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the monitoring target has an abnormality (YES in S6112), the main CPU 6101 sets the abnormal state flag of the monitoring target (S6113).

After the processing of S6113, or when the determination of S6112 is NO, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not there is a change in the abnormal state flag of the monitoring target (S6114).

In S6114, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no change in the abnormal state flag (when the determination in S6114 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6116 described later. On the other hand, in S6114, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the abnormal state flag has changed (YES in S6114), the main CPU 6101 sets the monitoring timer (S6115).

After the processing of S6115 or when the determination in S6114 is NO, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the monitoring timer has elapsed (S6116).

In S6116, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the monitoring timer has not elapsed (NO in S6116), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6119 described later. On the other hand, in S6116, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the monitoring timer has elapsed (YES in S6116), the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not there is a change in the abnormal state flag (S6117).

In S6117, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no change in the abnormal state flag (when the determination in S6117 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6119 described later. On the other hand, in S6117, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the abnormal state flag has changed (YES in S6117), the main CPU 6101 updates the abnormal state flag (S6118).

After the processing of S6118, or when S6116 or S6117 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the number of monitoring targets and updates, and determines whether or not the updated monitoring target number is "0" ( S6119).

In S6119, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of monitoring targets after the update is not "0" (when the determination in S6119 is NO), the main CPU 6101 sets the monitoring target to the monitoring target corresponding to the number of monitoring targets after the update. Instead, the processing after S6112 is performed. On the other hand, in S6119, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of monitoring targets after the update is "0" (when the determination in S6119 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process and performs the process. Return to the process of S6093 of the abnormal state monitoring process (FIG. 179).

As described above, in the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing of the present embodiment, the abnormality detection check processing is performed only on the monitoring target defined as the check target (“1”) by the mask value for abnormality detection. For the monitoring target specified as the non-check target (“0”) by the mask value for abnormality detection, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and the abnormality detection check process is not substantially performed. When such a process is performed, the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process can be further simplified. Therefore, in this case, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main process (main control main process) controlled by the main CPU 6101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 185. 182 to 185 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main control main process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a stack pointer setting process (S6201). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the process of setting the address of the interrupt vector table (S6202). In this process, the address of the interrupt vector table is stored in the I register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the power interruption signal is at the High level (S6203). In S6203, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO in S6203), the main CPU 6101 repeats the determination process of S6203.

On the other hand, in S6203, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S6203 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the flag management process of the RAM clear switch 6121 and the setting key 6080. (S6204). In this process, the main CPU 6101 saves the state information of the RAM clear switch 6121 and the state information of the setting key 6080.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a wait process (S6205). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a start waiting process on the sub control circuit 6200 side. The start-up waiting time (wait period) is 1200.07 msec. Further, in this start-up waiting time, the main CPU 6101 performs an interrupt request signal check process, a WDT output process when an interrupt request signal is generated, and a magnetic sensor initialization signal output process at a predetermined timing. The details of the weight processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 186 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the power failure before the startup is a normal power failure (S6206). In this process, the main RAM 6103 compares the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 6103 with the value of the power failure detection flag (“0A5H”) determined in advance, and if both are the same, It is determined that the power failure was normal (YES determination), but if the two are different, it is determined that the power failure was abnormal (NO determination).

In S6206, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power failure is not normal (NO in S6206), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6210 described later.

On the other hand, in S6206, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the power failure was normal (YES in S6206), the main CPU 6101 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 6103 (S6207). .. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a checksum value collation process in the work area (S6208).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the collation result is normal (S6209).

In S6209, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the collation result is normal (YES in S6209), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6217 described later. On the other hand, in S6209, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the collation result is not normal (when the determination in S6209 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6210 described later.

When the determination in S6206 or S6209 is NO, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the setting key 6080 and the RAM clear switch 6121 are in the ON state (S6210). This determination process is performed with reference to the value (on / off value) of the setting key switch bit of the input port 0 and the value of the RAM clear bit of the input port 2.

In S6210, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 and the RAM clear switch 6121 are in the ON state (when the determination in S6210 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6216 described later. On the other hand, in S6210, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the setting key 6080 and the RAM clear switch 6121 are not in the ON state (when the determination in S6210 is NO), the main CPU 6101 is the security signal of the external terminal (security bit of the output port). Is set to the on state (S6211).

Next, the main CPU 6101 displays an error on the performance display monitor 6070 (S6212). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets bit data for error display in the output port to the performance display monitor 6070. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 6070 lights up, and an error occurrence is displayed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the setting process of the WDT clear register address (S6213). Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the built-in WDT (S6214). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the built-in WDT clear value. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a restart process of the built-in WDT (S6215). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the built-in WDT restart value. Then, after the processing of S6215, the main CPU 6101 repeats the processing of S6213 to S6215 (WDT output processing) until the power is turned off (permanent loop processing is performed).

Here, returning to the process of S6210 again, when the determination in S6210 is YES, the main CPU 6101 stores the setting change state value in the start control flag area in the main RAM 6103 (S6216). By this process, the setting change status value is stored as the value of the start control flag.

After the processing of S6216, or when the determination of S6209 is YES, the main CPU 6101 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 6103 (S6217).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a startup state determination process (S6218). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) based on the value (value of the startup control flag) stored in the startup control flag area.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a RAM clear process at startup (S6219). In this process, the main CPU 6101 clears the designated area at startup in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the initial setting process at startup (S6220). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs initial setting processing according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear). The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. 187, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6221). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a power failure process (S6222). The details of the power cutting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 updates the initial value random number (S6223). In this process, the main CPU 6101 updates the initial value random number for special symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game is playable (S6224). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag, and when the value of the activation control flag (current activation state) is a value corresponding to the power failure recovery, S6224 is determined to be YES and activation is performed. If the value of the control flag is a value other than the value corresponding to the power failure recovery, S6224 is determined as NO.

In S6224, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is not possible (NO in S6224), the main CPU 6101 performs an interrupt enable process (S6225). Then, after the processing of S6225, the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6221 and performs the processing after S6221.

On the other hand, in S6224, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is playable (YES in S6224), the main CPU 6101 performs a register save process (S6226). In this process, the main CPU 6101 saves the accumulator A and the flag register F.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction process (S6227). In this process, the main CPU 6101 calculates and updates various base values. Further, this process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a restore process of the register saved in S6226 (S6228). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6229).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the system cycle time (6 msec: three times the interrupt cycle (2 mses)) has elapsed (S6230). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (current interrupt counter count value) in the main RAM 6103 is "0". The value of the interrupt counter is incremented by 1 for each system timer interrupt process (see S6017 in FIG. 172), and becomes "3" when the system cycle time elapses. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is "0", S6230 is judged as YES, and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is not "0", S6230 is judged as NO. It becomes.

In S6230, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S6230), the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6221 and performs the processing after S6221.

On the other hand, in S6230, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S6230), the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (interrupt counter value). The process is performed three times (S6231). By this process, the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process is reset (becomes "0").

As described above, in the present embodiment, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process sections of S6221 to S6230) is provided in the main control main process before executing various processes related to game control described later. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). In the present embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interrupt disabled section is twice or more and other than three times the interrupt cycle. It may be the value of.

Next, the main CPU 6101 updates the system timer (S6232). The system timer is a timer for managing the system cycle (6 msec), and the value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a main control command transmission / reception process (S6233). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs a command transmission / reception process for payout control.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol control process (S6234). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a control process for the special symbol game. The details of the special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 normally performs a symbol control process (S6235). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a control process for the normal symbol game. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 204 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game operation display unit control process (S6236). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of setting display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, the second special symbol display LED, the normal symbol display LED, the hold display LED, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game information data generation process (S6237). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs an external terminal plate pulse signal control process, an output data setting process, a test firing test signal generation process, and the like. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs port output processing (S6238). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs an output data set (transfer) process to the output port and a WDT output process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a state monitoring process (S6239). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs launch position determination processing (if there is a change in the launch position, performs transmission reservation processing of the launch position command), game abnormality detection determination processing (if there is an abnormality, transmission reservation of the game abnormality detection command). Performs processing) and payout abnormality detection judgment processing (if there is an abnormality, performs transmission reservation processing of the payout abnormality detection command).

Then, after the processing of S6239, the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6221 and performs the processing after S6221.

As described above, in the main control main process of the present embodiment, the state information of the RAM clear switch 6121 and the setting key 6080 are performed after the start and before the execution of the wait process (S6205) (before the checksum verification is completed). The status information of S6204 is saved (flag management process of S6204). When such processing is provided, for example, even if an operation is performed on the setting key 6080 during the wait period (even if it is turned on / off), the value of the start control flag at power-on (state information at start-up). ) Can be secured. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operating status of the setting key 6080 and the operating status of the RAM clear switch 6121 at the time of activation can be more reliably grasped, and the activation state of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 can be accurately identified.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S6221 to S6230) is provided before execution of various processes related to game control (processes after S6231) in the main control main process. , Power interruption processing (S6222), initial value random number update processing (S6223), performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction processing (S6227), etc. are performed within the interrupt prohibition section. That is, in the present embodiment, the interrupt-prohibited section is used to manage the values that affect the ball ejection performance of the game and the values that are aggregated throughout the game. Therefore, by providing such an interrupt prohibition section, the management of the game becomes simple, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 is reduced. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction process (S6227) is performed only when the game is playable in the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. That is, in the present embodiment, the performance display monitor 6070 is updated only when the game is possible, so that the process becomes simpler. Therefore, in such a processing configuration, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced.

[Wait processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the weight processing performed in S6205 in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 182 to 185) will be described. Note that FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure of weight processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 sets, for example, "60" to the number of first loops (S6301). Next, the main CPU 6101 sets, for example, "47761" in the number of second loops (S6302). The number of first loops and the number of second loops are parameters for managing the passage of the wait period, the number of first loops is set in the B register, and the number of second loops is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the current timing is a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (S6303). In the present embodiment, when the number of first loops is, for example, 10, the bit data of the magnetic sensor initialization signal is output to the corresponding output port (output port 1). Therefore, in the determination process of S6303, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the number of first loops is, for example, a number other than 10, and if the number of first loops is, for example, a number other than 10. The determination result of S6303 is YES, and when the number of first loops is, for example, 10, the determination result of S6303 is NO.

In S6303, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current timing is a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (when the determination in S6303 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6305 described later. On the other hand, in S6303, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current timing is not a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (when the determination in S6303 is NO), the main CPU 6101 inputs the bit data of the magnetic sensor initialization signal. Output to the address of the corresponding output port (output port 1) (S6304).

After the processing of S6304, or when S6303 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 6101 acquires the address information of the interrupt waiting monitor register (S6305). Next, the main CPU 6101 checks the data stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register (S6306).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not an interrupt request signal has been generated (S6307). In this determination process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not an interrupt request signal is generated according to the on / off information of the specific bit in the interrupt waiting monitor register, and if the specific bit is in the ON state, S6307 The determination result is YES, and if the specific bit is off, the determination result of S6307 is NO.

In S6307, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the interrupt request signal has not been generated (NO in S6307), the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6306 and performs the processing after S6306.

On the other hand, in S6307, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the interrupt request signal is generated (YES in S6307), the main CPU 6101 performs the WDT clear register address setting process (S6308). Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the built-in WDT (S6309). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a restart process of the built-in WDT (S6310).

Next, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the number of second loops and sets (updates) the subtraction result as a new number of second loops (S6311). Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the number of second loops is "0" (S6312).

In S6312, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of second loops is not "0" (when the determination in S6312 is YES), the main CPU 6101 returns the process to the process of S6305 and performs the processes after S6305.

On the other hand, in S6312, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of second loops is "0" (when the determination in S6312 is NO), the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the number of first loops and obtains a new subtraction result. It is set (updated) as the first loop count, and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result (first loop count after update) is not "0" (S6313).

In S6313, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of first loops after the update is not "0" (when the determination in S6313 is YES), the main CPU 6101 returns the processing to the processing of S6302 and performs the processing after S6302. ..

On the other hand, in S6313, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of first loops after the update is "0" (when the determination in S6313 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the wait process and controls the process. The process returns to the process of S6206 of the main process (FIGS. 182 to 185).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor initialization signal output process (S6304) is performed at a predetermined timing during the wait process (the number of first loops is, for example, 10 times), and the magnetism is increased. The sensor is initialized. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if magnetic disturbance occurs when the door / frame (base door 6003 and / or glass door 6004) of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 is opened, the magnetic sensor is reset by this process. , The adverse effect on the magnetic sensor due to the magnetic disturbance can be suppressed.

Note that "initializing (clearing) the magnetic sensor" here may include "initializing the magnetic sensor", and "initializing the settings (driver, etc.) of the magnetic sensor itself". , "Initialize the detection state of the magnetic sensor (for example, forcibly turn off the detection, or when the detection signal = 0, if magnetism is detected, the detection signal is set to a value other than 0." To do) is possible. Further, as the magnetic sensor initialization signal, when the detection signal = 0 in order to change the detection state of the magnetic sensor, if it is assumed that magnetism is detected, a value other than 0 is transmitted as the magnetic sensor initialization signal. Or, a predetermined signal (1 or 0, etc.) is transmitted to a predetermined input terminal (port, etc.) of the magnetic sensor so that the setting (driver, etc.) of the magnetic sensor itself can be initialized. It is also possible to do.

[Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the startup initial setting process performed in S6220 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 182 to 185) will be described. Note that FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial setting process at startup.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of reading the start control flag (S6321).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the startup state is a power failure recovery (S6322). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag.

In S6322, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the startup state is the power failure recovery (YES judgment in S6322), the main CPU 6101 performs the second normal game preprocessing (power failure recovery) described with reference to FIG. 177. Various initial setting processes for time) are performed (S6323). Then, after the processing of S6323, the main CPU 6101 ends the initial setting processing at startup, and returns the processing to the processing of S6221 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 182 to 185).

On the other hand, in S6322, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the startup state is not a power failure recovery (NO determination in S6322), the main CPU 6101 determines whether the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation (when the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation) S6324). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag.

In S6324, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation (when the determination in S6324 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs a pre-setting operation process (S6325). The details of the pre-setting operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 188, which will be described later. Then, after the process of S6325, the main CPU 6101 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the process of S6221 of the main control main process (FIGS. 182 to 185).

On the other hand, in S6324, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the startup state is neither a setting change nor a setting confirmation (when the determination in S6324 is NO), the main CPU 6101 is the first normal game described with reference to FIG. 176. Pre-processing (various setting processing at the time of clearing RAM) is performed (S6326). Then, after the processing of S6326, the main CPU 6101 ends the initial setting processing at startup, and returns the processing to the processing of S6221 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 182 to 185).

[Pre-setting operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the pre-setting operation process performed in S6325 during the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 187) will be described. Note that FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-setting operation process.

In the setting operation pre-processing, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command (S6331). The setting operation command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172).

Then, after the process of S6331, the main CPU 6101 ends the pre-setting operation process and also ends the initial setting process at startup (FIG. 187).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change process (see FIG. 174) or the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 175) is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 172), but the setting change or setting confirmation is performed. The transmission reservation process of the setting operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 6100 to the sub control circuit 6200 when performed is performed in the main control main process.

If the transmission reservation processing of the setting operation command is performed in the system timer interrupt processing, the transmission reservation processing of the setting operation command is performed for each interrupt processing for the executed setting operation, so that there are multiple transmission reservation processes of the setting operation command. May be executed several times. On the other hand, when the transmission reservation process of the setting operation command is performed in the main control main process as in the present embodiment, the transmission reservation process of the setting operation command is only executed once for the executed setting operation. I'm done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the transmission reservation process of the extra setting operation command. As a result, in the present embodiment, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

[Power disconnection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the power interruption process performed in S6222 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 182 to 185) will be described. Note that FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power failure processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (S6341).

In S6341, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the XINT detection flag is not in the ON state (NO in S6341), the main CPU 6101 ends the power interruption process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 182 to FIGS. 182 to FIG. Return to the process of S6223 of 185). On the other hand, in S6341, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S6341 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs a checksum value calculation process (S6342).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the checksum value calculation process is completed (S6343).

In S6343, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the checksum value calculation process is not completed (NO in S6343), the main CPU 6101 returns the process to S6342 and performs the process after S6342. On the other hand, in S6343, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the checksum value calculation process is completed (YES in S6343), the main CPU 6101 sets the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value (“0A5H”). Each is stored in a corresponding predetermined storage area in the main RAM 6103 (S6344).

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the XINT detection flag (S6345). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S6346). Then, after the processing of S6346, the main CPU 6101 repeats the CPU reset waiting processing (S6347).

[Special symbol control processing]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S6234 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 182 to 185) will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191. Note that FIGS. 190 and 191 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol control process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs the first special symbol address setting process (S6401). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 167) in the main RAM 6103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol-related timer update process (S6402). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly updates (subtracts) the variation display time (first special symbol waiting time) of the first special symbol, and determines whether or not the variation display time of the first special symbol has elapsed. Perform processing, etc. The details of the special symbol-related timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192 described later. In the variable display time management process of the special symbols (first and second special symbols) of the present embodiment, as described above, the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time are the upper two-byte timer and the latter half, respectively. It is managed separately by the lower 2-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the second special symbol address setting process (S6403). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 169) in the main RAM 6103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 168) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol-related timer update process (S6404). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly updates (subtracts) the variation display time (second special symbol waiting time) of the second special symbol, and determines whether or not the variation display time of the second special symbol has elapsed. Perform processing, etc. The details of the special symbol-related timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol-related timer update process called in S6404 is the same as that called in S6402, and in both processes, a common process is called and executed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 refers to the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 168) in the main RAM 6103, and reads out the control status number of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol control status number area. (S6405). The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating a transition destination (transition destination) of the state (control state) of the control process related to the variation display (special symbol game) of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, as described later, " Any of "0" to "6").

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (S6406). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the second special symbol read in S6405 is the special symbol fluctuation start value (“0”).

In S6406, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S6406 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6409 described later.

On the other hand, in S6406, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S6406 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the second special symbol address setting process. Do (S6407). In this process, the same process as that performed in S6403 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol management process (S6408). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs the control process corresponding to the control state number of the second special symbol read in S6405. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 described later.

After the processing of S6408 or when S6406 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the first special symbol control state number area with reference to the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166) in the main RAM 6103. The control state number of the first special symbol is read out (S6409).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S6410). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the first special symbol read in S6409 is the special symbol fluctuation start value (“0”).

In S6410, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S6410 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6413 described later.

On the other hand, in S6410, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S6410 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the first special symbol address setting process. Do (S6411). In this process, the same process as the process performed in S6401 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol management process (S6412). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs the control process corresponding to the control state number of the first special symbol read in S6409. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S6412 is the same as that called in S6408, and in both processes, a common process is called and executed.

After the processing of S6412 or when the determination of S6410 is YES, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the second special symbol control state number area with reference to the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 168) in the main RAM 6103. The control state number of the second special symbol is read out (S6413).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (S6414). In this process, the same process as the determination process performed in S6406 is performed.

In S6414, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S6414 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6417 described later.

On the other hand, in S6414, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S6414 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the second special symbol address setting process. (S6415). In this process, the same process as that performed in S6403 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol management process (S6416). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs the control process corresponding to the control state number of the second special symbol read in S6413. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S6416 is the same as that called in each of S6408 and S6412, and in these processes, a common process is called and executed.

After the processing of S6416 or when the determination in S6414 is NO, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the first special symbol control state number area with reference to the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166) in the main RAM 6103. The control state number of the first special symbol is read out (S6417).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S6418). In this process, the same process as the determination process performed in S6410 is performed.

In S6418, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S6418 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process. , Return to the process of S6235 of the main control main process (FIGS. 182 to 185).

On the other hand, in S6418, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S6418 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the first special symbol address setting process. (S6419). In this process, the same process as the process performed in S6401 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol management process (S6420). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs the control process corresponding to the control state number of the first special symbol read in S6417. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S6420 is the same as that called in each of S6408, S6412 and S6416, and in these processes, a common process is called and executed. Then, after the processing of S6420, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6235 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 182 to 185).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol address setting process is performed before each of the special symbol-related timer process and the special symbol management process is executed, and the special symbol (first special symbol or first special symbol) to be processed is performed. 2 Set the address of the special symbol work area table of (2 special symbol) in the IY register. In this case, when reading (acquiring) various data used in the special symbol-related timer processing and the special symbol management processing from the work area table, directly from the special symbol work area table based on the address set in the IY register. , The necessary data can be read (acquired). That is, in the present embodiment, when reading (acquiring) various data used in the special symbol-related timer processing and the special symbol management processing from the work area table, it is necessary to perform the reference processing of the address of the special symbol work area table. It disappears. Therefore, when such a special symbol address setting process is provided, the address reference process of the special symbol work area table can be omitted, so that the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 is reduced. be able to.

[Special symbol related timer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the special symbol-related timer update process performed in S6402 and S6404 in the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 190 and 191) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol-related timer update process.

In the special symbol-related timer update process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol-related timer update process. It is a special design to be done. For example, when the special symbol-related timer update process is called and executed in S6402 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the first special symbol. On the other hand, for example, when the special symbol-related timer update process is called and executed in S6404 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the second special symbol.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads out the control state number of the special symbol (in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "6" as described later) (S6431). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol control state number area (first special symbol control state in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The control state number of the special symbol is read out from the number area or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 168). In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the control state number of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol is changing (S6432). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the special symbol read in S6431 is the special symbol variation end value (“1”), and the control status number of the special symbol is the special symbol variation end value (“1”). If it is not "1"), it is determined that the special symbol is changing (YES determination).

In S6432, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol is not changing (NO in S6432), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6435 described later.

On the other hand, in S6432, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol is changing (YES in S6432), the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the special symbol pause flag of the special symbol (S6433). In this process, similarly to the process of S6341, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area in the special symbol work area table (in FIG. 166). The value of the special symbol pause flag is read from the first special symbol pause flag area or the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 168). In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the special symbol pause flag from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table. The special symbol pause flag is a flag for setting the stop or suspension of the fluctuation of the later special symbol when the first special symbol and the second special symbol change at the same time, that is, the variation display of the later special symbol. This is a flag for determining the control mode of the above, and is provided separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is set for the special symbol to be processed (S6434). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is on (whether or not the change start stop or fluctuation interruption of the special symbol is set), and the special symbol pause flag is turned on. If it is in the state, S6434 is determined to be YES, and if the special symbol pause flag is off, S6434 is determined to be NO.

In S6434, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is set for the special symbol to be processed (when the determination in S6434 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol-related timer update process. , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6405.

On the other hand, in S6434, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed (when S6434 determines NO), or when S6432 determines NO, the main CPU 6101 Reads the value (value of the upper 2-byte timer) stored in the address of the special symbol waiting time management timer area of the special symbol (S6435). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to wait for the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol wait in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the upper 2-byte timer stored in the time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a word counter subtraction process (S6436). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a subtraction process (update process) of the upper 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol) read in S6435.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has elapsed based on the value of the upper 2-byte timer after subtraction (S6437).

In S6437, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has not elapsed (NO in S6437), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol-related timer update process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6405.

On the other hand, in S6437, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has elapsed (when the determination in S6437 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has the current timing of the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is the timing when (the value of the upper 2-byte timer) becomes "0" (S6438). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time (value of the upper 2-byte timer) in the first half of the special symbol has just become "0" by the subtraction process of S6436 this time.

When the determination process of whether or not the value of the upper 2-byte timer has just become "0" is not performed, that is, when the progress determination process of the upper 2-byte timer is limited to the process of S6437, Even at the timing when the value of the upper 2-byte timer becomes "0" (at the end of counting the special symbol waiting time in the first half), the processing of S6440 described later (lower 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the second half of the special symbol)). Subtraction process) will be performed. In this case, the subtraction process of the lower 2-byte timer is 1 at the timing when the subtraction (update) process of the lower 2-byte timer should not be performed (the timing before the first subtraction process of the special symbol waiting time in the latter half). Since it will be performed once, it will not be possible to accurately count the special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol. However, when the process of S6438 is provided as in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the lower 2-byte timer is not performed at the timing when the value of the upper 2-byte timer becomes exactly "0". It is possible to prevent a malfunction of the counting process of the lower 2-byte timer and accurately count the waiting time of the special symbol in the latter half of the special symbol.

In S6438, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol becomes "0" (when the determination in S6438 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol-related timer update process. It ends and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6405.

On the other hand, in S6438, the main CPU 6101 is not at the timing when the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol becomes "0" (before the subtraction process of S6436 this time, the special symbol waiting time in the first half has already become "0". If it is determined, the main CPU 6101 determines the value of the lower 2-byte timer (special) stored in the address (address 2 bytes ahead) added by 2 to the start address of the special symbol waiting time management timer area of the special symbol. The special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the symbol) is read (S6439).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a word counter subtraction process (S6440). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a subtraction process (update process) of the lower 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol) read in S6439.

Then, after the processing of S6440, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol-related timer update processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called by S6404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6405.

[Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the special symbol management process performed in S6408, S6412, S6416 and S6420 in the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 190 and 191) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol management process.

In the special symbol management process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol management process. is there. For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed in S6408 or S6416 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the second special symbol, and the special symbol management process. Is called and executed in S6412 or S6420 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description is the first special symbol.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “6”) in parentheses written in parallel with the code of each processing step shown in FIG. 193 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed, and are in the special symbol work area table. It is stored in the special symbol control state number area (the first special symbol control state number area in FIG. 166 or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 168). Then, the main CPU 6101 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the upper 2-byte timer and determines whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (the special symbol waiting time management timer value ≠ 0 in the first half) (S6451). .. In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the upper 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6451, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6451 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. Return to (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

On the other hand, in S6451, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6451 is NO), the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the lower 2-byte timer and the latter half of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time (the special symbol waiting time management timer value in the latter half is ≠ 0) (S6452). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the lower 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the lower 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6452, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6452 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. Return to (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

On the other hand, in S6452, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6452 is NO), the main CPU 6101 reads out the control status number of the special symbol (S6453). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to control the special symbol control status number area (first special symbol control in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The control state number of the special symbol stored in the state number area or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 168 is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the control state number of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs reference processing of the special symbol control branch table (S6454). In the special symbol control branch table, the correspondence between each control state number (“0” to “6”) of the special symbol and the storage address of the corresponding processing program is defined.

Then, the main CPU 6101 performs the processing after S6455 according to the control state number of the special symbol read in S6453. The processing contents after S6455 include, for example, updating the control status number (any of "0" to "6") of the special symbol read in S6453 and the control status number of the special symbol in each processing step. It changes according to the presence or absence of the game, that is, the game situation of the special symbol game.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation start process (S6455). However, the processing of S6455 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (special symbol fluctuation start value) at the start time of the processing. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes for starting the variable display (special symbol game) of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 194, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "0" at the start of the processing of S6455, the processing of S6455 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation end process (S6456). However, the process of S6456 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (special symbol variation end value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes when ending the variable display of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol variation end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "1" at the start of the processing of S6456, the processing of S6456 is not performed internally and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game determination process (S6457). However, the process of S6457 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (special symbol game determination value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a determination process of the derivation result (big hit / small hit / loss) of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "2" at the start of the processing of S6457, the processing of S6457 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process (S6458). However, the process of S6458 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (large winning opening opening start value) at the start time of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs, for example, a selection process of a type of a large winning opening (special electric accessory), an opening pattern of the large winning opening, and a process of generating open / close control data of the special electric accessory. The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "3" at the start of the processing of S6458, the processing of S6458 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a large winning opening opening control process (S6459). However, the process of S6459 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (large winning opening opening control value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs, for example, an opening / closing control process for a special electric accessory (large winning opening). The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 202 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "4" at the start of the processing of S6459, the processing of S6459 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process (S6460). However, the process of S6460 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (preparation value for opening the large winning opening) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs, for example, a selection process of a type of a large winning opening, an opening pattern of a large winning opening, a process of generating open / close control data of a special electric accessory, and the like. The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "5" at the start of the processing of S6460, the processing of S6460 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol hitting end process (S6461). However, the processing of S6461 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (end value per special symbol) at the start of the processing. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes when ending the game (special symbol game) at the time of hitting the special symbol. The details of the special symbol hitting end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 203 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "6" at the start of the processing of S6461, the processing of S6461 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Then, after the processing of S6461, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

[Special symbol change start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the special symbol variation start processing performed in S6455 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 193) will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation start processing. In the special symbol variation start processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation start processing. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6471).

In S6471, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S6471 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start process and manages the process. The process returns to the process of S6456 of the process (FIG. 193).

On the other hand, in S6471, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S6471 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol game standby process (S6472). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs a game state (“game start” or “game standby”) check process. The details of the special symbol game standby process will be described later with reference to FIG. 195, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game state is "game standby" (S6473).

In S6473, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game state is "game standby" (when the determination in S6473 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process (when the game is determined to be YES). Return to the process of S6456 in FIG. 193).

On the other hand, in S6473, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game state is not "game standby" ("game start") (when S6473 is NO determination), the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process (when the game state is determined to be NO). S6474). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a subtraction process of the number of special symbol hold, a transfer process of the random number value (lottery result), a transmission reservation process of the hold subtraction command, and the like. In the random number value (lottery result) transfer process, the random number value stored in the random number storage area at the time of winning the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is transferred to the random number work area of the special symbol. At this time, a process of moving the random number value acquired at the time of winning the special symbol of the next fluctuation to the random number storage area (process of shifting the holding ball) is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol hit determination process (S6475). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a lottery result (big hit / small hit / loss) determination process. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the special symbol hit is not a big hit, a determination process of whether or not it is a small hit is performed. If it is determined in the process that it is not a small hit, the determination result is determined to be a loss. The contents of the special symbol hit determination process (S6475) will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol determination process (S6476). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to a lottery determination result (big hit / small hit / loss).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation pattern setting process (S6477). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs lottery processing for the first half variation display pattern and the second half variation display pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery determination result (big hit / small hit / loss), and sets each variation display pattern. .. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation display time setting process (S6478). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the fluctuation display time of the first half of the special symbol (special symbol waiting time of the first half) and the fluctuation display time of the second half (special symbol waiting time of the second half) into the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer, respectively. set.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the designated storage area (S6479). In this process, the random number work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 6103 is cleared, and the random number value acquired at the time of winning the special symbol whose fluctuation is started is cleared.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "1" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6480). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol variation end process (S6456) is performed after the end of the special symbol variation start process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6481). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166 or 168), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6482).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state management process (S6483). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly updates various flags related to the management of the game state. As other processes, the main CPU 6101 performs, for example, a game state offset value generation process, a special symbol effect mode management process, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command (S6484). The special symbol effect start command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6485). Then, after the processing of S6485, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6456 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 193).

(Details of special symbol hit judgment processing)
Here, the content of the special symbol hit determination process performed in S6475 will be described in more detail. First, the content of the special symbol hit determination process when the simultaneous fluctuation function is operating will be described.

In the special symbol hit determination process, if the special symbol that is not the processing target (the other special symbol) is already changing, the special symbol that is the processing target (one special symbol) is hit. Whether or not it is determined is not performed, but a small hit or loss determination process is performed. At this time, if the random number value (lottery result) of one special symbol is a random value corresponding to a small hit or a loss, the judgment result will be a small hit or a loss, respectively, but the random value of one special symbol When is a random number value corresponding to a big hit, the random number value is determined to be a random number value other than a small hit (a random number value corresponding to a loss), and the determination result is forcibly lost. That is, if the other special symbol that is not the processing target is already changing at the start of the fluctuation of one special symbol that is the processing target in the special symbol hit determination processing, the random value of one special symbol. Even if is a random value corresponding to a big hit (even if the lottery result is a big hit), the variable display of one of the special symbols is controlled so as to be a variable display corresponding to the loss.

Next, the specific contents of the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss performed in the special symbol hit determination process (S6475) will be described in more detail.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads out the address of the jackpot determination value data table (not shown) of the special symbol to be processed. In the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol, the range (lottery value) of the random value that becomes the jackpot set for each set value ("1" to "6") is defined. In addition, in the jackpot judgment value data table of the special symbol, the range of random numbers that are jackpots in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) and the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state) is defined for each set value. ing. Then, in the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol, the range of random numbers that are jackpots is defined from the start address side in ascending order of the set value. Specifically, in the jackpot judgment value data table of the special symbol, from the start address side, the range of random value that becomes a jackpot when the setting is "1" and the normal game state is set, and the setting is "1" and the probability variation game state. The range of random numbers that will be a big hit when the setting is "2", the range of random values that will be a big hit when the setting is "2" and the normal gaming state, and the randomness which will be the big hit when the setting is "2" and the probabilistic gaming state The range of numerical values, ..., The range of random numbers that will be a big hit when the setting is "6" and in the normal gaming state, and the range of random values that will be the big hit when the setting is "6" and the game is in the probabilistic game state. Stored in order.

Next, the main CPU 6101 reads the set value (loads the contents of the set value area in the main RAM 6103). Next, the main CPU 6101 doubles the read set value, and further sets the special symbol probability variation state flag value (“0” in the normal gaming state, “1” in the probability variation game state) to the doubled value. to add. As a result, the address offset value (offset value from the start address) of the storage area in which the range (lottery value) of the random number value referred to in the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol is stored is calculated. Then, by adding the address offset value to the start address of the jackpot judgment value data table of the special symbol, the storage area of the reference random number value range (lottery value) in the jackpot judgment value data table is specified, and the randomness is concerned. A range of numerical values (lottery value) can be obtained.

Next, the main CPU 6101 calls the lottery determination process, executes the lottery determination process with reference to the random number value and the lottery value, and acquires the big hit lottery determination result. At this time, if the special symbol is a big hit, the lottery judgment result will be a value other than "0 (00H)" (for example, "FFH"), and if the special symbol is not a big hit, the lottery judgment result will be "0". .. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a logical product operation of the lottery determination result and a preset jackpot flag value (for example, a value other than "0" such as "001H"). Then, the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol to be processed is a big hit if the result of the logical product operation is "1", and if the result of the logical product operation is "0", the special symbol Is not a big hit.

Next, when the result of the logical product operation described above is "0" and it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit, the main CPU 6101 reads out the special symbol selection value. In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register to store the special symbol selection value in the special symbol-related definition data table to be processed. The special symbol selection value stored in (the storage area of the first special symbol selection value in FIG. 167 or the storage area of the second special symbol selection value in FIG. 169) is read out. The special symbol selection value is a value indicating the type of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and is "0" when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol, and is the processing target. When the special symbol of is the second special symbol, it is "1".

Next, the main CPU 6101 reads out the address of the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table (not shown). In the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, the address of the special symbol small hit determination value data table (not shown) is defined for each type of special symbol. However, for the type of special symbol for which a small hit is not provided as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the address of the small hit judgment value data table of the special symbol is specified in the special symbol small hit judgment value data selection table. Absent. That is, in the present embodiment, the address of the small hit determination value data table for the first special symbol is not defined in the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 refers to the special symbol selection value (type of special symbol) and the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, and a small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the address of the small hit judgment value data table of the special symbol is specified in the special symbol small hit judgment value data selection table).

When it is determined in this determination process that a small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the main CPU 6101 refers to the randomness in the small hit determination value data table of the special symbol. Calculate the address of the numerical range (lottery value). If it is determined in this determination process that no small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol is lost.

Next, when a small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol, the main CPU 6101 calls the lottery determination process, executes the lottery determination process with reference to the random number value and the lottery value, and draws the small hit. Acquire the judgment result. At this time, if the special symbol is a small hit, the lottery determination result will be a value other than "0", and if the special symbol is not a small hit, the lottery determination result will be "0". The lottery determination process read by the small hit determination process is the same as the lottery determination process read by the large hit determination process described above. That is, in the present embodiment, a common process (module) is used for the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a logical product calculation of the small hit lottery determination result and a preset small hit flag value (for example, a value other than "0" such as "002H"). Then, the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol to be processed is a small hit if the result of the logical product operation is "1", and if the result of the logical product operation is "0", it is special. It is determined that the design is lost.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a common process (module) is used for the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss performed in the special symbol hit determination process (S6475). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, the small hit determination value data selection table for the special symbol is referred to, and only when the small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the small hit is provided. Although an example of performing a winning lottery determination process has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the read special symbol selection value is used as an argument (identifier indicating the type of the special symbol) of the lottery determination process, and the lottery determination process is executed with reference to the random number value and the lottery value corresponding to this argument. The winning lottery determination result may be acquired. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, and the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be further reduced. Further, in this case, since various processes executed by referring to the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table can be omitted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can also be reduced. ..

[Special symbol game standby processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the special symbol game standby process performed in S6472 during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 194) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game standby process. In the special symbol game standby process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game standby process. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the special symbol pause flag (S6491). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 166). Alternatively, the value of the special symbol pause flag stored in the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the special symbol pause flag from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is set (whether it is in the ON state) (S6492).

In S6492, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is set (when the determination in S6492 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6503 described later.

On the other hand, in S6492, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is not set (NO in S6492), the main CPU 6101 reads out the number of reserved special symbols (S6493). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol hold number area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol hold number area in FIG. 166). Alternatively, the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the number of reserved special symbols from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (S6494).

In S6494, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is not "0" (when the determination in S6494 is NO), the main CPU 6101 sets "game start" in the game state (S6495). Then, after the processing of S6495, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game standby processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6473 of the special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 194).

On the other hand, in S6494, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (when the determination in S6494 is YES), the main CPU 6101 reads out the special symbol demo flag value (S6496). The special symbol demo flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is demonstrating (waiting), and if the current gaming state is the standby state, the special symbol demo flag is turned on. In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to display the special symbol demo display state flag area in the special symbol work area table (first special symbol demo in FIG. 166). The special symbol demo flag value stored in the display state flag area or the second special symbol demo display state flag area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the special symbol demo flag value from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is being demoed based on the value of the special symbol demo flag read in S6496 (S6497).

In S6497, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current gaming state is being demoed (when the determination in S6497 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6503 described later.

On the other hand, in S6497, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the demo (NO in S6497), the main CPU 6101 sets the demo display command transmitted flag (S6498). In this process, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the value of the special symbol demo display state flag area in the special symbol work area table by using the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6499). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6500). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166 or 168), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the demo display command (S6501). The demo display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6502).

After the processing of S6502, or when S6492 or S6497 determines YES, the main CPU 6101 sets "game standby" in the game state (S6503). Then, after the process of S6503, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game standby process, and returns the process to the process of S6473 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 194).

As described above, in the special symbol game standby process of the present embodiment, when the special symbol pause flag is set (on state) for the special symbol to be processed, the special symbol is held. The series of processes of S6493 to S6502 including various processes related to numbers and various processes related to demo display are not executed. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game standby process can be simplified. In this case, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced. ..

[Special symbol change end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197, the special symbol variation end process performed in S6456 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 193) will be described. FIG. 196 and FIG. 197 are flowcharts showing a procedure of special symbol variation end processing. In the special symbol variation end processing described below, the "one special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation end processing. It is a special symbol, and the "other special symbol" is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table that is not set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation end processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of one of the special symbols is "1" (S6511).

In S6511, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of one of the special symbols is not "1" (when the determination in S6511 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end process and specializes the process. Return to the process of S6457 of the symbol management process (FIG. 193).

On the other hand, in S6511, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of one special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S6511 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has a special symbol pause flag value of one special symbol. Is read out (S6512). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of one special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area (first special in FIG. 166) in one special symbol work area table. The special symbol pause flag value stored in the symbol pause flag area or the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the special symbol pause flag value of one special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the one special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag of one of the special symbols is set (whether it is in the ON state) (S6513).

In S6513, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag of one of the special symbols is set (when the determination in S6513 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end processing and performs the processing. Return to the process of S6457 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 193).

On the other hand, in S6513, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the special symbol pause flag of one special symbol is not set (when the determination in S6513 is NO), the main CPU 6101 sets the control status number of one special symbol to ". 2 ”is set (S6514). By the update process of the control state number of the one special symbol, the special symbol game determination process (S6457) is performed on the one special symbol after the end process of the end of the change of the special symbol is completed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol effect stop command for one of the special symbols (S6515). The transmission of the special symbol effect stop command of one of the special symbols reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) during the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). It is said.

Next, the main CPU 6101 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter (S6516). The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times of variable display of the special symbol), and the counted value is stored in the symbol fixed number counter area in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 reads out the address of the storage area of the special symbol pause flag value of the other special symbol (S6517). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of one special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register to use the special symbol of the other special symbol stored in one special symbol-related definition data table. The address of the pause flag storage area (the storage area of the address of the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 167 or the storage area of the address of the first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 169) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 does not perform the address reference processing (reading processing) of the other special symbol-related definition data table and the address switching processing of the special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register, and the main RAM 6103 The address of the storage area for the special symbol pause flag value of the other special symbol can be read directly from the work area (one special symbol related definition data table).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a small hit confirmation process (S6518). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 166 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 168) in one of the special symbol work area tables. Based on the value, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols corresponds to the small hit.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the variation display of one special symbol is a small hit (S6519).

In S6519, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the variation display of one of the special symbols is not a small hit (when the determination in S6519 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6521 described later. On the other hand, in S6519, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the variation display of one special symbol is a small hit (when the determination in S6519 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has a special symbol pause flag in the other special symbol pause flag area. Set the value (on value) (S6520).

After the processing of S6520, or when the determination of S6519 is NO, the main CPU 6101 performs the jackpot confirmation processing (S6521). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 166 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 168) in one of the special symbol work area tables. Based on the value, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols corresponds to the big hit.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols is a big hit (S6522).

In S6522, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the variation display of one of the special symbols is not a big hit (when the determination in S6522 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to the process of S6457 in FIG. 193.

On the other hand, in S6522, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the variation display of one special symbol is a big hit (when the determination in S6522 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has a special symbol pause flag value in the other special symbol pause flag area. (On value) is set (S6523).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the address of the other special symbol-related definition data table in the main RAM 6103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the other special symbol work area table in the IY register (S6524).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S6525). In this process, the main CPU 6101 has a special symbol control state number area in the other special symbol work area table (first special symbol control state number area in FIG. 166 or second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 168). It is determined whether or not the control state number of the other special symbol stored in is "1", and if the control state number of the other special symbol is "1", the determination process of S6525 is a YES determination. If the control state number of the other special symbol is not "1", the determination process of S6525 is a NO determination.

In S6525, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the other special symbol is not in the variable display (NO in S6525), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end process and performs the process in the special symbol management process (when the special symbol management process is performed. Return to the process of S6457 in FIG. 193).

On the other hand, in S6525, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (when the determination in S6525 is YES), the main CPU 6101 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter (S6526).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a fluctuation stop flag setting process (S6527). By this process, the test firing test signal is output to the outside.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets a loss in the hit flag of the other special symbol (S6528). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 loses to the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 166 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 168) in the other special symbol work area table. Set the value corresponding to.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the work area related to the variation display of the other special symbol (S6529). Next, the main CPU 6101 sets a predetermined fixed waiting time in the upper 2-byte timer for managing the special symbol waiting time of the other special symbol (S6530).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol (S6531). Due to the update processing of the control state number of the other special symbol, the special symbol variation end processing is not performed for the other special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the other special symbol (S6532). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the other special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166 or 168), and the game state. Performs transfer processing of specified parameters.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command of the other special symbol (S6533). The transmission of the special symbol effect stop command of the other special symbol reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) during the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). It is said. Then, after the processing of S6533, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6457 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 193).

As described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, when the special symbol pause flag is set (on state) for one special symbol, the small hit confirmation of one special symbol is confirmed. The processing after S6514 including the processing and the jackpot confirmation processing is not performed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation end processing can be simplified. In this case, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced. ..

Further, as described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, in the series of processing of S6518 to S6524, if the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit or a small hit, in any case. , Set the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol (turn it on). That is, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the cancellation or interruption of the fluctuation start of the other special symbol can be controlled by a common flag (special symbol pause flag). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation end processing can be simplified, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, and When the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a control process (loss confirmation process) for confirming the change in the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly performed. Specifically, in the loss confirmation process, the special symbol hit flag of the other special symbol is set to the loss (S6528), and the control state number of the other special symbol is set to "2" (S6531: the other special symbol). The special symbol change end processing of) is performed. When such a loss confirmation process is provided, the special symbol pause flag is not set for one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, and the other special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When it is in the middle, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is forcibly lost and the control state number of the other special symbol is advanced, so that unnecessary processing such as confirmation processing of a big hit or a small hit for the other special symbol is performed. (Special symbol change end processing) can be omitted. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine provided with the simultaneous fluctuation function as in the present embodiment, when the above processing of S6531 is provided, the processing at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol is usually performed when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed. In the present embodiment, when the stop mode of the variation display of the identification information is to shift to the special gaming state, the processing at the end of the variation of the other special symbol can be simplified. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation end processing can be simplified by providing the above-mentioned loss confirmation processing. As a result, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced.

[Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, the special symbol game determination process performed in S6457 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 193) will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. 198 and 199 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol game determination process. In the special symbol game determination process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game determination process. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6541).

In S6541, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S6541 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination process and manages the process. Return to the process of S6458 of the process (FIG. 193). On the other hand, in S6541 when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S6541 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6542).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a jackpot confirmation process (S6543). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register to set the special symbol per flag area (first special symbol in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The hit flag value of the special symbol is directly read from the hit flag area or the second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 168, and based on this hit flag value, a process of confirming whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is performed. Do.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S6544).

In S6544, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is a big hit (YES in S6544), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6549 described later.

On the other hand, in S6544, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is not a big hit (NO in S6544), the main CPU 6101 performs a small hit confirmation process (S6545). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register to set the special symbol per flag area (first special symbol in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The hit flag value of the special symbol is directly read from the hit flag area or the second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 168, and based on this hit flag value, a confirmation process of whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is performed. I do.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is a small hit (S6546).

In S6546, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is a small hit (YES in S6546), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6549 described later.

On the other hand, in S6546, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is not a small hit (NO in S6546), the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game end process (S6547). The details of the special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 200 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6548). Then, after the processing of S6548, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6458 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 193).

Here, returning to the processing of S6544 and S6546 again, when S6544 or S6546 is a YES determination, the main CPU 6101 performs the start setting processing of the variation display of the special symbol at the time of a big hit or a small hit (S6549). In this process, the main CPU 6101 generates and updates a special symbol hit signal (big hit signal or small hit signal) output via the external terminal plate 6140 according to the designated special symbol (special symbol selection value). I do.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a round display LED data set process according to the designated special symbol (S6550). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of the upper limit value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened according to the designated special symbol (S6551).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a setting process of the large winning opening operation selection offset value according to the designated special symbol (S6552). The large winning opening operation selection offset value is a relative address value from the start address of the selection table when the large winning opening opening / closing operation pattern is determined from the selection table. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a jackpot signal setting process according to the designated special symbol (S6553).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the start display time per special symbol (S6554). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the start display time per special symbol to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 166 or the first in FIG. 168. 2 Set in the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "3" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6555). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S6458) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6556). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166 or 168), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol hit start display command (S6557). The special symbol hit start display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6558). Then, after the processing of S6558, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6458 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 193).

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the special symbol game end process performed in S6547 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 198 and 199) will be described. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game end processing. In the special symbol game end processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game end process. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6561). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6562). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166 or 168), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol game end command (S6563). The special symbol game end command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). Then, after the processing of S6563, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6548 of the special symbol game determination processing (FIGS. 198 and 199).

[Preparation for opening the big prize opening]
Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the large winning opening opening preparation process performed in S6458 and S6460 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 193) will be described. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening opening preparation process. In the large winning opening opening preparation process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the large winning opening opening preparation process. It is a special design.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" or "5" (S6571).

In S6571, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is neither "3" nor "5" (when the determination in S6571 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process. Then, the process is returned to the special symbol management process (FIG. 193). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process was called in S6458 during the special symbol management process, the process was returned to the process of S6459, and the large winning opening preparatory process was called in S6460 during the special symbol management process. In the case, the process is returned to the process of S6461.

On the other hand, in S6571, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" or "5" (when the determination in S6571 is YES), the main CPU 6101 sets the counter value for the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Read (S6572). The large winning opening opening counter is a counter that counts the number of opening of the large winning opening, and the counted value (the large winning opening opening counter value) is stored in the large winning opening opening counter area in the main RAM 6103. ..

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening number counter value is the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (S6573).

In S6573, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the large winning opening opening number counter value is not the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (when S6573 is NO determination), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6578 described later.

On the other hand, in S6573, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the counter value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (when the determination in S6573 is YES), the main CPU 6101 has the end display time per special symbol. Is set (S6574). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the end display time per special symbol to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 166 or the first in FIG. 168. 2 Set in the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "6" in the control state number of the special symbol (S6575). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol per end process (S6461) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6576). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166 or 168), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol per end display command (S6577). The transmission of the special symbol per end display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). Then, after the processing of S6577, the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 193). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S6458 during the special symbol management process, the process is returned to the process of S6459, and the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S6460 during the special symbol management process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6461.

Here, returning to the process of S6573 again, when S6573 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 6101 adds 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening count counter (S6578). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of an opening pattern of the large winning opening (S6579). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of the large winning opening (S6580).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of an opening pattern in the round of the selected large winning opening (S6581). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of setting data (table) for opening control of the selected large winning opening (S6582).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs an opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory (S6583). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs an opening / closing control data generation process for the special electric accessory (shutters 6053a, 6054a).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "4" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6584). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening control process (S6459) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6585). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166 or 168), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command (S6586). The transmission of the large winning opening open display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 6200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). Then, after the processing of S6586, the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 193). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S6458 during the special symbol management process, the process is returned to the process of S6459, and the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S6460 during the special symbol management process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S6461.

[Large winning opening opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 202, the large winning opening opening control process performed in S6459 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 193) will be described. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening opening control process. In the large winning opening opening control process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the large winning opening opening control process. It is a special design.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6951).

In S6951, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S6951 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process. Return to the process of S6460 in the management process (FIG. 193).

On the other hand, in S6591, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S6951 is YES), the main CPU 6101 reads out the large winning opening winning counter value (S6952). The large winning opening winning counter is a counter that counts the number of winnings (the number of rounds) of the large winning opening, and the counted value (the large winning opening winning counter value) is stored in the large winning opening winning counter area in the main RAM 6103. To.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not a predetermined number of prizes have been won in the large winning opening (S6953). In S6953, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the specified number of prizes have been won in the large winning opening (when the determination in S6953 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6597 described later.

On the other hand, in S6953, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the specified number of prizes have not been won in the large winning opening (when the determination in S6953 is NO), the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has elapsed. Is determined (S6594).

In S6594, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has not elapsed (NO in S6594), the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the process of S6460 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 193).

On the other hand, in S6594, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has elapsed (when the determination in S6594 is YES), the main CPU 6101 opens and closes the special electric accessory (shutters 6053a, 6054a). Control processing is performed (S6595). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the continuation or termination of the operating state of the special electric accessory, and at the time of continuation, generates the opening / closing control data of the special electric accessory. The opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory called in S6595 is the same process as the opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory called in S6583 during the special winning opening opening preparation process (see FIG. 201), and is between the two processes. Then, a common process is used.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not to continue the operating state of the special electric accessory (shutters 6053a, 6054a) (S6596).

In S6596, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the operating state of the special electric accessory continues (when the determination in S6596 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to the process of S6460 in FIG. 193. On the other hand, in S6596, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the operating state of the special electric accessory does not continue (when the determination in S6596 is NO) or when the determination in S6953 is YES, the main CPU 6101 closes the large winning opening. Perform the setting process (S6597).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the display time between rounds (S6598). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the display time between rounds to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 166 or the second special in FIG. 168. Set in the upper 2-byte timer of the symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "5" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6599). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S6460) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6600). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 166 or 168), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command (S6601). The inter-round display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). Then, after the processing of S6601, the main CPU 6101 ends the large winning opening opening control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6460 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 193).

[End processing per special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the special symbol per-end processing performed in S6461 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 193) will be described. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end processing per special symbol. In the special symbol per-end processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol-per-end processing. Is.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S6611).

In S6611, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S6611 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol hit end process and also performs the special symbol management process (when the special symbol hit end process is completed). FIG. 193) also ends. On the other hand, in S6611, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S6611 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6612).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of end common data per special symbol (S6613). Next, the main CPU 6101 resets (offs) the special symbol pause flag of the special symbol (S6614). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol pause flag area (first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 166 or second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 168) in the special symbol work area table. Set the special symbol pause flag value to the off value.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of end setting data per special symbol (S6615). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the end setting process of the special symbol game (S6616).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 200 (S6617). By this process, the control state number of the special symbol is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6618). Then, after the processing of S6618, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol hitting end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (FIG. 193).

[Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the normal symbol control process performed in S6235 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 182 to 185) will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol control process.

The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses in parallel with the processing name of each processing step shown in FIG. 204 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols, and the control state numbers are the normal in the main RAM 6103. It is stored in the symbol control status number area. The main CPU 6101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not there is a normal symbol waiting time (the remaining variable display time of the normal symbol) (whether or not the normal symbol waiting time management timer value ≠ 0) (S6701).

In S6701, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a normal symbol waiting time (YES in S6701), the main CPU 6101 ends the normal symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 182 to FIGS. 182 to FIG. Return to the process of S6236 of 185). When the main CPU 6101 determines in S6701 that there is no normal symbol waiting time (NO in S6701), the main CPU 6101 reads out the control status number of the normal symbol (S6702).

Then, the main CPU 6101 performs the processing after S6703 according to the control state number of the read normal symbol. The processing contents after S6703 include, for example, updating the control status number (any of "0" to "4") of the normal symbol read in S6702 and the control status number of the normal symbol in each processing step. It changes according to the presence or absence of, that is, the game situation of the normal symbol game.

First, the main CPU 6101 normally performs a symbol variation start process (S6703). However, the process of S6703 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 updates, for example, the transfer process of the normal symbol information, the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the normal symbol determination process, the setting process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". Various processes such as the process to be performed are performed as appropriate. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "0" at the start of the processing of S6703, the processing of S6703 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a normal symbol variation end process (S6704). However, the process of S6704 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 appropriately performs various processes for ending the variation display of the normal symbol, such as a process of selecting the waiting time after the normal symbol is confirmed and a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". Do. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "1" at the start of the processing of S6704, the processing of S6704 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a normal symbol game determination process (S6705). However, the process of S6705 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2" at the start of this process. In this process, for example, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if the lottery result of the normal symbol is lost, it is normal. The process of updating the control state number of the symbol to "0" is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "2" at the start of the processing of S6705, the processing of S6705 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 normally performs an electric accessory opening process (S6706). However, the process of S6706 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3" at the start of this process. In this process, for example, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "4" when the number of winnings of the normal electric accessory 6046 reaches the winning specified number. Further, in this process, for example, if the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory 6046 has not elapsed for a predetermined time, the main CPU 6101 ends the process of S6706 without updating the control state number of the ordinary symbol. Further, in this process, for example, when the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory 6046 elapses for a predetermined time and the operating state of the ordinary symbol is not continued, the main CPU 6101 updates the control state number of the ordinary symbol to "4". Perform the processing to be performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "3" at the start of the processing of S6706, the processing of S6706 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a normal symbol hitting end process (S6707). However, the process of S6707 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes for ending the normal symbol game (including, for example, a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "0"). If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "4" at the start of the processing of S6707, the processing of S6707 is not performed internally.

Then, after the processing of S6707, the main CPU 6101 ends the normal symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6236 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 182 to 185).

C. Third Embodiment Next, the configuration and various operations of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the configurations and various processing operations other than the configurations and various processing operations described below are the same as those of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the second embodiment. Therefore, in the following description, the same configuration (process) as the configuration (process) of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals (step numbers). Further, although the description will be omitted below, in the present embodiment, various effects described in the second embodiment are provided by providing the same configuration and various processing operations as the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of the second embodiment. The same effect as is obtained.

<Overview of pachinko game machine configuration, playability, control, etc.>
In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a big hit gaming state is provided as a type of gaming state controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, but a small hit gaming state is not provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "small hit" is not provided as a winning type in any of the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state) and the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) are the same as in the second embodiment. , A time-saving game state (high-winning game state) and a non-time-saving game state (low-winning game state) are provided. In each of the probabilistic gaming state and the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the "big hit" changes according to the set value, as in the second embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the type of the gaming state controlled and managed by the main CPU 6101, the state of "with high probability time reduction" (the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are simultaneously present) as in the second embodiment. (Occurrence), "with low probability time reduction" (normal game state and time reduction game state occur at the same time) and "low probability no time reduction" state (normal game state and non-time reduction game state occur at the same time) are provided. However, there is no state of "high probability no time reduction" (probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state occur at the same time), that is, a latent game state is not provided.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is not provided with the simultaneous change function of the special symbol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if a prize of the other special symbol occurs during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol is not started and is held. Treated as a sphere. Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is given priority over the variable display of the other special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols is executed in the reserved order. You may.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a fall lottery function from a probabilistic gaming state to a normal gaming state. The fall lottery and its determination processing are performed before the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the probabilistic game state, and when the fall lottery is won (when the fall is confirmed), the game state shifts from the probabilistic game state to the normal game state at that time. (Fall).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a predetermined external signal (hereinafter, referred to as "first jackpot signal": during the jackpot game consecutive villas) via the external terminal plate 6140 during the time saving game state or the jackpot gaming state. There is an output port that keeps outputting (the signal that is output to). This signal is output to a data display or the like provided externally.

However, when the fall lottery function from the probabilistic game state is provided as in the present embodiment, the fall lottery and its determination are performed before the start of the change of the special symbol in the probabilistic game state, and the fall is confirmed at that time. When the time-saving game state also ends, at that point, the first jackpot signal is interrupted, which is notified via a data display or the like before the start of fluctuation, recognizing that the player has fallen from the probabilistic game state. There is a possibility that it will end up.

In order to solve such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the fall is confirmed by the fall lottery performed before the start of the change of the special symbol, the first big hit signal is not interrupted. 1 A process of extending the output of the jackpot signal until the end of the game when the fall is confirmed (the end of the variation display of the special symbol) is performed.

In the present embodiment, a control flag (hereinafter referred to as “first jackpot signal extension flag”) for realizing the output extension processing of the first jackpot signal is provided, and the first jackpot signal extension flag is turned on / off. Therefore, the extension control of the output of the first jackpot signal is performed so that the first jackpot signal is not interrupted when the fall is confirmed. Specifically, when the fall from the probabilistic game state is confirmed by the fall lottery performed before the start of the change of the special symbol, and at that time, the time-saving game state also ends, the first jackpot signal extension flag is set to the on state. Then, the output of the first jackpot signal is extended, and then the output extension process of the first jackpot signal is terminated by setting the first jackpot signal extension flag to the off state at the end of the game when the fall is confirmed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first jackpot signal is transmitted to the external terminal plate 6140 not only during the time-saving gaming state and the jackpot gaming state, but also when the first jackpot signal extension flag is on. You can continue to output via. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the fall confirmation via the data display or the like (the problem at the time of winning the fall lottery described above can be solved). Therefore, when the output extension processing of the first big hit signal described above is provided, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game at the time of winning the fall lottery.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a time-saving lamp (notification lamp) that lights up during the time-saving game state, and the fall from the probability-changing game state is confirmed before the start of the change of the special symbol. When the time-saving game state is also completed, the time-saving lamp is turned off at the start of the fluctuation, so that the player may recognize that he / she has fallen.

Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a "big hit" is determined during the probabilistic gaming state (at the time of the probabilistic mid-big hit), and even when the time-saving gaming state ends at that time. A configuration is provided in which the output extension process of the first jackpot signal described above is executed, and the output of the first jackpot signal is extended until the end of the game at the time of the probability variation middle jackpot. When such a configuration is provided, the time saving lamp is turned off even at the time of the probability change medium big hit and when the time saving game state ends, but since the first big hit signal continues to be output, the time saving lamp is turned off due to the fall confirmation. It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a thing or a big hit through a data display or the like.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the output extension processing of the first jackpot signal described above, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the fall lottery is won, and also improve the interest of the game when the time saving lamp is turned off. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the same tables as the special symbol work area table and the special symbol related definition data table of each special symbol shown in FIGS. 166 to 169 (second embodiment) are mainly used. It is provided in the RAM 6103. Since the simultaneous fluctuation function is not provided in the present embodiment, the storage area for the information regarding the simultaneous fluctuation (for example, the storage area for the special symbol pause flag of each special symbol) is the special symbol of the present embodiment. It is not provided in the special symbol work area table and the special symbol related definition data table.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 6101 of the main control circuit 6100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 217. In the various processes executed by the main CPU 6101 in the present embodiment, the processing contents of the special symbol management processing are different from those executed by the main CPU 6101 in the second embodiment, and the other processing contents are the above-mentioned first. It is the same as the processing content described in the second embodiment. Therefore, in the following, only the processing contents of the special symbol management processing in the present embodiment will be described, and the description of other various processing will be omitted.

[Special symbol management process]
First, the special symbol management process performed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol management process. The special symbol management process of the present embodiment is performed in S6408, S6412, S6416 and S6420 in the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 190 and 191) described in the second embodiment.

Further, in the special symbol management process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol management process. .. Therefore, when the data set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol management process is the address of the first special symbol work area table, the "special symbol" to be processed becomes the first special symbol and IY. When the data set in the register is the address of the second special symbol work area table, the "special symbol" to be processed becomes the second special symbol.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “6”) in parentheses written in parallel with the code of each processing step shown in FIG. 205 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed, and are in the special symbol work area table. It is stored in the special symbol control state number area (the first special symbol control state number area in FIG. 166 or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 168). Then, the main CPU 6101 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the control state number.

As is clear from comparing the flowchart of the special symbol management process of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 193 with the flowchart of the special symbol management process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 205, the special symbol of the present embodiment is shown. The processing flow of the management process is the same as that of the second embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, each of the special symbol variation start process (S6805), the special symbol variation end process (S6806), the special symbol game determination process (S6807), and the special symbol per-end process (S6811). The processing content is different from the corresponding processing content of the second embodiment.

First, the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the upper 2-byte timer, and whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time (variable display time) in the first half of the special symbol (the special symbol waiting time management timer value ≠ 0 in the first half). Is determined (S6801). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the upper 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the upper 2-byte timer from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6801, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6801 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. Return to (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, if the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and if the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process, the process is processed. Is returned to the processing of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process, it is special. The symbol control process also ends.

On the other hand, in S6801, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6801 is NO), the main CPU 6101 reads the value of the lower 2-byte timer to read the value of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time in the latter half (the special symbol waiting time management timer value in the latter half is ≠ 0) (S6802). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the lower 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the value of the lower 2-byte timer from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6802, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6802 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. Return to (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, if the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and if the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process, the process is processed. Is returned to the processing of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process, it is special. The symbol control process also ends.

On the other hand, in S6802, when the main CPU 6101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S6802 is NO), the main CPU 6101 reads out the control status number of the special symbol (S6803). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to control the special symbol control status number area (first special symbol control in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table. The control state number of the special symbol stored in the state number area or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 168 is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the control state number of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs reference processing of the special symbol control branch table (S6804). Also in the present embodiment, in the special symbol control branch table, the correspondence relationship between each control state number (“0” to “6”) of the special symbol and the storage address of the corresponding processing program is defined.

Then, the main CPU 6101 performs the processing after S6805 according to the control state number of the read special symbol. The processing contents after S6805 include, for example, updating the control status number (any of "0" to "6") of the special symbol read in S6803 and the control status number of the special symbol in each processing step. It changes according to the presence or absence of the game, that is, the game situation of the special symbol game.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation start process (S6805). However, the process of S6805 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes for starting the special symbol game. The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 206 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "0" at the start of the processing of S6805, the processing of S6805 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation end process (S6806). However, the process of S6806 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes when ending the variable display of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol variation end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 212 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "1" at the start of the processing of S6806, the processing of S6806 is not performed internally and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game determination process (S6807). However, the process of S6807 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs a determination process of a lottery result (big hit / loss) of a special symbol and various processes according to the determination result. The details of the special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "2" at the start of the processing of S6807, the processing of S6807 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the large winning opening opening preparation process described with reference to FIG. 201 (S6808). However, the process of S6808 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3" at the start of this process. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "3" at the start of the processing of S6808, the processing of S6808 is not performed internally and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the large winning opening opening control process described with reference to FIG. 202 (S6809). However, the process of S6809 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4" at the start of this process. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "4" at the start of the processing of S6809, the processing of S6809 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the large winning opening opening preparation process described with reference to FIG. 201 (S6810). However, the process of S6810 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5" at the start of this process. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "5" at the start of the processing of S6810, the processing of S6810 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol hitting end process (S6811). However, the process of S6811 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs various processes when ending the game at the time of hitting a special symbol. The details of the special symbol hitting end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "6" at the start of the processing of S6811, the processing of S6811 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Then, after the processing of S6811, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 190 and 191). At this time, if the special symbol management process is called in S6408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6409, and if the special symbol management process is called in S6412 during the special symbol control process, the process is processed. Is returned to the processing of S6413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S6416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S6417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S6420 during the special symbol control process, it is special. The symbol control process also ends.

[Special symbol change start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the special symbol variation start processing performed in S6805 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 205) will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation start processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6821).

In S6821, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S6821 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start process and manages the process. The process returns to the process of S6806 of the process (FIG. 205).

On the other hand, in S6821, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S6821 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol game standby process (S6822). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly performs a game state (“game start” or “game standby”) check process. The details of the special symbol game standby process will be described later with reference to FIG. 207, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the game state is "game standby" (S6823).

In S6823, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game state is "game standby" (when the determination in S6823 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process (when the game is determined to be YES). Return to the process of S6806 in FIG. 205).

On the other hand, in S6823, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game state is not "game standby" ("game start") (when S6823 is NO determination), the main CPU 6101 performs special symbol memory transfer processing ( S6824). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a subtraction process of the number of special symbol reservations, a transfer process of the lottery result, a transmission reservation process of the hold subtraction command, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol fall determination process (S6825). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a fall lottery process if it is in a probabilistic game state, and if it wins a fall lottery, it performs various flag setting processes for falling the game state. The details of the special symbol fall determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 208 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol hit determination process (S6826). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a determination process of a lottery result (big hit / loss) of a special symbol. In this process, the same process as the special symbol hit determination process (S6475) described in the second embodiment is performed. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol determination process (S6827). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a process of determining the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result (big hit / loss) of the special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation pattern setting process (S6828). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs lottery processing of the first half variable display pattern and the latter half variable display pattern corresponding to the lottery result (big hit / loss) of the special symbol, and sets each variable display pattern. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol variation display time setting process (S6829). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the fluctuation display time of the first half of the special symbol (special symbol waiting time of the first half) and the fluctuation display time of the second half (special symbol waiting time of the second half) into the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer, respectively. set.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game state setting process (S6830). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state (various game state flags) setting process at the time of a big hit. The details of the special symbol game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 211 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears the designated storage area (S6831). Specifically, the main CPU 6101 clears the random number work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "1" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6832). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol variation end process (S6806) is performed after the end of the special symbol variation start process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6833). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs setting (update) processing of the control number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table, and transfer processing of the game state specification parameter. Further, in this process, the main CPU 6101 also performs a command parameter setting process for external output.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6834).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command (S6835). The special symbol effect start command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6836). Then, after the processing of S6836, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation start processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6806 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 205).

[Special symbol game standby processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the special symbol game standby process performed in S6822 during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 206) will be described. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game standby process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (S6841). In this process, the main CPU 6101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol hold number area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol hold number area in FIG. 166). Alternatively, the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number area in FIG. 168) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 6101 can directly read the number of reserved special symbols from the work area in the main RAM 6103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S6841, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is not "0" (when the determination in S6841 is NO), the main CPU 6101 sets "game start" in the game state (S6842). Then, after the process of S6842, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game standby process, and returns the process to the process of S6823 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 206).

On the other hand, in S6841, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (when the determination in S6841 is YES), the main CPU 6101 is in the demo (standby state) in the current gaming state. It is determined whether or not there is (S6843). In this determination process, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the demo display command has been transmitted (whether or not the demo display command transmitted flag is on). If the demo display command has already been transmitted, the determination result of S6843 is a YES determination, and if the demo display command has not been transmitted, the determination result of S6843 is a NO determination.

In S6843, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current gaming state is being demoed (when the determination in S6843 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6849 described later.

On the other hand, in S6843, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the demo (NO in S6843), the main CPU 6101 sets the demo display command transmitted flag to the on state (S6844). .. The value of the demo display command transmitted flag is the special symbol demo display state flag area (first special in FIG. 166) in the special symbol work area table provided in the main RAM 6103, as in the second embodiment. It is stored in the symbol demo display state flag area or the second special symbol display state flag area in FIG. 168).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6485). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S6846). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs setting (update) processing of the control number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table, and transfer processing of the game state specification parameter.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the demo display command (S6847). The demo display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6848).

After the processing of S6848 or when S6843 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 6101 sets "game standby" in the game state (S6849). Then, after the process of S6849, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game standby process, and returns the process to the process of S6823 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 206).

[Special symbol fall judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the special symbol fall determination process performed in S6825 during the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 206) will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol fall determination process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is in the probabilistic gaming state (S6851).

In S6851, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is not in the probabilistic game state (normal game state) (when the determination in S6851 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol fall determination process, and the process is changed to the special symbol. Return to the process of S6826 of the start process (FIG. 206).

On the other hand, in S6851 when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is in the probabilistic game state (YES in S6851), the main CPU 6101 performs a fall lottery process (S6852).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S6853).

In S6853, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the fall lottery has not been won (NO in S6853), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol fall determination process, and performs the process as a special symbol variation start process (FIG. It returns to the process of S6826 of 206).

On the other hand, in S6853, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the fall lottery has been won (YES in S6853), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol probability change state flag (S6854). By this process, the gaming state falls (shifts) from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol probability change state notification flag (S6855).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (number of time reductions = 0) (S6856).

In S6856, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of remaining time reductions is not "0" (when the determination in S6856 is NO), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6860 described later.

On the other hand, in S6856, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (when the determination in S6856 is YES), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time reduction state flag (S6857). .. By this process, the time saving game state ends. The special symbol time saving state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state, and is set to the on state when the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state. The value of the special symbol time saving state flag is stored in the special symbol time saving state flag area provided in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time saving state notification flag (S6858). The special symbol time saving state notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to notify that the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state, and is turned on when notifying that the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state. Set to state. That is, the special symbol time saving state notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to turn on the time saving lamp. If the special symbol time saving state flag is on, the time saving lamp is turned on, and if it is off, the time saving lamp is turned off. To do. Therefore, the processing of S6858 turns off the time saving lamp. The value of the special symbol time saving state notification flag is stored in the special symbol time saving state notification flag area provided in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the setting process of the first jackpot signal extension flag (S6859). By this process, the first jackpot signal extension flag is set to the ON state, and the output of the first jackpot signal (external signal) is extended. That is, if the fall is confirmed by the fall lottery performed before the start of the change of the special symbol and the time-saving game state ends at that time, the output of the first jackpot signal extension is extended. Since the first jackpot signal extension flag is reset (off) at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol when the fall is confirmed, the output of the first jackpot signal is extended until the end of the fluctuation display.

After the processing of S6859 or when S6856 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 6101 sets the offset addition value "2" to the data selection offset addition value (S6860). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol effect mode management process (S6861). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of the variation pattern table (effect variation pattern) of the special symbol based on the set data selection offset addition value. The details of the special symbol effect mode management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 209 described later.

Then, after the processing of S6861, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol fall determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6826 of the special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 206).

[Special symbol production mode management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the special symbol effect mode management process performed in S6861 during the special symbol fall determination process (see FIG. 208) will be described. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol effect mode management process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a determination process of a combination of special symbol variation pattern selection tables (variation pattern table described later) (S6781). In this process, the main CPU 6101 determines the combination of the special symbol variation pattern selection table (not shown) from the special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table (not shown) based on the set data selection offset addition value. ..

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the determined combination of the symbol variation pattern selection tables as the effect variation table (S6782). Then, after the process of S6782, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol effect mode management process and also ends the special symbol fall determination process (FIG. 208).

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern table groups used for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game are provided. In addition, each group is provided with a variation pattern table (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation during variation pattern table") used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol during the probability variation game state, and a variation pattern of the special symbol during the fall. The fluctuation pattern table used when determining the fluctuation pattern table (hereinafter referred to as "falling fluctuation pattern table"), and the fluctuation pattern table used when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol after the fall (during the normal gaming state). (Hereinafter, referred to as "normal medium fluctuation pattern table") is provided.

Then, except at the time of falling (normal time), at the end of the fluctuation display of the specific symbol, the probability changing fluctuation pattern table or the normal middle fluctuation pattern table is selected as the fluctuation pattern table according to the game situation, and the selected fluctuation pattern table is selected. The fluctuation pattern of the next special symbol is determined from. Further, in the present embodiment, when the fall is determined by the fall lottery performed before the start of the change of the special symbol (at the start of the game) in the probabilistic game state, the change pattern at the time of the fall is used as the change pattern table at the time of the fall decision. A table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is determined from the selected fall fluctuation pattern table.

Each variation pattern table is composed of a combination of a plurality of special symbol variation pattern selection tables set as an effect variation table in S6782. Further, each special symbol variation pattern selection table constituting the variation pattern table is associated with the number of variations (variation number period) of the special symbol in which the special symbol variation pattern selection table is used. When the variation pattern table having such a configuration is set, the special symbol variation pattern selection table used changes according to the variation number (variation number period) of the special symbol.

For example, one variation pattern tail is now composed of a combination of three special symbol variation pattern selection tables (special symbol variation pattern selection tables A, B, C), and the special symbol variation pattern selection table A is the first to 100th times. The number of fluctuations (variation number period) up to is associated, the number of fluctuations (variation number period) from the 101st to the 300th is associated with the special symbol variation pattern selection table B, and the special symbol variation pattern selection table C is 301. Consider the case where the number of fluctuations (variation number period) after the first time is associated. In this case, when the variation pattern tail is set as the effect variation table, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the special symbol variation pattern selection table A in the period of the number of variations from the first to the 100th. In the period of the number of fluctuations from the 101st to the 300th time, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table B, and in the period of the number of fluctuations after the 301st time, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is special. It is determined using the symbol variation pattern selection table C.

In the present embodiment, the selection and change processing of the variation pattern table (combination of special symbol variation pattern selection tables (effect group)) is performed based on the data selection offset addition value as described above, and the data selection offset addition value. When is "0", the normal medium fluctuation pattern table is selected, and when the data selection offset addition value is "1", the probability variation medium fluctuation pattern table is selected and the data selection offset addition value is "1". If it is 2 ”, the fall variation pattern table is selected. The data selection offset addition value is set to "2" when the fall lottery is won at the start of the game in the probabilistic game state. In this case, the data selection set before the fall lottery is selected. The offset addition value "1" is changed to "2", and the fluctuation pattern table is changed to the fall fluctuation pattern table based on the changed data selection offset addition value "2".

When such a correspondence configuration between the data selection offset addition value and the fluctuation pattern table (combination of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table) is provided, the fluctuation to be used in the determination process of the fluctuation pattern table (effect fluctuation table) of the special symbol is provided. After setting the pattern table group (the above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table), the game is simply moved by the offset value (data selection offset addition value) according to the game situation in the group. You can select a variation pattern table according to the situation. In this case, the selection process of the variation pattern table can be simplified (the address acquisition process of each variation pattern table becomes unnecessary). As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced, the processing performed by the main control circuit 6100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 6100 can be reduced. It can be mitigated.

(Modification example of selection method of production fluctuation table)
The method of selecting the variation pattern table (combination of the special symbol variation pattern selection table) according to the game situation after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter referred to as "selection method of the effect variation table") is limited to the example of the present embodiment. Not done. Here, another example of the method of selecting the effect variation table (variation pattern table) according to the game situation will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table, a special symbol variation pattern selection table group, and a special symbol variation pattern selection offset table used in the selection process of the effect variation table of this example. is there.

In the special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table, data relating to the storage addresses of a plurality of selectable special symbol variation pattern selection table groups (in the example of FIG. 210, special symbol variation pattern selection table groups 0 to 3) (Special symbol variation pattern selection table relative address from the start address of the selection data table) is specified. Although detailed description is omitted for the special symbol variation pattern selection table group, the number of fluctuations and the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table to be referred to when selecting the effect variation table from the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table are mainly used. The relationship with the reference (head) address in is specified. Further, in the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table, data relating to the storage addresses of a plurality of types of effect variation tables (offset value: in the example of FIG. 210, the effect variation table 0 to 12 values) are defined.

In this example, first, the special symbol variation pattern selection table group to be used after the big hit game is selected with reference to the special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data pattern. In this selection process, the special symbol variation pattern selection table group may be determined according to, for example, a jackpot symbol, a game state, a random number value when the jackpot is won, and the like. Further, when selecting the special symbol variation pattern selection table group, a new lottery may be performed to select the table group. In this case, the special symbol variation pattern selection table group can be randomly determined.

Next, from the data (offset value) regarding the storage addresses of the plurality of types of effect variation tables specified in the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table according to the selected special symbol variation pattern selection table group and the current number of variations. , Determines the data (reference address, reference offset value) related to the storage address of the effect variation table which is the reference (head) of the effect variation table which is a candidate for use. This determination process is a process of determining which address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table is to be used as a reference according to the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the number of fluctuations is the 20th, the data stored in the 6th address from the start address of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection offset table is used as a reference, and when the number of fluctuations is the 30th, it is special. In this determination process, it is determined that the data stored in the ninth address from the start address of the symbol variation pattern selection offset table is used as a reference.

Then, the data selection offset addition value (any of "0" to "2") according to the game state is added to the data (reference address) related to the storage address of the effect variation table which is the reference determined in the above determination process. Then, the storage address of the effect variation table to be used is determined.

For example, when the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot game is the 20th, the data stored in the 6th address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table by the second selection process is used as a reference. Consider the case where it is decided to do.

In this case, for example, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is in the normal gaming state (after falling), the data selection offset addition value is "0", so that the data related to the storage address of the reference effect variation table ( The offset value obtained by adding the data selection offset addition value "0" to the reference address = 6) is "6", and the data (relative address value) stored in the sixth address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table. : In the example shown in FIG. 210, the effect variation table stored in the “effect variation table 10 values”) is used (selected) as the normal medium variation pattern table.

Further, in this case, for example, when the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is the probabilistic gaming state, the data selection offset addition value is "1", so that the data related to the storage address of the reference effect variation table (reference address =). The offset value obtained by adding the data selection offset addition value "1" to 6) is "7", and the data stored at the 7th address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table (relative address value: FIG. 210). In the example shown in (1), the effect variation table stored in the “effect variation table 7 values”) is used (selected) as the probability variation during variation pattern table.

Further, in this case, for example, when the game state after the jackpot game ends is when the fall is confirmed, the data selection offset addition value is "2", so that the data related to the storage address of the reference effect variation table (reference address =). The offset value obtained by adding the data selection offset addition value "2" to 6) is "8", and the data stored at the eighth address from the start address of the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table (relative address value: FIG. 210). In the example shown in (1), the effect variation table stored in the “effect variation table binary value”) is used (selected) as the fall variation pattern table.

As described above, in the above-mentioned modification of the effect variation table selection method, a plurality of types of candidates for use after the jackpot game is completed, depending on the type of the selected special symbol variation pattern selection table group and the current number of variations. The selection criteria (start address) of the effect variation table group is determined, and a plurality of effect variation tables to be used after the end of the jackpot game are used according to the selection criteria and the game state (data selection offset addition value) after the end of the jackpot game. It is determined from the production variation table group of the species.

In the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table, as described above, data (offset values) relating to the storage addresses of a plurality of effect variation tables that are candidates for use according to the number of variations are continuously arranged on the address. Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table is a table group in which the range (address range in the special symbol variation pattern selection offset table) of the effect variation table to be used is specified according to the number of fluctuations. It can also be expressed as.

[Special symbol game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the special symbol game state setting process performed in S6830 during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 206) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game state setting process.

First, the main CPU 6101 performs a jackpot confirmation process (S6881). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 166 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 168) in the special symbol work area table. The value (flag value per special symbol) is read, and based on the flag value per special symbol, a process of confirming whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol corresponds to the big hit is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S6882).

In S6882, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is not a big hit (NO in S6882), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game state setting process, and performs the process in S6831 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 206). Return to the processing of. On the other hand, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is a big hit (YES in S6882), the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is in the probabilistic gaming state (S6883).

In S6883, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is not in the probabilistic game state (NO in S6883), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game state setting process and performs the process in the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 206). Return to the processing of S6831.

On the other hand, in S6883, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the game is in the probabilistic game state (YES in S6883), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol probabilistic state flag (S6884). Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol probability change state notification flag (S6885).

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the remaining number of time reductions is not "0" (number of time reductions ≠ 0) (S6886).

In S6886, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of remaining time reductions is not "0" (when the determination in S6886 is YES), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game state setting process and starts the process of changing the special symbol. Return to the process of S6831 of the process (FIG. 206).

On the other hand, in S6886, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (when the determination in S6886 is NO), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time reduction state flag (S6887). .. Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time saving state notification flag (S6888). By this process, the time saving lamp is turned off.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets (on) the first jackpot signal extension flag (S6889). By this processing, the output port of the first jackpot signal (external signal) is set to the ON state, and the output processing of the first jackpot signal is extended. Then, after the process of S6889, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game state setting process, and returns the process to the process of S6831 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 206).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processes (S6884 to S6889) performed at the time of the probability change medium jackpot in the special symbol game state setting process are the processes (S6854) performed at the time of the fall confirmation in the special symbol fall determination process (see FIG. 208). The process is the same as that of ~ S6859). Therefore, in both processes, the time saving lamp is turned off at the end of the time saving game state (time saving number of times = 0), but it is not possible to recognize whether it is due to the fall confirmation or the big hit. Can be. Further, in this case, since the output of the first jackpot signal is extended in both processes, whether the time saving lamp is turned off due to the fall confirmation or the jackpot even through the data display or the like. Cannot be recognized. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the time saving lamp is turned off.

[Special symbol change end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the special symbol variation end processing performed in S6806 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 205) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation end processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S6891).

In S6891, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S6891 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end processing and manages the processing. Return to the process of S6807 of the process (FIG. 205).

On the other hand, in S6891 when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S6891 is YES), the main CPU 6101 sets the fixed waiting time of the special symbol (S6892). .. In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the fixed waiting time of the special symbol in the upper 2-byte timer in the special symbol waiting time management timer area (4 bytes) in the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "2" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6893). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol game determination process (S6807) is performed after the end process of the special symbol variation end process is completed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command of the special symbol (S6894). The special symbol effect stop command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) during the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). Then, after the processing of S6894, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol variation end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6807 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 205).

[Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, the special symbol game determination process performed in S6807 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 205) will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214. 213 and 214 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol game determination process.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6901).

In S6901, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S6901 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination process and manages the process. Return to the process of S6808 of the process (FIG. 205).

On the other hand, in S6901, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S6901 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6902).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a jackpot confirmation process (S6903). In this process, the main CPU 6101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 166 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 168) in the special symbol work area table. The value (flag value per special symbol) is read, and based on the flag value per special symbol, a process of confirming whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol corresponds to the big hit is performed.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S6904).

In S6904, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is a big hit (YES in S6904), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6908 described later.

On the other hand, in S6904, when the main CPU 6101 determines that it is not a big hit (NO in S6904), the main CPU 6101 performs a game state management process (S6905). In this process, the main CPU 6101 mainly updates various flags and counters related to the management of the game state. The details of the game state management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215 described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a special symbol game end process (S6906). The details of the special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 216, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6907). Then, after the processing of S6907, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6808 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 205).

Here, returning to the process of S6904 again, if S6904 is a YES determination, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the first jackpot signal extension flag (S6908). By this process, the output of the first big hit signal is stopped. Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the start of the variable display at the time of a big hit (S6909). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of a special symbol hit signal (big hit signal) output via the external terminal plate.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a round display LED data set process according to the designated special symbol (S6910). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of the upper limit value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened according to the designated special symbol (S6911).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a setting process of the large winning opening operation selection offset value according to the designated special symbol (S6912). The large winning opening operation selection offset value is a relative address from the start address of the selection table when the large winning opening opening / closing operation pattern is determined from the selection table. Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of a jackpot signal (external signal) according to the designated special symbol (S6913).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the start display time per special symbol (S6914). In this process, the main CPU 6101 sets the start display time per special symbol in the upper 2-byte timer in the special symbol waiting time management timer area (4 bytes) in the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "3" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6915). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S6808) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6916). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs setting (update) processing of the control number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table, and transfer processing of the game state specification parameter.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol hit start display command (S6917). The special symbol hit start display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 6200 in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6918). Then, after the process of S6918, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the process of S6808 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 205).

[Game status management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the game state management process performed in S6905 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 213 and 214) will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game state management process.

First, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter (S6921). The time saving state change number counter is a counter for counting the remaining time saving number of times, and the counted value is stored in the time saving state change number counter area in the main RAM 6103.

Next, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the remaining number of time reductions is not "0" (number of time reductions ≠ 0) (S6922). In S6922, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the number of remaining time reductions is not "0" (when the determination in S6922 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6926 described later.

On the other hand, in S6922, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the remaining number of time reductions is "0" (when the determination in S6922 is NO), the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the value of the special symbol probability change state flag is "0". (S6923). In S6923, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the value of the special symbol probability change state flag is not "0" (when the determination in S6923 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs the process of S6926 described later.

On the other hand, in S6923, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the value of the special symbol probability change state flag is "0" (when the determination in S6923 is NO), the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time saving state flag. (S6924). Next, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the special symbol time saving state notification flag (S6925). By this process, the time saving lamp is turned off.

After the processing of S6925, or when S6922 or S6923 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 6101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect fluctuation number counter (S6926). The effect fluctuation count counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations in which the currently set special symbol variation pattern selection table is used, and the counted value is used in the effect variation counter in the main RAM 6103. Stored. As in the present embodiment, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is composed of a combination of the special symbol variation pattern selection tables, and the special symbol variation pattern selection table is added to each special symbol variation pattern selection table. When the number of fluctuations (variation count period) of the special symbol in which is used is associated, it is set in the effect fluctuation count counter each time the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table to be used is switched according to the number of fluctuations. The number of remaining fluctuations (initial value) is also reset.

Then, after the process of S6926, the main CPU 6101 ends the game state management process, and returns the process to the process of S6906 of the special symbol game determination process (FIGS. 213 and 214).

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the special symbol game end process performed in S6906 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 213 and 214) will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game end processing.

First, the main CPU 6101 clears (offs) the first jackpot signal extension flag (S6931). As a result, the output of the first jackpot signal is stopped. Next, the main CPU 6101 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S6932).

Next, the main CPU 6101 sets the value stored in the special symbol probability variation state flag area in the main RAM 6103 (“0” in the normal gaming state and “1” in the probability variation game state) as the data selection offset of the input register. It is set as an additional value (S6933).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol effect mode management process described with reference to FIG. 209 (S6934). In this process, when the data selection offset addition value set in S6933 is "0", the normal medium fluctuation pattern table is selected as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern table is set in S6933. When the data selection offset addition value is "1", the probability variation mid-variation pattern table is selected as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S6935). In this process, the main CPU 6101 performs setting (update) processing of the game state number area, the game state designation parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table, and transfer processing of the game state designation parameter.

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol game end command (S6936). The special symbol game end command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control side in the effect control command transmission process (S6022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 172). Then, after the processing of S6936, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S6907 of the special symbol game determination processing (FIGS. 213 and 214).

[End processing per special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the special symbol hitting end process performed in S6811 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 205) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end processing per special symbol.

First, the main CPU 6101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S6941).

In S6941, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control status number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S6941 is NO), the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol hit end process and the special symbol management process ( FIG. 205) also ends.

On the other hand, in S6941, when the main CPU 6101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S6941 is YES), the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S6942).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a set process of end common data per special symbol (S6943). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs a selection process of end setting data per special symbol (S6944).

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the end setting process of the special symbol game (S6945). Next, the main CPU 6101 performs the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 216 (S6946). By this process, the control state number of the special symbol is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 6101 performs interrupt enable processing (S6947). Then, after the processing of S6947, the main CPU 6101 ends the special symbol hitting end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (FIG. 205).

<Application example>
In the second and third embodiments, the operations and functions controlled by the main control circuit 6100 have been mainly described, but these operations and functions are also applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is possible. That is, the various functions (effect functions) controlled on the sub-control circuit 200 side described in the first embodiment can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machines of the second and third embodiments, in this case. Similarly, various effects based on the various functions described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the description of the above various embodiments, the configurations of various modifications have been described, but in the present invention, the configurations of these various embodiments and various modifications are appropriately combined and used as long as no particular inconsistency occurs. be able to. Further, in the above-mentioned various embodiments and the above-mentioned various modifications, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be appropriately applied to other game machines, for example, to various game machines such as ball game machines, gaming machines, enclosed game machines, slot machines and pachislot game machines. It can also be applied.

<Expandability of other game machines according to the above embodiment>
Next, various expandability of the game machine according to the above-mentioned various embodiments and the above-mentioned various modifications will be described.

(1) Extensibility 1
The gaming machine of the above embodiment may be configured so that, for example, a set value of 6 stages of "1" to "6" can be set by, for example, a person involved in the hall. When the set value is changed, for example, the jackpot probability (internal winning probability) in the internal lottery is changed.

The game machine of the above-described embodiment can apply the present invention to all game machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is given based on the result of the game. That is, the game machine of the above-described embodiment is not limited to a form in which a game medium is launched or thrown in by a physical movement of a player to play a game, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player and enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game machine or a game performed without a medal. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium.

When managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game medium (not shown). It is connected to the bidirectional communication function via a handling device and a predetermined interface, and is an operation of lending a game medium (that is, an operation of providing a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium loading operation. ) Or, when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the player is made to acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium). Operation), or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game may be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the game machine based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In this case, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate, but the game media management device uses a dedicated unit or the like. When transmitting and receiving signals to and from the game machine via the game machine, it is also possible to receive game information and the like via a dedicated unit or board for transmitting and receiving signals.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on game media handling device side (Neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the game medium management device described above, the number of internal points inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the player not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot for the game medium and the slot for the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

In addition, the enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside and the data regarding the increase / decrease of the game medium due to the consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium are communicated to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via a cable, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above with respect to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the enclosed game machine can avoid the so-called return ball (foul ball). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the game medium management device. Here, obtaining a holding ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, by being launched from the game ball from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the possessed ball decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening provided in the game area, the number of balls to be paid out is increased according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase due to lending from the game media management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and withdrawal. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine may have a payout control circuit and operating means (for example, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device, which may be provided separately or integrally with the game machine). However, the game medium management device may have an operating means (for example, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device, which may be provided separately or integrally with the game machine). The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of each winning opening of the game ball. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. The liquid crystal display device (or touch panel, etc.) is not particularly limited in its installation position, but is mainly located at the lower part of the game machine, and the game value managed by the game medium management device is converted into a ball. Accepts requests for (ball lending) and counting (returning) balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the above embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the game machine or the like.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. You can confirm that it has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

(2) Extensibility 2
In the gaming machine of the present invention, opening the door is a condition for changing the setting on the software. The setting can be changed only after the door opening is monitored (detected) by turning on the setting key + RWM (RAM) clear switch when the power is turned on. When the set value is not set, "E" is displayed in all 4 digits of the performance display monitor. At this time, although a predetermined sound is also generated, not only the predetermined sound but also a voice "RWM abnormality error" may be generated. When the setting is changed, a specific sound is generated (the voice "The setting is being changed" may also be generated), and all the lamps are lit. On the back side of the game machine, the set value changes each time the RWM clear switch is pressed, and when the setting key is returned (pulled out), it returns to the normal state. If you open the door and turn on the power with the key turned, you can check the set value on the back side in the setting confirmation state, and the message "Settings are being changed" is displayed on the screen.

In addition, a maintenance mode may be installed. In the maintenance history, the time when the power is turned on, the time when the setting is confirmed, the time when the RWM (RAM) abnormality occurs, the error related to the setting, and the like are recorded. In this case, for example, a maximum of about 200 maintenance histories may be recorded. In the setting history, the history of setting change and setting confirmation and the setting value can be confirmed. This history cannot be viewed without the setting key.

Further, the display of the setting change may be performed only by the control on the sub side, but the special figure-related display may be fully lit by the control on the main side. When the setting change is displayed by all lighting of the special figure-related display, the all lighting pattern is not provided in the display pattern of the special symbol. Further, the setting change history can be recorded up to, for example, about 100 cases, and the maintenance mode can be operated only during the setting confirmation. In addition, the history cannot be deleted in the hall (game hall).

Further, since the power supply board is provided with a backup function, an RWM abnormality occurs when the board is switched, and the performance display monitor is also cleared. There is no delay at the final confirmation of setting the set value. The setting is changed during the delay.

(3) Extensibility 3
In pachinko gaming machines, a first sensor that detects the opening of the front door and a second sensor that detects that the main body (holding frame of the board) has moved (opening operation, etc.) from the outer frame (machine frame, etc.). A sensor is provided.

The setting may not be changed when the opening is detected by the first sensor, and the setting may be changed when the opening is detected by the second sensor. In this case, the switch that is pressed to change the setting is provided on the board or the like on the back side of the game machine, and the worker in the game hall moves the main body to move the front of the game machine (outer frame of the game machine). It is possible to change the settings while it is guaranteed to work from the front). The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which the setting can be changed when the opening is detected by both the first sensor and the second sensor, or the opening is detected by the first sensor. It may be configured so that the setting can be changed when it is set.

<Additional notes>
[30th and 31st game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, in recent years, pachinko gaming machines having a function of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time are required to enhance the interest of the game for such a function.

The present invention has been made to solve the thirtieth problem, and a thirtieth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a function of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time. It is to provide a technique capable of enhancing the interest of the game for such a function.

In order to achieve the thirtieth object, the present invention provides the following thirtieth gaming machine.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
A second determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift the player to the advantageous special gaming state when the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045) is satisfied. )When,
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
The timing of ending the variable display of the one identification information by the one identification information display means and the timing of starting the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means overlap with each other. In a specific case where one of the determination results corresponding to the identification information display means of the above is to shift to the special gaming state, the other identification information based on the other determination result corresponding to the other identification information display means. A game machine characterized by not starting the variable display of.

Further, in the thirtieth gaming machine of the present invention, in the specific case, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) is turned on so as not to start the variable display of the other identification information. When the special gaming state executed based on the determination result of one of them ends, the predetermined control flag is turned off to start the variable display of the identification information of the other based on the determination result of the other. You may do so.

Further, in the thirtieth gaming machine of the present invention, when one of the identification information is in variable display and the mode of variable display of the one identification information is a mode of shifting to the special gaming state. In addition, even if the start condition of the other identification information is satisfied, the other identification information may be controlled so as not to determine the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state.

In order to achieve the thirtieth object, the present invention provides the following thirty-first gaming machine.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
A second determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift the player to the advantageous special gaming state when the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045) is satisfied. )When,
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
The variation display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is started at the timing when the variation display of the one identification information is finished by the one identification information display means and during the period from the timing to a predetermined time before. In a specific case where the timing is included and the determination result of one corresponding to the one identification information display means shifts to the special gaming state, the other corresponding to the other identification information display means. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display of the other identification information based on the determination result of the above is not started.

Further, in the 31st gaming machine of the present invention, in the specific case, when the special gaming state executed based on the determination result of one of the above is completed, the other is based on the determination result of the other. The variable display of the identification information of the above may be started.

Further, in the 31st gaming machine of the present invention, when one of the identification information is in variable display and the mode of variable display of the one identification information is a mode of shifting to the special gaming state. In addition, even if the start condition of the other identification information is satisfied, the other identification information may be controlled so as not to determine the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state.

According to the thirtieth and thirty-first game machines of the present invention having the above configuration, in a game machine having a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time, the interest of the game for such a function is enhanced. be able to.

[32nd to 45th game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, the above-mentioned game machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit, various table data, etc. are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, in such a game machine, there is a demand for the development of a technique capable of more efficiently executing the processing performed by the main control circuit and reducing the processing load of the main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the thirty-first problem, and the thirty-first object of the present invention is to more efficiently execute the processing performed by the main control circuit and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit. It is to provide a game machine that can be played.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 32nd gaming machine.

An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The storage means is provided with two work areas.
Specific information (for example, an identifier) associated with the work area to be used is added to the information to be processed using each work area.
When processing information using one of the two work areas, the arithmetic processing means uses the work area based on the specific information added to the information to be processed. A game machine characterized by selecting.

Further, in the 32nd gaming machine of the present invention, the specific information is higher-level address data constituting the address of the corresponding work area.
In the work area selection process by the arithmetic processing means, the arithmetic processing means may specify the address of the work area to be used based on the specific information.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 33rd gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The storage means is provided with a first work area and a second work area.
The process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is performed using the first work area.
The process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is performed using the second work area.
The first specific information (for example, an identifier) associated with the first work area is added to the information to be processed in the process related to the variable display of the first identification information.
The second specific information associated with the second work area is added to the information to be processed in the process related to the variable display of the second identification information.
The arithmetic processing means
When performing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information, the first work area is selected based on the first specific information added to the information to be processed.
When performing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information, the second work area is selected based on the second specific information added to the information to be processed. A game machine to play.

Further, in the 33rd gaming machine of the present invention, the first specific information is higher-level address data constituting the address of the first work area, and the second specific information is the second specific information. It is the address data on the upper side that constitutes the address of the work area of 2.
In the work area selection process by the arithmetic processing means, the arithmetic processing means may specify the address of the work area to be used based on the specific information.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 34th gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A first data table (for example, a first special symbol work area table) in which information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored.
A second data table (for example, a second special symbol work area table) in which information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored is provided.
In the first data table, the second identification of the same type as the predetermined information is stored in the storage area of the address separated by a predetermined offset value from the address of the storage area of the predetermined information regarding the first identification information. Information about the information is stored, and the address of the second data table is stored in the last storage area.
In the second data table, the first item of the same type as the specific information is stored in the storage area of the address separated from the address of the storage area of the specific information related to the second identification information by the predetermined offset value. Information on the identification information is stored, and the address of the first data table is stored in the last storage area.
In the process related to the variable display of the first identification information, when reading out the information related to the second identification information of the same type as the predetermined information stored in the first data table, the arithmetic process is performed. The means uses the address of the storage area of the predetermined information as a reference address, corrects the address by the predetermined offset value with respect to the reference address, and based on the corrected address, the same type of information as the predetermined information. Read the information about the second identification information,
In the process related to the variable display of the second identification information, when reading the information related to the first identification information of the same type as the specific information stored in the second data table, the arithmetic process is performed. The means uses the address of the storage area of the specific information as a reference address, corrects the address by the predetermined offset value with respect to the reference address, and based on the corrected address, the same type of information as the specific information. A gaming machine characterized by reading out information related to the first identification information.

Further, in the 34th gaming machine of the present invention, during the variable display of one identification information by one of the identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the other is displayed. It may be possible to start variable display of the other identification information by the identification information display means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 35th gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A display means (for example, a performance display monitor 6070) for displaying predetermined information (for example, a base value) regarding the history of the game value given to the player is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Random number updating means (for example, S6019 during system timer interrupt processing) that updates the random number value used in the game control by the game control means, and
A display control means (for example, S6024 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the display processing of the predetermined information by the display means, and
It has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The setting value change processing or confirmation processing by the setting control means is executed when the game is not permitted, and in this case, the random number value update processing by the random number updating means and the display control. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information display processing by means is not executed.

Further, in the 35th gaming machine of the present invention, the display means may be capable of displaying the set value as well.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 36-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means includes setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The setting value change processing or confirmation processing by the setting control means is executed when the game is not permitted, and in this case, the processing executed by the interrupt processing execution means when the game is permitted is performed. A game machine that is characterized by being interrupted.

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 36-2 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
A startup information acquisition means (for example, S6014 during system timer interrupt processing) for acquiring information on the startup status, and
It has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The setting value change processing or confirmation processing by the setting control means is executed when the game is not permitted, and in this case, the processing executed by the interrupt processing execution means is performed when the game is permitted. Without
A game machine characterized in that the determination of game permission or game disapproval is performed based on the information regarding the activation state acquired by the activation information acquisition means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 37th gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A display means (for example, a performance display monitor 6070) for displaying predetermined information (for example, a base value) regarding the history of the game value given to the player is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Random number updating means (for example, S6019 during system timer interrupt processing) that updates the random number value used in the game control by the game control means, and
A display control means (for example, S6024 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the display processing of the predetermined information by the display means, and
Setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
It has a timer update means (for example, S6018 during system timer interrupt processing) that performs timer update processing for managing the predetermined cycle.
The setting value change processing or confirmation processing by the setting control means is executed when the game is not permitted, and in this case, the random number value update processing by the random number updating means and the display control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the display process of the predetermined information and the update process of the timer by the timer update means are not executed.

Further, the 37th gaming machine of the present invention further includes a storage means (for example, a main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for game control by the game control means.
The storage means has a first work area (for example, a game RAM area) in which information necessary for executing a process related to the progress of the game is stored, and information necessary for executing a process not related to the progress of the game. Has a second working area (eg, an out-of-area RAM area) in which
The display processing of the predetermined information by the display control means may be executed using the second work area.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 38-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
It has a data transmission means (for example, S6022 during system timer interrupt processing) that transmits data from the game control means to the effect control means according to a game situation.
The game control means has a setting operation data generation means (for example, a setting operation pre-processing) that generates setting operation data indicating that the setting value change processing or confirmation processing has been performed.
The setting operation data generated by the setting operation data generating means is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means by the data transmitting means in the first interrupt process performed after the setting operation data generation process. A game machine characterized by being interrupted.

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 38-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
It has a data transmission means (for example, S6022 during system timer interrupt processing) that transmits data from the game control means to the effect control means according to a game situation.
The game control means has a setting operation data generation means (for example, a setting operation pre-processing) that generates setting operation data indicating that the setting value change processing or confirmation processing has been performed.
The setting operation data generated by the setting operation data generating means is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means by the data transmitting means in the first interrupt process performed after the setting operation data generation process. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that the reservation processing for transmission of the setting operation data is performed during the control processing by the game control means, but is not performed during the interrupt processing by the interrupt processing execution means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 39th gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means is
Setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
It has a data transmission means (for example, S6022 during system timer interrupt processing) that transmits data from the game control means to the effect control means according to a game situation.
The game control means has a setting operation data generation means (for example, a setting operation pre-processing) that generates setting operation data indicating that the setting value change processing or confirmation processing has been performed.
The setting operation data generated by the setting operation data generating means is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means by the data transmitting means in the first interrupt process performed after the setting operation data generation process. ,
In the interrupt process in which the set value is changed by the setting control means, the data transmission means is the same data as specific data (for example, an initialization command) transmitted when the storage means is cleared. Is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means,
In the interrupt process in which the setting value confirmation process is performed by the setting control means, the data transmission means uses the same data as predetermined data (for example, a power failure recovery command) to be transmitted when the power is restored. A game machine characterized by transmitting from a game control means to the effect control means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 40th gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing a control process by the game control means is provided.
In the control process by the game control means, a prohibition period (for example, S6221 to S6230 during the main control main process) of execution of the interrupt process by the interrupt process execution means is provided in the progress of the process.
During the prohibition period, the game control means has a predetermined information regarding a response process when a power failure occurs, an update process of an initial random number value used in the game control, and a history of the game value given to the player. Update processing (for example, base value)
The storage means has a first work area (for example, a game RAM area) in which information necessary for executing a process related to the progress of the game is stored, and information necessary for executing a process not related to the progress of the game. Has a second working area (eg, an out-of-area RAM area) in which
A gaming machine characterized in that the update processing of the predetermined information regarding the history of the gaming value given to the player is executed using the second work area.

Further, in the 40th gaming machine of the present invention, the update process of the predetermined information regarding the history of the gaming value given to the player may be executed only when the game is possible.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the 41st gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) during the control process by the game control means is provided.
In the control process by the game control means, a prohibition period (for example, S6221 to S6230: 6 msec during the main control main process) of execution of the interrupt process by the interrupt process execution means is provided in the progress of the process.
During the prohibition period, the game control means determines the response process when a power failure occurs, the update process of the initial random number value used in the game control process, and the history of the game value given to the player. Information (for example, base value) is updated.
A gaming machine characterized in that the prohibited period is a predetermined number of times that is twice or more the predetermined period.

Further, in the 41st game machine of the present invention, the processing of the prohibited period by the game control means may be performed before the execution of the control processing related to the progress of the game by the game control means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 42-1 gaming machine.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
With the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045), the second determination means (for example, the main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variation display time of the other identification information elapses, it is possible to perform end-time processing for the variation display of the other identification information.
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variation display of the one identification information is not set to the ON state. In the case, it is determined that the control process of the variable display of the one identification information is shifted to the process of determining the result of the stop mode of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, during the special symbol variation end process). S6514),
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, the predetermined control flag is not set to the ON state, and the result of the stop mode of the variation display of the one identification information becomes the special gaming state. In the case of shifting, the end-time processing for the variable display of the other identification information is not performed, and the control process for the variable display of the other identification information is stopped in the variable display of the other identification information. It is possible to decide to shift to the process of determining the result (for example, S6531 during the special symbol change end process).
A game machine characterized by that.

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 42-2 gaming machines.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
With the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045), the second determination means (for example, the main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variation display time of the other identification information elapses, it is possible to perform end-time processing for the variation display of the other identification information.
A predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
A control parameter (for example, a special symbol control state number) for controlling the transition of the control process of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, if the predetermined control flag of the one identification information is not set to the ON state, the control processing of the variation display of the one identification information is controlled. The parameter is updated to a predetermined value (for example, "2") for transitioning to the control process of the variable display next to the variable display end process (for example, S6514 during the special symbol variable end process), and in that case, When the result of the stop mode of the variable display of the one identification information is to shift to the special gaming state, the control parameter of the control process of the variable display of the other identification information is also updated to the predetermined value (for example). , S6531 during special symbol change end processing)
A game machine characterized by that.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 43-1 gaming machine.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
With the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045), the second determination means (for example, the main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variation display time of the other identification information elapses, it is possible to perform end-time processing for the variation display of the other identification information.
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variation display of the one identification information is not set to the ON state. In the case, it is determined that the control process of the variable display of the one identification information is shifted to the process of determining the result of the stop mode of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, during the special symbol variation end process). S6514),
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, the predetermined control flag is not set to the ON state, and the result of the stop mode of the variation display of the one identification information shifts to the special gaming state. If the other identification information is in variable display, the end-time processing for the variable display of the other identification information is not performed, and the control process for the variable display of the other identification information is performed. It is determined to shift to the process of determining the result of the stop mode of the variation display of the other identification information (for example, S6531 during the special symbol variation end process).
A game machine characterized by that.

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 43-2 gaming machine.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
With the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045), the second determination means (for example, the main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variation display time of the other identification information elapses, it is possible to perform end-time processing for the variation display of the other identification information.
A predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
A control parameter (for example, a special symbol control state number) for controlling the transition of the control process of the variable display of the identification information is provided.
When the variation display of the one identification information ends, if the predetermined control flag of the one identification information is not set to the ON state, the control processing of the variation display of the one identification information is controlled. The parameter is updated to a predetermined value for transitioning to the control process of the next variable display after the end process of the variable display (for example, S6514 during the special symbol variable end process), and in that case, the change of the identification information of one of the above. When the result of the display stop mode shifts to the special gaming state and the other identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the control parameter of the control process for the variable display of the other identification information is also determined. It is updated to the value (for example, S6531 during the special symbol change end processing).
A game machine characterized by that.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 44-1 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A time counting means (for example, a special symbol waiting time management timer area) for managing a specific period in the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The time counting means is composed of a first time counting means (for example, a high-order 2-byte timer) and a second time counting means (for example, a low-order 2-byte timer).
When the specific period is a time that can be counted by one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means, the one time counting means manages the specific period. (For example, S6554 during special symbol game determination processing),
When the specific period cannot be counted by one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means, first, a part of the specific period is used by the one time counting means. The period is managed, and after the management by the one time counting means is completed, the remaining period of the specific period is managed by the other time counting means (for example, special symbol-related timer update processing).
A game machine characterized by that.

Further, in the game machine according to the 44-1 of the present invention, the first time counting means and the second time counting means may each be composed of a 2-byte timer.

Further, in order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 44-2 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A time counting means (for example, a special symbol waiting time management timer area) for managing a specific period in the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The time counting means is composed of a first time counting means (for example, a high-order 2-byte timer) and a second time counting means (for example, a low-order 2-byte timer).
When the specific period is a time that can be counted by one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means, the one time counting means manages the specific period. (For example, S6554 during special symbol game determination processing),
When the specific period cannot be counted by one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means, first, a part of the specific period is used by the one time counting means. After the management by the one time counting means is completed, the remaining period of the specific period is managed by the other time counting means (for example, special symbol-related timer update processing).
The time that can be counted by the one time counting means and the time that can be counted by the other time counting means are the same as each other, but are a part of the specific period managed by the one time counting means. A gaming machine characterized in that the period is different from the remaining period of the specific period managed by the other time counting means.

In order to achieve the 31st object, the present invention provides the following 45-1 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A time counting means (for example, a special symbol waiting time management timer area) for managing a specific period in the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The time counting means is composed of a first time counting means (for example, a high-order 2-byte timer) and a second time counting means (for example, a low-order 2-byte timer).
When the specific period is the variation display period of the identification information, first, one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means is used for a part of the variation display period. And after the management by the one time counting means is completed, the remaining time of the fluctuation display period is managed by the other time counting means (for example, special symbol-related timer update processing).
A game machine characterized by that.

Further, in the game machine according to the 45-1 of the present invention, a part of the variable display period is the first half of the variable display period, and the remaining period of the variable display period is the variable display period. It may be the latter half of the period.

Further, in order to achieve the above d-31st object, the present invention provides the following 45-2 gaming machines.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A time counting means (for example, a special symbol waiting time management timer area) for managing a specific period in the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The time counting means is composed of a first time counting means (for example, a high-order 2-byte timer) and a second time counting means (for example, a low-order 2-byte timer).
When the specific period is the variation display period of the identification information, first, one of the first time counting means and the second time counting means is used for a part of the variation display period. After the management by one of the time counting means is completed, the remaining period of the fluctuation display period is managed by the other time counting means (for example, special symbol-related timer update processing).
A part of the fluctuation display period managed by the one time counting means and the remaining period of the fluctuation display period managed by the other time counting means are different periods from each other, and are a part of the fluctuation display period. A game machine characterized in that the period of is sometimes 0.

According to the 32nd to 45th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to more efficiently execute the processing performed by the main control circuit and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit.

[46th to 56th game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, the above-mentioned game machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit, various table data, etc. are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, in such a game machine, there is a demand for reducing the capacity of a processing program managed by a main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the 32nd problem, and a 32nd object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of a processing program managed by a main control circuit. That is.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 46th gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A first index table (for example, a first special symbol-related definition data table) in which reference information for calling information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored. )When,
A second index table (for example, a second special symbol-related definition data table) in which reference information for calling information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored. )When,
A game machine equipped with.

Further, in the 46th gaming machine of the present invention, the address of the second index table is stored in the last storage area in the first index table, and the address of the second index table is stored at the last in the second index table. The address of the first index table may be stored in the storage area of.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 47-1 gaming machine.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
Information used when executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means, and used when executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means. An index table that stores reference information for calling information, and
A game machine equipped with.

Further, in the game machine according to the 47-1 of the present invention, during the variable display of one of the identification information by one of the identification information display means and the second identification information display means, It may be possible to start variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means.

Further, in order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 47-2 gaming machine.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
Information used when executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means, and used when executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means. It has an index table that stores reference information for calling information, and
In order to call up the information used when executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information and the information used when executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information in the index table. The address of each storage area of the reference information of the game machine is defined by a relative value (for example, an offset value) from the start address of the index table.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 48th gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A first data table (for example, a first special symbol work area table) in which information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored.
A second data table (for example, a second special symbol work area table) in which information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored is provided.
In the first data table, the second identification of the same type as the predetermined information is stored in the storage area of the address separated by a predetermined offset value from the address of the storage area of the predetermined information regarding the first identification information. Information about the information is stored,
In the second data table, the first item of the same type as the specific information is stored in the storage area of the address separated from the address of the storage area of the specific information related to the second identification information by the predetermined offset value. Information about the identification information is stored
In the process related to the variable display of the first identification information, when reading out the information related to the second identification information of the same type as the predetermined information stored in the first data table, the arithmetic process is performed. The means uses the address of the storage area of the predetermined information as a reference address, corrects the address by the predetermined offset value with respect to the reference address, and based on the corrected address, the same type of information as the predetermined information. Read the information about the second identification information,
In the process related to the variable display of the second identification information, when reading the information related to the first identification information of the same type as the specific information stored in the second data table, the arithmetic process is performed. The means uses the address of the storage area of the specific information as a reference address, corrects the address by the predetermined offset value with respect to the reference address, and based on the corrected address, the same type of information as the specific information. A gaming machine characterized by reading out information related to the first identification information.

Further, in the 48th gaming machine of the present invention, the predetermined offset value may be added to the reference address in the address correction process by the arithmetic processing means.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 49th gaming machine as follows.

With the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the second starting port 6045), either a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) or a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player A game state transition determining means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to a crab, and
The identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the game state transition determination means.
A first determining means for determining whether or not the determination result by the gaming state transition determining means is for shifting to the special gaming state, and
A second determining means for determining whether or not the determination result by the gaming state transition determining means is for shifting to the specific gaming state is provided.
A common process (for example, a special symbol hit determination process) is used in the determination process by the first determination means and the determination process by the second determination means.
A plurality of types of set values having different probabilities of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the gaming state transition determining means are provided.
The game state transition determining means uses data stored in a predetermined storage area designated based on a parameter (address offset value) determined according to the set value, and uses the special game state and the specific game. A gaming machine characterized in determining whether or not to transition to any of the states.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 50th gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) in which information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored, and
A storage means (for example, an IY register) capable of storing specific information when the arithmetic processing is executed by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
When the arithmetic processing means performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, the area in the storage means (for example, special symbol work) in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored. A gaming machine characterized in that the address information of a region table) is stored in the storage means, and the information required for the arithmetic processing is read out from the storage means by using the address information stored in the storage means.

Further, in the 50th gaming machine of the present invention, the identification information display means is
With the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044), the first identification information display means (for example, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol) for variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is performed. 1 Special symbol display device 6061) and
A second identification information display means (for example, a second identification information display means (for example, a second special symbol) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, a prize of the second start opening 6045). 2 Special symbol display device 6062) and
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
The arithmetic processing means
When performing arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the first identification information, the address information of the first area in the storage means in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored is used. The information necessary for the arithmetic processing is read out from the storage means by storing it in the storage means and using it for the address information of the first area stored in the storage means.
When performing arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the second identification information, the address information of the second area in the storage means in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored is used. Information necessary for the arithmetic processing may be read out from the storage means by storing the information in the storage means and using the address information of the second area stored in the storage means.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 51-1 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) in which information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored, and
A register (for example, an IY register) capable of storing specific information when the arithmetic processing is executed by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
When the arithmetic processing means performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, the area in the storage means (for example, special symbol work) in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored. A gaming machine characterized in that the address information of a region table) is stored in the register, and the information required for the arithmetic processing is read out from the storage means by using the address information stored in the register.

Further, in order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 51-2 gaming machine.

Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). When,
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) in which information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is stored, and
A first register (for example, an IY register) capable of storing specific information when the arithmetic processing means executes the arithmetic processing, and
A second register (for example, an IX register) capable of storing predetermined information when the arithmetic processing is executed by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The arithmetic processing means
When performing arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the variable display of the identification information
The address information of the first area (for example, the special symbol work area table) in the storage means in which the information used for the arithmetic processing is stored is stored in the first register, and is stored in the first register. Using the stored address information, the information required for the arithmetic processing is read from the storage means, and the information is read.
The address information of the second area (for example, the special symbol-related definition data table) in the storage means in which the reference information for calling the information used at the time of executing the arithmetic processing is stored is stored in the second register. A gaming machine that is stored and used for the address information stored in the second register to read the reference information necessary for the arithmetic processing from the storage means.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 52nd gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A first initial setting means (for example, a first normal pre-game process) that performs a first initial setting process when the storage means is cleared.
A second initial setting means (for example, a second normal game pre-processing) that performs a second initial setting process when the power is restored is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means includes setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
When the setting value is changed by the setting control means, the first initial setting process can be executed by the first initial setting means, and the setting control means confirms the set value. A gaming machine, sometimes characterized in that the second initial setting process can be executed by the second initial setting means.

Further, in the 52nd gaming machine of the present invention, the interrupt processing execution means further sets the setting operation means (for example, the setting key 6080) that triggers the execution of the setting value change processing or the confirmation processing by the setting control means. ) Has a setting operation determination means (for example, S6015 during system timer interrupt processing) for determining the operation status.
When the setting control means performs the setting value change processing and the setting operation determining means determines that the setting operation means is in the off state, the first initial setting processing by the first initial setting means is executed. Then, when the setting control means performs the confirmation processing of the set value and the setting operation determination means determines that the setting operation means is in the off state, the second initial setting process by the second initial setting means. May be executed.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 53-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
An initial setting means (for example, first normal game pre-processing or second normal game pre-processing) that performs initial setting processing when the power is restored or the storage means is cleared is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means includes setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the setting value is confirmed or changed by the setting control means, the initial setting process by the initial setting means can be executed.

Further, in order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 53-2 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
An initial setting means (for example, first normal game pre-processing or second normal game pre-processing) that performs initial setting processing when the power is restored or the storage means is cleared is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means includes setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls setting value change processing or confirmation processing indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
When the setting value confirmation process or change process is performed by the setting control means, the initial setting process by the initial setting means can be executed.
The content of the initial setting process executed by the initial setting means when the setting value confirmation process is performed by the setting control means is the case where the setting value change process is performed by the setting control means. A gaming machine characterized in that it differs from the content of the initial setting process executed by the initial setting means.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 54th gaming machine as follows.

The first determination means (for example, the main) for determining whether or not to shift to the first gaming state which is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the first start opening 6044). CPU6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
A second determination means (for example, main) for determining whether or not to shift to a second gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). CPU6101) and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
The first gaming state and the second gaming state include a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
At least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state further includes a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the special gaming state.
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variable display of one of the identification information ends, in a specific case where the stop mode of the variable display of one of the identification information is a mode of shifting to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, the other identification information A predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variation display of the
In the case where the stop mode of the variation display of one of the identification information is the mode of shifting to the special gaming state.
When the other identification information is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is controlled so that the variable display of the other identification information is not started.
When the other identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the mode of stopping the variable display of the other identification information is controlled so as not to be a mode of shifting to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state. Game machine.

Further, in the 54th gaming machine of the present invention, an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information is used.
A first index table (for example, a first special symbol-related definition data table) in which reference information for calling information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the first identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored. )When,
A second index table (for example, a second special symbol-related definition data table) in which reference information for calling information used at the time of executing the process related to the variable display of the second identification information by the arithmetic processing means is stored. ) And may be further provided.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the 55th gaming machine as follows.

A first determination for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first starting condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044). Means (eg, main CPU 6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
A second determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to shift to the special gaming state advantageous to the player when the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start port 6045) is satisfied. )When,
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
A predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the first or second identification information is provided.
In the state where the variable display of the first or second identification information can be started, when the predetermined control flag for the first identification information is set to the ON state, the variable display of the first identification information is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that the state of the variable display of the first identification information is set to the standby state without starting.

Further, in the 55th gaming machine of the present invention, a start condition is further satisfied for one of the identification information during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. In this case, a determination result storage means (for example, a special symbol holding number area) for storing the determination result by one of the determination means corresponding to the one identification information at the time of establishment is provided within a predetermined upper limit number.
When the predetermined control flag for the one identification information is set to the ON state in the state where the variable display of the one identification information can be started, the determination stored in the determination result storage means is performed. The process of determining the number of results (for example, S6494 during the special symbol standby process) may not be performed.

In order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 56-1 gaming machine.

The first determination means (for example, the main) for determining whether or not to shift to the first gaming state which is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the first start opening 6044). CPU6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
A second determination means (for example, main) for determining whether or not to shift to a second gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). CPU6101) and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
The first gaming state and the second gaming state include a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
At least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state includes a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the special gaming state.
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variable display of the one identification information ends, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the one identification information is set to the ON state. In this case, a process of determining whether or not the mode of stopping the variation display of one of the identification information is the mode of shifting to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state until at least the predetermined control flag is set to the off state. Is not performed (for example, S6513 during special symbol change end processing)
A game machine characterized by that.

Further, in order to achieve the 32nd object, the present invention provides the following 56-2 gaming machines.

The first determination means (for example, the main) for determining whether or not to shift to the first gaming state which is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the first start opening 6044). CPU6101) and
Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and
A second determination means (for example, main) for determining whether or not to shift to a second gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning of the second start opening 6045). CPU6101) and
A second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second determination means. With
The first gaming state and the second gaming state include a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
At least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state includes a specific gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the special gaming state.
During the variable display of one identification information by one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the variable display of the other identification information by the other identification information display means is performed. Can be started and
When the variable display of the one identification information ends, a predetermined control flag (for example, a special symbol pause flag) for determining the control mode of the variable display of the one identification information is set to the ON state. In this case, a process of determining whether or not the mode of stopping the variation display of one of the identification information is the mode of shifting to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state until at least the predetermined control flag is set to the off state. Is not performed (for example, S6513 during the special symbol change end processing),
When the variation display of one of the identification information ends, the predetermined control flag is set to the ON state, and the mode of stopping the variation display of one of the identification information shifts to the special gaming state. Further, when the other identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, the gaming machine is characterized in that the mode of the variable display of the other identification information is set to a mode that does not shift to the special gaming state or the specific gaming state.

According to the 46th to 56th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit can be reduced.

[57th to 59th game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, the above-mentioned game machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit, various table data, etc. are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, in such a game machine, it is required to reduce the capacity of data such as a table managed by a main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the 33rd problem, and a 33rd object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the amount of data managed by the main control circuit. Is.

In order to achieve the 33rd object, the present invention provides the 57th gaming machine as follows.

A first game that determines whether or not to shift to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning of the first start port 6044). A state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 6101) and
The first identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first game state transition determination means. )When,
Whether to shift to either the special gaming state or the specific gaming state (for example, the small hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player, triggered by the establishment of the second starting condition (for example, winning of the second starting port 6045). A second game state transition determining means (for example, main CPU 6101) for determining whether or not to use
The second identification information display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 6062) that variablely displays the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second game state transition determination means. )When,
Whether or not the determination result by the first game state transition determining means shifts to the special gaming state, or the determination result by the second gaming state transition determining means is the special gaming state and the specific game. It is provided with a determination means (for example, a special symbol hit determination process) for determining whether or not the state is to be transferred to any of the states.
When the determination process is executed by the determination means, information regarding the type of identification information to be determined is used as an argument.
When the argument is the information related to the first identification information, in the determination process, only the determination as to whether or not the determination result is to shift to the special gaming state is performed.
When the argument is information related to the second identification information, in the determination process, it is determined whether or not the determination result is to be transferred to either the special gaming state or the specific gaming state. Made,
A plurality of types of set values having different probabilities of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by each of the first and second gaming state transition determining means are provided.
The first gaming state transition determining means puts the special gaming state into the special gaming state by using the data stored in the predetermined storage area designated based on the parameter (address offset value) determined according to the set value. Decide whether to migrate and
The second gaming state transition determining means uses the data stored in the specific storage area designated based on the parameters determined according to the set value to determine the special gaming state and the specific gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in deciding whether or not to shift to either.

Further, in the 57th gaming machine of the present invention, during the variable display of one identification information by one of the identification information display means and the second identification information display means, the other is displayed. It may be possible to start variable display of the other identification information by the identification information display means.

In order to achieve the 33rd object, the present invention provides the 58th gaming machine as follows.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
It is provided with a setting operation means (for example, a setting key 6080) that is operated when executing a setting value change process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The interrupt processing execution means has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the setting value change processing or confirmation processing.
The determination of the start of execution of the control process by the setting control means is performed based on the detection of a predetermined operation indicating the start of the execution of the setting operation means (for example, ON edge), and the execution of the control process by the setting control means ends. Is determined based on the detection of a specific operation (for example, OFF edge) indicating the end of the execution of the setting operation means.
The presence / absence of detection of the predetermined operation and the presence / absence of detection of the specific operation are determined by the operation information (for example, the activation control flag) indicating the operation status of the setting operation means in the previous interrupt processing and the current interrupt processing. A gaming machine characterized in that it is performed by comparing with the operation information indicating the operation status of the setting operation means in the above.

In order to achieve the 33rd object, the present invention provides the following 59-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A first operating means (for example, setting key 6080) operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
A second operating means (for example, RAM clear switch 6121) that is operated when clearing the storage means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the setting value change processing or confirmation processing.
Whether or not the control process is executed by the setting control means is a combination of the first operation information indicating the operation status of the first operation means and the second operation information indicating the operation status of the second operation means (for example, activation). A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined based on a control flag).

Further, in order to achieve the 33rd object, the present invention provides the following 59-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, a system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means, and
A first operating means (for example, setting key 6080) operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
A second operating means (for example, RAM clear switch 6121) that is operated when clearing the storage means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has a setting control means (for example, S6016 during system timer interrupt processing) that controls the setting value change processing or confirmation processing.
Whether or not the control process is executed by the setting control means is a combination of the first operation information indicating the operation status of the first operation means and the second operation information indicating the operation status of the second operation means (for example, activation). Determined based on the control flag)
The combination of the first operation information and the second operation information when the setting value change processing is performed by the setting control means is the first operation when the setting value confirmation processing is performed by the setting control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the combination of one operation information and the second operation information is different.

According to the 57th to 59th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, the amount of data managed by the main control circuit can be reduced.

[60th and 61st game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the magnetism becomes unstable (disturbance) when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened, which may adversely affect the magnetic sensor provided in the gaming machine (malfunction, etc.).

The present invention has been made to solve the 34th problem, and the 34th object of the present invention is to provide the game machine even if magnetic disturbance occurs when the door / frame of the game machine is opened. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an adverse effect on a magnetic sensor.

In order to achieve the 34th object, the present invention provides the following 60th gaming machine.

A game machine main body (for example, main body 6002) and
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
With a magnetic sensor
It is provided with an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the game.
When the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means clears the detection by the magnetic sensor.

Further, in the 60th gaming machine of the present invention, the initialization signal of the magnetic sensor is sent to a predetermined output port in a predetermined standby process (for example, wait process) performed by the arithmetic processing means after the power failure is restored. It may be output.

Further, the 60th gaming machine of the present invention includes a setting control means exposed on the back surface of the gaming machine main body, which controls a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
When the door member is open, the setting may be changed by the setting control means.

In order to achieve the 34th object, the present invention provides the following 61-1 gaming machine.

A game machine main body (for example, main body 6002) and
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
With a magnetic sensor
It is provided with an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the game.
A gaming machine characterized in that an initialization signal of the magnetic sensor is output to a predetermined output port in a predetermined standby process (for example, wait process) performed by the arithmetic processing means after the power failure is restored.

Further, in order to achieve the 34th object, the present invention provides the following 61-2 gaming machine.

A game machine main body (for example, main body 6002) and
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
With a magnetic sensor
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
It is provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game.
The arithmetic processing means clears the detection by the magnetic sensor at a predetermined timing (for example, when the number of first loops is, for example, 10) within the start-up waiting time on the effect control means side after the power is restored. A featured gaming machine.

Further, in order to achieve the 34th object, the present invention provides the following 61-3 gaming machines.

A game machine main body (for example, main body 6002) and
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
With a magnetic sensor
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
It is provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game.
The arithmetic processing means is updated within the start-up waiting time on the effect control means side after the power is restored, and when a predetermined parameter for counting the start-up waiting time reaches a predetermined value (for example, the first loop). A gaming machine characterized in that the detection by the magnetic sensor is cleared when the number of times is (for example, 10 times).

According to the 60th and 61st gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, even if magnetic disturbance occurs when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened, the adverse effect on the magnetic sensor provided in the gaming machine is suppressed. be able to.

[62nd and 63rd game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, in the above-mentioned game machine, when the door / frame of the game machine is opened, the magnetism becomes unstable (disturbed) or vibration occurs, and various sensors (for example, magnetic sensor, etc.) provided in the game machine are provided. It may have an adverse effect (malfunction, etc.) on the vibration sensor, etc.).

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned 35th problem, and a 35th object of the present invention is to play a game machine even if magnetic disturbance or vibration occurs when the door / frame of the game machine is opened. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing an adverse effect on various sensors (for example, a magnetic sensor, a vibration sensor, etc.) provided in the door.

In order to achieve the 35th object, the present invention provides the following 62-1 gaming machine.

A game machine main body (for example, main body 6002) and
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
Anomaly detection sensor that detects anomalies and
It is provided with an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the game.
When the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means lowers the abnormality detection level of the abnormality detection sensor.

Further, in the game machine according to the sixth invention of the present invention, when the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means sets the abnormality detection level of the abnormality detection sensor to a non-detection level. May be good.

Further, in order to achieve the 35th object, the present invention provides the following 62-2 gaming machines.

A game machine main body (for example, main body 6002) and
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
Anomaly detection sensor that detects anomalies and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during arithmetic processing by the arithmetic control means is provided.
When the door member is open, each time the interrupt processing is executed by the interrupt processing executing means, a process of lowering or maintaining the abnormality detection level of the abnormality detection sensor is performed. ..

In order to achieve the 35th object, the present invention provides the following 63-1 gaming machine.

A game machine main body (for example, main body 6002) and
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
Anomaly detection sensor that detects anomalies and
It is provided with an arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of the game.
When the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means excludes the abnormality detection by the abnormality detection sensor from the abnormality detection target.

Further, in the game machine No. 63-1 of the present invention, information defining an abnormality detection target (for example, information on the input port 2) is provided.
When the door member is open, the arithmetic processing means may clear data (for example, a magnetic sensor bit) for which the abnormality detection sensor included in the information is an abnormality detection target. ..

Further, in order to achieve the 35th object, the present invention provides the following 63-2 gaming machine.

A game machine main body (for example, main body 6002) and
A door member (for example, a base door 6003 and / or a glass door 6004) attached to the game machine main body so as to be openable and closable.
A game board on which the game medium rolls,
Anomaly detection sensor that detects anomalies and
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of a game, and
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during arithmetic processing by the arithmetic control means is provided.
When the door member is open, a process of excluding the abnormality detection by the abnormality detection sensor from the abnormality detection target before performing the determination processing of the presence / absence of abnormality detection in the interrupt processing by the interrupt processing execution means. A game machine characterized by the fact that

According to the 62nd and 63rd gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, even if magnetic disturbance or vibration occurs when the door / frame of the gaming machine is opened, various sensors provided in the gaming machine (for example, magnetic) It is possible to suppress adverse effects on sensors, vibration sensors, etc.).

[64th and 65th game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a plurality of symbol display devices (display areas) and a function capable of variablely displaying identification information on a plurality of symbol display devices at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150303). See publication).

By the way, in recent pachinko gaming machines, a plurality of set values (“1” to “6”) having different game advantages (for example, jackpot winning probability, etc.) are provided, and an operation for changing or confirming the set values is provided. There is a setting key to enable. Then, in such a game machine, there is a demand for a technique capable of more reliably grasping the operation status (on / off) of the setting key at the time of startup and accurately identifying the startup state of the game machine. ..

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned 36th problem, and the 36th object of the present invention is to more reliably grasp the operation status of the setting key at the time of activation and to determine the activation state of the game machine. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be accurately identified.

In order to achieve the 36th object, the present invention provides the following 64-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a setting operation means (for example, a setting key 6080) that is operated when executing a setting value change process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
When the power is restored, the game control means saves operation information indicating the operation status of the setting operation means before performing the activation waiting process (for example, S6205 during the main control main process) on the effect control means side. A gaming machine characterized in that (for example, S6204 during main control main processing) is performed.

Further, the game machine according to the 64-1 of the present invention further includes a storage means (for example, a main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing a control process by the game control means.
The game control means may perform a check process of the sum value of the storage means after the activation waiting process on the effect control means side.

Further, in order to achieve the 36th object, the present invention provides the following 64-2 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game, and
It is provided with a setting operation means (for example, a setting key 6080) that is operated when executing a setting value change process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game.
The game control means
When the power is restored, a process of saving operation information indicating the operation status of the setting operation means (for example, the main control main) before performing the activation waiting process on the effect control means side (for example, S6205 during the main control main process) Perform S6204) during processing,
After the activation waiting process on the effect control means side, the activation state determination process is performed based on the operation information indicating the operation status of the setting operation means (for example, S6218 during the main control main process).
A game machine characterized by that.

In order to achieve the 36th object, the present invention provides the following 65-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
A first operating means (for example, setting key 6080) operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
A second operating means (for example, RAM clear switch 6121) that is operated when clearing the storage means is provided.
When the power is restored, the game control means has the first operation information indicating the operation status of the first operation means before performing the activation waiting process (for example, S6205 during the main control main process) on the effect control means side. A gaming machine characterized in that a process of saving a second operation information indicating an operation status of the second operation means (for example, S6204 during a main control main process) is performed.

Further, in order to achieve the 36th object, the present invention provides the following 65-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 6200) that controls the operation of the effect according to the progress of the game, and
A storage means (for example, main RAM 6103) for storing information necessary for executing the control process by the game control means, and
A first operating means (for example, setting key 6080) operated when executing a setting value changing process or a confirmation process indicating the degree of advantage of the game, and
A second operating means (for example, RAM clear switch 6121) that is operated when clearing the storage means is provided.
The game control means
At the time of power recovery, the first operation information indicating the operation status of the first operation means and the second operation are performed before the activation waiting process on the effect control means side (for example, S6205 during the main control main process) is performed. A process for saving the second operation information indicating the operation status of the means (for example, S6204 during the main control main process) is performed.
After the activation waiting process on the effect control means side, the activation state determination process is performed based on the first operation information and the second operation information (for example, S6218 during the main control main process).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the 64th and 65th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to more reliably grasp the operation status of the setting key at the time of activation and accurately identify the activation state of the gaming machine.

[66th and 67th game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a probability-changing gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “probability-changing gaming state”) after the jackpot gaming state ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996). In the probabilistic game state, the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a higher probability than in the normal state. Further, the pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996 is provided with a function of performing a lottery (fall lottery) for determining whether or not a fall in the gaming state is won or not during the probabilistic gaming state. If the player wins, the probabilistic game state ends, and the game state shifts to the game state in which the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a probability at the normal time.

By the way, the above-mentioned game machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit, various table data, etc. are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, in such a game machine, there is a demand for reducing the capacity of a processing program managed by a main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the 37th problem, and a 37th object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of a processing program managed by a main control circuit. It is to be.

In order to achieve the 37th object, the present invention provides the following 66-1 gaming machine.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determining means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state (for example, a special symbol fall determination process), and
A first data table (for example, a normal medium fluctuation pattern table) used for determining a variation display pattern of the identification information in the first case where the gaming state is the normal gaming state,
A second data table (for example, a variation pattern table during probability variation) used when determining a variation display pattern of the identification information in the second case where the gaming state is the high probability gaming state,
A third data table (for example, at the time of a fall) used when determining a variation display pattern of the identification information in the third case where it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Fluctuation pattern table), equipped with
The arithmetic processing means
A parameter value (for example, a data selection offset addition value) indicating any of the first, second, and third cases is set according to the current gaming situation.
In the third case, the third data table is selected as the data table for determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the value of the parameter corresponding to the third case. A featured game machine.

Further, in order to achieve the 37th object, the present invention provides the following 66-2 gaming machines.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determining means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state (for example, a special symbol fall determination process), and
A first selection table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern selection offset table) in which data relating to a plurality of types of selectable variation display patterns of the identification information (for example, effect variation table values) are defined, and
A plurality of types of second selection tables (for example, for example, in which reference addresses in the first selection table are defined as a reference when data relating to a variation display pattern of a predetermined identification information is selected from the first selection table. Special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table group) and
A third selection table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table) in which data relating to the plurality of types of second selection tables are defined is provided.
The arithmetic processing means
Set the value of the parameter indicating the game status (for example, the data selection offset addition value) to the value corresponding to the current game status, and set it.
Based on predetermined information (for example, jackpot symbol, gaming state, etc.), data relating to a predetermined second selection table is selected from the third selection table, and the selected data relating to the predetermined second selection table is provided. Based on the data, the reference address in the first selection table defined in the predetermined second selection table is acquired, and the reference address is acquired.
When the value of the parameter is a specific value (for example, "2") corresponding to when it is determined by the fall determining means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state, the first selection is made. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display pattern of the identification information corresponding to the data defined in the address obtained by adding the offset value corresponding to the specific value to the reference address in the table is selected.

In order to achieve the 37th object, the present invention provides the following 67-1 gaming machine.

A determination means (for example, main) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. CPU6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determining means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state (for example, a special symbol fall determination process), and
In the first case where the gaming state after the end of the variation display of the identification information is the normal gaming state, the first data table (for example, the variation during normal) used when determining the variation display pattern of the identification information. Pattern table) and
A second data table (for example, during probabilistic change) used when determining the variable display pattern of the identification information in the second case where the gaming state after the end of the variable display of the identification information is the high probability gaming state. Fluctuation pattern table) and
A third data table (for example, at the time of a fall) used when determining a variation display pattern of the identification information in the third case where it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Fluctuation pattern table), equipped with
The arithmetic processing means
A parameter value (for example, a data selection offset addition value) indicating any of the first, second, and third cases is set according to the current gaming situation.
In the first case, the data table is selected as the data table for determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the value of the parameter corresponding to the first case.
In the second case, the second data table is selected as the data table for determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the value of the parameter corresponding to the second case.
In the third case, the third data table is selected as the data table for determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the value of the parameter corresponding to the third case. A featured game machine.

Further, in the game machine of the 67-1 of the present invention, the value of the parameter corresponding to the second case and the value of the parameter corresponding to the third case correspond to the first case. The offset value may be set with the value of the parameter to be used as a reference value.

Further, in order to achieve the 37th object, the present invention provides the following 67-2 gaming machine.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
An arithmetic processing means (for example, main CPU 6101) that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operation of variable display of the identification information, and
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determining means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state (for example, a special symbol fall determination process), and
A first selection table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern selection offset table) in which data relating to a plurality of types of selectable variation display patterns of the identification information (for example, effect variation table values) are defined, and
A plurality of types of second selection tables (for example, for example, in which reference addresses in the first selection table are defined as a reference when data relating to a variation display pattern of a predetermined identification information is selected from the first selection table. Special symbol fluctuation pattern selection table group) and
A third selection table (for example, a special symbol variation pattern selection table selection data table) in which data relating to the plurality of types of second selection tables are defined is provided.
The arithmetic processing means
Set the value of the parameter indicating the game status (for example, the data selection offset addition value) to the value corresponding to the current game status, and set it.
Based on predetermined information (for example, jackpot symbol, gaming state, etc.), data relating to a predetermined second selection table is selected from the third selection table, and the selected data relating to the predetermined second selection table is provided. Based on the data, the reference address in the first selection table defined in the predetermined second selection table is acquired, and the reference address is acquired.
When the value of the parameter is the first specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the game state after the end of the variation display of the identification information is the normal game state, the first Select the variation display pattern of the identification information corresponding to the data specified in the reference address in the selection table of
When the value of the parameter is the second specific value (for example, "1") corresponding to the game state after the end of the variation display of the identification information is the high probability gaming state, the first In the selection table of 1, the variation display pattern of the identification information corresponding to the data defined by the address obtained by adding the offset value corresponding to the second specific value to the reference address is selected.
When the value of the parameter is a third specific value (for example, "2") corresponding to when it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state, the first A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display pattern of the identification information corresponding to the data defined in the address obtained by adding the offset value corresponding to the third specific value to the reference address in the selection table of 1 is selected. ..

According to the 66th and 67th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit can be reduced.

[68th and 69th game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a probability-changing gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “probability-changing gaming state”) after the jackpot gaming state ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996). In the probabilistic game state, the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a higher probability than in the normal state. Further, the pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996 is provided with a function of performing a lottery (fall lottery) for determining whether or not a fall in the gaming state is won or not during the probabilistic gaming state. If the player wins, the probabilistic game state ends, and the game state shifts to the game state in which the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a probability at the normal time.

By the way, the above-mentioned game machine usually has a main control board on which a circuit (main control circuit) for controlling a main game operation such as determination of identification information is mounted, and a circuit for controlling an effect operation by displaying an image or the like (main control circuit). A sub-control board on which a sub-control circuit) is mounted is provided. The game operation is controlled by a CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted on the main control circuit. At this time, under the control of the CPU, the program stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory) of the main control circuit, various table data, etc. are expanded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control circuit, and processing related to various game operations is executed. Will be done. In recent years, in such a game machine, there is a demand for the development of a technique capable of more efficiently executing the processing performed by the main control circuit and reducing the processing load of the main control circuit.

The present invention has been made to solve the 38th problem, and the 38th object of the present invention is to more efficiently execute the processing performed by the main control circuit and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit. It is to provide a game machine that can be played.

In order to achieve the 38th object, the present invention provides the following 68-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has an abnormality monitoring means (for example, general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing) capable of monitoring a plurality of types of abnormality items.
The abnormality monitoring means is a gaming machine characterized in that, for an abnormality item that is not to be monitored, the determination result of the presence or absence of the abnormality is no abnormality regardless of the presence or absence of the abnormality of the abnormality item.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the 68-1 of the present invention, monitoring specific information that defines whether or not to monitor each of the plurality of types of abnormal items is provided.
The abnormality monitoring means may determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the abnormality item based on the information indicating the presence or absence of the abnormality in the abnormality item and the monitoring specific information.

Further, in order to achieve the 38th object, the present invention provides the following 68-2 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has an abnormality monitoring means (for example, general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing) capable of monitoring a plurality of types of abnormality items.
The abnormality monitoring means determines that there is no abnormality in the abnormality item that is not to be monitored, regardless of the presence or absence of the abnormality in the abnormality item.
A gaming machine characterized in that the monitoring process by the abnormality monitoring means is not executed when the game is not permitted.

In order to achieve the 38th object, the present invention provides the following 69-1 gaming machine.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has an abnormality monitoring means (for example, general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing) capable of monitoring a plurality of types of abnormality items.
Monitoring specific information that defines whether or not to monitor each of the plurality of types of abnormal items is provided.
The abnormality monitoring means is
Based on the information indicating the presence or absence of abnormality of the abnormal item and the monitoring specific information, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined for the abnormal item, and the determination is repeated for all the abnormal items.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the determination of an abnormal item that is not to be monitored, the determination result of the presence or absence of an abnormality is no abnormality regardless of the presence or absence of the abnormality of the abnormal item.

Further, in the game machine according to the 69-1 of the present invention, does the abnormality monitoring means monitor information indicating the presence or absence of abnormality of the abnormality item and the abnormality item specified in the monitoring specific information? A logical product operation with the information of whether or not is performed may be performed, and the presence or absence of an abnormality of the abnormal item may be determined based on the result of the logical product operation.

Further, in order to achieve the 38th object, the present invention provides the following 69-2 gaming machines.

Game control means (for example, main control main process) that controls the operation of the game,
An interrupt processing execution means (for example, system timer interrupt processing) capable of executing interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle during the control processing by the game control means is provided.
The interrupt processing execution means has an abnormality monitoring means (for example, general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing) capable of monitoring a plurality of types of abnormality items.
Monitoring specific information that defines whether or not to monitor each of the plurality of types of abnormal items is provided.
The abnormality monitoring means is
Based on the information indicating the presence or absence of abnormality of the abnormal item and the monitoring specific information, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined for the abnormal item, and the determination is repeated for all the abnormal items.
In the judgment for an abnormal item that is not to be monitored, the judgment result of the presence or absence of an abnormality is set to no abnormality regardless of the presence or absence of the abnormality of the abnormal item.
A gaming machine characterized in that the monitoring process by the abnormality monitoring means is not executed when the game is not permitted.

According to the 68th and 69th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to more efficiently execute the processing performed by the main control circuit and reduce the processing load of the main control circuit.

[70th and 71st game machines]
Conventionally, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a probability-changing gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “probability-changing gaming state”) after the jackpot gaming state ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996). In the probabilistic game state, the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a higher probability than in the normal state. Further, the pachinko gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-103996 is provided with a function of performing a lottery (fall lottery) for determining whether or not a fall in the gaming state is won or not during the probabilistic gaming state. If the player wins, the probabilistic game state ends, and the game state shifts to the game state in which the identification information of a predetermined combination is derived and displayed with a probability at the normal time.

By the way, conventionally, in a game machine having the above-mentioned fall lottery function, it is required to suppress a decline in the interest of the game even when the fall lottery is won.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned 39th problem, and the 39th object of the present invention is to reduce the interest of the game at the time of winning the fall lottery in the game machine having the function of the fall lottery. It is to provide a technology capable of suppressing.

In order to achieve the 39th object, the present invention provides the 70th gaming machine as follows.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determining means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state (for example, a special symbol fall determination process), and
An external signal output means that continues to output a predetermined external signal (for example, a first big hit signal) during a high winning game state (for example, a time-saving game state) in which the probability that the predetermined start condition is satisfied is high is provided.
When it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state and the high winning gaming state ends, the external signal output means until the variation display of the identification information ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the output of the predetermined external signal is extended.

Further, in the 70th gaming machine of the present invention, an extension flag (for example, a first jackpot signal extension flag) indicating whether or not to extend the output of the predetermined external signal is provided.
When it is determined by the fall determination means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state and the high winning gaming state ends, the extension flag is turned on before the start of the variation display of the identification information. , The extension flag may be turned off at the end of the variable display of the identification information.

In order to achieve the 39th object, the present invention provides the 71st gaming machine as follows.

A determination means (for example, a determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined start condition (for example, winning of the first starting port 6044) is satisfied. Main CPU 6101) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display device 6061) that variablely displays identification information (for example, first special symbol) based on the determination result by the determination means.
In a highly probable gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means is higher than that of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player, before the start of the variable display of the identification information. , A fall determining means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state (for example, a special symbol fall determination process), and
An external signal that continues to output a predetermined external signal (for example, a first jackpot signal) during a high winning game state (for example, a time-saving game state) in which the probability that the predetermined start condition is satisfied is high, and during the special game state. With signal output means,
When it is determined by the fall determining means to shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state and the high winning gaming state ends, and when the high probability gaming state is in progress, the special gaming is performed by the determining means. When the transition to the state is determined and the high winning gaming state ends, the output of the predetermined external signal by the external signal output means is extended until the variable display of the identification information ends. A game machine characterized by that.

Further, the 71st gaming machine of the present invention is further provided with a notification lamp (for example, a time saving lamp) that lights up during the high winning game state and turns off when the high winning game state ends. You may.

According to the 70th and 71st gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game at the time of winning the fall lottery.

16,6013 ... Display device (liquid crystal display), 24,6011 ... Speaker, 35 ... Power switch, 100,6100 ... Main control circuit, 101,6101 ... Main CPU, 102,6102 ... Main ROM, 103,6103 ... Main RAM, 201 ... sub CPU, 328, 6080 ... setting key, 330, 6121 ... RAM clear switch (backup clear switch), 338 ... power supply circuit, 662 ... main button, 664 ... select button, 1000 ... accessory group, 1002 ... Character detection sensor group, 2010 ... Relay board, 2100 ... Host control circuit, 6001 ... Pachinko game machine, 6002 ... Main body, 6003 ... Base door, 6004 ... Glass door, 6012 ... Game board, 6015 ... Launch device, 6016 ... Payout device, 6018 ... lamp (LED) group, 6020 ... accessory, 6043 ... ball passage detector, 6044 ... first starting port, 6045 ... second starting port, 6046 ... ordinary electric accessory, 6051, 6052 ... general prize Mouth, 6053 ... 1st prize opening, 6054 ... 2nd prize opening, 6055 ... Out mouth, 6056 ... Game nail, 6061 ... 1st special symbol display device, 6062 ... 2nd special symbol display device, 6063 ... Normal symbol Display device, 6064 ... 1st special symbol hold display device, 6065 ... 2nd special symbol hold display device, 6066 ... Normal symbol hold display device, 6070 ... Performance display monitor, 6071 error notification monitor, 6081 ... Setting switch, 6140 ... External Terminal board, 6200 ... Sub-control circuit, 6300 ... Payout / launch control circuit

Claims (1)

Arithmetic processing means that performs arithmetic processing to control the operation of the game,
A storage means for storing information necessary for executing the arithmetic processing by the arithmetic processing means is provided.
The storage means is provided with two work areas.
Specific information associated with the work area to be used is added to the information to be processed using each work area.
When the arithmetic processing means processes information using one of the two work areas, the work area to be used is based on the specific information added to the information to be processed. Select and
The specific information is higher-level address data that constitutes the address of the corresponding work area.
In the work area selection process by the arithmetic processing means, the arithmetic processing means is a gaming machine characterized in that an address of a work area to be used is designated based on the specific information.

Images